User Guide About This Manual

Selected Version Getting Started

Copy

Fax

Print

Scan

Document Server

Web Image Monitor

Adding Paper and Toner

Troubleshooting

Specifications for the Machine

Legal and Contact Information

For information not found in this manual,

see the online manuals available on our
web site (https://www.ricoh.com/) or via the
control panel.

For safe and correct use, be sure to read Safety Information before
using the machine.
How to Read the Manuals
Symbols Used in the Manuals

This manual uses the following symbols:

Indicates points to pay attention to when using functions. This symbol indicates points that may result in
the product or service becoming unusable or result in the loss of data if the instructions are not obeyed.
Be sure to read these explanations.

Indicates supplementary explanations of the machine's functions, and instructions on resolving user
errors.

[]
Indicates the names of keys or buttons on the product or display.

1
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
How to Read the Manuals................................................................................................................................. 1
Symbols Used in the Manuals.......................................................................................................................1
1. About This Manual
Abbreviated Names of Options......................................................................................................................11
2. Getting Started
Turning On and Off the Power........................................................................................................................17
Turning On the Main Power........................................................................................................................17
Turning Off the Main Power........................................................................................................................18
Energy Saving Mode...................................................................................................................................19
Guide to Names and Functions of Components............................................................................................22
Front and Left View...................................................................................................................................... 22
Front and Right View....................................................................................................................................24
Rear and Left View.......................................................................................................................................25
Names and Functions of the Control Panel....................................................................................................26
Touch Panel/Interface.................................................................................................................................26
LED Indicators...............................................................................................................................................27
Changing the Display Language.................................................................................................................... 29
Confirming the Functions that Are Added in RICOH Always Current Technology.....................................30
Confirming the Version of RICOH Always Current Technology Implemented on the Machine............30
How to Use the Home Screen.........................................................................................................................31
Intuitive Screen Operation Using Fingertips.............................................................................................. 33
How to Use the "Settings"................................................................................................................................ 36
How to Use the Copy Screen..........................................................................................................................39
How to Use the Copy Screen (Standard).................................................................................................. 39
How to Use the Copy Screen (No Scrolling Screen)............................................................................... 41
Changing the Layout or Display of the Keys of the Copy Function......................................................... 42
How to Use the Fax Screen............................................................................................................................. 44
Customizing the [Send Settings] Screen.................................................................................................... 44
How to Use the Scanner Screen..................................................................................................................... 47
Customizing the [Send Settings] Screen.................................................................................................... 47
Adding a Frequently Used Application or Widget to the Home Screen..................................................... 50
Adding an Icon/Widget to the Home Screen.......................................................................................... 51
Moving or Deleting Icons and Widgets.....................................................................................................51

2
 Creating a Folder to Organize Icons......................................................................................................... 52
Registering Frequently Used Settings as a Program...................................................................................... 53
Registering Settings as a Program.............................................................................................................. 54
Changing the Contents of the Program......................................................................................................55
Logging In from the Control Panel.................................................................................................................. 57
Logging In by Entering the User Name and Password.............................................................................58
Logging In Using an IC Card...................................................................................................................... 59
Logging In Using a Mobile Device.............................................................................................................59
Authenticating Using the User Code.......................................................................................................... 61
Changing the Login Password.................................................................................................................... 61
Placing an Original on the Exposure Glass................................................................................................... 63
Placing an Original in the Auto Document Feeder (ADF).............................................................................65
Placing Originals in the ARDF.....................................................................................................................66
Placing Originals in the One-pass Duplex Scanning ADF....................................................................... 68
3. Copy
Basic Procedure for Copying Documents...................................................................................................... 73
Reserving a Copy Job While Executing Another Copy Job.....................................................................76
Interrupting the Current Copy to Copy Another Original.........................................................................77
Making Enlarged or Reduced Copies............................................................................................................79
Specifying a Copy Ratio or Size................................................................................................................ 79
Enlarging or Reducing According to the Paper Size................................................................................ 81
Reducing Slightly to Increase the Margins................................................................................................ 82
Duplex Copying............................................................................................................................................... 84
Combining and Copying a Multi-page Original onto a Single Sheet of Paper.........................................86
Copying onto Envelopes................................................................................................................................. 89
Copying onto Envelopes in the Bypass Tray............................................................................................. 89
Copying onto Envelopes in the Paper Tray............................................................................................... 91
Copying in Page Order or for Each Page Number...................................................................................... 92
4. Fax
Basic Procedure for Transmitting Faxes..........................................................................................................95
Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book..............................................................................................98
Registering a Fax Number and Send Conditions......................................................................................98
Changing/Deleting the Registered Data Such as Fax Number............................................................100

3
 Displaying a Preview before Sending a Fax............................................................................................... 101
Viewing the Transmission Result of Sent Faxes............................................................................................103
Confirming the Information on the Fax Screen....................................................................................... 103
Checking the Result in Communication Result Report.............................................................................104
Checking the Result in Immediate TX Result Report................................................................................ 105
Checking the Result in Communication Failure Report........................................................................... 105
Checking the Result in Error Report..........................................................................................................105
Viewing Memory Storage Report............................................................................................................ 105
Checking by E-mail................................................................................................................................... 105
Confirming the Information in Web Image Monitor...............................................................................107
5. Print
Installing the Printer Driver by Using Device Software Manager Installer................................................ 109
Installing Device Software Manager from the CD-ROM.......................................................................109
Installing Device Software Manager from the Downloaded File..........................................................112
Installing the Printer Driver for Network Connection (Windows)...............................................................115
Installing the PCL 6 Printer Driver from the CD-ROM............................................................................. 115
Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver from the CD-ROM................................................................... 116
Installing the PCL 6/PostScript 3 Printer Driver from the Downloaded File..........................................118
Installing the Printer Driver for Windows................................................................................................. 119
If the Machine Cannot Be Found............................................................................................................. 120
Installing the Printer Driver for Network Connection (macOS)..................................................................123
Installing the PPD file................................................................................................................................. 123
Registering the Machine in [Printers & Scanners]................................................................................... 124
Specifying the Option Settings................................................................................................................. 127
Basic Procedure for Printing Documents...................................................................................................... 129
Printing a Document in Windows.............................................................................................................129
Printing a Document in macOS................................................................................................................ 131
Printing on Both Sides of Paper.................................................................................................................... 134
Specifying 2-sided Print (Windows)........................................................................................................ 134
Specifying 2-sided Print (macOS)............................................................................................................134
Combining and Printing Multiple Pages on a Single Sheet of Paper........................................................ 136
Specifying the Combine 2 Originals Function (Windows).................................................................... 136
Specifying the Combine 2 Originals Function (macOS)........................................................................136

4
Printing on Envelopes.................................................................................................................................... 138
Printing on Envelopes Loaded on the Bypass Tray................................................................................. 138
Printing on Envelopes Loaded in the Paper Tray.................................................................................... 141
Printing Documents Stored in the Printer from the Control Panel............................................................... 145
Printing from a USB Flash Memory Device or SD Card Directly............................................................... 147
Printable File Formats................................................................................................................................ 147
Printing from a Memory Storage Device or Scan Application.............................................................. 148
6. Scan
Scanning Documents and Sending the Scanned Data by E-mail..............................................................151
Basic Procedure for Sending an E-mail................................................................................................... 151
Registering the E-mail Destination in the Address Book When Sending an E-mail..............................153
Scanning Documents and Sending the Scanned Data to a Folder........................................................... 156
Confirming the Computer Information (Windows)................................................................................. 156
Creating a Shared Folder (Windows)..................................................................................................... 158
Confirming the Computer Information (macOS).....................................................................................161
Creating a Shared Folder (macOS)........................................................................................................ 162
Registering the Created Shared Folder in the Address Book................................................................ 163
Basic Procedure for Performing Send to Folder......................................................................................165
Scanning an Original with Suitable Quality and Density...........................................................................167
Specifying the File Type or File Name When Scanning a Document....................................................... 170
Notes about and limitations of file types................................................................................................. 172
7. Document Server
Storing Documents in Document Server.......................................................................................................173
Printing Documents in Document Server...................................................................................................... 175
Printing a Document with the Settings Specified When Scanned..........................................................175
Changing the Print Settings to Print a Document.....................................................................................176
Specifying a Page to Print.........................................................................................................................177
8. Web Image Monitor
Using Web Image Monitor...........................................................................................................................179
What You Can Do on the Web Image Monitor..................................................................................... 180
Web Image Monitor Screen.................................................................................................................... 182
Specifying Web Image Monitor Help..................................................................................................... 182

5
 9. Adding Paper and Toner
Loading Paper into the Paper Tray...............................................................................................................185
Loading Paper into Tray 1 to 4................................................................................................................ 186
Loading Paper into the Bypass Tray........................................................................................................ 190
Loading Paper into Tray 3 (LCT).............................................................................................................. 191
Loading Paper into the Large Capacity Tray (LCT)................................................................................ 193
Specifying the Paper Size That Is Not Automatically Detected.............................................................194
Specifying a Custom Size Paper Using the Control Panel..................................................................... 196
Specifying Paper Type and Thickness Settings....................................................................................... 197
Recommended Paper Sizes and Types........................................................................................................200
Trays 1–4...................................................................................................................................................200
Bypass Tray................................................................................................................................................202
Tray 3 (LCT)............................................................................................................................................... 203
Large Capacity Tray (LCT)........................................................................................................................204
Notes on Special Paper............................................................................................................................204
Paper Thickness for Each Paper Weight..................................................................................................205
Unusable Paper......................................................................................................................................... 205
Paper Storage............................................................................................................................................206
Saving Printouts......................................................................................................................................... 207
Thick Paper Orientation and Recommended Status................................................................................... 208
Envelope Orientation and Recommended Status....................................................................................... 209
Using the Copy Function...........................................................................................................................210
Using the Printer Function..........................................................................................................................210
Loading Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper............................................................................... 212
Copying onto Letterhead Paper............................................................................................................... 212
Printing onto Letterhead Paper Using the Printer Driver..........................................................................213
Recommended Original Size and Weight.................................................................................................. 215
Sizes Detectable with Auto Paper Select..................................................................................................... 217
Replacing the Toner.......................................................................................................................................219
Precautions When Storing Toner..............................................................................................................220
Precautions When Replacing the Toner.................................................................................................. 220
Disposing Exhausted Toners.....................................................................................................................221
Replenishing the Staples................................................................................................................................223

6
Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle................................................................................................................ 224
Precautions When Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle............................................................................224
Disposing the Used Waste Toner Bottle.................................................................................................. 226
10. Troubleshooting
Alert Sounds................................................................................................................................................... 227
Checking the Indicators, Icons, and Messages on the Control Panel.......................................................229
When an Icon is Displayed with a Message.......................................................................................... 229
When the [Check Status] Indicator is lit or flashing................................................................................ 231
When the Machine Cannot Be Operated................................................................................................... 233
When the Machine Does Not Respond Correctly to an Operation on the Control Panel..................233
When the Machine Does Not Respond Correctly to an Operation from a Computer....................... 237
When a Message Appears and the Machine Cannot Be Operated........................................................239
When a Message Appears While Using the Copy Function.....................................................................242
When a Message Appears While Using Document Server...................................................................... 244
When a Message Appears While Using the Fax Function........................................................................ 246
Messages that Appear During Operation or When Sending/Receiving a Fax Cannot Be Performed....
.................................................................................................................................................................... 246
Messages that Appear When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Network.....................................247
Messages that Appear When the Remote Fax Function Is Unavailable.............................................. 256
When a Message Appears While Using the Printer Function....................................................................260
Messages that Appear without Error Codes........................................................................................... 260
Messages that Appear with Error Codes................................................................................................ 272
When a Message Appears While Using the Scanner Function................................................................ 276
Messages that Appear on the Control Panel.......................................................................................... 276
Messages that Appear on the Computer................................................................................................ 283
When Other Messages Appear...................................................................................................................289
Messages that Appear When Machine Login Fails............................................................................... 291
Messages that Appear When Logging in to the Machine Using an IC Card Fails............................. 298
Messages that Appear When the LDAP Server Is Unavailable............................................................ 299
Messages that Appear When There Is a Problem with the Certificate................................................. 300
Messages that Appear When an Application Site Cannot Be Used.................................................... 302
11. Specifications for The Machine
Model-Specific Information.......................................................................................................................... 303

7
 List of Specifications.......................................................................................................................................304
Specifications for the Main Unit............................................................................................................... 304
Specifications for the Document Server...................................................................................................325
Specifications for Facsimile.......................................................................................................................326
Specifications for Printer........................................................................................................................... 331
Specifications for Scanner........................................................................................................................ 333
Specifications for One-pass Duplex Scanning ADF...............................................................................338
Specifications for Auto Reverse Document Feeder (ARDF)....................................................................339
Specifications for Internal Finisher SR3250............................................................................................ 340
Specifications for Finisher SR3260..........................................................................................................341
Specifications for Booklet Finisher SR3270............................................................................................ 344
Specifications for Finisher SR3280..........................................................................................................347
Specifications for Booklet Finisher SR3290............................................................................................ 349
Specifications for Internal Finisher SR3300............................................................................................ 352
Specifications for Internal Multi-Folding Unit..........................................................................................353
Specifications for External Tray................................................................................................................355
Specifications for Internal Shift Tray.........................................................................................................356
Specifications for Internal Tray 2............................................................................................................. 356
Specifications for Bridge Unit................................................................................................................... 357
Specifications for Punch Unit (Internal Finisher SR3250).......................................................................358
Specifications for Punch Unit (Finisher SR3260 ,Booklet Finisher SR3270)........................................ 359
Specifications for Punch Unit (Finisher SR3280 ,Booklet Finisher SR3290)........................................ 360
Specifications for Lower Paper Tray........................................................................................................ 361
Specifications for Lower Paper Trays.......................................................................................................361
Specifications for Tray 3 (LCT)................................................................................................................. 362
Specifications for Large Capacity Tray (LCT)..........................................................................................362
Specifications for IEEE 1284 Interface Board........................................................................................ 363
Specifications for Wireless LAN Board................................................................................................... 363
Specifications for Device Server Option................................................................................................. 364
The Setting Values of the Transmission Function..........................................................................................365
Send Email................................................................................................................................................. 365
Send to Folder........................................................................................................................................... 366
Broadcast Transmission.............................................................................................................................367

8
Printable Area and Margin...........................................................................................................................368
Machine Options...........................................................................................................................................369
Guide to Functions of the Machine’s External Options..........................................................................369
Guide to Functions of the Machine’s Internal Options...........................................................................375
Functions Requiring Optional Configurations..............................................................................................377
Copy Function............................................................................................................................................377
Facsimile Functions.................................................................................................................................... 379
Printer Function.......................................................................................................................................... 382
Scanner Function....................................................................................................................................... 384
Interface..................................................................................................................................................... 385
Others.........................................................................................................................................................385
Function Compatibility...................................................................................................................................386
12. Legal and Contact Information
Environmental Regulations............................................................................................................................ 389
ENERGY STAR Program (mainly North America)............................................................... 389
Energy Saving Functions...........................................................................................................................389
User Information on Electrical and Electronic Equipment (mainly Europe)...................... 391
Note for the Battery and/or Accumulator Symbol (For EU countries only) (mainly Europe)
.................................................................................................................................................................... 392
Environmental Advice for Users (mainly Europe)............................................................... 393
Notes to users in the state of California (Notes to Users in USA) (mainly North America)....
.................................................................................................................................................................... 394
Copyright Information about Installed Software.........................................................................................395
Trademarks (User Guide)..............................................................................................................................396

9
10
1. About This Manual

Abbreviated Names of Options

In the manuals, the abbreviated names of options are used. The abbreviated names and corresponding
product names are as follows:
Abbreviated names of externally attached options

IM 2500/3000/3500 series
Abbreviated name Product name

Finisher SR3260 Finisher SR3260

Booklet Finisher SR3270 Booklet Finisher SR3270

Internal Finisher SR3250 Internal Finisher SR3250

Internal Finisher SR3300 Internal Finisher SR3300

(mainly Europe and Asia) Punch Unit PU3070 EU

Punch unit
Punch Unit PU3070 SC

Punch Unit PU3080 EU

Punch Unit PU3080 SC

(mainly North America) Punch Unit PU3070 NA

Punch unit
Punch Unit PU3080 NA

Internal Multi-Folding Unit Internal Multi-Fold Unit FD3010

(mainly Asia) ARDF DF3110

ARDF*1

(mainly Asia) SPDF DF3130

One-pass duplex scanning ADF*1

Small size paper unit Small Paper Feeding Unit Type M37

ADF double-feed detection kit Page Keeper Type M37

(mainly Asia) Platen Cover PN2000

Exposure glass cover

11
 1. About This Manual

Abbreviated name Product name

Internal Tray 2 1 Bin Tray BN3130

Lower paper tray Paper Feed Unit PB3270

Lower paper trays Paper Feed Unit PB3300

Tray 3 (LCT) LCIT PB3290

Caster table Caster Table Type M3

Large capacity tray (LCT) LCIT RT3040

External tray Side Tray Type M37

Internal shift tray Internal Shift Tray SH3080

Bridge unit Bridge Unit BU3090

(mainly North America) Handset HS3020

Handset

Counter interface unit Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12

Card reader NFC Card Reader Type M45

IM 4000/5000 series
Abbreviated name Product name

Finisher SR3260 Finisher SR3260

Booklet Finisher SR3270 Booklet Finisher SR3270

Internal Finisher SR3250 Internal Finisher SR3250

(mainly Europe and Asia) Punch Unit PU3070 EU

Punch unit
Punch Unit PU3070 SC

Punch Unit PU3080 EU

Punch Unit PU3080 SC

Punch Unit PU3090 EU

Punch Unit PU3090 SC

12
 Abbreviated Names of Options

Abbreviated name Product name

(mainly North America) Punch Unit PU3070 NA

Punch unit
Punch Unit PU3080 NA

Punch Unit PU3090 NA

Finisher SR3280 Finisher SR3280

Booklet Finisher SR3290 Booklet Finisher SR3290

Internal Multi-Folding Unit Internal Multi-Fold Unit FD3010

(mainly Asia) ARDF DF3110

ARDF*1

(mainly Asia) SPDF DF3130

One-pass duplex scanning ADF*1

Small size paper unit Small Paper Feeding Unit Type M37

ADF double-feed detection kit Page Keeper Type M37

(mainly Asia) Platen Cover PN2000

Exposure glass cover

Internal Tray 2 1 Bin Tray BN3130

Lower paper tray Paper Feed Unit PB3270

Lower paper trays Paper Feed Unit PB3300

Tray 3 (LCT) LCIT PB3290

Caster table Caster Table Type M3

Large capacity tray (LCT) LCIT RT3040

External tray Side Tray Type M37

Internal shift tray Internal Shift Tray SH3080

Bridge unit Bridge Unit BU3090

(mainly North America) Handset HS3020

Handset

13
 1. About This Manual

Abbreviated name Product name

Counter interface unit Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12

Card reader NFC Card Reader Type M45

IM 6000
Abbreviated name Product name

Finisher SR3260 Finisher SR3260

Booklet Finisher SR3270 Booklet Finisher SR3270

(mainly Europe and Asia) Punch Unit PU3080 EU

Punch unit
Punch Unit PU3080 SC

Punch Unit PU3090 EU

Punch Unit PU3090 SC

(mainly North America) Punch Unit PU3080 NA

Punch unit
Punch Unit PU3090 NA

Finisher SR3280 Finisher SR3280

Booklet Finisher SR3290 Booklet Finisher SR3290

Internal Multi-Folding Unit Internal Multi-Fold Unit FD3010

Small size paper unit Small Paper Feeding Unit Type M37

ADF double-feed detection kit Page Keeper Type M37

Internal Tray 2 1 Bin Tray BN3130

Lower paper tray Paper Feed Unit PB3270

Lower paper trays Paper Feed Unit PB3300

Tray 3 (LCT) LCIT PB3290

Caster table Caster Table Type M3

Large capacity tray (LCT) LCIT RT3040

External tray Side Tray Type M37

14
 Abbreviated Names of Options

Abbreviated name Product name

Internal shift tray Internal Shift Tray SH3080

Bridge unit Bridge Unit BU3090

(mainly North America) Handset HS3020

Handset

Counter interface unit Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12

Card reader NFC Card Reader Type M45

Abbreviated names of internal options

Abbreviated name Product name

Fax unit Fax Option Type M45

Extra G3 interface unit G3 Interface Unit Type M45

IEEE 1284 interface board IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type M19

File format converter File Format Converter Type M19

Wireless LAN board IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface Unit Type M19

(mainly Asia)/ (mainly Fax Connection Unit Type M45

North America)
Fax connection unit

Expansion memory FAX Memory Unit Type M19 64MB

Device server option Device Server Option Type M37

OCR unit OCR Unit Type M13

(mainly Europe)/ Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10

(mainly North America)
Enhanced Security HDD

IPDS unit IPDS Unit Type M45

PostScript 3 unit PostScript3 Unit Type M45

15
 1. About This Manual

Abbreviated name Product name

(mainly Asia)/ (mainly XPS Direct Print Option Type M45

North America)
XPS card

*1 In this manual, "ADF" refers to the ARDF and the one-pass duplex scanning ADF. "ADF" stands for "Auto
Document Feeder", and "ARDF" stands for "Auto Reverse Document Feeder".

16
2. Getting Started

Turning On and Off the Power

To turn the machine on and off, press the main power switch on the right side of the machine.

• When you are using the fax function on the machine, do not turn the power off under normal
operation. If the power is turned off, data stored in the fax memory will be lost in about one hour
after the machine is turned off. If you have to turn the power off or unplug the power cord for some
reason, make sure 100% is shown as available memory on the screen for the fax function.

Turning On the Main Power

• Do not press the main power switch repeatedly. When you turn the power on or off, wait at least
10 seconds after confirming that the main power indicator on the right side of the control panel has
turned on or off.

D0CHIA5721

1. Make sure the power cord is firmly plugged into the wall outlet.

17
 2. Getting Started

2. Open the cover of the main power switch on the front right side of the machine, and push
the switch.

DZB636

The main power indicator on the right side of the control panel turns on.

• When the power is turned on, the screen may show that the machine is performing an auto restart.
Do not turn off the main power while the machine is processing. It takes about 7 minutes until the
machine restarts.
• If a file was deleted from memory, a Power Failure report is automatically printed as soon as the
power is restored. This report can be used to identify lost files.

Turning Off the Main Power

• Do not turn off the power while the machine is in operation. To turn the power off, confirm that the
operation is finished.
• Do not hold down the main power switch while turning off the main power. Doing so forcibly turns
off the machine's power and may damage the hard disk or memory and cause malfunctions.
• Do not press the main power switch repeatedly. When you turn the power on or off, wait at least
10 seconds after confirming that the main power indicator on the right side of the control panel has
turned on or off.

18
 Turning On and Off the Power

D0CHIA5721

1. Open the cover of the main power switch on the front right side of the machine, and push
the switch.

DZB636

The main power indicator on the right side of the control panel turns off. The main power turns off
automatically after the machine has shut down properly.

Energy Saving Mode

When the machine is not operated for a specified period of time, the machine enters the "Energy Saving
mode" automatically. "Energy Saving mode" has two modes, "Fusing Unit Off mode" and "Sleep mode",
and the machine enters the Fusing Unit Off mode first. In the factory default, the machine is configured to
use both modes.
Fusing Unit Off Mode
In this mode, the main power indicator is lit. Because the heater of the fusing unit is turned off but
the screen of the control panel is still displayed, the power consumption decreases, but you can
start operation promptly. If you do not operate the machine for a specified period of time, the
machine emits a clicking sound and enters Fusing Unit Off mode.
• You can specify whether to enable the Fusing Unit Off mode and the time to wait before the
machine enters Fusing Unit Off mode under [Fusing Unit Off Mode (Energy Saving) On/Off].
See "Date/Time/Timer", User Guide (Full Version).

19
 2. Getting Started

Sleep Mode
In this mode, the display of the control panel turns off and the main power indicator blinks slowly.
Power consumption is minimized. When you do not operate the machine for a specified period of
time or press [Energy Save] ( ), the machine enters Sleep mode.
• You can specify the amount of time that the machine waits before entering Sleep mode under
[Sleep Mode Timer].
See "Date/Time/Timer", User Guide (Full Version).
• The machine recovers from Sleep mode when you perform one of the following:
• Lift the ADF or exposure glass cover.
• Place an original in the ADF.
• Touch the display of the control panel.

• The energy saving functions are disabled when an error occurs or while an operation is in
progress.
• The energy saving functions will not operate in the following cases:
• When fixed warm-up is in progress
• When operations are suspended during printing
• When a warning message appears (The machine enters Fusing Unit Off mode unless the
cover is open.)
• When paper is jammed (The machine enters Fusing Unit Off mode except when the cover is
open.)
• When the Data In indicator is lit or flashing (The machine enters Fusing Unit Off mode except
when the Data In indicator is lit or flashing due to receiving faxes or storing documents.)
• The machine does not enter Sleep mode in the following cases:
• During communication with external equipment
• When the hard disk is active
• When the service call message appears
• When the ADF, machine's cover, or ADF cover are opened
• When the "Add Toner" message appears
• When toner is being replenished
• When one of the following screens is displayed:
• System Settings
• Counter
• Inquiry
• Address Book

20
 Turning On and Off the Power

• Tray/Paper Settings
• When data is being processed
• If a file is waiting to be transmitted within the next minute using the "Send Later" facsimile function
• When a recipient is being registered in the address list or group dial list
• When the sample print, locked print, hold print, or stored print screen is displayed
• When the screen of a document that was stored under the printer function appears
• When the internal cooling fan is active
• When accessing the machine using Web Image Monitor

21
 2. Getting Started

Guide to Names and Functions of Components

• Do not obstruct the machine's vents. Doing so can result in fire as the internal components are
overheated.

Front and Left View

4 7

5
6

3
8

D0CHIA0407

1. Exposure glass cover/Auto Document Feeder (ADF)

Lower the cover over originals placed on the exposure glass.
If you load a stack of originals in the ADF, the ADF will automatically feed the originals one by one.
page 65 "Placing an Original in the Auto Document Feeder (ADF)"
2. Exposure glass
Place originals face down here.
page 63 "Placing an Original on the Exposure Glass"
3. Vents
Prevent overheating.
After large-volume printing, the ventilation fan may continue to work to lower the temperature inside the
machine.

22
 Guide to Names and Functions of Components

4. Control panel
page 26 "Names and Functions of the Control Panel"
5. Internal tray 1
Copied/printed paper and fax messages are delivered here. And the paper is output under the paper holder
attached inside the internal tray.

D0CHIA5720

6. Front cover
Open to replace the toner cartridge or waste toner bottle.
page 219 "Replacing the Toner"
page 224 "Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle"
7. Main power switch
To turn the power on and off, open the cover of the main power switch and press the main power switch.
page 17 "Turning On and Off the Power"
8. Paper trays (Trays 1–2)
Standard paper trays. Load paper here.
page 185 "Loading Paper into the Paper Tray"
9. Lower paper trays
Optional paper trays. Load paper here.
page 185 "Loading Paper into the Paper Tray"

• When using paper holders, always follow the precautions below.

• Be sure not to place objects in front of the paper holders. Doing so may cause paper jams.
• After pulling out copied/printed paper, do not put it back under the paper holders. Doing so
may result in malfunction and paper jams.

23
 2. Getting Started

Front and Right View

7 D0CHIA5702

1. ADF's extender
Pull this extender out to prevent originals larger than B4 JIS or 81/2 × 14 size from falling.
2. Bypass tray
Use to copy or print on OHP transparencies, adhesive labels, and paper that cannot be loaded in the paper
trays.
page 190 "Loading Paper into the Bypass Tray"
3. Paper guides
When loading paper in the bypass tray, align the paper guides flush against the paper.
4. Extender
Pull this extender out when loading paper larger than A4 , 81/2 × 11 in the bypass tray.
5. Vents
Prevent overheating.

24
 Guide to Names and Functions of Components

After large-volume printing, the ventilation fan may continue to work to lower the temperature inside the
machine.
6. Lower right cover
Open this cover to remove jammed paper.
7. Right cover
Open this cover to remove jammed paper.

Rear and Left View

2
1 3
4

D0CHIA0401

1. Vents
Prevent overheating.
After large-volume printing, the ventilation fan may continue to work to lower the temperature inside the
machine.
2. USB host interface
Use the port to connect the IC card authentication device.
3. USB 2.0 interface
Use the port to connect the machine and the computer with the USB cable.
4. Ethernet interface
Used the port to connect the machine to the network or to use the remote management service (RICOH
@Remote) over the Internet.

25
 2. Getting Started

Names and Functions of the Control Panel

The touch panel (Smart Operation Panel) that displays the operation screen of the machine is referred to
as the "Control Panel".
• On both sides of the control panel, interfaces for connecting external devices and slots to insert an
SD card/USB flash memory device are provided.
• Even when the screen is turned off, the LED indicators on the frame of the control panel show the
status of the machine.

Touch Panel/Interface

1 2

3
D0CMIC1309

1. Media slots
Insert an SD card or USB flash memory device. You can store the scanned data or print the file stored on the
media.
• Use an SD memory card or SDHC memory card with a maximum capacity of 32 GB. You cannot use an
SDXC memory card.
• Use the media formatted in FAT16 or FAT32.
• Certain types of USB flash memory devices cannot be used in the machine.
• A USB extension cable, hub, or card reader cannot be used.
• If the power of the machine is turned off or the media is removed from the machine while the machine is
reading the data in the media, check the data in the media.
• Before removing the media from the slot, press the icon displayed on the screen ( / ) to cancel the
connection.

26
 Names and Functions of the Control Panel

D0CMIC1306

2. Touch Panel
Displays the Home screen, operation screen of applications, and messages. Operate with the fingertips.
page 31 "How to Use the Home Screen"
page 33 "Intuitive Screen Operation Using Fingertips"
3. NFC tag
Used to connect the machine and a smart device with the RICOH Smart Device Connector.
See "Using the Machine Functions from a Mobile Device", User Guide (Full Version).
page 59 "Logging In Using a Mobile Device"

• You can adjust the angle of the control panel to improve visibility.

D0CHIA5704

LED Indicators

23 4
D0CMIC1310

27
 2. Getting Started

1. Media access indicator

Flashes when data is being read from or written to an SD card.
While the machine is accessing the SD card or USB flash memory device, do not turn the power off or remove
the media.
• If the media access lamp does not light when an SD card is pushed into the media slot, do the following:
• Reinsert the SD card.
• The SD card may be broken. Contact the shop where you bought it.
2. Fax indicator
Indicates the status of the fax function.
• Flashing: transmitting and receiving data
• Lit: receiving data (Substitute RX File/Memory Lock Reception/Personal Box)
3. Data In indicator
Flashes when the machine is receiving data sent from the printer driver or LAN-Fax driver.
4. Status indicator
Indicates the status of the system. Stays lit when an error occurs or toner runs out.
page 229 "Checking the Indicators, Icons, and Messages on the Control Panel"
5. Main power indicator
The main power indicator lights up when you turn on the main power switch. In Sleep mode, it flickers slowly.

28
 Changing the Display Language

Changing the Display Language

You can change the language used on the display. English is set as default.

1. On the Home screen, press the change language widget.

2. Select the language you want to display.

3. Press [OK].

29
 2. Getting Started

Confirming the Functions that Are Added in

RICOH Always Current Technology
You can install the upgrade package for the machine's functions by RICOH Always Current Technology.
You can apply the latest functions developed after purchase and security updates.
To install the latest version of RICOH Always Current Technology, access the Application Site from the
control panel of the machine.

EDS004

• For details about installing RICOH Always Current Technology, see the Operating Instructions for
Application Site.

Confirming the Version of RICOH Always Current Technology Implemented on

the Machine

1. Press [Machine Information] tab on [Check Status] screen.

2. Press [Inquiry].
3. Check the version of the machine under the machine information.

30
 How to Use the Home Screen

How to Use the Home Screen

Press [Home] ( ) at the bottom center of the screen to display the Home screen on which icons for
each function are shown. On the Home screen, you can register frequently used shortcuts and widgets.

• Do not apply strong impact or force to the screen, or it may be damaged. Maximum force
allowable is approx. 30N (approx. 3 kgf). (N = Newton, kgf = Kilogram force. 1 kgf = 9.8N.)
• Touch the Home screen to operate it.
page 33 "Intuitive Screen Operation Using Fingertips"
• You can add or delete icons and widgets, and change their order.
page 50 "Adding a Frequently Used Application or Widget to the Home Screen"
1 2 3 4 5

15 6

7
8

6 14 13 12 11 10 9
D0CZPM1340

1. Login icon
This icon is displayed when users are logged in. When you press the icon, the names of the users who are
currently logged in are displayed.
2. System Message
Displays system and application messages. If there are two or more messages, they will be displayed
alternately.
If a message indicating that the toner has run out or an error has occurred is displayed, press the message to
display the system message list to check the contents.

31
 2. Getting Started

3. Help
When the machine is connected to the Internet and Help is available for the screen that is displayed or the
error that has occurred, press this icon to display a Help screen.
Select the [Accept cookies] check box in the control panel browser to display Help properly.
See "Browser Settings", User Guide (Full Version).
4. [Login]/[Logout]
These keys are displayed when user authentication or administrator authentication is enabled. Press the keys to
log in to or log out from the machine.
page 57 "Logging In from the Control Panel"
5. [Energy Save]
Press to enter or exit Sleep mode.
page 19 "Energy Saving Mode"
6. Switch Screens
Press to scroll the screens right and left. The Home screen has 5 screens.

DZC180

You can switch between the screens by flicking.

page 33 "Intuitive Screen Operation Using Fingertips"
You can hide the screen with no icons by setting [Home Screen Blank Pages] to [Do not Display Blank Pages].
See "Display/Input", User Guide (Full Version).
7. Application list
Press to display applications that are not displayed on the Home screen.
page 50 "Adding a Frequently Used Application or Widget to the Home Screen"
8. Current display position
Shows which of the five screens is currently displayed.
9. [Stop]
Press to stop scanning or printing.
You can change the setting to stop only a job in progress with [Stop Key to Suspend Print Job].
See "Others", User Guide (Full Version).
10. [Menu]
Displayed if a menu is available in the currently selected application.
On the Home screen, press to restore the icons to their factory default positions.

32
 How to Use the Home Screen

11. [Home]
Press to display the Home screen.
12. [Back]
Press to return to the previous screen.
13. Date/Time and Toner remaining
The current date and time is displayed.
To display the information about Toner remaining, specify [Display Time/Remaining Toner] of [System Bar
Settings] to [Remaining Toner].
See "Display/Input", User Guide (Full Version).
14. [Check Status]
Press to check the following system statuses of the machine. This lights up in red when an error occurs.
• Machine's status
Indicates the error status and network status.
• Operational status of each function
Status of functions such as Copy or Scanner
• Current jobs
• Job history
• Machine's maintenance information
See "Checking the Machine Status from the Control Panel", User Guide (Full Version).
15. Icon display area
Displays the icons and widgets.

• You can change the screen displayed when the power is turned on under [Function Priority].
• See "Displaying Frequently Used Functions on the First Screen", User Guide (Full Version).
• When you press [Menu] ( ) [Reset Home Screen] with the Embedded Software Architecture
application being installed in the machine, the application icons are not deleted.

Intuitive Screen Operation Using Fingertips

On the Home screen or application screen, you can perform the following operations by touching the
screen with your fingertips.
Flick (for switching between screens)
Touch and slide your finger on the screen quickly left or right to switch between the screens.

33
 2. Getting Started

DZB181

Drag (for moving an icon)

Press and hold an icon, and then slide your finger while pressing on the screen to move the icon.

DZB182

Long tap (for displaying the available menu screen)

Press and hold on a blank area on the screen to display the menu screen.
On the Home screen you can add a folder or change the wallpaper from the menu.

DZB183

In some applications, you can also use the following actions to operate the screen:
Pinch-in (for zooming out the screen)
Touch the screen with your thumb and forefinger, and pinch them together. This feature is useful
when previewing files and images.

34
 How to Use the Home Screen

DZB185

Pinch-out (for zooming in the screen)

Touch the screen with your thumb and forefinger, and spread them apart. You can also zoom in the
screen by tapping the screen twice quickly. When you quickly tap the screen twice again, the
screen returns to full display. This feature is useful when previewing files and images.

DZB184

35
 2. Getting Started

How to Use the "Settings"

Press [Settings] on the Home screen to change the settings of the machine, edit the address book, or
confirm various information.
The "Settings" screen consists of the menus shown below.

6
7
1
8
2 9
3
4

D0CHPA5101

1. System Settings
Specify the operation panel display, machine operation settings, operation sounds, timer, network settings
and other settings.
For the list of setting items, see "System Settings Items" in User Guide (Full Version).
2. Address Book

Manage the destination for sending data from the fax or scanner or the authentication information for logging
in to the machine.
See "How to Use the Address Book", User Guide (Full Version).
You can start operation by pressing [Address Book] on the Home screen.

36
 How to Use the "Settings"

3. Tray/Paper Settings

Specify the size and type of paper set in the paper tray.
See "Tray/Paper Settings", User Guide (Full Version).
4. Basic Settings When Installing

You can configure the settings easily when installing the machine.
• On the "Settings" screen, you can specify the settings for the items shown below in Wizard format when
the machine is moved to a different location or the environment in which the machine is used changes.
• Basic Settings
• Network Settings
• Fax Settings
• On the [Firmware Update] screen, you can update the firmware of the machine.
• On the "Scan to Folder Helper", you can easily specify the destination to send the scanned data to a
computer.
5. Application Settings
Change the settings for the Copier, Document Server, Fax, Printer, and Scanner functions.
For the list of setting items, see "Copier/Document Server Settings Items", "Fax Settings Items", "Printer Settings
Items", and "Scanner Settings Items" in User Guide (Full Version).
6. Search All
You can search for a setting item by entering a keyword. Enter more than one keyword to narrow down the
search results.
7. Change Language
You can change the language displayed on the control panel.

37
 2. Getting Started

8. Inquiry

Confirm the contact for requesting repair of the machine or ordering consumables.
9. Counter

Display and print the total number of sheets printed for each function.
See "Checking the Counter of the Machine", User Guide (Full Version).

• If administrator authentication has been set, contact the administrator to change the settings.
• When you are finished performing an operation, press [Home] ( ) to return to the normal screen.
• When you search for a setting item by using [Search All], a part of the search result screen may
appear blurred. If this happens, enter the same keyword and search again. If the blurring is not
resolved after searching again, press the blurred part of the screen while you scroll it up and down,
and when you return to the original position, the blurred part of the screen that you have pressed
will be displayed clearly.

38
 How to Use the Copy Screen

How to Use the Copy Screen

You can select from one of two types for the Copy screen:
Standard View
The basic functions that are used frequently are displayed with big keys. Scroll down the screen to
see the keys used to configure the functions for finishing or editing.

D0CZPM1303

Full View
You can see all the function keys on a single screen. You do not need to scroll through the screens
to select a function.

• To switch the screen type, press [Menu] ( ) [Screen Settings] [Switch Screen Type] on the
Copy screen.
• You can use the same functions on either screen.
• When the administrator has configured user authentication and User's Own Customization is
enabled, each login user can change the screen type.

How to Use the Copy Screen (Standard)

You can customize the layout and how the keys are displayed on the Copy screen in Standard. For
details, see page 42 "Changing the Layout or Display of the Keys of the Copy Function".

39
 2. Getting Started

1 2

7
D0CZPM1305

1. Copy function keys

Press a key to select the function to assign to the key. Flick up and down on the screen to display the keys out
of the visible area. The keys with assigned functions are displayed in yellow or with in the upper left corner.
Depending on the assigned function, the display of the key changes according to the specified setting.
2. [Interrupt]
Interrupt a copy job in progress to copy a different original.
3. [Reset]
Reset the settings configured on the Copy screen.
4. Preview of the current setting status
Displays an image representing the settings configured on the Copy screen. Press the image to display the list
of the settings.

5. [Sample Copy]
Press to make a partial copy as a test before proceeding to copy the rest of the original.
See "Making a Partial Copy as a Test and Copying the Rest of the Original", User Guide (Full Version).

40
 How to Use the Copy Screen

6. [Start]
Press to perform copying.
7. Other keys for Copy function
Press to select the functions whose keys are out of the visible area of the screen. The key of the function that is
currently configured is displayed with in the upper left corner.
8. Select One Touch Job
You can see the preset settings in the machine or the job history. When user authentication is configured,
display the history of the executed jobs for each login user. When selecting a job history, its settings are
displayed on the current Copy screen. You can use the same settings as a previous job by selecting the job
history.

How to Use the Copy Screen (No Scrolling Screen)

1 2

4
8
5

7
D0CZPM1307

1. Copy function keys

Press a key to select the function to assign to the key. The keys with assigned functions are displayed in yellow.
To see the display area in the illustration below, press or flick to the left or right.

2. [Interrupt]
Interrupt a copy job in progress to copy a different original.
3. [Reset]
Reset the settings configured on the Copy screen.
4. Preview of the current setting status
Displays an image representing the quantity and the settings configured on the Copy screen. Press [Qty] to
display the number keys. Press the image to display the list of the settings.
5. [Sample Copy]
Press to make a partial copy as a test before proceeding to copy the rest of the original.
See "Making a Partial Copy as a Test and Copying the Rest of the Original", User Guide (Full Version).

41
 2. Getting Started

6. [Start]
Press to perform copying.
7. Other keys for Copy function
Press to select the functions whose keys are out of the visible area of the screen. The key of the function that is
currently configured is displayed with in the upper left corner.
8. Select One Touch Job
You can see the preset settings in the machine or the job history. When user authentication is configured,
display the history of the executed jobs for each authenticated user. When selecting a job history, its settings
are displayed on the current Copy screen. You can use the same settings as a previous job by selecting the job
history.

Changing the Layout or Display of the Keys of the Copy Function

You can customize the layout and how the Copy function keys are displayed on the Copy screen in
Standard mode (Arranging keys mode).
When the administrator has configured user authentication and User's Own Customization is enabled,
each login user can customize the layout.
Switching to change the key layout mode
On the Copy screen, press and hold one of the keys until the screen changes, and then press [OK]
to display the screen of the arranging keys mode.

Changing the key layout

Press and hold the key to move, drag it to the location to display, and then press [OK].

± ´ ²

³ µ

D0CMIC1355

42
 How to Use the Copy Screen

Hiding a key
Press and hold the key to hide, drag it to "Hide the Keys", and then press [OK].

DZX027

Displaying a hidden key

Press "Hidden Key List" to display the hidden keys. Press and hold the key to display, drag it to the
location to display, and then press [OK].

DZX028

Confirming the initial placement of the keys

Press [Menu] ( ) [Screen Settings] [Temporarily Restore Initial Key Layout] on the Copy
screen. After confirming, press [Back].
Resetting the key layout to the default
Press [Menu] ( ) [Screen Settings] [Restore Initial Key Layout] [Yes] on the Copy
screen.

43
 2. Getting Started

How to Use the Fax Screen

There are five kinds of functions and settings on the Fax screen.
1 2

5 3

D0CZPM1333

1. Destination type selection

Switch the destination type between [Fax] (including IP-Fax) and [Internet Fax]. The items displayed in the
address book and destination entry screen for manual entry change also when you switch the destination type.
2. Transmission/reception information confirmation
Browse and print the received documents that are stored in the memory or on the hard disk drive of the
machine. You can also browse and print the transmission and reception history.
3. Transmission settings
You can specify the additional features to use when sending a fax, configure the scan settings appropriately
for the original to scan, and display a preview before sending the fax. You can specify four commonly used
settings, such as switching transmission modes, that you can set from the shortcut keys without opening the
[Send Settings] screen. You can also check the settings that are currently specified and the remaining amount
of memory.
4. Destination specification
You can select an address registered in the address book through one-touch operation. Press to specify a
destination by using various other methods such as by entering manually or selecting from the history. You can
also register a new destination in the address book.
5. Job history
Job history of the executed jobs is displayed. When user authentication is set, the job history of each
authenticated user is displayed. When you select a job history, the setting will be applied on the current Fax
screen. This feature is convenient when you are using the same setting repeatedly.

Customizing the [Send Settings] Screen

Press and hold a key on the [Send Settings] screen to customize the layout of the keys.
When the administrator has enabled user authentication and User's Own Customization, the screen can
be customized for each user.

44
 How to Use the Fax Screen

Switching to change the key layout mode

Long-press any key and press [OK] on the screen below to switch to the key sorting mode and
enable changing of the key layout.

Changing the key layout

Long-press a key to change the layout, drag it to a new location, and then press [OK].

± ´ ²

³ µ

D0CMIC1355

Hiding a key
Long-press a key to hide, drag it to [Hide the Keys] (Trash icon), and then press [OK].

DZX027

Displaying a hidden key

Press "Hidden Key List" to display the hidden keys. Press and hold the key to display, drag it to the
location to display, and then press [OK].

45
 2. Getting Started

DZX028

Confirming the initial placement of the keys

Press [Menu] ( ) [Change Key Layout] [Check the key layout of the factory defaults] on
the Fax screen. After confirming, press [Back].
Resetting the key layout to the default
Press [Menu] ( ) [Change Key Layout] [Reset Layout] [Restore] on the Fax screen.

46
 How to Use the Scanner Screen

How to Use the Scanner Screen

There are five kinds of functions and settings on the Scanner screen.
1 2

5 3

D0CZPM1334

1. Destination type selection

You can switch between [Scan to Email] and [Scan to Folder]. The items displayed in the address book and
destination entry screen for manual entry also change when you switch the destination type.
2. Scan Files Status
You can browse the transmission history of the sent documents and cancel sending of a document waiting in
the queue. The transmission file status may not be displayed depending on the security settings.
3. Transmission settings
You can specify the scan settings according to the type of document to scan and the purpose of the scanned
data, and display a preview before sending the data. You can specify four commonly used settings, such as
selecting the type of the original, that you can set from the shortcut keys without opening the [Send Settings]
screen.
4. Destination specification
You can select a destination registered in the address book through one-touch operation. Press to specify a
destination by using various other methods such as by entering manually or selecting from the history. You can
also register a new destination in the address book.
5. Select One Touch Job
You can see the preset settings in the machine or the job history. When user authentication is set, the job
history of each authenticated user is displayed. When you select a job history, the setting will be applied on
the current Scanner screen. This feature is convenient when you are using the same setting repeatedly.

Customizing the [Send Settings] Screen

Press and hold a key on the [Send Settings] screen to customize the layout of the keys.
When the administrator has enabled user authentication and User's Own Customization, the screen can
be customized for each user.

47
 2. Getting Started

Switching to change the key layout mode

Long-press any key and press [OK] on the screen below to switch to the key sorting mode and
enable changing of the key layout.

Changing the key layout

Long-press a key to change the layout, drag it to a new location, and then press [OK].

± ´ ²

³ µ

D0CMIC1355

Hiding a key
Long-press a key to hide, drag it to [Hide the Keys] (Trash icon), and then press [OK].

DZX027

Displaying a hidden key

Press "Hidden Key List" to display the hidden keys. Press and hold the key to display, drag it to the
location to display, and then press [OK].

48
 How to Use the Scanner Screen

DZX028

Confirming the initial placement of the keys

Press [Menu] ( ) [Change Key Layout] [Check the key layout of the factory defaults] on
the Scanner screen. After confirming, press [Back].
Resetting the key layout to the default
Press [Menu] ( ) [Change Key Layout] [Reset Layout] [Restore] on the Scanner screen.

49
 2. Getting Started

Adding a Frequently Used Application or

Widget to the Home Screen
You can use a frequently used icon or widget easily by adding it to the Home screen. You can organize
the icons on the Home screen as you like by changing their order or using folders.
• Add an icon or widget from the application list screen.
• Each page of the Home screen can display up to 12 icons, widgets or folders, for a total of 60
items. A folder can hold up to 80 icons.
• You can add the following items to the Home screen: shortcuts of bookmarks in the browser on the
screen and programs registered in the Copy, Fax or Scanner.

D0CHPA5109

• You cannot add a shortcut of a program registered by the document server function to the Home
screen.
• When you have set user authentication, log in and customize it. Each user can register their own
Home screen.
• A shortcut, folder, or widget cannot be created or moved if there is no space on the Home screen.
In this case, delete one of the registered items, and then perform the same operation.
• The names of icons and widgets are displayed up to 20 double-byte or 30 single-byte characters.
Names composed of 21 or more double-byte characters are displayed with "...", indicating the
20th and later characters.

50
 Adding a Frequently Used Application or Widget to the Home Screen

Adding an Icon/Widget to the Home Screen

1. Press the application list icon on the Home screen.

DZC187

2. Press and hold the icon or widget to be added to the application list screen.

• Select the [WIDGET] tab to add a widget, or select the [PROGRAM] tab to add a program.
3. After the screen changes to the Home screen, move the icon or widget to the desired
position and release it.
To add a classic application or program, select the type of application or program from the
displayed menu.

Moving or Deleting Icons and Widgets

• To move an icon or widget, press and hold the icon and move it to the desired position, and then
release it.

51
 2. Getting Started

• To delete an icon or widget, press and hold the icon and move it to the trash icon, and then release
it.
• When you delete a shortcut icon of a function or program from the Home screen, the function or
program is not deleted.
• To reset the Home screen, perform the following procedure.
1. Press [Menu] ( ) on the bottom center of the Home screen.
2. Press [Reset Home Screen], and then press [OK].

Creating a Folder to Organize Icons

1. Press and hold a spot on the Home screen where you want to create a folder.
2. When the "Add to Home Screen" screen is displayed, press [Folder].

DZC188

3. Open the created folder, press and hold its title, and then change the folder name.
You can enter up to 30 characters for a folder name.
4. Drag the icon and release it over the folder.

52
 Registering Frequently Used Settings as a Program

Registering Frequently Used Settings as a

Program
You can register a "program" made of a combination of the functions used in the Copy, Fax, or
Scanner, such as the scan setting, output setting, and address.
• You can load the registered program easily from the application screen.

D0CZPM1316

• When you press the icon of a program on the Home screen, the machine applies the settings and
performs the function registered in the program automatically.
• You can register the following number of items as programs.
• Copy: 25 items
• Fax: 100 items
• Scanner: 100 items
You can prohibit users other than the machine administrator from registering a program.
See "Specifying Menu Protect", User Guide (Full Version).

• You cannot register the following settings as a program:

• Copy
Orientation of [2 Sided/Combine]
• Fax
[Subject], [Sender]
• Scanner
[Sender], [PDF Security Settings], [Start Number]
• You can register a destination on the program of the scanner function only when [Program Setting
for Destinations] of [Scanner Settings] is set to [Include Destinations].
• See "Address Book Settings", User Guide (Full Version).
• When [Program Setting for Destinations] of [Scanner Settings] is set to [Exclude Destinations], the
destination registered on the recalled program in the scanner function is not displayed.

53
 2. Getting Started

• A folder destination with a destination protection code cannot be registered on a program of the
scanner function.

Registering Settings as a Program

First, configure the settings to be registered on the Copy, Fax, or Scanner screen, and then register them.

1. On the Home screen, press [Copy], [Fax], or [Scanner].

If the icon is not displayed on the Home screen, add the icon from the application list screen.
page 50 "Adding a Frequently Used Application or Widget to the Home Screen"
2. Specify scan and output settings to be registered as a program.

3. Press [Menu] ( ).
4. Press [Set Current Settings to Program].

D0CZPM1316

5. Press a program number to register the settings.

6. Enter a program name and select an icon.
7. Press [Prev. Screen] [OK].
8. Press [Place].
The selected icon is displayed on the Home screen.

54
 Registering Frequently Used Settings as a Program

Even if you select [Do not Place], you can add shortcuts to the program to the Home screen after
the program registration is complete.
9. Press [Exit].

Changing the Contents of the Program

You can change a part of the program and overwrite it or change the contents and register them as a
new program.

1. On the Home screen, press [Copy], [Fax], or [Scanner].

If the icon is not displayed on the Home screen, add the icon from the application list screen.
page 50 "Adding a Frequently Used Application or Widget to the Home Screen"
2. Press [Menu] ( ), and then press [Recall Program].

D0CZPM1316

3. Press the program number to be changed.

4. Change the scan and output settings.
5. Press [Menu] ( ), and then press [Set Current Settings to Program].
6. Select a program number to register the changed settings.
• To overwrite the program, select the number of the loaded program, and then press
[Program] on the message appears.

55
 2. Getting Started

• To register the contents as a new program, select a number that is not programmed.
7. Enter a program name and select an icon.
8. Press [Prev. Screen] [OK].
9. Press [Place].
Even if you select [Do not Place], you can add shortcuts to the program to the Home screen after
changing the settings of the program is complete.
10. Press [Exit].

• To change the icon or program name or to delete the program, press [Menu] ( ) and operate
from [Edit / Delete Program].

56
 Logging In from the Control Panel

Logging In from the Control Panel

When the machine is configured by the administrator to restrict use by unauthorized users, you must
authenticate your login information before starting the operation.
The authentication methods are described below.
• When Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is configured on the
machine, enter the user name and password for authentication to log in to the machine before
starting operation.

• Depending on the machine settings, you can use an IC card or mobile device for authentication.

• If user code authentication is specified, you may need to enter the user code to operate the
restricted application.

To prevent use of the machine by an unauthorized person, always log out when you have finished using
the machine. While a user is logged in, the name of the user is displayed in the system message.

57
 2. Getting Started

• If the machine is not used for a specified period, the user is automatically logged out (Auto Logout).
The default setting for Auto Logout is 3 minutes. The period of Auto Logout can be changed by
[Auto Logout Timer] of [System Settings] or the Auto Logout setting can be disabled.
• See "Date/Time/Timer", User Guide (Full Version).
• Ask the administrator for the login user name, login password, and user code.
• See "Verifying Users to Operate the Machine (User Authentication)", User Guide (Full Version).

Logging In by Entering the User Name and Password

Enter the authentication information using the keyboard displayed on the control panel.

1. Press [Login] at the top right on the screen.

D0CHPA5117

2. Press [User Name].

DZC191

3. Enter the login user name, and then press [Done].

4. Press [Password].
5. Enter the login password, and then press [Done].
6. Press [Login].

58
 Logging In from the Control Panel

• If an incorrect password is entered a specified number of times, login with the same name is
disabled (Lockout Function). The default setting for unsuccessful attempts before a user is locked out
is five. If the user is locked out, the administrator must release the lockout.
• To log out from the machine, press [Logout] at the top right on the screen, and then press [OK].

Logging In Using an IC Card

Hold an IC card over the card reader to the right of the control panel. If the card is not registered on the
machine, enter the authentication information and register the card.

1. Hold an IC card over the card reader.

D0CHIA5722

• When the card is registered on the machine, login operation finishes.

• When the card is not registered, the registration screen is displayed. Proceed to the next step
to register the card.
2. Enter the Login User Name and Login Password, and then press [Register].
3. Hold the IC card over the card reader again.

• To log out, hold the IC card over the card reader or press [Logout] at the top right on the screen.
• If another user holds the IC card over the card reader while you are still logged in, you are
automatically logged out and the new user logs in.

Logging In Using a Mobile Device

Log in to the machine using the RICOH Smart Device Connector app on your mobile device. You need a
mobile device that supports Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE).

1. Enable the Bluetooth function on your mobile device.

59
 2. Getting Started

2. Start the RICOH Smart Device Connector application on the mobile device, and then flick
left or right to display the login screen.

If the login screen is not displayed, press [Settings] [Navigation Display Item], and then enable
the display of [Login to MFP] on RICOH Smart Device Connector.
3. Press [NEXT].
4. Display the login screen on the control panel of the machine, and hold the mobile device
over the Bluetooth label.

60
 Logging In from the Control Panel

• To log out from the machine, hold the mobile device over the Bluetooth label on the control panel
or press [Logout] at the top right on the screen.
• If another user holds a mobile device over the card reader while you are still logged in, you are
automatically logged out and the new user logs in.

Authenticating Using the User Code

When User Code Authentication is specified as the authentication method on the machine, enter the user
code before operating an application.

1. Enter the user code, and then press [OK].

D0CHPA5105

• When you finish the operation of the application, press [Energy Save] ( ) or press and hold
[Reset] to release the authentication status.

Changing the Login Password

When Basic Authentication, Windows Authentication, or LDAP Authentication is configured on the

machine, change the password periodically to prevent use of the machine by an unauthorized person.
Passwords can contain the following characters. Make the password difficult to guess.
• Uppercase letters: A to Z (26 characters)
• Lowercase letters: a to z (26 characters)
• Numbers: 0 to 9 (10 characters)
• Symbols: (space) ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , – . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ~ (33 characters)

1. Log in to the machine.

61
 2. Getting Started

2. Press [Address Book] on the Home screen.

3. Select the login user from the address book, and then press [Edit].

EDN012

4. Press the [User Management / Others] tab [User Management].

5. Enter the new password in [Login Password], and then re-enter the password in [Confirm
Login Password] for confirmation.

D0CMPC6371

You can enter up to 128 characters.

6. Press [OK] twice.
7. After completing the procedure, press [Home] ( ).

62
 Placing an Original on the Exposure Glass

Placing an Original on the Exposure Glass

Use the exposure glass to scan originals that cannot be placed in the auto document feeder (ADF), such
as books and license cards.

• When lowering the ADF, do not place your hands on the hinges and exposure glass. Your
hands or fingers are caught, which can result in injury.

• Do not lift the ADF forcefully. The cover of the ADF might open and cause injury. The ADF, or its
hinges may also become damaged.

1. Lift the ADF or the exposure glass cover.

Lift the ADF or the exposure glass cover by more than 30 degrees to detect the document size
automatically when placing an original on the exposure glass.
2. Place the original face down and aligned to the mark on the upper left corner of the scan
area.

DZW102

page 215 "Recommended Original Size and Weight"

page 217 "Sizes Detectable with Auto Paper Select"
3. Lower the ADF or the exposure glass cover.

• When you place a thick book or three-dimensional original on the exposure glass and lower the
ADF, the back side of the ADF rises up to accommodate the original.

63
 2. Getting Started

DZW103

• Do not open or close the ADF with your hands placed in the space between the ADF and exposure
glass.

D0CHIA5705

64
 Placing an Original in the Auto Document Feeder (ADF)

Placing an Original in the Auto Document

Feeder (ADF)
The ADF automatically scans multiple sheets of originals or two-sided originals at one time.
There are two types of ADF as follows:
Auto Reverse Document Feeder (ARDF)
When scanning a two-sided original, the machine scans the front side of the original first, and then
turns it over to scan the back side.

DZW104

One-pass duplex scanning ADF

When scanning a two-sided original, the machine scans the front and back sides of the two-sided
original at one time.

DZW105

• For details about the sizes of originals that you can place in the ADF, see the following:
page 215 "Recommended Original Size and Weight"
page 217 "Sizes Detectable with Auto Paper Select"
• If the originals described below are placed in the ADF, it may cause misfeeds, white lines, or black
lines, or result in damage to the originals. Place these originals on the exposure glass.
• Stapled or clipped originals

65
 2. Getting Started

• Perforated or torn originals

• Curled, folded, or creased originals
• Pasted originals
• Originals with adhesive tape, glue or paste stuck to them
• Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermal paper, art paper, aluminum foil, carbon
paper, or conductive paper
• Originals with perforated lines
• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts
• Sticky originals such as translucent paper
• Thin or highly flexible originals
• Bound originals such as books
• Transparent originals such as transparencies or translucent paper
page 63 "Placing an Original on the Exposure Glass"
• When loading an original written by pencil on the ADF, the original may be dirty from by being
scraped.
• Correct an original that tends to curl before setting on the machine.
• Fan sheets before loading so that multiple originals do not stick to each other and are not fed at the
same time. If the edge of the paper is not cut well, the edges of the paper curl back, forming what
are called burrs. Before you set originals with burrs, fan the originals carefully.

D0CMIC1421

• Do not set an original that is wet with correcting fluid or ink. The scanning glass will be stained and
the stain will be scanned with the original.

Placing Originals in the ARDF

• Do not block the sensors with your hand. Be sure to load the originals neatly and do not push them
into the ADF forcibly. It may cause paper misfeeds or paper size error.

66
 Placing an Original in the Auto Document Feeder (ADF)

DZW106

1. Adjust the original guide to the original size.

DZW107

2. Place the aligned originals squarely face up in the ARDF.

Place the originals with the first page facing up.
Fan sheets before loading so that multiple papers do not stick to each other and are not fed at
once.
Do not stack the originals beyond the limit mark.

DZX108

67
 2. Getting Started

• To scan originals larger than B4 JIS or 81/2 × 14 size, raise the ADF’s extender on the ADF
output tray.

DZW795

• When using the ARDF to scan originals with a paper weight less than 42 g/m2 (11 lb. Bond),
move the slide tray on the original output tray to the left side. When the slide tray of the Auto
Reversible Document Feeder (ARDF) is in the left, the amount of output paper will be low. After
scanning a thin original, return the slide tray to the previous position.

DZW109

Placing Originals in the One-pass Duplex Scanning ADF

• Do not block the sensors with your hand. Be sure to load the originals neatly and do not push them
into the ADF forcibly. It may cause paper misfeeds or paper size error.

68
 Placing an Original in the Auto Document Feeder (ADF)

DZW110

1. Place the originals flush against the rear paper guide and adjust the paper guides to the
size of the originals.

D0CHIA5718

D0CHIA5719

2. Place the aligned originals squarely face up in the one-pass duplex scanning ADF.
Place the originals with the first page facing up.
Fan sheets before loading so that multiple originals do not stick to each other and are not fed at
once. If the edge of the paper is not cut well, the edges of the paper curl back, forming what are
called burrs. Before you set originals with burrs, fan the originals carefully.
Load the originals by placing them flush against the rear paper guide.
Do not stack the originals beyond the limit mark.

69
 2. Getting Started

DZX112

• To scan originals larger than B4 JIS or 81/2 × 14 size, pull out the ADF’s extender on the
original output tray, and then raise the stopper.

DZW113

• To scan originals that are smaller than A6 size, attach the small size paper unit as follows:
1. Open the ADF cover.
2. Engage the two projections of the small size paper unit with the holes on the one-pass
duplex scanning ADF.

70
 Placing an Original in the Auto Document Feeder (ADF)

DZW181

3. Close the ADF cover.

DZW182

71
 2. Getting Started

72
3. Copy

Basic Procedure for Copying Documents

Set the original on the exposure glass or auto document feeder (ADF) to make a copy.

• If the previous setting is still active, press [Reset] before copying.

1. Press [Copy] on the Home screen.

2. Place the original.

page 63 "Placing an Original on the Exposure Glass"
page 65 "Placing an Original in the Auto Document Feeder (ADF)"
To copy both sides of the paper, to staple, or to punch holes, confirm the orientation of the original
according to how you want the printout to appear.
Basic Original Orientation

Place Orientation

Place the original face

Exposure Glass down in a readable
orientation.
DZB208

Place the original face

ADF up in a readable
orientation.

DZB209

If the Readable Orientation Is Not Vertical

When you copy a portrait original larger than A4 or 8 1/2" × 11" (LT) (A3 or 11" × 17"),
place it as shown below, and then specify [Original Orientation].

73
 3. Copy

Place Orientation

Rotate the original

clockwise or counter-
Exposure Glass
clockwise 90 degrees
and place it face down.
DZB210

Rotate the original

clockwise or counter-
ADF
clockwise 90 degrees
and place it face up.
DZB211

When Specifying [Top 2] as the Staple or Punch Position

Place an original as shown below, and then specify [Original Orientation].

Place Orientation

Place the original face

Exposure glass down in a readable
orientation.
EDM218

Place the original face

Auto document
up in a readable
feeder (ADF)
orientation.
EDM219

3. Press [Original Orientation] on the Copy screen.

If the key is not displayed, select it from [Original Settings].

When you place the original face up in a readable orientation, this setting is not necessary if
[Readable Direction] is displayed on the key. Placing of the original is completed.

74
 Basic Procedure for Copying Documents

4. Specify the Original Orientation.

If the display of this screen is not necessary when you press [Start], clear the [Check the orientation
of the original every time after pressing [Start]] check box.
Placing of the original is completed.
5. Press [ ] or [ ] in [Quantity] to specify the number of copies.

DZC207

You can enter this using the keyboard after pressing [Quantity] or a number.
6. Press the paper tray select key and select the paper to use as necessary.

• When you select [Auto Paper Select], the paper suitable for the original is selected
automatically. When the orientations of the original and paper in the paper tray do not
match, the machine rotates the copied image 90 degrees automatically. However, the copied
image may not be rotated depending on the settings or types of Finishing, staple or punch, for
example.
• If the size of the original is not detected properly or when you make a copy on paper of a
special size, specify the paper tray in which the paper to use is loaded.
7. Press [Start].
• When the [Check the orientation of the original every time after pressing [Start]] check box is
selected in [Select the original's orientation], and some settings, such as duplex copying or
combining are specified, the screen below is displayed. Select the original orientation as
necessary. If you do not need to select this each time, clear the check box.

75
 3. Copy

• When you place the original on the ADF, the process of copying the original starts.
• When you place the original on the exposure glass, the copy process starts according to the
setting contents. To make a copy of the second page or back side of the original, place the
original accordingly on the exposure glass, and then press [Start]. Press [Finish Scn] after
scanning all originals if necessary according to the setting contents.

• Originals scanned when no paper is loaded or when an error has occurred will be copied
automatically when the machine is ready to execute copying.

Reserving a Copy Job While Executing Another Copy Job

When [Reserve] is displayed on the execution screen of the current copy job, you can scan the original
of another copy job to execute after the current job is completed (Job Preset).
You can make reservations for up to eight jobs each in the Copier and Document Server functions.

1. Press [Reserve] on the execution screen of a copy job.

D0CHPA5201

2. Place a new original to scan on the machine.

page 73 "Basic Procedure for Copying Documents"
3. Specify 2 sided, Combine, Sort, and other copy settings if necessary.
page 84 "Duplex Copying"
page 86 "Combining and Copying a Multi-page Original onto a Single Sheet of Paper"
page 92 "Copying in Page Order or for Each Page Number"

76
 Basic Procedure for Copying Documents

4. Press [Reserve Start].

The machine starts scanning the placed original.
After the current copy job is completed, the reserved copy job starts automatically.

• To delete the reserved job or preview its image on the screen, press [Job Confirmation].

Interrupting the Current Copy to Copy Another Original

When [Interrupt] is displayed on the copy processing screen, you can pause the current copy to scan
and copy another original (Interrupt mode).

1. Press [Interrupt] on the execution screen of a copy job.

2. When the scanning stops, remove the original being copied.

3. Place a new original to scan on the machine.
page 73 "Basic Procedure for Copying Documents"
4. Specify 2 sided, Combine, Sort, and other copy settings if necessary.
page 84 "Duplex Copying"
page 86 "Combining and Copying a Multi-page Original onto a Single Sheet of Paper"
page 92 "Copying in Page Order or for Each Page Number"
5. Press [Interrupt Start].
6. When the Interrupt mode is finished, remove the original and copied paper.
7. Press [Cancel Interrupt].
8. Set the rest of the original that was supposed to be copied before the Interrupt mode, and
press [Start].
The previous copy job settings are restored. Simply press [Start] to continue copying from where it
left off.

• You cannot use the Interrupt mode while scanning a fax original.

77
 3. Copy

• You cannot use the Interrupt mode with the staple mode while copying in the staple mode.

78
 Making Enlarged or Reduced Copies

Making Enlarged or Reduced Copies

You can enlarge or reduce the original when copying with the following methods:
• Enlarging or reducing at a specified reduction ratio or into a specified size (Zoom/Reduce/
Enlarge/Size Magnification)
• Enlarging or reducing according to the paper size (Auto Reduce/Enlarge)
• Reducing slightly (Create Margin)

Specifying a Copy Ratio or Size

1. Press [Copy] on the Home screen.

2. Place the original.

page 73 "Basic Procedure for Copying Documents"
The base point of reduce/enlarge is different for the exposure glass and Auto Document Feeder
(ADF) as shown in the following table:

Setting position Base point Enlarge Reduce

Enlarged or reduced from the

top left.

Exposure glass

DZB222

Enlarged or reduced from the

bottom left
DZB224 DZB225

Auto document
feeder (ADF)

DZB223

79
 3. Copy

When you place two-sided originals in the One-pass duplex scanning ADF, the top right corner of
the original will be the base point for the enlargement/reduction of the reverse side. To enlarge or
reduce from the same point, set the original on the exposure glass and perform 2-sided copy.
3. Press [Copy Ratio] and select a copy ratio or size.

To specify a copy ratio or size other than the displayed setting, press [Others] and perform the
following procedure.
Specifying a copy ratio (Zoom/Reduce/Enlarge)
Enter a value or select the copy ratio.

D0CZPM6505

Specifying a size (Size Magnification)

Press [Specify Copy Size], enter the length of the original and copied image, and then press
[OK].

4. Press [Start].

• You can change the options of the copy ratio that is displayed on the Copy screen when pressing
[Copy Ratio]. You can also change the enlargement and reduction ratios that appear when [Copy
Ratio] [Others] is pressed on the Copy screen.

80
 Making Enlarged or Reduced Copies

• See "Reduce / Enlarge", User Guide (Full Version).

Enlarging or Reducing According to the Paper Size

The original is enlarged or reduced to fit on the specified paper size (Scale to Paper Size).

DZB236

To copy a document whose size cannot be detected, specify [Original Size] on the Copy screen.
For the original size detected on the exposure glass or in the ADF automatically, see the following
section:
page 217 "Sizes Detectable with Auto Paper Select"

1. Press [Copy] on the Home screen.

2. Place the original.

page 73 "Basic Procedure for Copying Documents"

81
 3. Copy

3. On the Copy screen, press [Copy Ratio] and [Fit to Paper Size].

DZC237

4. Select the tray loaded with the paper to use.

When the orientations of the original and paper in the paper tray do not match, the machine
rotates the copied image automatically. To reduce an original of A3 (11 × 17) size to A4 (81/2 ×
11) size, for example, you can select either A4 (81/2 × 11) or A4 (81/2 × 11) .

DZB240

5. Press [Start].

Reducing Slightly to Increase the Margins

The original is reduced to 93% in size and printed in the center of the paper. This setting is useful if you
want to copy an original to a paper of the same size without the edges being slightly cropped when
copied in full size or to increase the margins.

82
 Making Enlarged or Reduced Copies

1. Press [Copy] on the Home screen.

2. Place the original.

page 73 "Basic Procedure for Copying Documents"
3. On the Copy screen, press [Create Margin].

• If the key is not displayed, register [Create Margin], by using [Customize Function: Copy
(Standard Mode)] or [Customize Function: Copy (All View Mode)].
• See "Others (Copier / Document Server Settings)", User Guide (Full Version).
4. Press [Start].

• You can change the copy ratio of [Create Margin] to a value other than 93%.
• See "Reduce / Enlarge", User Guide (Full Version).

83
 3. Copy

Duplex Copying
You can copy two 1-sided pages or one 2-sided page onto the front and back sides of a single sheet of
paper.

DZB251

The size of the original that can be copied differs from that of the 1-sided copy.
page 215 "Recommended Original Size and Weight"
For details about the sizes, orientations, and weights of paper that can be used in the duplex function,
see the following section:
page 304 "List of Specifications"

1. Press [Copy] on the Home screen.

2. Press [1 Sided 2 Sided] or [2 Sided 2 Sided] on the Copy screen.

Duplex Copying with the Settings Other Than Those Displayed on the Keys
1. Press [2 Sided/Combine].

2. Specify the original and print side settings.

84
 Duplex Copying

• Original Direction: Specify the orientation to place the originals.

• Original Setting: Specify the condition of the originals to copy (1 sided/2 sided
(Page Opening Direction)).
• Print Side Setting: Select the finish from [Open to Right/Left] or [Open to Top].
3. Press [OK].
3. Place the original.
page 73 "Basic Procedure for Copying Documents"
4. Press [Start].
• When placing the originals on the exposure glass, press [Finish Scn] after scanning all of the
originals if necessary according to the setting contents and number of originals.

• You can specify the margins in [Settings] [Copier / Document Server Settings] [Edit / Stamp]
[Margin].
• See "Edit / Stamp", User Guide (Full Version).
• You cannot perform Duplex Copy onto the following paper types:
• Label paper (adhesive labels)
• OHP transparencies
• Envelopes
• Thick paper 4
• Translucent Paper
• You can change the setting contents of the two-sided copy key on the Copy screen.
• See "Others (Copier / Document Server Settings)", User Guide (Full Version).
• Use the [Series] function to copy the front and back sides of a two-sided original onto one side of a
sheet page by page.
• See "Copying Facing Pages of a Book Type Original or Two-sided Original", User Guide (Full
Version).

85
 3. Copy

Combining and Copying a Multi-page Original

onto a Single Sheet of Paper
You can copy multiple sheets in an original onto one side or both sides of a sheet of paper to save
paper.

1 2 3

3
2 3
1 1
2 DZB253

The arrangement of copied pages and copy ratio varies depending on the original orientation and
combined pages.

Original Orientation Combine 2 pages Combine 4 pages Combine 8 pages

1
4

1 2
8
1

DZB256 DZB257 DZB258

DZB254

1
1
4

2
1

DZB255 8
DZB259 DZB260 DZB261

1. Press [Copy] on the Home screen.

2. On the Copy screen, press [1 sided Comb 2 orig].

To combine with the settings other than those displayed on the keys
1. Press [2 Sided/Combine].

86
 Combining and Copying a Multi-page Original onto a Single Sheet of Paper

2. Specify about the original, print side, and combining.

• Original Direction: Specify the orientation to place the originals.

• Original Setting: Specify the condition of the originals to copy (1 sided/2 sided
(Page Opening Direction)).
• Print Side Setting: Specify the condition of the copied sheet (1 sided/2 sided (Page
Opening Direction)).
• Combine Settings: Specify the number of pages to combine on one side of a sheet.
3. Press [OK].
3. Press the paper tray select key and select the paper to copy onto.

4. Place an original.
page 73 "Basic Procedure for Copying Documents"
To position the right-page first and then the left page when copying an original written
longitudinally, place the original upside down in the ADF.
Example: Combining 2 Pages

Orientation Results

1
2
3
4

2 1
4 3
DZB263
DZB262

87
 3. Copy

5. Press [Start].
When placing the originals on the exposure glass, press [Finish Scn] after scanning all of the
originals if necessary according to the number of originals.

• The minimum copy ratio in the Combine function is 25%. For example, if you copy an A3 (11 ×
17)-size original onto A4 (81/2 × 11)-size paper with [1 sided Comb 4 orig], the copy ratio
becomes less than 25% and parts of the image might not be copied.
• You can configure the following settings in [Settings] [Copier / Document Server Settings] [2
Sided / Combine] [Combine]:
• [Copy Order in Combine]: The order of combined images
• [Separation Line in Combine]: The separation line between combined pages
See "2 Sided / Combine", User Guide (Full Version).
• You can configure the following settings in [Settings] [Copier / Document Server Settings]
[Edit / Stamp] [Erase]:
• [Erase Original Shadow in Combine]: Determine whether to erase the boundary margin
around each original to maintain the margin
See "Edit / Stamp", User Guide (Full Version).
• You can change the setting contents of the Combine key on the Copy screen.
• See "Others (Copier / Document Server Settings)", User Guide (Full Version).

88
 Copying onto Envelopes

Copying onto Envelopes

To copy onto envelopes that are not usually used, set them in the bypass tray. If you copy onto
envelopes frequently, set them in the paper tray.

Copying onto Envelopes in the Bypass Tray

• The Duplex Copy function cannot be used for envelopes. If Duplex Copy is specified, press one of
the following keys to cancel the setting.

1. Press [Copy] on the Home screen.

2. Set the envelope in the bypass tray with the copying side face down.
page 209 "Envelope Orientation and Recommended Status"
The "Bypass Tray Paper Settings" screen is displayed.

3. Press [Change Setting].

When envelopes are set in the bypass tray, the type and size are not detected automatically.
Specify the type and size of the paper manually.

89
 3. Copy

4. Select [Envelope], and then proceed to the next screen.

D0CHPA5202

To change the envelope weight, press [ChngThickness] to specify the weight.

5. Check that the selected envelope size is correct, and then press [OK].

• If the selected envelope size is not the same as the actual size, select the correct envelope
size.
• When you select [Custom Size], enter the envelope size. When the envelope is set with the
flap opened, be sure to include the width of the flap.

D0CHIA6001

6. Place the original on the exposure glass.

page 209 "Envelope Orientation and Recommended Status"
7. Press [Start].

90
 Copying onto Envelopes

Copying onto Envelopes in the Paper Tray

• The Duplex Copy function cannot be used for envelopes. If Duplex Copy is specified, press one of
the following keys to cancel the setting.

1. Set the envelopes in the paper tray

page 209 "Envelope Orientation and Recommended Status"
2. Press [Copy] on the Home screen.

3. Press the paper tray select key on the Copy screen.

4. Select the paper tray in which the envelopes are set.

DZC270

5. Place the original on the exposure glass.

page 209 "Envelope Orientation and Recommended Status"
6. Press [Start].

91
 3. Copy

Copying in Page Order or for Each Page

Number
When copying two or more copies of multi-page originals, you can specify the page order as described
below.
Sort
Copies in the order of the original.

3 3
1 2 3 2 2
1 1
DZB241

Stack
Groups together copies of each page in a multi-page original.

1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3
DZB242

Rotate Sort
Copies in the order of the original and outputs by rotating each copy set. Each copy set is output
lengthwise and breadthwise alternately to identify each set.
1

3
2
2

1 2 3
1
3

DZB243

To specify rotate sort, use two paper trays and set the same size and type of paper in the trays in
different orientations, vertically ( ) and horizontally ( ). When the paper cannot be set in vertical
( ) orientation, you cannot specify Rotate Sort.

• An optional unit such as the internal shift tray or finisher is required to use this function.
• page 377 "Functions Requiring Optional Configurations"

92
 Copying in Page Order or for Each Page Number

1. Press [Copy] on the Home screen.

2. Place the original.

page 73 "Basic Procedure for Copying Documents"
3. Press [ ] or [ ] under [Quantity] on the Copy screen to specify the number of copies.

DZC207

You can enter this using the keyboard after pressing [Quantity] or a number.
4. Press [Sort/Stack] on the Copy screen.

If the key is not displayed, select it from [Finishing].

If the optional equipment that can stack the copied sheets is not attached to the machine, only
[Sort] is displayed on the key.
5. Select the function to specify.

6. Press [Start].
When selecting [Sort] or [Rotate Sort] and placing an original on the exposure glass, a single set of
copies is made. After scanning all of the originals, press [Finish Scn] to copy the rest of the sets.

• If you specify sort or stack with the finisher or internal shift tray installed, the output sheets will be
shifted by each set.

93
 3. Copy

• You can change the action to perform when paper or memory runs out during sorting under [Rotate
Sort: Auto Paper Continue] or [Memory Full Auto Scan Restart].
• See "Finishing", User Guide (Full Version).

94
4. Fax

Basic Procedure for Transmitting Faxes

The machine scans an original to transmit it by fax into the machine's memory before establishing a
communication with the destination (Memory Transmission).
You can also transmit a fax while confirming the status of the fax destination.
See "Sending a Fax While Scanning the Original", User Guide (Full Version).

• It is recommended that you call the receivers and confirm with them when sending important
documents.

1. Press [Fax] on the Home screen.

2. Check that [Fax] and [Memory Transmission] are displayed on the fax screen.

D0CZPM6757

Press an item on the fax screen to select [Memory Transmission] if [Immed. Transmission] is
selected.
3. Place the original in the ADF or on the exposure glass.
See "Setting an Original to Send by Fax on the Scanner", User Guide (Full Version).
4. Press [Settings], and then specify the scan settings.
See "Sending a Fax at the Image Quality Suitable for the Original", User Guide (Full Version).

95
 4. Fax

5. Specify the destination.

D0CZPM6758

• To enter the fax number manually, select the destination from the destination history, or search
for the destination in the address book, press , and specify the destination. You can also
enter the fax number manually by pressing .

D0CHPA5404

You can select only the destination entered using the numeric keypad from the history.
• To specify the destination again, press .

D0CZPM6760

6. On the [Settings] screen, specify [Sender] as necessary.

• When a login user is operating the machine, the login user becomes the sender.
To receive a transmission result by e-mail, select [Notification of Result]. The e-mail address
that you selected the [Register as both a destination and a sender] check box when registering
the address will be used as the e-mail address of the sender.
See "Registering E-mail Addresses in the Address Book", User Guide (Full Version).
• To print the sender's name on the page received at the destination, select [Stamp Sender
Name].

96
 Basic Procedure for Transmitting Faxes

• If the Auto Specify Sender Name function is enabled, the sender is automatically specified
and you can omit the procedure for specifying a sender.
7. Press [Start].
To cancel transmission after scanning the original, press [Stop] and operate in [Job Status]
[Transmission Standby File].
See "Confirming and Handling a Document in the Fax Queue", User Guide (Full Version).
When fax transmission is complete, the message "Transmission was finished." is displayed.
When Fax Transmission Ended Sound is enabled, a sound is produced.
See "Configuring the Type and Volume of the Sound Emitted When Using Fax", User Guide (Full
Version).

• If the telephone line you are connected to requires time to connect to the public line after you dial
the external number, enter a [Pause] after entering the number to specify the time to wait before
dialing the number. The machine pauses for about two seconds for each single [Pause] entered.
• To use tone-dialing in a pulse-dialing environment, press [Tone]. A tone signal is generated for
every number you enter afterward.
• You can perform Immediate transmission only when the total number of destinations specified for
all documents exceeds the maximum value.
• The communication that has been initiated first is displayed on the screen when performing three
simultaneous communications.

97
 4. Fax

Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book

By registering the destinations to which you frequently send faxes together with the send conditions in the
address book, you can easily send faxes.

Registering a Fax Number and Send Conditions

1. Press [Address Book] on the Home screen.

2. Press [Register] on the Address Book screen.

EDN022

3. Enter the information of the destination on the [Name] tab, and then select a title to
classify it.

4. Press [Destinations] tab [Fax].

98
 Registering Fax Numbers in the Address Book

5. Specify the Fax Destinations and send conditions.

• Select Line: Select the line to use.

• International Transmission Mode: Specify whether to reduce errors occurring when sending
abroad.
• Fax Header: Select the name of the sender printed on the reception sheet of the destination.
Register the fax header in advance.
See "Printing the Destination Name, Fax Header, and Standard Message on the Fax
Received at the Destination", User Guide (Full Version).
• Label Insertion: Specify the name (title + name) and fixed phrase printed on the reception
sheet of the destination.
See "Printing the Destination Name, Fax Header, and Standard Message on the Fax
Received at the Destination", User Guide (Full Version).
6. Press the [User Management / Others] tab as necessary, and specify the settings.
• User Management: Enter the authentication information to login and use the machine.
• Registration Destination Group: Select a group to which this destination belongs as necessary.
Register the group in advance.
See "Registering Groups in the Address Book", User Guide (Full Version).
• Display Priority: When the destinations are sorted in the order of priority, a destination with
higher priority is displayed prior to that with lower priority. The destinations with the same
priority are displayed in the order of registration.
• Destination Protection: Select this check box to require entering of the protection code to
select the destination.
See "Using the Protection Function to Prevent the Misuse of Addresses", User Guide (Full
Version).
7. Press [OK].
8. After completing the procedure, press [Home] ( ).
9. When a message prompting you to back up the address book appears on the screen,
press [Go to Backup] to back up the address book.
If you select [Close], you can close the address book without backing up and go back to the Home
screen.

99
 4. Fax

See "Making a Backup or Restoring the Address Book", User Guide (Full Version).

Changing/Deleting the Registered Data Such as Fax Number

If you delete the destination used for the personal box, file transmission will fail. Exclude the destination
from the personal box before deleting it.
See "Receiving Faxes to Personal Boxes", User Guide (Full Version).

1. Press [Address Book] on the Home screen.

2. Select the destination to change or delete on the Address Book screen.

EDN013

You can delete multiple destinations at one time.

3. Press [Edit] or [Delete] to change or delete the destination information.
4. When changing or deleting is complete, press [Home] ( ).
5. When a message prompting you to back up the address book appears on the screen,
press [Go to Backup] to back up the address book.
If you select [Close], you can close the address book without backing up and go back to the Home
screen.
See "Making a Backup or Restoring the Address Book", User Guide (Full Version).

100
 Displaying a Preview before Sending a Fax

Displaying a Preview before Sending a Fax

You can display the preview of the scanned document on the display of the machine to check if it is
scanned as specified.
This function cannot be used when sending a fax while using any of the following:
• Immediate Transmission
• On-hook dialing
• Manual dialing
To display the preview in the correct orientation, specify [Original Orientation] in [Settings] correctly.

1. Press [Fax] on the Home screen.

2. Place the original in the Auto Document Feeder (ADF) or on the exposure glass.
See "Setting an Original to Send by Fax on the Scanner", User Guide (Full Version).
3. On the fax screen, press [Settings] [Original Orientation] to specify the orientation of
the original, and then press [Preview].

4. Configure the scan settings.

See "Sending a Fax at the Image Quality Suitable for the Original", User Guide (Full Version).
5. Specify the destination on the fax screen, and then press [Start].
6. Check the preview.

101
 4. Fax

• Flick the image left or right to switch between the pages.

• Pinch in or out on the image to zoom in or out.
7. Press [Transmit].
To cancel transmission and perform the procedure from scanning the original again, press
[Cancel].

102
 Viewing the Transmission Result of Sent Faxes

Viewing the Transmission Result of Sent Faxes

You can check the result of a fax transmission on the fax screen, in various reports, or on the screen of a
computer.
The following reports are printed according to the transmission result or the settings:
• Communication Result Report: The result of Memory Transmission is printed.
• Immediate TX Result Report: The result of Immediate Transmission is printed.
• Communication Failure Report: This report is printed when a fax could not be sent to all specified
destinations by Memory Transmission.
• Error Report: This report is printed when sending a fax by Immediate Transmission failed.
• Memory Storage Report: This report is printed when the scanned document could not be stored in
the memory.

• The fax transmission results can also be confirmed in Records.

• See "Viewing the History of Sent and Received Faxes", User Guide (Full Version).
• Specify [Notification of Results] when sending a fax to receive the transmission result by e-mail.
• page 105 "Checking by E-mail"

Confirming the Information on the Fax Screen

Press [Job Status] [Transmission Result] on the fax screen to view the information.

1. Press [Fax] on the Home screen.

2. Press [Job Status] on the fax screen.

D0CZPM6763

103
 4. Fax

3. Press [Transmission Result], and select the transmission result to display.

• Display All
Displays the transmission results from among the total number of both transmission and
reception results, which cannot exceed 1,000.
• Display per User
Press this to display the result of transmissions performed by a specific user. Select the user to
display the results and press [Display].
• Display Specified Period
Press this to display the result of transmissions performed in the specified period. Specify the
period by entering the start and end dates or selecting from the calendar displayed on the
screen, and press [Display].
4. Check the transmission results and press [Exit].
• "--LAN-Fax -->" is shown as the result of transmission to the machine when you send a fax
from your computer. For the result of transmission to the destination, refer to the transmission
result of the same document number.
• The destination may be displayed as "*" depending on the security settings.
• In a field for an e-mail that was encrypted and distributed or forwarded, the encryption icon
( ) is displayed.
• To display the result of the transmission that is completed while displaying the transmission
results, close the transmission result screen and open it again.

• You cannot confirm or change an outgoing document in LAN-Fax, document waiting, or document
whose status is "Trnsmtg.".

Checking the Result in Communication Result Report

The report is printed every time you send a document by Memory Transmission. When more than one
destination is specified, the report is printed after transmitting the fax to all destinations is completed.

104
 Viewing the Transmission Result of Sent Faxes

Checking the Result in Immediate TX Result Report

In the factory default setting, the machine is configured not to print the report automatically. Specify Auto
Print to print it every time you send a document by Immediate Transmission.
See "Others (Fax Settings)", User Guide (Full Version).

• If the page was sent successfully, the Page column gives the total number of pages sent
successfully.

Checking the Result in Communication Failure Report

This report is printed if the fax could not be sent to all specified destinations by Memory Transmission
when Fax is not set to Auto Print (the factory default setting).

Checking the Result in Error Report

This report is printed if a fax could not be sent by Immediate Transmission when Immediate Transmission
Result Report is not set to Auto Print (the factory default setting).

Viewing Memory Storage Report

Memory Storage Report is printed when the document to send by Memory Transmission is stored in the
memory.

• Even if the machine is set up not to print this report, it is still printed if an original could not be
stored.
• It is not printed when you are using Parallel Memory Transmission.

Checking by E-mail

You can check the fax transmission result on your computer by sending an e-mail to the sender or the e-
mail address specified when sending the fax. The image of the original sent by fax, along with the
destination, date and time, and transmission result is included in the e-mail.

• To view the report without text disruption, select a font of even character width in your e-mail
application's settings.

105
 4. Fax

1. Press [Fax] on the Home screen.

2. Place the original in the Auto Document Feeder (ADF) or on the exposure glass.
See "Setting an Original to Send by Fax on the Scanner", User Guide (Full Version).
3. To send a notification e-mail to the sender, press [Settings] [Sender], and then specify
the sender.
When a login user is operating the machine, the login user becomes the sender.
The e-mail address that you selected for the [Use as Sender] check box when registering the
address will be used as the e-mail address of the sender.
See "Registering E-mail Addresses in the Address Book", User Guide (Full Version).
4. Select the [Notification of Result] check box, and then press [OK].

DZX317

5. To send a notification e-mail to a destination other than the sender, press [Notification of
Result] on the [Settings] screen, and then specify the destination of the e-mail.

6. Configure the scan settings.

See "Sending a Fax at the Image Quality Suitable for the Original", User Guide (Full Version).
7. After configuring the send settings, specify the destination on the fax screen, and send the
fax.
page 95 "Basic Procedure for Transmitting Faxes"
See "Basic Procedure for Sending Internet Faxes", User Guide (Full Version).

106
 Viewing the Transmission Result of Sent Faxes

See "Basic Procedure for Sending IP-Faxes", User Guide (Full Version).

• The file type for notification of e-mail transmission results can be selected from [TIFF], [PDF], or
[PDF/A] in [Fax Settings] [Detailed Initial Settings] [Email Transmission Results Settings]
[File Format of Transmission Results Email].

Confirming the Information in Web Image Monitor

In Web Image Monitor, you can view up to 1,000 of the latest total results of the transmission and
reception history.

1. Log in to Web Image Monitor as the administrator.

See "Logging in to Web Image Monitor", User Guide (Full Version).
2. From the "Status/Information" menu, click [Job].
3. Click [Transmission] under [Fax History].
4. Confirm the transmission history.
• Click [Details] to view the details.
• To save the history as a list to a file in the CSV format, click [Download Transmission List].
5. Click [Logout] and then close the Web browser.

107
 4. Fax

108
5. Print

Installing the Printer Driver by Using Device

Software Manager Installer
Device Software Manager is a support utility for driver installation in Windows. Device Software
Manager helps you to detect the latest driver via the internet automatically according to the computer
you are using and install it with a simple procedure.

• Manage Printers permission is required to install the drivers. Log on as an Administrators group
member.
• Device Software Manager supports Windows OS only. To install the printer driver on Mac OS, see
the following sections:
• page 123 "Installing the Printer Driver for Network Connection (macOS)"
• See "Installing the Printer Driver for USB Connection (macOS)", User Guide (Full Version).
• Follow the instructions of the installer to connect the USB cable.

Installing Device Software Manager from the CD-ROM

1. Set the CD-ROM in the computer.

If the installer does not start automatically, double-click [Setup.exe] in the Windows folder of the
CD-ROM.
2. Select a language, and then click [OK].

109
 5. Print

3. Click [Install Online].

D0CHDA6201

4. Click [Accept Agreement and Install] on the "License Agreement" screen.

5. On the "Quality Improvement Program" screen, select [I will participate in the Quality
Improvement Program] or [I will not participate in the Quality Improvement Program],
and then click [Next].
6. On the "Driver Update Notification Setting" screen, specify whether to display the
message about the driver update, and then click [Next].
The process of installing Device Software Manager starts.
7. Select the connection between the machine and computer, and then click [Next].

D0CZDM0201

• Network: Search for devices connected to the network.

110
 Installing the Printer Driver by Using Device Software Manager Installer

• USB: Following the instructions on the "Connection with device" screen, connect the machine
and the computer with the USB cable to search for the machine.
8. Select this machine from among the detected devices, and then click [Next].

D0CZDM0202

The installation of the driver starts.

• If "Could not verify publisher" is displayed at the beginning of installation, continue the
installation.
• When you connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable, follow the instructions on
the installer screen.

If the machine is not detected, click [Cancel Connection]. Even if the connection is canceled,
the installation is complete. After the installer screen is closed, the machine is added
automatically when it is connected to the computer with the USB cable.

111
 5. Print

9. When the installation is complete, click [Finish].

When you are prompted to restart your computer, restart it by following the instructions that
appear.

• After completing the installation, Device Software Manager icon is created on the desktop screen.

• You can update the installed printer driver with Device Software Manager.
• See "Updating the Driver (Windows)", User Guide (Full Version).
• If the "User Account Control" dialog box appears during the driver installation procedure, click
[Yes] or [Continue].
• If the "Windows Security" dialog box appears during the driver installation procedure, click [Install
this driver software anyway].

Installing Device Software Manager from the Downloaded File

1. Double-click the downloaded file.

2. Select the [Run Driver Installer after installation] check box, and then click [Accept
Agreement and Install].
3. On the "Quality Improvement Program" screen, select [I will participate in the Quality
Improvement Program] or [I will not participate in the Quality Improvement Program],
and then click [Next].
4. On the "Driver Update Notification Setting" screen, specify whether to display the
message about the driver update, and then click [Next].
The process of installing Device Software Manager starts.
5. On the "End User License Agreement" screen, click [Agree and Go to Next].

112
 Installing the Printer Driver by Using Device Software Manager Installer

6. Select the connection between the machine and computer, and then click [Next].

DZX730

• Network: Search for devices connected to the network.

• USB: Following the instructions on the "Connection with device" screen, connect the machine
and the computer with the USB cable to search for the machine.
7. Select this machine from among the detected devices, and then click [Next].

D0CZDM0202

The installation of the driver starts.

• If "The publisher could not be verified" is displayed at the beginning of installation, continue
the installation. There is no problem with the started installer that is downloaded from the
manufacturer's website. Continue the installation.
• When you connect the machine and the computer with a USB cable, follow the instructions on
the installer screen.

113
 5. Print

If the machine is not detected, click [Cancel Connection]. Even if the connection is canceled,
the installation is complete. After the installer screen is closed, the machine is added
automatically when it is connected to the computer with the USB cable.
8. When the installation is complete, click [Finish].

• Double-click the Device Software Manager icon created on the Finder of the computer to update
the printer driver.
• See "Updating the Driver (Windows)", User Guide (Full Version).

114
 Installing the Printer Driver for Network Connection (Windows)

Installing the Printer Driver for Network

Connection (Windows)
When the machine and the computer are connected to the same network, the installer searches for the
machine to install the printer driver. If the installer cannot find the machine, specify the IP address or
machine name to install the printer driver.

• Manage Printers permission is required to install the driver. Log on as an Administrators group
member.

• If the "User Account Control" dialog box appears during the driver installation procedure, click
[Yes] or [Continue].
• If the "Windows Security" dialog box appears during the driver installation procedure, click [Install
this driver software anyway].

Installing the PCL 6 Printer Driver from the CD-ROM

1. Set the CD-ROM in the computer.

If the installer does not start automatically, double-click [Setup.exe] in the Windows folder of the
CD-ROM.
2. Select a language, and then click [OK].
3. Click [Recommended Install from Disk].

D0CHDA6202

4. Click [Network Printer(s)].

115
 5. Print

5. On the "End User License Agreement" screen, click [Agree and Go to Next].

D0CHDA6203

6. Select this machine from among the detected devices, and then click [Next].

D0CZDM0202

Printer driver installation starts.

7. When the installation is complete, click [Finish].

Installing the PostScript 3 Printer Driver from the CD-ROM

1. Set the CD-ROM in the computer.

If the installer does not start automatically, double-click [Setup.exe] in the Windows folder of the
CD-ROM.

116
 Installing the Printer Driver for Network Connection (Windows)

2. Select a language, and then click [OK].

3. Click [PostScript 3 Printer Driver].

D0CHDA6204

4. On the "End User License Agreement" screen, click [Agree and Go to Next].

D0CHDA6203

117
 5. Print

5. Select this machine from among the detected devices, and then click [Next].

D0CZDM0202

Printer driver installation starts.

6. When the installation is complete, click [Finish].

Installing the PCL 6/PostScript 3 Printer Driver from the Downloaded File

1. Double-click the downloaded file.

2. On the "End User License Agreement" screen, click [Agree and Go to Next].
3. Select [Network], and then click [Next].

DZX731

• The search detects devices connected to the network.

118
 Installing the Printer Driver for Network Connection (Windows)

• If the error screen is displayed, see page 120 "If the Machine Cannot Be Found".
4. Select this machine from among the detected devices, and then click [Next].

D0CZDM0202

Printer driver installation starts.

5. When the installation is complete, click [Finish].

Installing the Printer Driver for Windows

1. Double-click the downloaded file.

2. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer.
3. Display the "Devices and Printers" screen.
Windows 10 (version 1703 or later)
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Windows System] [Control Panel].
2. Click [View devices and printers].
Windows 10 (earlier than version 1703)
1. Right-click [Start], and then click [Control Panel].
2. Click [View devices and printers].
Windows 8.1
1. On the Charm Bar, click [Set] [Control Panel].
2. Click [View devices and printers].
4. Click [Add a printer].
5. Click [The printer that I want isn't listed].
6. Select [Add a local printer or network printer with manual settings], and then click [Next].

119
 5. Print

7. Select [Standard TCP/IP Port] on [Create a new port:], and then click [Next].
8. Enter the IP address of this machine in [Host Name or IP address].
9. Clear the [Query the printer and automatically select the driver to use] check box, and
then click [Next].
Searching for the TCP/IP port starts.
10. When the "Additional port information required" screen is displayed, select [RICOH
Network Printer C model], and then click [Next].
11. Click [Have Disk...] [Browse...] to specify the driver (INF file), and then click [OK].
The driver is stored in the [DISK1] folder in the folder that was created when unzipping the
downloaded file.
12. Select a printer driver to install, and then click [Next].
13. Enter the printer name as necessary, and then click [Next].
Printer driver installation starts.
14. Specify the printer as a shared printer as necessary, and then click [Next] [Finish].

If the Machine Cannot Be Found

The "Network Connection Error" screen is displayed.

Confirm and perform to , and then click [OK]. If the machine still cannot be found, specify the IP
address or machine name to install the printer driver.

120
 Installing the Printer Driver for Network Connection (Windows)

1. Click [Click if you cannot find the device].

DZC089

2. Select [Specify device IP address] or [Specify device name], and then click [Next].
When specify the machine IP address
1. Enter the IP address of the machine and click [Search].

DZC091

2. When the machine is detected, click [Next].

Printer driver installation starts.
When specify the machine name
1. Select the machine to use, and then click [Next].

121
 5. Print

DZC094

2. On the "Printer Preference" screen, select one of the port names from among "Port
Name", and then click [Next].

DZC950

Printer driver installation starts.

For details about the procedure for specifying the IP address after installing the printer
driver, see the following section:
See "When You Cannot Print a Document even if the Printer Driver is Installed", User
Guide (Full Version).
3. When the installation is complete, click [Finish].

122
 Installing the Printer Driver for Network Connection (macOS)

Installing the Printer Driver for Network

Connection (macOS)
Install the PPD file (printer driver) under macOS, and then register the machine on the computer from the
system preferences.

• You need an administrator name and a password (phrase). For details, consult your network
administrator.
• For the latest information on the corresponding operating system, see the "Readme.htm" file,
located on the CD-ROM root directory.

• Setting procedures using macOS 10.15 are shown as an example. The actual procedure may
differ depending on the OS version you are using.

Installing the PPD file

1. Set the CD-ROM in the computer, and click [macOS] (brand name) to display the
[macOS PPD Installer] folder.
To install the driver from the downloaded file, display the folder that is the location of the
downloaded file.
2. Double-click the package file.

DZX684

3. On the "Introduction" screen, click [Continue].

4. On the "License" screen, click [Continue] and then click [Agree].
• When prompted to select where to install the driver, specify the install location, and click
[Continue].
5. Click [Install].

123
 5. Print

6. Enter the administrator's user name and password, and then click [Install Software].

The installation of the PPD file starts.

7. When the installation is complete, click [Close].

Registering the Machine in [Printers & Scanners]

Register the PPD file of the machine in the system preferences to enable printing.

1. Select [System Preferences...] from the Apple menu.

2. Click [Printers & Scanners].
3. Click [+].

DZX689

124
 Installing the Printer Driver for Network Connection (macOS)

4. Click [IP], and configure the information of the machine.

DZX690

• Address: Enter the IP address of the machine.

• Protocol: Select [Line Printer Daemon - LPD]. If the printer takes time to perform operations
when using the [Line Printer Daemon - LPD] protocol, change the protocol to [HP Jetdirect -
Socket].
• Use: Check that the machine name is displayed. If "Generic PostScript Printer" is displayed,
the entered IP address may not be correct.
When "Generic PostScript Printer" is displayed even though the IP address is correct
Perform the following procedure to select the PPD file of the machine:
1. Select [Select Software...] on "Use".

125
 5. Print

DZC098

2. Select the machine on the "Printer Software" screen, and then click [OK].

DZC099

5. Click [Add].
The progress screen is displayed.
• If the progress screen does not close after a while, click [Configure...] and configure the
option configuration of the printer. For the procedure of the option configuration, see
page 127 "Specifying the Option Settings".

126
 Installing the Printer Driver for Network Connection (macOS)

6. Check that the machine name is added to the [Printers & Scanners] screen.

D0CHDA6205

7. Close the system preferences screen.

Specifying the Option Settings

If the option configuration of the machine is not automatically reflected, select the option installed on the
machine in [Printers & Scanners].

1. Select [System Preferences...] from the Apple menu.

2. Click [Printers & Scanners].
3. Select the machine from the list, and then click [Options & Supplies...].

D0CHDA6206

127
 5. Print

4. Click [Options], select the option installed on the machine, and then click [OK].
• If the usable options are not displayed, the IP address has not been entered correctly or the
PPD file has not been registered properly. To enter the IP address or register the PPD file, see
page 124 "Registering the Machine in [Printers & Scanners]".
5. Close the system preferences screen.

• If the option you want to select is not displayed, PPD files may not be set up correctly. To complete
the setup, check the name of the PPD file displayed in the dialog box.
• Setting procedures using macOS 10.15 are shown as an example. The actual procedure may
differ depending on the OS version you are using.
• To specify an optional Adobe PostScript when using a PostScript 3 printer driver, select [Adobe
PostScript] in the "PostScript:" list on the [Options] tab.

128
 Basic Procedure for Printing Documents

Basic Procedure for Printing Documents

Specify the printer driver and configure the Document Size, Paper Type, and other settings to print a
document.

• Duplex printing is selected as the default setting. If you want to print on only one side, select [Off]
for the two-sided printing setting.
• If you send a print job via USB 2.0 while the machine is in Sleep mode, an error message may
appear after the print job is completed. In this case, check whether the document was printed.

Printing a Document in Windows

1. Open a document to print on the computer, and display the setting screen of the printer
driver from the print menu in the application.
The procedure to display a document varies depending on the applications.
For example in Microsoft Word/Excel, click [Print] on the [File] menu, select the device to use, and
then click [Printer Properties].

DZC420

2. Specify the Document Size, Paper Type, Input Tray, and other settings.
You can configure the basic settings just by using the [Basic] tab.

129
 5. Print

D0CZDM6553

• Job Type: Select [Normal Print] to execute printing immediately.

You can make a partial print as a test and proceed to print the rest of the document (Sample
Print).
See "Making a Partial Print as a Test and Printing the Rest of the Document", User Guide (Full
Version).
You can store documents in the machine (Locked Print, Hold Print, or Stored Print).
See "Storing Documents to Print in the Machine", User Guide (Full Version).
• Document Size: Select the size of the document to print.
• Print On: Select the size of the paper to print on.
• Copies: Enter the print quantity.
• Orientation: Specify the orientation of the document. Select Portrait or Landscape.
• Input Tray: Select the tray loaded with the paper to use. When you select [Auto Tray Select], a
suitable paper tray is selected automatically according to the specified [Print On] and [Paper
Type].
• If you do not want to use particular trays when [Auto Tray Select] is specified, set the
machine so it does not automatically select those trays.
• To prevent the machine from selecting other trays automatically, disable auto tray
switching.
See "Tray/Paper Settings", User Guide (Full Version).
• Paper Type: Select the type of paper to use.
You can configure some advanced settings using the [Input/Output] to [Image Quality] tabs.

130
 Basic Procedure for Printing Documents

D0CHWA5605

The caution icon ( ) indicates that there are disabled items. Click the icon to check the cause.
To set each function in details, click the detail settings button ( ).
3. After completing the configuration, click [OK] to print.

• On the [Devices and Printers] screen, right-click the printer icon of the machine, and then click
[Printing preferences] to change the default values of the printer settings.
• When you use the driver distributed from the print server, [Standard settings] specified in the print
server are displayed as the default.

Printing a Document in macOS

In the following example procedure, macOS 10.15 is used. The procedure may vary for different
versions.

1. Open a document to print on the computer, and click [Print] on the [File] menu.
2. Select the printer you use from [Printer:].

131
 5. Print

3. Specify Paper Size, Orientation, and other settings.

D0CHMA5606

• Copies: Enter the print quantity.

• Paper Size: Select the size of the document to print.
• Orientation: Specify the orientation of the document. Select [Portrait] or [Landscape].
4. Select a category from the pop-up menu, and then specify the paper tray and paper type.

D0CHMA5607

Paper Feed
• All Pages From: Select the tray loaded with the paper to use. When you select [Auto
Select], a suitable paper tray is selected automatically according to the specified paper
size and paper type.
When the paper of the specified size is not loaded on the machine, printing is performed
following the settings of the machine.

132
 Basic Procedure for Printing Documents

Job Log
• Job Type: Select [Normal Print] to execute printing immediately.
You can make a partial print as a test and proceed to print the rest of the document
(Sample Print).
See "Making a Partial Print as a Test and Printing the Rest of the Document", User Guide
(Full Version).
You can store documents in the machine (Locked Print, Hold Print, or Stored Print).
See "Storing Documents to Print in the Machine", User Guide (Full Version).
Printer Features
Select a category in "Feature Sets", and then specify the setting items.
• Paper
• Paper Type: Select the type of paper to use.
5. After completing the configuration, click [Print] to print.

133
 5. Print

Printing on Both Sides of Paper

Specify 2-sided Print in the printer driver.

Specifying 2-sided Print (Windows)

Specify 2-sided Print on the [Basic] tab.

1. Open a document to print on the computer, and display the setting screen of the printer
driver from the print menu in the application.
2. Specify Document Size, Paper Type, Orientation and others.
page 129 "Basic Procedure for Printing Documents"
3. In [2 sided:] on the [Basic] tab, specify the binding side of and way to open the paper.

Orientation of the original and opening type

Orientation Open to left Open to top

Portrait

Landscape

4. After completing the configuration, click [OK] to print.

Specifying 2-sided Print (macOS)

Specify 2-sided Print on the [Layout] menu.

1. Open a document to print on the computer, and display the setting screen of the printer
driver from the print menu in the application.
2. Specify Paper Size, Orientation, Paper Type, and other settings.
page 129 "Basic Procedure for Printing Documents"

134
 Printing on Both Sides of Paper

3. Select the [Two-Sided] check box, and then select [Layout] to specify the binding side and
opening type of the paper.

Orientation of the original and opening type

Long edge Short edge

DZC442

4. After completing the configuration, click [Print] to print.

135
 5. Print

Combining and Printing Multiple Pages on a

Single Sheet of Paper
You can print multiple pages on a single sheet at a reduced size (Combine 2 Originals).
For example, you can reduce an original of A4 size to A5 size and print two pages on an A4 sheet. You
can use the 2 Sided Print and Combine 2 Originals functions at the same time to economize on paper.
You can print up to 16 pages on a single sheet and specify the order to arrange the pages on the sheet.

1 2 3

3
2 3
1 1
2 DZB253

Specifying the Combine 2 Originals Function (Windows)

Specify the Combine 2 Originals function on the [Basic] tab.

1. Open a document to print on the computer, and display the setting screen of the printer
driver from the print menu in the application.
2. Specify Document Size, Paper Type, Orientation and other settings.
page 129 "Basic Procedure for Printing Documents"
3. In [Layout:] on the [Basic] tab, specify the number of pages to combine.
Click the detail settings button of [Layout] to do the following settings:
• Page Order: Select the order of the pages.
• Draw Frame Border: Select the check box to draw a line between pages.
4. After completing the configuration, click [OK] to print.
When printing from an application that supports the same function as the machine, do not set the
function in the application. If the setting in the application is enabled, the print result may not be as
intended.

Specifying the Combine 2 Originals Function (macOS)

Specify the Combine 2 Originals function on the [Layout] menu.

136
 Combining and Printing Multiple Pages on a Single Sheet of Paper

1. Open a document to print on the computer, and display the setting screen of the printer
driver from the print menu in the application.
2. Specify Paper Size, Orientation, Paper Type, and other settings.
page 129 "Basic Procedure for Printing Documents"
3. Select [Layout], and then specify the number of pages to combine and the order of the
pages.
Configure the following settings:
• Pages per Sheet: Select the number of pages to combine.
• Layout Direction: Select the order of the pages.
• Border: Select a type of border line to draw between the pages.
4. After completing the configuration, click [Print] to print.

137
 5. Print

Printing on Envelopes
Load envelopes in the bypass tray or paper tray.
Load envelopes in the machine and change the Tray Paper Settings in the Control Panel.

Printing on Envelopes Loaded on the Bypass Tray

1. Load an envelope in the Bypass Tray.

Types and orientations of Bypass Tray

envelopes

Side-opening envelopes

Flap: open
Bottom side of the envelope:
left
Printing surface: lower side

Side-opening envelopes

DZB936

Flap: close
Bottom side of the envelope:
back
Printing surface: lower side

2. On the Home screen, press [Settings].

138
 Printing on Envelopes

3. On the Settings screen, press [Tray/Paper Settings].

D0CHPA5601

4. Press [Paper Size/Paper Type].

5. Press [Bypass Tray] [Paper Size: Printer], and then select the size of the envelopes.

• If the size of the loaded envelope is not included in the list, select [Custom] and enter the
value.
6. Press [OK].
7. Press [Paper Type/Thickness], and then select [Envelope] from "Paper Type".
Also, select the thickness of the loaded envelopes from "Paper Thickness".

8. Press [OK] twice.

9. After completing the configuration, press [Home] ( ).
10. Open a document to print in the computer, and display the setting screen of the printer
driver from the print menu application.

139
 5. Print

11. Specify the paper size and paper type.

Windows

D0CHWA5614

• Document Size: Select the envelope size. If the envelope size is not included among the
options, enter the value in [Custom Paper Size...].
• Paper Type: [Envelope]
You can specify a custom paper size, which is commonly used as the option of the Document
Sizes.
See "Printing on Custom-sized Paper Loaded on the Bypass Tray", User Guide (Full Version).
To print in landscape orientation, select the [Rotate by 180 Degrees] check box on the
[Input/Output] tab, and then print.

140
 Printing on Envelopes

macOS

D0CHDA5615

• Paper Size: Select the envelope size. If the envelope size is not included among the
options, select [Manage Custom Sizes] and enter the value.
• Paper Type: Envelope
To print in landscape orientation, select [On] for [Rotate by 180 Degrees] in [Basic] in
"Feature Sets".
12. Execute printing.

Printing on Envelopes Loaded in the Paper Tray

1. Load an envelope in the Paper Tray.

Types and orientations of Tray 1 to 4

envelopes

Side-opening envelopes

D0CHIA1901

Flap: open
Bottom side of the envelope:
right
Printing surface: upper side

141
 5. Print

Types and orientations of Tray 1 to 4

envelopes

Side-opening envelopes

DZB935

Flap: close
Bottom side of the envelope:
back
Printing surface: upper side

2. On the Home screen, press [Settings].

3. On the Settings screen, press [Tray/Paper Settings].

D0CHPA5601

4. Press [Paper Size/Paper Type], and then select the tray in which the envelopes are
loaded.
5. Press [Paper Size], and select the size of the envelopes.

142
 Printing on Envelopes

• If the size of the loaded envelope is not included in the list, select [Custom] and enter the
value.
6. Press [OK].
7. Press [Paper Type/Thickness], and then select [Envelope] from "Paper Type".
Also, select the thickness of the loaded envelopes from "Paper Thickness".

8. Press [OK] twice.

9. After completing the configuration, press [Home] ( ).
10. Open a document to print in the computer, and display the setting screen of the printer
driver from the print menu application.
11. Specify the paper size and paper type.
Windows

D0CHWA5614

• Document Size: Select the envelope size. If the envelope size is not included among the
options, enter the value in [Custom Paper Size...].
• Paper Type: [Envelope]

143
 5. Print

You can specify a custom paper size, which is commonly used as the option of the Document
Sizes.
See "Printing on Custom-sized Paper Loaded on the Bypass Tray", User Guide (Full Version).
To print in landscape orientation, select the [Rotate by 180 Degrees] check box on the
[Input/Output] tab, and then print.
macOS

D0CHDA5615

• Paper Size: Select the envelope size. If the envelope size is not included among the
options, select [Manage Custom Sizes] and enter the value.
• Paper Type: Envelope
To print in landscape orientation, select [On] for [Rotate by 180 Degrees] in [Basic] in
"Feature Sets".
12. Execute printing.

144
 Printing Documents Stored in the Printer from the Control Panel

Printing Documents Stored in the Printer from

the Control Panel
To print a document stored from the printer driver in the machine, perform the print operation on Quick
Print Release of the control panel. The file administrator also can delete unneeded documents and
unlock documents locked by entering an invalid password.

1. On the Home screen, press [Quick Print Release].

2. On the Quick Print Release screen, select the user ID used to store the document.
Enter the password when the Locked Print documents or the Stored Print documents protected by
passwords are stored. The screen shows the documents corresponding to the entered password
and the documents without passwords.
You can also use your smart device for authentication instead of entering the password.
See "Connecting a Mobile Device to the Machine", User Guide (Full Version).
page 57 "Logging In from the Control Panel"
3. Select a document to print.

• Preview: The first page of the document is displayed. If you select multiple documents, the
preview cannot be displayed. Preview cannot be displayed if the document was encrypted
while storing it in the printer driver.
• Print Settings: Change the print settings for the selected document.
The following stored files cannot be changed: files automatically stored by [Store and Skip
Errored Job] or [Restrict Direct Print Jobs], files encrypted by the printer driver, and files for
which unauthorized copy prevention or Background Numbering has been specified.
See "Print Settings Configured on the Control Panel", User Guide (Full Version).

145
 5. Print

• Manage Files...: Change the print time of a Hold Print job or the password specified on the
document. If you select multiple documents or encrypt the document to store in the printer
driver, the item is disabled.
See "Encrypting the Document when Storing It", User Guide (Full Version).
4. Press [Print] twice.

146
 Printing from a USB Flash Memory Device or SD Card Directly

Printing from a USB Flash Memory Device or

SD Card Directly
You can connect a memory storage device to the media slot of the machine and print the files stored on
it. Use this to print external data easily.

• Keep SD cards and USB flash memory devices out of reach of children. If a child accidentally
swallows an SD card or USB flash memory device, consult a doctor immediately.

• USB flash memory device and SD cards are supported for direct printing. However, certain types
of USB flash memory device and SD cards cannot be used.
• The machine cannot print a document over 1 GB.
• You can select up to 100 files within 1 GB total.
• If the print job of PDF file is canceled, execute printing from a PDF viewer such as Acrobat Reader
while using the printer driver.

Printable File Formats

File format Details

JPEG files Exif version 1.0 or later

Uncompressed TIFF files

TIFF files
TIFF files compressed using the MH, MR, or MMR method

PDF files PDF version 1.7 (Acrobat 8.0 compatible) or earlier*1

XPS files Possible for all XPS files

*1 The machine does not support the following functions: Crypt Filter, DeviceN Color Space (more than eight
components), watermark note, optional contents (version 1.6), AcroForm

• The PDF file of a custom size may not be printed.

147
 5. Print

Printing from a Memory Storage Device or Scan Application

1. On the Home screen, press [Print/Scan (Memory Storage Device)]

2. On the Print/Scan (Memory Storage Device) screen, press [Print from Storage Device]

DZX460

3. Insert a memory storage device in the media slot on the side of the control panel.

D0CMIC1307

4. Press [USB] or [SD Card].

5. Select the file to print.
Files in the external media are displayed as icons or thumbnail images.

148
 Printing from a USB Flash Memory Device or SD Card Directly

6. Press [Print Settings] to specify the settings of 2-Sided Print or Finishing as necessary.

D0CHPA6452

• Copy Ratio: Select whether to print in the original size or to reduce or enlarge to match the
paper size.
• Quantity: Enter the print quantity.
• Resolution: Select the resolution of the image to print.
• Select Paper Tray: Select the paper tray.
• 2 Sided: Select the opening direction of the printed sheet.
• Combine: Select whether to combine multiple pages into a sheet.
• Sort/Stack: Select whether to print in ordered sets or in a batch page by page.
• Book: Select the opening direction of the Magazine binding. You can specify the setting of
Magazine binding only when printing a file in the PDF/XPS format.
• Staple: Select the staple position.
• Punch: Select the punch position.
• Fold: Select the type of fold or printing side.
7. Press [Start] to start printing.

149
 5. Print

150
6. Scan

Scanning Documents and Sending the Scanned

Data by E-mail
Scan a document and attach the scanned data to an e-mail and send it from the machine.
• Configure the SMTP server and network settings in advance.
See "Configuring the Settings to Send E-mails from the Machine", User Guide (Full Version).
• Register an e-mail address in the address book to select the address as the destination easily when
sending an e-mail.
See "Registering E-mail Addresses in the Address Book", User Guide (Full Version).

Basic Procedure for Sending an E-mail

• This machine supports SMTPS (SMTP over SSL).

• This machine supports Web mail sending.
• To use Message Disposition Notification, log in to the machine as a user and specify the sender.
Note, however, that the [Reception Notice] notification e-mail may not be transmitted if the e-mail
software of the recipient does not support Message Disposition Notification.
• If you press [Preview] and then start scanning, the Preview screen appears. You can use this screen
to check how the originals are scanned and the scan setting used for scanning. After checking the
preview, you can specify whether to send the file or not.
• See "Displaying a Preview Before Sending the Scanned Document", User Guide (Full Version).
• After an e-mail is sent, the destination, sender, subject, text, and file name fields will be
automatically cleared. If you want to preserve the information in these fields, contact your local
dealer.

1. Press [Scanner] on the Home screen.

151
 6. Scan

2. Select [Scan to Email] on the scanner screen.

D0CZPM6701

3. Place the original on the scanner.

See "Placing an Original to Scan", User Guide (Full Version).
4. Press [Send Settings] on the scanner screen.

5. Press [Sender] and specify the sender.

• When a logged in user is operating the machine, the logged in user becomes the sender.
• When [On] is specified in [System Settings] [Send (Email/Folder)] [Email] [Auto
Specify Sender Name], you can send an e-mail even when the sender is not specified. The
administrator's e-mail address that is registered on the machine is used as the sender.
• Specify the sender to receive an opening confirmation.
6. Select the [Reception Notice] check box to receive an opening confirmation of the e-mail
from the destination.

7. Specify the destination on the scanner screen.

D0CZPM6702

• To enter the e-mail address manually, select the destination from the destination history, or
search for the destination in the address book, press , and specify the destination.

152
 Scanning Documents and Sending the Scanned Data by E-mail

D0CZPM6703

• Press to specify the destination again or select [To], [Cc] or [Bcc].

D0CZPM6704

• You can specify multiple destinations.

• If the target destination does not appear, display the destination by selecting its initial letter
from the title.
• Depending on the security setting, some destinations may not appear in the destination list.
• When the specified destination is updated using the Central Management function, the
spooled documents are sent to the destination after updating.
8. Specify the scan settings according to the purpose of the scanned data.
page 167 "Scanning an Original with Suitable Quality and Density"
page 170 "Specifying the File Type or File Name When Scanning a Document"
9. Press [Start].

Registering the E-mail Destination in the Address Book When Sending an E-

mail

When specifying an e-mail address by entering it manually or selecting it from the scanner records, you
can register the e-mail address in the address book before sending an e-mail.

153
 6. Scan

1. Press [Scanner] on the Home screen.

2. Select [Scan to Email] on the scanner screen.

D0CZPM6701

3. Place the original on the scanner.

See "Placing an Original to Scan", User Guide (Full Version).
4. Press [Send Settings] on the scanner screen and configure the scan settings according to
the purpose of the scanned data.
page 167 "Scanning an Original with Suitable Quality and Density"
page 170 "Specifying the File Type or File Name When Scanning a Document"
5. Specify the destination.
• When entering manually
1. Press and then select [Enter Using Keyboard].

D0CZPM6705

2. Enter the e-mail address, and press .

154
 Scanning Documents and Sending the Scanned Data by E-mail

D0CZPM6706

3. Specify the e-mail address that was entered manually and press [Reg. to Add. Book].

D0CZPM6707

4. Enter the name and other additional information.

• When selecting from the transmission history
1. Press and then select [Select from History].

D0CZPM6708

2. Press [Register] of the destination to register.

3. Register the name and other additional information.
6. Press [OK] to close the address book screen after registering the information.
7. Press [Start] on the scanner screen.

155
 6. Scan

Scanning Documents and Sending the Scanned

Data to a Folder
To send the data of a scanned original to a shared folder on a computer, create the shared folder on the
computer in advance and register the destination folder in the address book.
• You also need to configure the settings for connecting to the network from the machine.
See "Connecting to a Wired LAN", User Guide (Full Version).
See "Connecting to a Wireless LAN", User Guide (Full Version).
• You can add a folder destination in the address book easily using Scan to Folder Helper.
See "Specifying the Destination of Send to Folder Using the Scan to Folder Helper App", User
Guide (Full Version).

• Using the SMB 3.0 protocol, you can save files in encrypted folders.
• The scanned file can be also saved to an FTP server.
• See "Registering the Destination Folder to Use for Send to Folder", User Guide (Full Version).

Confirming the Computer Information (Windows)

Confirm the name, IP address, and other information of the computer used to create a shared folder,
and write down the information on the check list.

1. Print the check sheet.

See "Printing the Check Sheet", User Guide (Full Version).
2. Click [Start] on the computer and click [Windows System] [Command Prompt].
3. Enter "ipconfig/all" and press the [Enter] key.

156
 Scanning Documents and Sending the Scanned Data to a Folder

4. Check the computer name, enable/disable status of the DHCP server and IP address, and
write down the information in [1] on the check sheet.

DZC501

When the screen shown above is displayed, fill in the sheet as follow:

Computer name LAPTOP-5955S09U

[1] DHCP server enable/disable setting No

IP address 192.168.0.152
DZC523

5. Enter "set user" and press the [Enter] key.

Enter a space between "set" and "user".
6. Check the domain name, workgroup name and login user name, and write down the
information in [2] on the check sheet.

CKX007

When the screen shown above is displayed, fill in the sheet as follow:

USERDNSDOMAIN
[ abcd-net.local ]
Domain name/workgroup name
[2] USERDOMAIN
[ ABCD-NET ]

Computer login user name TYamada

DZC524

157
 6. Scan

"USERDNSDOMAIN" is not displayed when the login user who executed the command is a local
user.
7. Check the login password on the computer, and write down the information in [3] on the
check sheet.
The required information on the computer is confirmed. Now create a shared folder on your
computer and specify the access permissions of the folder.

• Depending on the operating system or security settings, it might be possible to specify a user name
that does not have a password assigned. However, we recommend that for greater security you
select a user name that has a password.

Creating a Shared Folder (Windows)

Create a shared folder on the Windows Desktop and specify the access permissions of the folder.

• If you are creating a shared folder for the first time on this computer, you must enable the file
sharing function. For details, see Windows Help.
• To register a shared folder in the machine's address book, you need the computer's IP address or
computer name, and the user name and password of a user who has access permissions for the
shared folder.

1. Log on to Windows as a user with administrative privileges.

2. Create a new folder in Windows Explorer and write down the folder name in [4] on the
check sheet.
3. Right-click the created folder, and then click [Properties].

158
 Scanning Documents and Sending the Scanned Data to a Folder

4. On the [Sharing] tab, click [Advanced Sharing].

DZC318

5. Select the [Share this folder] check box, and then click [Permissions].
After completing the procedure, remove Everyone (unspecified user), and then add a user allowed
access the folder. The user whose information is written down on the check sheet is used in the
example shown below.
6. Select [Everyone] under [Group or user names], and then click [Remove].
7. Click [Add] [Advanced] [Object Types].
8. Select [Users], and then click [OK].

DZC319

9. Click [Locations], select the name of the domain or work group the user belongs to ([2] on
the check sheet) and then click [OK].
10. Click [Find Now].

159
 6. Scan

11. From the Search results, select the login user name of the computer to be added ([2] on
the check sheet) and then click [OK].
When you cannot find a specific user, click [Columns], or right-click the [Search results] field, select
[Select Column], and then add [Logon Name] or [Logon Name (pre-Windows 2000)] from the
[Available columns] list.
12. Click [OK].
13. Select the added user, and then select the [Allow] check box under [Permissions].

DZC320

14. Click [OK] to close all windows.

The access permissions on the folder have been successfully configured. If you want to specify
access permissions for the folder to allow other users or groups to access the folder, configure the
folder as follows:
1. Right-click the created folder and then click [Properties].
2. Click [Edit...] on the [Security] tab.
3. Click [Add] [Advanced].
4. Select [Object Types] or [Locations] and click [Find Now].
5. Select the user or group to assign permissions and click [OK].
6. Click [OK].
7. Select the added user, and then select the [Allow] check box under [Permissions].
8. Click [OK] to close all windows.

160
 Scanning Documents and Sending the Scanned Data to a Folder

Confirming the Computer Information (macOS)

Confirm the name of the computer used to create the shared folder, login user name and other settings
and write down the information on the check list.

1. Log on to macOS as a user with administrative privileges.

2. Click the Apple menu.
3. Click [About This Mac].
4. Click [System Report].
5. Click [Software] on the left pane and write down the displayed computer name in [1] and
the user name in [2] on the check sheet.

DZC525

When the screen shown above is displayed, fill in the sheet as follow:

[1] Computer name User's MacBook

[2] Computer login user name User

DZC526

6. Click the Apple menu and select [System Preferences].

7. In [Network], click [Ethernet] or [Wi-Fi] and write down the displayed IP address in [1]
on the check sheet.
The required information on the computer is configured. Now create a shared folder.

• Depending on the operating system or security settings, you might be able to specify a user name
that does not have a password assigned. However, we recommend that you select a user name
that has a password.

161
 6. Scan

Creating a Shared Folder (macOS)

Create a shared folder and specify the access permissions of the folder.

1. Print the check sheet.

See "Printing the Check Sheet", User Guide (Full Version).
2. Create a new folder and write down the folder name in [4] on the check sheet.
3. Click the Apple menu and select [System Preferences].
4. Click [Sharing], select the [File Sharing] check box and then click [Options].

DZC527

5. Select the check boxes of [Share files and folders using SMB] and the user account to use
for file sharing and then click [Done].

DZC528

When the [Authentication] screen is displayed, enter the password of the selected account and
then click [Done].

162
 Scanning Documents and Sending the Scanned Data to a Folder

6. Click [ ] below [Shared Folders] on the [Sharing] screen.

DZC529

7. Specify the folder created in Step 1 and click [Add].

8. Select the folder added in Step 6 and confirm that the permission of the user to access the
folder is set to "Read & Write".

DZC530

• To register a shared folder in the machine's address book, you need the computer's IP address,
and the user name and password of a user who has access permissions for the shared folder.

Registering the Created Shared Folder in the Address Book

This section describes the procedure for registering a shared folder created in Windows using the
information on the check sheet as an example.

1. Press [Address Book] on the Home screen.

163
 6. Scan

2. Press [Register] on the address book screen.

EDN022

3. Enter the information of the destination in the input boxes displayed on the [Name] tab,
and select the title to classify the destination.

4. Press the [Destinations] tab, and then press [Folder].

5. Select [SMB (Send to Shared Folder on PC)] in [Protocol].
6. Specify the network path to the shared folder in "Path".
Entering the path name manually
If the computer name is "YamadaPC" ([1] on the check sheet) and the shared folder name is
"shared_doc" ([4]), enter as follows:
\\YamadaPC\shared_doc
Selecting a folder from the list
Enter the IP address or host name of the computer on which to search for a shared folder,
press [Browse Network], and then select the destination folder.
7. Under [Folder Authentication Info], select [Specify Other Authentication Information] and
then enter the name and password of the login user who will access the shared folder.
8. Press [Connection Test] [Exit].
• When no connection is established, check the message that appears.
page 276 "When a Message Appears While Using the Scanner Function"
• Press [Cancel] to abort the connection test, such as when you make a mistake specifying Path.
9. Press [OK].

164
 Scanning Documents and Sending the Scanned Data to a Folder

10. If necessary, press the [User Management / Others] tab and specify the settings.

DZC131

11. Press [OK].

12. Press [Home] ( ) after specifying the settings.

• The connection test may take time.

• Even if the connection test was successful, the machine may fail to transfer the file if you do not
have write privileges for the file or there is not enough free hard disk space.
• If the client computer has a fixed IP address assigned to it, you can specify the IP address manually
by including it in the path name of the destination folder. For example, if the IP address is
"192.168.1.191" and the shared folder name is "user", enter "\\192.168.1.191\user" as the
path.
• When the specified destination is updated using the Central Management function, the spooled
documents are sent to the destination after updating.

Basic Procedure for Performing Send to Folder

1. Press [Scanner] on the Home screen.

2. Select [To Folder] on the scanner screen.

D0CZPM6709

165
 6. Scan

3. Place the original on the scanner.

See "Placing an Original to Scan", User Guide (Full Version).
4. Press [Send Settings] and configure the scan settings according to the purpose of the
scanned data.

page 167 "Scanning an Original with Suitable Quality and Density"

page 170 "Specifying the File Type or File Name When Scanning a Document"
5. Press , select [Search Address Book] or [Specify by Reg. No.] and then specify the
shared folder that is registered in the address book.

D0CHPA5502

• To enter the information manually, press , and select [Manual Entry]. Select SMB as the
protocol and enter the required information. Press [Connection Test] to test the connection.
Press [Cancel] to abort the connection test, such as when you make a mistake specifying
[Path].
• To specify the destination again, press .
6. Press [Start].

• If any of the machine's security functions are enabled, select the destination from the registered
folder only when you send files by Scan to Folder.
• If the firewall of an antivirus program is active, you may not be able to specify a shared folder on
the computer as a folder destination. If this is the case, see the antivirus program's Help.
• If Windows firewall is active and you cannot specify a shared folder on the computer as a folder
destination, the machine may be able to communicate with the computer by changing the
exceptions of the Windows firewall. For details, see Windows Help.
• After scan files are sent, the destination and file name fields will be automatically cleared. If you
want to preserve the information in these fields, contact your local dealer.
• When the specified destination is updated using the Central Management function, the spooled
documents are sent to the destination after updating.

166
 Scanning an Original with Suitable Quality and Density

Scanning an Original with Suitable Quality

and Density
Specify the quality and density to scan on the [Send Settings] screen.

1. Press [Scanner] on the Home screen.

2. Place the original on the scanner.

See "Placing an Original to Scan", User Guide (Full Version).
3. Press [Send Settings] on the scanner screen and specify the original type (quality), density
and resolution.
When specifying the original type

Original Type Appropriate for

Black & White: Text A document mainly composed of text in black and white. The
original is scanned in two tones of black and white.
• Dropout Color
The machine scans the original while erasing the specified
color (Chromatic Color, Red, Green, Blue). To specify a
color to erase more precisely, move toward [Narrow]
in the color range to erase.

Black & White: Text / A document with text and photos in black and white. The original
Photo is scanned in two tones of black and white.

Black & White: Text / A document with text and figures in black and white. The original
Line Art is scanned in two tones of black and white.

Black & White: Photo A document with figures and photos in black and white. The
original is scanned in two tones of black and white.

Gray Scale A document with figures and photos in black and white. The
original is scanned as an image comprising many shades of
gray.

167
 6. Scan

Original Type Appropriate for

Full Color: Text / Photo A document mainly comprising text in color.

Full Color: Glossy Photo An original in color such as silver-halide prints or pictures.

Full Color: Shiny A glossy original in color such as a precious metal or jewelry.
Materials

Auto Color Select The machine determines the type of the original automatically
while scanning. It may not be determined correctly depending
on the scan settings and original content.

• You can select only [Gray Scale], [Full Color: Text / Photo], [Full Color: Glossy Photo],
or [Full Color: Shiny Materials] when [High Comp. PDF] as the [File Type].
page 170 "Specifying the File Type or File Name When Scanning a Document"
• If you select the original type not compatible with the file format specified in [File Type], a
message suggesting you to change the file type or original type is displayed. In this case,
select a file type or original type from those suggested in the message.
When adjusting the density

• Move to the left or right to adjust the density. The colors in the scanned image
darken as you move the slider to the right.
• Select the [Auto Density] check box to adjust the density automatically when scanning an
original with a non-white background such as newspaper or a document that has show-
through.
• You can specify the shading level in [Scanner Settings] [Scan] [Color/Density]
[Background Density of ADS (Full Color)].
When specifying the resolution

• Select the resolution to use for scanning the original. Image quality improves as the
resolution increases, but the size of the scanned data also increases.
• To ensure the quality of scanned data, [100 dpi] cannot be selected in the following
cases:

168
 Scanning an Original with Suitable Quality and Density

• [High Comp. PDF] is specified in [File Type]

page 170 "Specifying the File Type or File Name When Scanning a Document"
• PDF is selected in [File Type] and OCR setting is specified
See "Scanning an Original as a PDF File with Embedded Text Data", User Guide
(Full Version).
4. To send the scanned document to an e-mail address, press [Sender] and then specify the
sender.
5. Specify the destination on the scanner screen, and press [Start].

• You can also specify the quality and resolution from the scanner screen. Press items on the screen to
specify them.

D0CHPA5501

169
 6. Scan

Specifying the File Type or File Name When

Scanning a Document
Specify the settings in [Send Settings] on the scanner screen.

1. Press [Scanner] on the Home screen.

2. Place the original on the scanner.

See "Placing an Original to Scan", User Guide (Full Version).
3. Press [Send Settings] on the scanner screen.

4. Press [File Type], and select the file type to save the scanned document.
Press [Others] to display the detailed settings screen.

File Type Description

PDF Creates a standard PDF file.

High Comp. PDF You can reduce the data size without affecting text legibility.

PDF/A This is an international standard suitable for long-term data storage.

TIFF This image file format is suitable for black-and-white text and lines.

This image file format is suitable for photos and images with subtle
JPEG
gradations.

• You can select from the following file types:

• Single Page: PDF, High Compression PDF, PDF/A, TIFF, JPEG

170
 Specifying the File Type or File Name When Scanning a Document

If you select a single-page file type when scanning multiple originals, one file is created
for each single page and the number of files sent is the same as the number of pages
scanned.
• Multi-page: PDF, High Compression PDF, PDF/A, TIFF
If you select a multi-page file type when scan multiple originals, scanned pages are
combined and sent as a single file.
• Selectable file types differ depending on the scan settings and other conditions. For details
about file types, see page 172 "Notes about and limitations of file types".
5. To specify the file name, press [File Name] and enter the file name.
The file name is generated by combining the following three items:

• File Name: Enter the string to use at the beginning of the file name.
• Start Number: Specify the starting number of a serial number that will be appended at the end
of each file name when specifying a file format comprising a single page per file.
• Add Date & Time: Select this check box to add the "year, month, day, hour, and minute" the
scanning is performed at the end of the file name.
6. Specify the scan settings according to the purpose of the scanned data.
page 167 "Scanning an Original with Suitable Quality and Density"
7. Specify the destination on the scanner screen, and press [Start].

• You can also embed the security and digital signature settings, and text information in the PDF file.
• See "Scanning an Original as a PDF with Security Settings Specified", User Guide (Full Version).
• See "Scanning an Original as a PDF File with Embedded Text Data", User Guide (Full Version).
• You can change the number of digits in [Scanner Settings] [Sending Settings] [File Name]
[Number of Digits for Single Page Files].
• The version of the created PDF files is 1.4/1.5.
• You can also select File Type from the scanner screen. Press an item on the screen to select it.

171
 6. Scan

D0CHPA5504

Notes about and limitations of file types

Depending on the file format you select, the following limitations will apply:
TIFF
If you select TIFF as the file format, the data is not compressed and thus results in larger files.
High Compression PDF
You cannot select [High Comp. PDF] in the following cases:
• When "Available Functions" of "Scanner Function" is set to [Black & White Only] in [System
Settings] [Settings for Administrator] [Function Restriction] [Restrict Functions of Each
Application].
• If [System Settings] [Settings for Administrator] [File Management] [PDF File Type:
PDF/A Fixed] is set to [On].
• High Compression PDF is not compatible with Adobe Acrobat Reader 5.0/Adobe Reader
6.0 or earlier versions.
• When [High Comp. PDF] is selected as the file type for scanning, areas of uneven density may
appear in the scan file. If this happens, change the PDF File setting to [PDF/A] or [PDF].

172
7. Document Server

Storing Documents in Document Server

You can store documents scanned by the machine in the document server.
You can also store them using the printer driver.
See "Storing Documents to Print in the Machine", User Guide (Full Version).

• Documents stored in the document server are deleted after three days (72 hours) in the factory-
default configuration. Change the settings in [Auto Delete File in Document Server] to change the
period until documents are deleted or to specify not to delete documents automatically.
• See "Changing the Storage Period of Document Server or Specifying an Indefinite Period", User
Guide (Full Version).

1. On the Home screen, press [Document Server].

2. On the document server screen, press [To Scanning Screen].

DZX233

3. Specify the folder to store documents, the document name, and other settings.

D0CHPA5301

173
 7. Document Server

• Target Fldr. to Store: Select the "Shared Folder" created in the factory default configuration or
a user folder created by a user to store the document. To select a user folder, create it in
advance.
See "Organizing Document Server Using Folders", User Guide (Full Version).
• User Name: Specify the user name displayed as the owner of the document. Select a user
from the address book or enter the name.
• File Name: Specify the name of the scanned document. If you do not specify the file name, a
name such as "COPY0001" or "COPY0002" is assigned automatically.
• Password: Specify the password required for printing the document.
4. Place the original.
Place the original in the same way as in the Copy function.
page 73 "Basic Procedure for Copying Documents"
5. Specify the scanning conditions such as size.
6. Press [Start].
• When you place the original on the Auto Document Feeder (ADF), the folder list screen is
displayed after scanning the original.
• When you place the original on the exposure glass, press [Finish Scanning] after scanning all
originals to print to display the folder list screen.

• When you scan a document whose size is not detected automatically, the scanned document is
stored with a size that differs from the original.
• You can specify whether to allow other users to read or edit the stored document.
• See "Accessing Documents in Document Server from a Web Browser", User Guide (Full Version).
• When you do not want to delete stored documents, specify [Auto Delete File in Document Server]
to [Off], and then store the documents. When [Specify Days] or [Specify Hours] is selected after
documents have been stored, the documents will not be deleted. Only the documents stored after a
setting change are deleted automatically.

174
 Printing Documents in Document Server

Printing Documents in Document Server

You can print the documents stored in the document server with the same settings, paper size and other
settings specified when the documents were scanned. You can also change the print settings or specify a
page to print.

• You can print a document in the document server using Web Image Monitor.
• See "Accessing Documents in Document Server from a Web Browser", User Guide (Full Version).

Printing a Document with the Settings Specified When Scanned

• When printing two or more documents at a time, the print settings specified for the first document
are applied to all the remaining documents.
• Some of the selected documents may not be printed due to the difference in the size or resolution.

1. On the Home screen, press [Document Server].

2. On the document server screen, select the desired folder.

DZX236

Press [Search by Folder No.] or [Search by Folder Name] to search for a folder.

175
 7. Document Server

3. Select the document to print.

D0CZPM6656

• Press [User Name] or [File Name] on the left side of the screen to search for a document.
• If the document is password protected, enter the password and press [OK].
• To print two or more copies, enter the quantity using the number keys.
• To print multiple documents at once, select the documents to print in the printing order. You
can select up to 30 documents.
• After selecting the documents, you can confirm the selected documents by pressing [Order] to
list them in the printing order.
4. Press [Start].

• To stop printing, press [Stop] [Cancel Printing].

• You can change the number of sets during printing. This function can be used only when the Sort
function is selected in the printing conditions. To change the quantity while printing is in progress,
press [Stop], enter the quantity, and then press [Resume Printing]. The quantity you can enter differs
depending on when you press [Stop].

Changing the Print Settings to Print a Document

• When you select two or more documents to change the print settings, the first document keeps the
changed contents after printing. The second document and later documents do not keep the
changed contents and instead keep the settings of when they were stored.

1. On the Home screen, press [Document Server].

2. On the document server screen, select the desired folder.

176
 Printing Documents in Document Server

3. Select the document to print.

• If the document is password protected, enter the password and press [OK].
• To print two or more copies, enter the quantity using the number keys.
4. Press [To Printing Screen].
5. Change the print settings.

• When specifying Sort or Rotate Sort, you can make a partial print as a test and proceed to
print the rest of the quantity by pressing [Sample Copy].
• Press [Back to File List] to return to the screen for selecting documents.
6. Press [Start].

Specifying a Page to Print

1. On the Home screen, press [Document Server].

2. On the document server screen, select the desired folder.

3. Select the document to print and press [Print Specified Page].
• If the document is password protected, enter the password and press [OK].
• To print two or more copies, enter the quantity using the number keys.

177
 7. Document Server

4. Specify the page to print.

D0CHPA5302

• 1st Page: Select this to print the first page only. When you selected two or more documents,
the first page of each document is printed.
• Specified Page: Select this to print the specified page.
• Specify Range: Enter the page printing starts in [Start Number] and the page printing ends in
[End Number].
5. Press [Start].

178
8. Web Image Monitor

Using Web Image Monitor

Web Image Monitor is a screen to confirm the machine status and settings on the computer.
When the machine and a computer can be connected to a network, you can access to Web Image
Monitor by entering the IP address of the machine on the address bar of the Web browser.
Accessing to Web Image Monitor

1. Enter the IP address of the machine in the address bar of the Web browser.

Example: when the IP address of the machine is "192.168.1.10"

• If SSL is specified
https://192.168.1.10/
• If SSL is not specified
http://192.168.1.10/
When you do not know whether SSL is specified on the machine, enter the address starting
with https. When you fail the connection, enter the address starting with http.
When entering the IPv4 address, do not enter "0" for each segment. If "192.168.001.010" is
entered, you cannot access the machine.
2. Confirming the machine status or settings on the top page of Web Image Monitor.

D0CHAA8030

The machine status and remaining amount of consumables are displayed.

You can access Web Image Monitor more quickly by registering the machine's URL as a
bookmark. Note that the URL you register must be the URL of the top page, which is the page

179
 8. Web Image Monitor

that appears before login. If you register the URL of a page that appears after login, Web
Image Monitor will not open properly from the bookmark.
To change the settings, click [Login] at the top right on the screen and enter the User Name
and Password.
Recommended Web Browser

Windows macOS

Internet Explorer 11 or later Safari 3.0 or later

Firefox 52 or later Firefox 52 or later

Google Chrome version 50 or later Google Chrome version 50 or later

Microsoft Edge 20 or later -

• You can use the screen reader software JAWS 7.0 or later on Internet Explorer.

• When you use a DNS server or WINS server, you can use Host Name instead of IP address to
connect the server.
• When the screen is distorted or the operation is unstable, confirm that "JavaScript" or "Use
Cookies" is specified to Active on the computer.
• When using Host Name under Windows Server 2008 or later in the IPv6 environment, resolve
Host Name in the external DNS server. You cannot use the host file.
• When specifying the settings from Web Image Monitor, do not log in to the machine from the
control panel. The setting value may not be reflected.
• If you are using a proxy server, change the web browser settings so that no data goes through the
proxy server to connect to this machine. Contact your administrator for information about the
settings.
• If you click your browser's back button but the previous page does not appear, click the browser's
refresh button and try again.

What You Can Do on the Web Image Monitor

Items displayed on the Web Image Monitor and settings depend whether the machine is logged in.
• When not logged in
The machine status, settings, and job status are displayed. You can browse the settings of the
machine but cannot change them.
• When logged in (as a user)

180
 Using Web Image Monitor

Log in as a user registered in the Address Book. The users can operate the jobs that they executed
and change a part of settings of the machine.
• When logged in (as an Administrator)
The administrator can change all settings of the machine.

What you can do

Function Not logged in User Administrator

Machine status

Machine settings *1 *1

Machine setting change - *1

Job list

Job history

Access to Address Book -

File operation in Document Server -

Network settings - *1

Network settings change - *1

Cancel printing - -

Security settings - -

: Available -: Not available

*1 Depending on the Administrator settings

181
 8. Web Image Monitor

Web Image Monitor Screen

D0CHAA8031

1. Menu
Menu items described below are displayed.
• Status/Information: Displays the machine status, option configuration, counter, and job status.
• Device Management: Manages the machine settings and Address Book.
• Print Job/Stored File: Operates the files stored in the printer driver or document server.
• Convenient Links: Displays the link to the Favorite URL.
2. Header
An icon to link to the Login screen is placed at the top right on the screen. The Help, Version Information, and
Keyword Search buttons are also displayed.
3. Refresh/Help
(Refresh): Update the information in the work area.
(Help): View or download Help file contents.
4. Main Area
The machine status and settings are displayed.

Specifying Web Image Monitor Help

Web Image Monitor has Help to describe the function of setting items. When you use Help for the first
time, you can select to read online Help or to download Help File.
View Online Help Now
You can view the latest Web Image Monitor Help on the Internet.
Download Help File
You can download Web Image Monitor Help to the computer and view it. When you store the
downloaded Help file in the Web server and assign to the Help button ( ), you can view the
Help without connecting to the Internet.

182
 Using Web Image Monitor

To assign the downloaded Help file to the Help button ( ), specify the path to the Help file
following the procedure below.

1. Log in to Web Image Monitor as an Administrator.

2. Click [Configuration] on the "Device Management" menu on Web Image Monitor.

D0CHAA8032

3. Click [Webpage] under the "Webpage" category.

4. In "Download Help File", select the operating system and displayed language, and then
click [Download].
5. Unzip the downloaded zip file and store it in the Web server.
6. Enter the path to the Help file stored in the Web server in "URL" under "Set Help URL
Target".
For example, when URL of the Help File is "http://a.b.c.d/HELP/JA/index.html", enter "http://
a.b.c.d/HELP/".
7. Click [OK].
8. After completing the procedure, log out and finish Web Image Monitor.

183
 8. Web Image Monitor

184
9. Adding Paper and Toner

Loading Paper into the Paper Tray

The method of loading paper varies for each tray type.

• When replacing paper or removing jammed paper, make sure not to trap or injure your fingers.

Bypass Tray

Tray 1
Tray 2

Tray 3
Tray 4

Tray 3 Large Capacity Tray Tray 3 (LCT) Large Capacity Tray

(LCT) (LCT)
D0CHIA0402

• Before loading paper into a tray, check the paper size and type that can be loaded in the tray,
and confirm the paper size that is automatically detected.
page 200 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types"
• When loading paper of a size that is not automatically detected, specify the paper size in [Tray/
Paper Settings] of [Settings].
page 194 "Specifying the Paper Size That Is Not Automatically Detected"
• To load thin paper, thick paper, or other special paper, specify the paper type or thickness in
[Tray/Paper Settings] of [Settings].
See "Tray/Paper Settings", User Guide (Full Version).
page 197 "Specifying Paper Type and Thickness Settings"
• Check the paper setting before printing. If the paper differs from the paper setting, a mismatch error
will occur when you print.
• Straighten curled or warped paper before loading.
• When loading paper on a tray which has a few sheets of paper, multiple sheets of paper may be
fed at once from the tray. Take out all sheets, fan the sheets, and then load them again.

185
 9. Adding Paper and Toner

• If a paper tray is pushed vigorously when putting it back into place, the position of the tray's side
fences may slip out of place.
• When loading a low number of sheets, be sure not to squeeze the side fences in too tightly. If the
side fences are squeezed too tightly against the paper, the edges may crease, thin paper may
wrinkle, or the paper may misfeed.
• You may hear the sound of rubbing paper. This is not a malfunction.
• Do not stack paper over the limit mark.

Loading Paper into Tray 1 to 4

Adjust the side and end fences according to the paper size. When loading B4 JIS, A3, or 11 × 17
paper to tray 2-4, also change the position of the auxiliary side fence.

• Do not stack paper over the limit mark. If you load paper over the limit mark, the printed images
may become slanted or a paper jam may occur.
Paper Envelope

DZX185

Load paper into every tray in the same way. In the following example procedure, Tray 2 is used.

1. Check that paper in the paper tray is not being used, and then pull the tray out carefully.

D0CHIA5707

2. Remove paper if loaded.

186
 Loading Paper into the Paper Tray

3. While pressing the release lever of the side fence, slide the side fences outward.

D0CHIA5708

4. To load B4 JIS, A3, or 11 × 17 paper, pull the tray out completely and then change the
positions of the two auxiliary side fences.
Place the tray on a flat surface.

D0CHIA5709

1. Press the concave part to distort the auxiliary side fence (1), and then take it out of the tray
(2).

1
DZW134

2. Put the auxiliary side fence into the groove for the paper size to use.

187
 9. Adding Paper and Toner

DZW116

Change the position of the auxiliary side fence in the back in the same way.
5. While pressing the release lever of the end fence, slide the end fence outward.

D0CHIA5710

If the end fence is fixed with the stopper, rotate the fixing screw of the stopper 90 degrees
counterclockwise with a coin or similar object and remove the stopper.

D0CHIA5723

6. Square the paper and load it with the print side facing up.
Fan sheets before loading so that multiple sheets of paper do not stick to each other and are not
fed at once.
Check the paper edges are aligned at the right side.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.

188
 Loading Paper into the Paper Tray

D0CHIA5711

7. While pressing the release lever, adjust the side and end fences to the paper size.
Do not leave spaces between the paper and fences.

D0CHIA5712

To fix the end fence, engage the two projections of the stopper with the holes on the end fence,
and then tighten the fixing screw by rotating it 90 degrees clockwise with a coin or similar object.
• If you will not fix the end fence, put the stopper in the position as shown in the illustration, and
then rotate the fixing screw 90 degrees clockwise with a coin or similar object.

D0CHIA5724

8. Push the tray in the original position carefully.

To return the completely pulled out tray to the original position, push the tray straight in. If the paper
tray is damaged, it may cause a paper jam. Also, if you push the tray forcibly, the side fence of the
tray may be moved.

189
 9. Adding Paper and Toner

• You can load envelopes into the paper trays.

• page 209 "Envelope Orientation and Recommended Status"

Loading Paper into the Bypass Tray

Use the bypass tray to load paper of a size that cannot be loaded into Tray 1 to 4, such as transparency
film and label paper (adhesive labels).
The maximum number of sheets you can load at the same time depends on paper type.
page 200 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types"

• Do not stack paper over the limit mark. If you load paper over the limit mark, the print image may
be slanted or the paper may be jammed.

Left: Plain Paper

Right: Thick Paper

D0CHIA0403

1. Open the bypass tray.

D0CHIA5714

190
 Loading Paper into the Paper Tray

When loading paper larger than the bypass tray (longer than A4 paper in landscape orientation),
pull out the extender.
2. Load the paper with the print side down, and push it in lightly until you hear a beep.
Fan sheets before loading so that multiple sheets of paper do not stick to each other and are not
fed at once.
When loading envelopes or letterhead paper, confirm the orientation, face and back, or location
of flaps.
page 209 "Envelope Orientation and Recommended Status"
page 212 "Loading Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper"
Align the paper guides to the paper size.

D0CHIA5715

• To load paper on the bypass tray, it is better to orient it in the direction of .

Loading Paper into Tray 3 (LCT)

(mainly Europe and Asia)

Tray 3 (LCT) can hold A4 portrait paper only. If you want to print on 81/2 × 11 portrait paper from Tray
3 (LCT), contact your service representative.
(mainly North America)
Tray 3 (LCT) can hold 81/2 × 11 portrait paper only. If you want to print on A4 portrait paper from Tray
3 (LCT), contact your service representative.
• You can load paper in both the left and right sides of the tray.
• The paper in the right side of Tray 3 (LCT) is fed to the machine. When the paper loaded in the
right side of Tray 3 (LCT) runs out, paper on the left side is automatically shifted to the right, and the
tray continues to feed the paper.
• While printing from Tray 3 (LCT), you can pull out the left side of the tray and load new paper.

191
 9. Adding Paper and Toner

• When the paper loaded in the right side of Tray 3 (LCT) runs out, paper on the left is automatically
shifted to the right. Do not pull out Tray 3 (LCT) while you hear the sound of moving paper.

DZW120

1. Pull Tray 3 (LCT) out carefully.

DZW135

2. Square the paper and load it with the print side facing up.
Fan sheets before loading so that multiple sheets of paper do not stick to each other and are not
fed at once.
For the right stack, align the right edge of the paper with the right edge of the tray. For the left
stack, align the left edge of the paper with the left edge of the tray.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.

192
 Loading Paper into the Paper Tray

When the whole tray can be pulled out

DZW140

When half of the tray can be pulled out

Load 30 or more sheets of paper in the left half of the tray.

DZW141

3. Carefully push Tray 3 (LCT) fully in.

Loading Paper into the Large Capacity Tray (LCT)

(mainly Europe and Asia)

The large capacity tray (LCT) can hold A4 portrait paper only. If you want to print on 81/2 × 11 or B5
JIS portrait paper from the large capacity tray (LCT), contact your service representative.
(mainly North America)
The large capacity tray (LCT) can hold 81/2 × 11 portrait paper only. If you want to print on A4 or B5
JIS portrait paper from the large capacity tray (LCT), contact your service representative.

193
 9. Adding Paper and Toner

1. Open the cover of the Large Capacity Tray (LCT).

D0CHIA5716

2. Square the paper and load it with the print side facing down.
Fan sheets before loading so that multiple sheets of paper do not stick to each other and are not
fed at once.
Check the paper edges are aligned at the left side.
Do not stack paper over the limit mark.

D0CHIA5717

3. Close the cover of the Large Capacity Tray (LCT).

Specifying the Paper Size That Is Not Automatically Detected

1. Press [Settings] on the Home screen.

194
 Loading Paper into the Paper Tray

2. Press [Tray/Paper Settings].

D0CHPA5110

3. Press [Paper Size/Paper Type] [Paper Size/Paper Type].

4. Press one tray to set.

5. Press [Paper Size].

D0CHPA5111

To specify for the bypass tray, press [Paper Size: Printer].

The size of the paper in Tray 3 (LCT) and the large capacity tray (LCT) is fixed and cannot be
changed.
6. Choose one paper size from the list shown, and then press [OK].
7. Press [OK].
8. After completing the configuration, press [Home] ( ).
To use paper that can be detected automatically after using paper that cannot be detected
automatically, restore the setting of Auto Detect. To restore the setting of Auto Detect, load the
paper again, operate steps 1 to 6, select [Auto Detect], and then press [OK].

195
 9. Adding Paper and Toner

Specifying a Custom Size Paper Using the Control Panel

1. Press [Settings] on the Home screen.

2. Press [Tray/Paper Settings].

D0CHPA5110

3. Press [Paper Size/Paper Type] [Paper Size/Paper Type].

4. Press one tray to set.

5. Press [Paper Size].

D0CHPA5111

To specify for the bypass tray, press [Paper Size: Printer].

The size of the paper in Tray 3 (LCT) and the large capacity tray (LCT) is fixed and cannot be
changed.

196
 Loading Paper into the Paper Tray

6. Press [Custom] from the list shown.

D0CHPA5112

7. Press the value in the "A" or "B" field, and then enter the new value.
Specify the values within the numbers of "< >", and then press [Done].

8. Press [OK] three times.

9. After completing the configuration, press [Home] ( ).

Specifying Paper Type and Thickness Settings

If the print settings and the loaded paper that are used for a print job do not match, a mismatch error
occurs.
Check and specify the paper settings before you start printing.

• Before you change the settings, confirm the priority of the paper settings for printing (priority to the
printer driver or to the control panel).
• [Settings] [Printer Settings] [System] [Paper In/Out] [Tray Setting Priority]
On the printer driver
Check the settings of paper tray and paper type on the printer driver and make sure the settings
match the loaded paper.

197
 9. Adding Paper and Toner

On the control panel

1. Press [Settings] on the Home screen.

2. Press [Tray/Paper Settings].

D0CHPA5110

3. Press [Paper Size/Paper Type] [Paper Size/Paper Type].

4. Press one tray to set.

5. Press [Paper Type/Thickness].

D0CHPA5113

198
 Loading Paper into the Paper Tray

6. Choose one paper type and paper thickness from the list shown, and then press
[OK].

7. Press [OK].
8. After completing the configuration, press [Home] ( ).

199
 9. Adding Paper and Toner

Recommended Paper Sizes and Types

The recommended paper sizes and types for each tray are as described below.

• When performing multiple sheet feeding, fan sheets thoroughly or load sheets one by one from the
bypass tray.
• When you load the following types of paper, you may hear a buzzing sound. This does not affect
the performance.
• Transparency film
• Translucent paper
• Postcards
• The printing speed may be lower depending on the paper size or paper type.

Trays 1–4

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

60–300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond– Paper sizes that can be detected 550 sheets (80 g/m2, 20
110 lb. Cover) automatically*1: lb. Bond)
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4

A3 , A4, A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS,

81/2 × 11

A4 , A5 , B5 JIS , 11 × 17 ,
81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11, 71/4 ×
101/2 , 81/2 × 132/5

200
 Recommended Paper Sizes and Types

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

60–300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond– Select the paper size using the Tray 550 sheets (80 g/m2, 20
110 lb. Cover) Paper Settings menu*1: lb. Bond)
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4

A5 , A6 , B6 JIS , 81/2 × 13
, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 ×
13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2 ,
51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K, 11 ×
15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 132/5

A5 , A6 , B6 JIS , 81/2 × 13
, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 ×
13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2 ,
51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K, 11 ×
15 , 10 × 14

60–300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond– Custom size: 550 sheets (80 g/m2, 20
110 lb. Cover) lb. Bond)
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4
Vertical: 90.0–297.0 mm
Horizontal: 148.0–431.8 mm

Vertical: 3.55–11.69 inches

Horizontal: 5.83–17.00 inches

Envelopes Select the paper size using the Tray • : 50 sheets

Paper Settings menu: • :
41/8 × 91/2, 37/8 × 71/2 , C5 Double flap: 15 sheets
Env, C6 Env, DL Env
Single flap: 25 sheets

*1 Adjust the supporting side fence before loading B4 JIS , A3 , or 11 × 17 paper to tray 2-4.

201
 9. Adding Paper and Toner

Bypass Tray

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond– Paper sizes that can be detected • 100 sheets (80 g/m2,
110 lb. Cover) automatically: 20 lb. Bond)
Thin Paper–Thick Paper 4 • Thick Paper 1: 40
sheets
A3 , A4, A5, A6 , B4 JIS , B5
JIS, B6 JIS • Thick Paper 2–Thick
Paper 3: 20 sheets
• Thick Paper 4: 16
A5 , B5 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × sheets
11, 71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2
, 12 × 18

52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond– Specify the paper size*1: • 100 sheets (80 g/m2,
110 lb. Cover) 20 lb. Bond)
Thin Paper–Thick Paper 4 • Thick Paper 1: 40
11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 ×
sheets
13 , 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 , • Thick Paper 2–Thick
71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K Paper 3: 20 sheets
, 16K, 12 × 18 , 11 × 15 , • Thick Paper 4: 16
10 × 14 , 81/2 × 132/5 sheets

A3 , A4, A5 , A6 , B4 JIS ,
B5 JIS , B6 JIS , 81/2 × 13 ,
81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13
, 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2 , 8K
, 16K, 11 × 15 , 10 × 14 ,
8 /2 × 132/5
1

52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond– Custom size*2: • 100 sheets (80 g/m2,
110 lb. Cover) 20 lb. Bond)
Thin Paper–Thick Paper 4 • Thick Paper 1: 40
Vertical: 90.0–304.8 mm*3
sheets
Horizontal: 148.0–600.0 mm*4
• Thick Paper 2–Thick
Paper 3: 20 sheets
Vertical: 3.55–12.00 inches*3 • Thick Paper 4: 16
sheets
Horizontal: 5.83–23.62 inches*4

202
 Recommended Paper Sizes and Types

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

Translucent paper A3 , A4, B4 JIS , B5 JIS 1 sheets

Label paper (adhesive labels) A4, B4 JIS 30 sheets

OHP transparencies A4, 81/2 × 11 50 sheets

Envelopes Specify the paper size*1: 10 sheets

41/ 8 × 91/2 , 37/ 8 × 71/2, C5
Env, C6 Env, DL Env

*1 Specify the paper size.

• Using the Copy function.
page 73 "Basic Procedure for Copying Documents"
• Using the Printer function.
page 129 "Basic Procedure for Printing Documents"
*2 In printer or facsimile mode, the maximum horizontal length of the custom size is 1,260 mm (49.60 inches). If
you want to print on paper with a horizontal length of 600–1,260 mm (23.62–49.60 inches), contact your
service representative. If you want to load paper with a horizontal length of 600 mm (23.62 inches) or
longer in the bypass tray, it must have a vertical width of 305 mm (12.1 inches) or less.
*3 When only the Internal Multi-Folding unit is mounted, you cannot use paper that is wider than 297 mm.
*4 When paper larger than 432 mm (17 inches) in size is used, the paper may become wrinkled, may not be
fed into the machine, or may cause paper jams.

Tray 3 (LCT)

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

60–300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond– 1000 sheets × 2

110 lb. Cover)
A4
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4

81/2 × 11

60–300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond– 1000 sheets × 2

110 lb. Cover)
81/2 × 11 *1
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4

A4 *1

203
 9. Adding Paper and Toner

*1 To load paper any of the sizes specified above, contact your service representative.

Large Capacity Tray (LCT)

Paper type and weight Paper size Paper capacity

60–300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond– 1500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20

110 lb. Cover) lb. Bond)
A4
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4

81/2 × 11

60–300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond– 1500 sheets (80 g/m2, 20

110 lb. Cover) *1, 81/ *1 lb. Bond)
B5 JIS 2 × 11
Plain Paper 1–Thick Paper 4

A4 *1, B5 JIS *1

*1 To load paper any of the sizes specified above, contact your service representative.

Notes on Special Paper

Paper Type Note

Setting thick paper page 208 "Thick Paper Orientation and Recommended
Status"

Setting envelopes page 209 "Envelope Orientation and Recommended

Status"

Setting letterhead paper page 212 "Loading Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided

Paper"

Setting label paper (adhesive labels) We recommend that you use specified label paper. If
paper other than the specified one is used, normal
operation and quality cannot be guaranteed.

Setting transparencies When using transparencies, check their print sides

carefully. Erroneous loading may cause problems. Remove
copied or printed sheets one by one.

204
 Recommended Paper Sizes and Types

Paper Type Note

Setting translucent paper • When loading translucent paper, always use long
grain paper.
• Remove copied or printed sheets one by one.

Paper Thickness for Each Paper Weight

Paper Thickness Paper weight

Thin Paper 52–59 g/m2 (14–15 lb. Bond)

Plain Paper 1 60–74 g/m2 (16–20 lb. Bond)

Plain Paper 2 75–81 g/m2 (20 lb. Bond)

Middle Thick 82–105 g/m2 (20–28 lb. Bond)

Thick Paper 1 106–169 g/m2 (28 lb. Bond–90 lb. Index)

Thick Paper 2 170–220 g/m2 (65–80 lb. Cover)

Thick Paper 3 221–256 g/m2 (80 lb. Cover–140 lb. Index)

Thick Paper 4 257–300 g/m2 (140 lb. Index–110 lb. Cover)

Unusable Paper

• Do not use stapled sheets of paper, aluminum foil, carbon paper, or any kind of conductive
paper. Doing so can result in fire.

Paper causing faults

Do not use any of the following kinds of treated paper. Doing so may cause faults.
• Paper for inkjet printers
• Thermal paper
• Art paper
• Aluminum foil
• Carbon paper
• Conductive paper

205
 9. Adding Paper and Toner

• Paper with perforated lines

• Hemmed-edge paper
• Window envelopes
• Tab stock
• OHP transparencies for color printing
Do not copy or print onto sides that are already printed.
Paper causing paper jam
Do not use the following kinds of paper. It may cause a paper jam.
• Bent, folded, or creased paper
• Perforated paper
• Slippery paper
• Torn paper
• Rough paper
• Thin paper with little stiffness
• Paper with a dusty surface
If you use paper curled by humidity or drying, the paper or staple may jam.
Do not load sheets that have already been printed onto by another machine. Doing so may
interfere with loading of paper because the powder for preventing offset may attach to the paper
roller.

• A paper jam may occur depending on the condition of the paper even when using the
recommended paper.

Paper Storage

When storing paper, the following precautions should always be followed:

• Do not store paper where it will be exposed to direct sunlight.
• Store paper in a dry environment (humidity: 70% or less).
• Store on a flat surface.
• Do not store paper vertically.
• Once opened, store paper in a plastic bag.

206
 Recommended Paper Sizes and Types

Saving Printouts

• Prints will fade if exposed to strong light or dampness and humidity for extended periods of time.
Preserve the quality of your copies by storing them in a binder in a dark, dry place.
• When folding prints, toner in the folds will come off.
• If the prints are stored in the conditions described below, toner may melt:
• When a print and a half-dried print are put on top of each other
• When solvent-type adhesive agents are used for pasting prints
• When prints are placed on mats made of chlorinated plastic in locations of high temperature
for long periods of time
• When prints are placed in locations of extremely high temperatures, such as near a heater

207
 9. Adding Paper and Toner

Thick Paper Orientation and Recommended

Status
When loading thick paper of 106-300 g/m2 (28 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover) in the paper trays, or in the
bypass tray, follow the recommendations below to prevent misfeeds and loss of image quality.
Paper Orientation
Thick paper has a paper direction according to its grain. Set the paper direction according to the
grain, as shown in the following diagram:

Direction of Large Capacity

Tray 1–4 Tray 3 (LCT) Bypass Tray
paper grain Tray (LCT)

Not Not
recommended recommended

Paper Storage
• Temperature: 20–25°C (68–77°F)
• Humidity: 30–65%.
Do not use together paper that has been stored in different environments.
Minimum Number of Sheets
• 20 sheets or more (paper trays of the machine/optional lower paper trays unit used)
After loading paper, position the side fences flush against the paper stack.

• When printing on thick, smooth paper, be sure to fan the paper thoroughly before loading. If you
do not fan thick paper, jams and misfeeds can occur. If paper continues to become jammed or
feed in together even after they are fanned, load them one by one from the bypass tray.
• Proper performance and quality may not be achieved under the recommended conditions
depending on the paper.
• The printed sheet may curl. If the printed sheet curls, correct it.

208
 Envelope Orientation and Recommended Status

Envelope Orientation and Recommended

Status
The way to place an original on the exposure glass and load envelopes varies depending on the shape
and orientation of the envelopes.

• Do not print on the following envelopes:

• Window envelopes
• Envelopes with moisture
Before setting envelopes
• To load envelopes with the flaps opened, use only envelopes that are at least 148 mm (5.9
inches) long including the open flap. Set the envelopes with the flaps fully open. A paper jam
may occur depending on the length or shape of the envelope flap.
• Before loading envelopes, press down on them to remove any air from inside and flatten out
all four edges. If they are bent or curled, flatten their leading edges (the edge going into the
machine) by running a pencil or ruler across them.

• For information about recommended envelopes, contact your local dealer.

• The Duplex function cannot be used with envelopes.
• Set the margins on the top, bottom, left and right to be 15 mm or more so as to print with adequate
quality.
• An image may not be printed clearly on a sheet whose thickness is uneven. Print a few sheets and
check the result.
• The printing result may not be adequate or the envelope may become wrinkled when the
temperature or humidity is high.
• The printing result may not be adequate or output envelopes may become wrinkled depending on
the printing environment even when using the recommended envelopes.
• When printing onto paper other than an envelope after printing onto several envelopes, you may
have to wait about one minute until printing starts to allow the machine to make adjustments.

209
 9. Adding Paper and Toner

Using the Copy Function

Orientation of
Exposure Glass Tray 1-4 Bypass Tray
Envelopes

Side-opening
envelopes

DZW772
DZW769

Flaps: open Flaps: open

Flaps: open
Side to be printed: face Side to be printed: face
Side to be scanned: face down
down up

Side-opening
envelopes

DZW771
DZW768

Flaps: closed Flaps: closed

Flaps: closed
Side to be printed: face Side to be printed: face
Side to be scanned: face down
down up

When loading envelopes, specify the envelope size and thickness.

page 89 "Copying onto Envelopes"

Using the Printer Function

Orientation of
Tray 1-4 Bypass Tray
Envelopes

Side-opening
envelopes

DZW772

Flaps: open Flaps: open

Side to be printed: face up Side to be printed: face down

210
 Envelope Orientation and Recommended Status

Orientation of
Tray 1-4 Bypass Tray
Envelopes

Side-opening
envelopes *1

DZW771

Flaps: closed Flaps: closed

Side to be printed: face up Side to be printed: face down

*1 Select the check box of [Rotate by 180 Degrees] on [Input/Output] tab, and then print.
When loading envelopes, select "Envelope" as the paper types using both [Tray/Paper Settings] and
printer driver and specify the thickness of envelopes.
page 138 "Printing on Envelopes"

211
 9. Adding Paper and Toner

Loading Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided

Paper
To print onto letterhead paper or business letter paper on which logos or patterns are printed, confirm
how to set the paper or the settings of this machine so that the original is printed onto the orientation-
fixed (top to bottom) or two-sided paper correctly.

Copying onto Letterhead Paper

Specify the settings of this machine as described below, and then place an original and load the paper.
• [Settings] [Copier / Document Server Settings] [Paper/Paper Input] [Letterhead Setting]
[Yes]
Original Orientation

Exposure Glass ADF

DZB776 DZB777

Paper Orientation

Large Capacity
Copy side Tray 1–4 Tray 3 (LCT) Bypass tray
Tray (LCT)

One-sided
originals

DZB778 DZB778
DZB782 DZB784

DZB779

DZB785

212
 Loading Orientation-fixed Paper or Two-sided Paper

Large Capacity
Copy side Tray 1–4 Tray 3 (LCT) Bypass tray
Tray (LCT)

Two-sided
originals *1

DZB780 DZB780
DZB783 DZB786

DZB781

DZB787

*1 When printing the first page onto the letterhead side

Printing onto Letterhead Paper Using the Printer Driver

Specify the settings of this machine as described below.

• [Settings] [Printer Settings] [System] [Paper In/Out] [Letterhead Setting] [Auto
Detect]
Paper Orientation

Large Capacity
Copy Side Tray 1-4 Tray 3 (LCT) Bypass Tray
Tray (LCT)

One-sided
originals

DZB778 DZB778
DZB782 DZB784

DZB788

DZB790

213
 9. Adding Paper and Toner

Large Capacity
Copy Side Tray 1-4 Tray 3 (LCT) Bypass Tray
Tray (LCT)

Two-sided
originals

DZB780 DZB780
DZB783 DZB786

DZB789

DZB791

• When you set [Letterhead Setting] to [On (Always)], you can print onto letterhead paper when the
paper type in the printer driver’s settings is set to [Letterhead].
• If a print job is changed partway through printing from one-sided to two-sided printing, one-sided
output after the first copy may be printed facing a different direction. To ensure all paper is output
facing the same direction, specify different input trays for one-sided and two-sided printing. Note
also that two-sided printing must be disabled for the tray specified for one-sided printing.

214
 Recommended Original Size and Weight

Recommended Original Size and Weight

(mainly Europe and Asia)

Original location Original size Original weight

Exposure glass Up to A3 -

ADF One-sided A3 –B6 JIS (Japanese Industrial 40–128 g/m2 (11–34 lb.
originals Standard), A6*1 Bond) *3
11 × 17 –51/2 × 81/2*2

Two-sided A3 –A5, A6*1 52–128 g/m2 (14–34 lb.

originals 11 × 17 –51/2 × 81/2*2 Bond) *3

Mixed A3 , B4 JIS , A4, B5 JIS, 11 × 17 52–81 g/m2 (14–20 lb.

Sizes , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11 Bond)
mode

*1 When a small size paper unit is used on the one-pass duplex scanning ADF.
*2 51/2 × 81/2 can be used only in the scanner function.
*3 When a small size paper unit is used on the one-pass duplex scanning ADF: 64-128 g/m2 (17-34 lb.
Bond)
(mainly North America)

Original location Original size Original weight

Exposure glass Up to 11 × 17 -

ADF One-sided 11 × 17 –51/2 × 81/2 40–128 g/m2 (11–34 lb.

originals A3 –A5*1, A6*2 Bond) *3

Two-sided 11 × 17 –51/2 × 81/2 52–128 g/m2 (14–34 lb.

originals A3 –A5*1, A6*2 Bond) *3

Mixed 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 52–81 g/m2 (14–20 lb.

Sizes 11, 10 × 14 , 71/4 × 101/2 , Bond)
mode A3 , A4

*1 A5 can be used only in the scanner function.

*2 When a small size paper unit is used on the one-pass duplex scanning ADF.
*3 When a small size paper unit is used on the one-pass duplex scanning ADF: 64-128 g/m2 (17-34 lb.
Bond)

215
 9. Adding Paper and Toner

• An original whose size is within the range of the maximum original scan area can be placed.
• page 304 "Specifications for the Main Unit"
• On all sides of the original, there is a missing image area. Even if you place originals on the
exposure glass or in the ADF correctly, the missing image area on all four sides of the original
might not be copied.
• page 304 "Specifications for the Main Unit"
• You can place originals of two different sizes only in Mixed Sizes mode.

216
 Sizes Detectable with Auto Paper Select

Sizes Detectable with Auto Paper Select

(mainly Europe and Asia)

Original
A3 B4 JIS A4 B5 JIS A5 A5 B6 JIS
location

Exposure *4 *4 *1*4 *4 *4 -*2*4 -

glass

ADF *3

Original location 11 × 17 81/2 × 11 81/2 × 13

Exposure glass - -*1 *7

ADF *5 *6 *7

: Detectable size, -: Undetectable size

*1 Default is A4. If you want to switch the detectable size from A4 to 81/2 × 11, contact your service
representative.
*2 If you want to detect sizes smaller than A5 , contact your service representative.
*3 You cannot use the two-sided scanning mode.
*4 If you want to switch the detectable size from A3 , A4, A5 , B4 JIS , or B5 JIS to 8K , 16K,
contact your service representative.
*5 Default is 11 × 17 . If you want to switch the detectable size from 11 × 17 to 8K , contact your
service representative.
*6 Default is 81/2 × 11. If you want to switch the detectable size from 81/2 × 11 to 16K , contact your
service representative.
*7 Default is 81/4 × 13 . If you want to switch the detectable size from 81/2 × 13 to 8 × 13 or
81/2 × 13 , contact your service representative.
(mainly North America)

Original 81/2 × 14 81/2 × 11 81/2 × 11 51/2 × 51/2 ×

11 × 17
location 81/2 81/2

Exposure *6 *1 *1 -*2
glass

ADF *5 *4 *3 *3

217
 9. Adding Paper and Toner

Original location 10 × 14 71/4 × 101/2 A3 A4

Exposure glass - - - -*1

ADF

: Detectable size, -: Undetectable size

*1 Default is 81/2 × 11. If you want to switch the detectable size from 81/2 × 11 to A4, contact your
service representative.
*2 If you want to detect sizes smaller than 51/2 × 81/2 , contact your service representative.
*3 Default is 81/2 × 11. If you want to switch the detectable size from 81/2 × 11 to 8 × 10 or 71/4 ×
101/2 , contact your service representative.
*4 Default is 81/2 × 14 . If you want to switch the detectable size from 81/2 × 14 to 81/2 × 132/5
or 81/2 × 13 , contact your service representative.
*5 Default is 11 × 17 . If you want to switch the detectable size from 11 × 17 to 11 × 15K , contact
your service representative.
*6 You can switch the detectable size from 81/2 × 14 to 81/2 × 132/5 by using [Auto Detect: Switch
Paper Size Detected Legal/Oficio] in the Tray Paper Settings menu.

• If the original type is one of the following, the machine may not be able to detect the paper size
automatically. Select the paper size manually.
• Dark originals with a lot of text and drawings
• Originals that partially contain a solid image
• Originals that have solid images at their edges
• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts
• Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper
• Originals with glossy surfaces
• Bound originals with a thickness of more than 10 mm (0.4 inches), such as books
• When the ADF scans an original of a size that cannot be detected automatically, the size of the
scanned image will be different from the original.
• When loading an original of a size that is not automatically detected, specify the original size or
select the paper tray that is the same size as the original. The output image may not be full size or it
may be different from the intended one if the print settings are not specified properly.

218
 Replacing the Toner

Replacing the Toner

You can view the procedure to replace the toner by watching a movie that is displayed on the control
panel.
See "Contact Information", User Guide (Full Version).

• Replace the toner after the message prompting replacement is displayed on the control panel.
• The machine may become damaged if you use toner of a different type.
• Do not turn off the power of the machine when replacing the toner. If you turn off the power when
replenishing the toner, the specified settings are canceled, and printing will not resume afterwards.
• Store the toner in a dry environment away from direct sunlight and generally under the temperature
below 35°C.
• Keep the toner horizontal when storing it.
• After removing the print cartridge from the machine, do not shake it while its opening is facing
downward. The remaining toner may spill out.
• After removing the toner cartridge, do not touch the interior of the machine.
• Do not pull out and put back the toner cartridge repeatedly. The remaining toner may leak.
• Follow the procedure displayed on the screen to replenish the toner.

1. Press [Watch Video].

D0C9PA8225

Press [Check Status] and then press [Check] under [Machine Status] tab.
2. Press the play ( ) key.
3. Replace the toner by following the procedure shown in the video.

• You can transmit data in the fax or scanner function even after the toner runs out. However, you
cannot transmit a fax when the number of times of reception and transmission performed in the fax
function after the toner has run out and the number of times of communication not recorded in the
Records exceeds a total of 1,000. Replace the toner earlier.

219
 9. Adding Paper and Toner

• While the message prompting you to replace the toner is displayed, Memory Storage Report for
Memory Transmission will not be printed.
• If appears when there is a lot of toner, hold the cartridge with the opening upward, shake it
well, and then reinstall it.

Precautions When Storing Toner

• Do not store toner (new or used) or toner containers while toner is inside in a place with an open
flame. The toner can ignite and result in burns or fire.

• Do not leave the following items in a place where children can reach them:
• Toner (new or used)
• Toner containers while toner is inside
• Toner-attached parts

Precautions When Replacing the Toner

• Do not dispose of the following items into a fire. Toner will ignite on contact with naked flame
and burns can result.
• Toner (new or used)
• Toner containers while toner is inside
• Toner-attached parts

• Do not absorb spilled toner (including used toner) using a vacuum cleaner. Absorbed toner may
cause ignition or explosion due to electric contact sparks inside the vacuum cleaner. However,
you can use a toner-compatible industrial vacuum cleaner. When toner is spilled, remove the
spilled toner using a wet cloth so that the toner is not scattered.

• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this product's
packaging:
• Do not leave the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this machine close to babies
and small children. Suffocation can result if polythene materials are brought into contact
with the mouth or nose.

220
 Replacing the Toner

• When the following occurs while toner is handled, receive emergency measures first, and then
consult a doctor if necessary.
• When inhaling toner, gargle with a large amount of water and move into a fresh air
environment.
• When swallowing toner, dilute gastric contents with a large amount of water.
• When getting toner into your eyes, flush them with a large amount of water.

• When removing jammed paper, replenishing or replacing toner (new or used), make sure not to
inhale toner.

• When removing jammed paper, replenishing or replacing toner (new or used), be careful not to
have toner dirt your skin or clothes.

• If toner (new or used) comes into contact with your skin or clothes and smears them, take the
following actions:
• If toner comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and
water.
• If toner comes into contact with your clothes, wash the stained area with cold water.
Heating the stained area by applying hot water will set the toner into the fabric and
removing the stain may become impossible.

• When replacing a container with toner (including used toner) or consumables with toner, be
careful that the toner does not splatter. After removing used consumables and shutting the lid of
the container if the lid is available, put them in a bag.

• Do not open toner containers forcibly while toner is inside, crush or squeeze them. Toner
spillage can cause accidental ingestion or dirtying of clothes, hands, or floor.

Disposing Exhausted Toners

You cannot reuse exhausted toners.

When disposing a depleted print cartridge, place the cartridge in a box or plastic bag while paying
attention not to spill any toner powder.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
If you want to discard your used toner container, please contact your local sales office. If you discard it
by yourself, treat it as general plastic waste material.
(mainly North America)

221
 9. Adding Paper and Toner

Please see our local company website for information on the recycling of supply products, or you can
recycle items according to the requirements of your local municipalities or private recyclers.

222
 Replenishing the Staples

Replenishing the Staples

Contact your consumable supplier and prepare new staples for replenishment when the "Staples are
almost out." message is displayed. Replace the staples after the message prompting replacement is
displayed on the control panel.

• When operating the machine, do not put your hand inside the booklet finisher tray of the
finisher's staple unit. You may trap your fingers in the machine's gap and injury can result.

• Stapling failures or jams may occur if you use a staple cartridge other than that recommended.
Confirming the supplier of consumables
Press [Machine Information] on the [Check Status] screen to display the telephone number for
ordering consumables.
See "Contact Information", User Guide (Full Version).
Replenishing the staples
Replenish the staples while watching the video displayed on the screen for the procedure.

1. Press [Watch Video].

D0C9PA8225

Press [Check Status] and then press [Check] under [Machine Status] tab.
2. Press the play ( ) key.
3. Replenish the staples while watching the video.

• If you cannot raise the upper unit by holding on both ends of the cartridge, there are staples still
remaining inside. Continue using the machine without replenishing the staples.

223
 9. Adding Paper and Toner

Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle

The waste toner bottle needs to be replaced soon when the "Waste Toner Bottle is almost full." message
is displayed. Prepare a replacement waste toner bottle.
See "Contact Information", User Guide (Full Version).
See the video displayed on the control panel of the machine for the procedure to replace the waste
toner bottle.

• For safe and correct use, please be sure to read Safety Information before replacing the machine's
supplies.
• You cannot reuse the waste toner bottle.
• To prevent the toner being spilled on the floor, table, or other object from the removed waste toner
bottle, cover these objects with sheets of newspaper.

1. Press [Watch Video].

D0C9PA8225

Press [Check Status] and then press [Check] under [Machine Status] tab.
2. Press the play ( ) key.
3. Replace the waste toner bottle by following the procedure shown in the video.

Precautions When Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle

• Do not store toner (new or used) or toner containers while toner is inside in a place with an open
flame. The toner can ignite and result in burns or fire.

224
 Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle

• Do not dispose of the following items into a fire. Toner will ignite on contact with naked flame
and burns can result.
• Toner (new or used)
• Toner containers while toner is inside
• Toner-attached parts

• Do not absorb spilled toner (including used toner) using a vacuum cleaner. Absorbed toner may
cause ignition or explosion due to electric contact sparks inside the vacuum cleaner. However,
you can use a toner-compatible industrial vacuum cleaner. When toner is spilled, remove the
spilled toner using a wet cloth so that the toner is not scattered.

• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this product's
packaging:
• Do not leave the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this machine close to babies
and small children. Suffocation can result if polythene materials are brought into contact
with the mouth or nose.

• Do not leave the following items in a place where children can reach them:
• Toner (new or used)
• Toner containers while toner is inside
• Toner-attached parts

• When the following occurs while toner is handled, receive emergency measures first, and then
consult a doctor if necessary.
• When inhaling toner, gargle with a large amount of water and move into a fresh air
environment.
• When swallowing toner, dilute gastric contents with a large amount of water.
• When getting toner into your eyes, flush them with a large amount of water.

• When removing jammed paper, replenishing or replacing toner (new or used), make sure not to
inhale toner.

• When removing jammed paper, replenishing or replacing toner (new or used), be careful not to
have toner dirt your skin or clothes.

225
 9. Adding Paper and Toner

• If toner (new or used) comes into contact with your skin or clothes and smears them, take the
following actions:
• If toner comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected area thoroughly with soap and
water.
• If toner comes into contact with your clothes, wash the stained area with cold water.
Heating the stained area by applying hot water will set the toner into the fabric and
removing the stain may become impossible.

• When replacing a container with toner (including used toner) or consumables with toner, be
careful that the toner does not splatter. After removing used consumables and shutting the lid of
the container if the lid is available, put them in a bag.

• Do not open toner containers forcibly while toner is inside, crush or squeeze them. Toner
spillage can cause accidental ingestion or dirtying of clothes, hands, or floor.

Disposing the Used Waste Toner Bottle

When disposing the used waste toner bottle, place the bottle in a box or plastic bag while paying
attention not to spill any toner powder.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
If you want to discard your used waste toner bottle, please contact your local sales office. If you discard
it by yourself, treat it as general plastic waste material.
(mainly North America)
Please see our local company website for information on the recycling of supply products, or you can
recycle items according to the requirements of your local municipalities or private recyclers.

226
10. Troubleshooting

Alert Sounds
The machine notifies you with an alert sound when a paper jam occurs, the original is left on the
machine, or another problem occurs. Listen to the alert sound for one of the patterns described below,
and perform the required procedure accordingly.

Sound pattern*1 Condition Solution

A short beep Touch/Notification Sound -

Login Sound/Logout Sound

A short beep, followed by Invalid Operation Sound If you entered an incorrect password,
long beep enter the correct password.
If you hear this sound when touching
an icon or key, you do not have
permission to use the function or
setting. Log in to the machine as a user
with permission, or consult your user
administrator.

A long beep Operation Completed Sound Check the operation result.

Copy: Job Done Sound
Fax Printing Ended Sound
Fax Transmission Ended Sound
Fax Reception Ended Sound

Two long beeps Warm-up Sound The machine is ready for use after the
machine is turned on or recovers from
the sleep mode.

Five long beeps Auto Reset Sound The machine has been reset to the
default state after the specified period
of time has passed with the machine
unoperated. If you were performing
and paused an operation, perform the
operation from the beginning again.

227
 10. Troubleshooting

Sound pattern*1 Condition Solution

Five long beeps Caution Sound Check that an original is not left on the
(repeating four times) Copy: Forgot Original Sound exposure glass and that paper is
loaded in the paper tray.
Scanner: Forgot Original
Sound
Fax: Forgot Original Sound

Five short beeps Warning Sound Check the message displayed on the
(repeating five times) screen, and resolve the problem by
removing the jammed paper or
original, or replacing the toner.

12 short beeps Blank Page Detected Sound Check that the original is placed in the
ADF with the side to scan facing up.

*1 The factory default sound pattern is used as an example in the table above.

• You cannot pause an alert sound that has started. The machine continues to emit the sound until the
preset sound pattern is completed.
• You can specify the volume and type of alert sound in [Settings] [System Settings] [Sound].
The type of sound can be specified for each condition described in the table above. You can also
specify the volume of the sound emitted when using On-hook or Immediate Transmission to send a
fax in [Settings] [Fax Settings] [Others] [Adjust Sound Volume]. Press [Home] ( ) after
specifying the settings.
• See "Setting the Sound Volume and Type", User Guide (Full Version).

228
 Checking the Indicators, Icons, and Messages on the Control Panel

Checking the Indicators, Icons, and Messages

on the Control Panel
The machine notifies you of the machine condition or status of an application with the [Check Status]
indicator or a message displayed on the control panel. Check the status and resolve the problem
accordingly.
Message

[Check Status] indicator

DZC702

• Message
Displays a message indicating the status of the machine or application. Press the message to
display it in full text. You can also view more than one message as a list.
• [Check Status] indicator
If there is a problem such as a paper jam, the [Check Status] indicator lights up or flashes along
with a message displayed on the screen. Press [Check Status] to check the status of the machine or
application, and resolve the problem accordingly.

When an Icon is Displayed with a Message

When you need to resolve a problem such as a paper jam, an icon is displayed at the beginning of a
message. See the table below for the meaning of each icon.

Icon Condition Solution and reference

Maintenance or repair is required. Prepare for maintenance or consider

repairing the machine.

229
 10. Troubleshooting

Icon Condition Solution and reference

Paper is jammed. See the animated illustration displayed on the

control panel, and remove the jammed
paper.
See "When Paper or an Original Is Jammed",
User Guide (Full Version).

An original has jammed. See the animated illustration displayed on the

control panel, and remove the jammed
original.
See "When Paper or an Original Is Jammed",
User Guide (Full Version).

Paper has run out. Load paper into the paper tray.
page 185 "Loading Paper into the Paper
Tray"

Toner is almost depleted, or has run out. Prepare a replacement toner. Replace the
toner when it runs out.
page 219 "Replacing the Toner"

• If appears when there is a lot of toner,

pull out the print cartridge by following
the toner replacement procedure that is
displayed on the screen, and then set it
back again.

The waste toner bottle is full, or almost full. Prepare a replacement waste toner bottle.
Replace the bottle when it becomes full.
page 224 "Replacing the Waste Toner Bottle"

Staples are nearly depleted, or have run Prepare a cartridge for replacement, and
out. load it when the staples run out.
page 223 "Replenishing the Staples"

The hole punch receptacle is full. Empty the receptacle.

See "When the Hole Punch Receptacle Is
Full", User Guide (Full Version).

A cover is open. Check that all covers of the machine and

options are closed.

230
 Checking the Indicators, Icons, and Messages on the Control Panel

• For the names and the contact information of consumables, check [Settings] [Inquiry]. Press
[Home] ( ) after completing the operation to close [Settings].
• See "Contact Information", User Guide (Full Version).

When the [Check Status] Indicator is lit or flashing

The [Check Status] indicator notifies the user when the machine requires immediate attention.
Flashing in red
The machine is unavailable for use. Press [Check Status] and resolve the problem as soon as
possible.
Flashing in yellow
Maintenance on the machine needs to be performed soon. Perform the required procedure
accordingly.
You can display the status confirmation screen with [Check Status]. On the screen, check the detailed
status of the machine or application.

1. Press [Check Status].

DZC703

2. Press [Check] to check the details, and perform the required procedure.
page 229 "When an Icon is Displayed with a Message"

D0CHPA5807

: The machine cannot be used.

231
 10. Troubleshooting

: Some of the functions cannot be used, or the toner is almost depleted.

• Depending on the machine condition, such as a paper jam or open cover, the status confirmation
screen may be displayed automatically without pressing [Check Status].

232
 When the Machine Cannot Be Operated

When the Machine Cannot Be Operated

• If a message is displayed on the screen, check the message.

• page 239 "When a Message Appears and the Machine Cannot Be Operated"
• When confirming or changing the settings in [Settings], press [Home] ( ) after completing the
operation to close [Settings].

When the Machine Does Not Respond Correctly to an Operation on the

Control Panel

Condition Cause Solution and reference

The screen of the control The machine is in the sleep Touch the screen.
panel is not lit. mode.

Nothing is displayed The power of the machine is Check that the main power indicator is not
when you touch the turned off. lit, and then turn on the main power of the
screen. machine.
page 17 "Turning On and Off the Power"

The power of the The power cable is Connect the ground wire, and plug the
machine does not come unplugged from the wall power cable into the wall outlet.
on. outlet. See "Installation Requirements After
Moving the Machine", User Guide (Full
Version).

The machine is connected to You cannot use an extension cord.

an extension cord. After checking that the screen is not lit when
you touch it and the main power indicator
is unlit, remove the extension cord and plug
the power cable directly into the wall
outlet.

There may be a problem After checking that the screen is not lit when
with the wall outlet. you touch it and the main power indicator
is unlit, plug the power cord into a
confirmed operating wall outlet.

233
 10. Troubleshooting

Condition Cause Solution and reference

Only the copy icon is The functions other than the The time required for a function to start up
displayed when the copy function are starting varies depending on the function. Wait a
machine is turned on. up. while.

Only some of the menu The functions other than the The time required for a function to start up
items are displayed copy function are starting varies depending on the function. More
when you press up. items on the menu in [Settings] are
[Settings] after turning on displayed as the functions start up. Wait a
the power of the while.
machine.

The login screen is Basic Authentication, Enter the login user name and password,
displayed. Windows Authentication, or and then press [Login]. For the login user
LDAP Authentication is name and password, consult the user
specified. administrator.
page 57 "Logging In from the Control
Panel"

The User Code entry User Code authentication is Enter the User Code, and press [OK].
screen is displayed. specified. Consult the user administrator for the user
code.

A function is not Another function that cannot Wait for the function in progress to end,
executed, or you cannot be used with the specified and then perform the next operation. For
perform an operation. function at the same time is details about functions that cannot be used
being executed. at the same time, see the following section:
page 386 "Function Compatibility"
When a backup of the address book is
being created using Web Image Monitor
or another method, the next function is
executed after the backup is completed.

234
 When the Machine Cannot Be Operated

Condition Cause Solution and reference

The key is unresponsive, A malfunction is temporarily Turn off the power of the machine, wait for
or another key is occurring on the machine. 10 seconds or more after confirming that
activated. There is a device or the main power indicator is turned off, and
equipment that is generating then turn on the power again.
Multi-touch, such as
noise in the vicinity. page 17 "Turning On and Off the Power"
pinch-in and pinch-out,
does not work properly. If the message persists even after you have
turned the power off and then on, consider
You cannot interrupt A malfunction is temporarily repairing the machine.
copying even after occurring on the machine.
pressing [Stop] while the
copy function is
operating.

You cannot interrupt Basic Authentication, Log in to the machine as the user who
copying or scanning Windows Authentication, or started the copying or scanning operation
even after pressing LDAP Authentication is or as the machine administrator, and press
[Stop], and the login specified, and the user who [Stop].
screen is displayed. started the copying or
scanning operation has
logged out.

Help is not displayed The application that is The help function cannot be used when
when you press [Help] currently in use does not is grayed out. Close the application or
( ). support the help function, or message, and then try again.
is grayed out because
"Paper Misfeed" or another
message is being displayed.

is grayed out because The help function cannot be used if the user
the user does not have does not have permission to use the
permission to use the browser function. If is always grayed
browser function. out, consult the user administrator to check
whether you have permission to use the
browser function. The user administrator
can change the access permissions in the
address book.
See "Confirming the Available Functions",
User Guide (Full Version).

235
 10. Troubleshooting

Condition Cause Solution and reference

The screen changes to The machine is not Check if you can display a web page in
Web Browser when you connected to the network [Web Browser]. If a web page cannot be
press [Help] ( ), but correctly. displayed, check that the machine is
the help content is not connected to the network correctly.
displayed. See "Selecting the Network Connection
Method", User Guide (Full Version).

The browser is configured Check that [Web Browser] [Menu]

not to save cookies. ( ) [Settings] [Privacy & security]
[Accept cookies] check box is selected.

The screen remains The machine is in a Check the conditions in which the machine
turned on and the condition that does not does not enter the sleep mode.
machine does not enter allow the machine to enter page 17 "Turning On and Off the Power"
the sleep mode when the sleep mode.
you press [Energy
Saving] ( ).

The machine does not The shutdown operation Press the main power switch again.
shut down when more could not be performed If the message persists even after you have
than four minutes have normally. turned the power off and then on, consider
passed after you press repairing the machine.
the main power switch.

The power of the [Main Power Off] is Check [Weekly Timer Easy Settings] and
machine is turned off specified in the weekly [Weekly Timer Detailed Settings] on
automatically. timer. [Settings] [System Settings] [Date/
Time/Timer] [Timer].

236
 When the Machine Cannot Be Operated

When the Machine Does Not Respond Correctly to an Operation from a

Computer

Condition Cause Solution and reference

When using the address A certificate is not installed Install the certificate on the computer.
book from Device on the computer when Consult your network administrator for the
Manager NX, an SSL/TLS is enabled on the certificate.
incorrect password error machine.
is displayed even when
you enter the correct An item other than [Simple Specify [Simple Encryption] in "Driver
login user name and Encryption] is specified in Encryption Key:Encryption Strength" in
password. "Driver Encryption [Settings] [System Settings] [Settings
Key:Encryption Strength". for Administrator] [Security]
[Extended Security Settings].

You cannot access the There is a problem with the Check the cable connecting the machine
machine using Web connection between the and the computer, and disconnect and then
Image Monitor. machine and the computer. connect the cable again. Also, check the
connection to the hub or router, and turn off
and on the power of the device if possible.
Next, turn off the power of the machine,
wait for 10 seconds or more after
confirming that the main power indicator is
turned off, and then turn on the power.
page 17 "Turning On and Off the Power"

A proxy server is specified. In the proxy setting of the Web browser,

specify the IP address of the machine as an
exception. You can check the IP address in
[Check Status] "Network".

237
 10. Troubleshooting

Condition Cause Solution and reference

"There is a problem with [Permit SSL/TLS Click [Continue to this website (not
this website's security Communication] is set to recommended).].
certificate." is displayed [Ciphertext Only]. To specify not to display the message, log
and you cannot connect in to the machine in the administrator
to the machine when mode, and specify [Ciphertext/Cleartext]
accessing the machine in [SSL/TLS] "Permit SSL/TLS
using Web Image Communication" under [Device
Monitor. Management] [Configuration]
"Security".

"https" is entered at the Do not enter "s" after "http".

beginning of the URL.

238
 When a Message Appears and the Machine Cannot Be Operated

When a Message Appears and the Machine

Cannot Be Operated
Message Condition Solution and reference

"Service Call" The machine needs to Consider repairing the machine.

SCxxx-xx be repaired.

Contact
Serial No. of Machine

"Functional Problems" A malfunction that Prepare for maintenance or consider repairing

SCxxx-xx requires maintenance or the machine.
repair has occurred. • If a message prompts you to turn the
Contact
power of the machine off and then on, the
Serial No. of Machine
problem may be resolved by turning off
the power, waiting for 10 seconds or
more after confirming that the main
power indicator is turned off, and then
turning on the power.
page 17 "Turning On and Off the Power"
• When "Press [Cancel] to cancel
functions." is displayed, you can continue
using the machine except for the function
in which the malfunction is occurring after
pressing [Cancel].

"Please wait." The machine is Wait a while. Turn off the power of the
recovering from the machine if the message persists after five
sleep mode. minutes, wait for 10 seconds or more after
confirming that the main power indicator is
turned off, and then turn on the power.
page 17 "Turning On and Off the Power"

239
 10. Troubleshooting

Message Condition Solution and reference

"Please wait." The machine is Wait a while and do not turn off the power of
preparing to perform a the machine.
function or executing the
image stabilization
process.

The ambient Check the room temperature and whether it

temperature is outside satisfies the operational requirements of the
the temperature range machine. If the machine has just been moved
specified for the to the current location, leave it be for some
machine operation. time and allow it to adapt to the environment
before use.
See "Installation Requirements After Moving
the Machine", User Guide (Full Version).
If the message persists after five minutes even
when the room temperature is within the
specifications, wait for 10 seconds or more
after confirming that the main power indicator
is turned off, and then turn on the power.
page 17 "Turning On and Off the Power"

"Please wait." A consumable or supply Wait a while and do not turn off the power of
such as the toner has the machine. Turn off the power of the machine
been replenished. if the message persists after five minutes, wait
for 10 seconds or more after confirming that
the main power indicator is turned off, and
then turn on the power.
page 17 "Turning On and Off the Power"

"Shutting down... Please The power of the Wait until the power is turned off.
wait. Main power will be machine was turned off
turned off automatically. while the machine was
Maximum waiting time: 4 starting up or in the
minute(s)" standby mode.

• If the message persists even after you have performed the operations as instructed in the following
message, a malfunction may temporarily occur on the machine. Turn off the power of the machine,
wait for 10 seconds or more after confirming that the main power indicator is turned off, and then
turn on the power.

240
 When a Message Appears and the Machine Cannot Be Operated

• "Cover Open"
• "Add Toner" / "Add Staples"
• "Waste Toner Bottle is full." / "Hole Punch Receptacle is full."
• "Original left on exposure glass."
• "No paper."
• page 17 "Turning On and Off the Power"

241
 10. Troubleshooting

When a Message Appears While Using the

Copy Function
Message Condition Solution and reference

"Cannot Detect Original An original is not placed Place the original correctly. When you place
Size" correctly on the an original on the exposure glass, the machine
machine. detects the original size by opening and
closing the exposure glass cover or ADF.
Open the cover or ADF by more than 30
degrees when placing an original.

An original with a When scanning an original with a difficult-to-

difficult-to-detect size detect size, specify the paper tray in [Paper
even in the regular size, Select]. Also, when making an enlarged or
such as a transparency reduced copy, select an item other than [Fit to
or paper with sticky Paper Size]
notes, is placed on the page 217 "Sizes Detectable with Auto Paper
machine. Select"

An original of a custom When scanning an original of a custom size,

size is placed on the specify the original size in [Original Setting]
machine. [Original Size] [Custom Size].

"Cannot XXX paper of A paper size that is not Check the paper size supported in Duplex
this size." supported in Duplex copying and the specified finishing type and
"XXX is not available with copying or the specified load the supported paper.
this paper size." finishing type is page 304 "List of Specifications"
specified.
("2 Sided Copy" or the
name of specified
finishing appears in
place of XXX)

"Exceeded the maximum The maximum number of Check the number of sheets that can be
number of multi-sheet sheets that can be specified for multi-sheet fold, and then reduce
fold." specified for multi-sheet the number of originals before loading them.
fold has been page 304 "List of Specifications"
exceeded.

242
 When a Message Appears While Using the Copy Function

Message Condition Solution and reference

"Exceeded the maximum When the copy volume For details about the copy volume use
number of sheets that can use limitation is limitation, consult the user administrator. The
be used. Copying will be enabled, copying was user administrator can change the limit on the
stopped." canceled because the copy volume use.
copy volume of the user See "Specifying Maximum Print Volume Use of
exceeded the upper Each User", User Guide (Full Version).
limit allotted for the user.

"Set next original(s) Duplex copying is When not copying onto both sides of paper,
within the following specified. clear the [1 sided 2 sided] and [2 sided 2
seconds, then press sided] check boxes.
[Start]."

"Stapling capacity The number of sheets Check the number of sheets that can stapled
exceeded." that can be stapled together at a time, and reduce the number of
together is exceeded. sheets in the original placed on the machine.
page 304 "List of Specifications"

243
 10. Troubleshooting

When a Message Appears While Using

Document Server
For details about the messages that are displayed when printing a document, see the descriptions of the
messages that are displayed in the copy function.
page 242 "When a Message Appears While Using the Copy Function"

Message Condition Solution and reference

"Cannot delete the folder The folder contains a Request the file administrator to unlock the
because it contains locked document. document. The file administrator can unlock
locked file(s). Contact the documents.
file administrator." See "Specifying Access Privileges for
Documents Stored in Document Server", User
Guide (Full Version).

"Cannot detect original An original is not placed Place the original correctly. When you place
size." on the machine. an original on the exposure glass, the machine
detects the original size by opening and
closing the exposure glass cover or ADF.
Open the cover or ADF by more than 30
degrees when placing an original.

An original with a When scanning an original of a difficult-to-

difficult-to-detect size detect size, specify the paper tray. Also, when
even in the regular size, making an enlarged or reduced copy, select
such as a transparency an item other than [Auto Reduce / Enlarge].
or paper with sticky page 217 "Sizes Detectable with Auto Paper
notes, is placed on the Select"
machine.

An original with a When scanning an original with a custom size,

custom size is placed on specify the original size in [Original Settings]
the machine. [Original Size] [Custom Size].

"Cannot display preview The format of the image Press [Confirm] to display the preview screen
of this page." data is corrupted. without a thumbnail. If the image data
comprises multiple pages, press to display
a different page.

244
 When a Message Appears While Using Document Server

Message Condition Solution and reference

"Magazine or Booklet A document scanned in You cannot specify [Booklet] or [Magazine] to

mode cannot be used for the copy function and a the document comprising data stored in the
data stored with mixed document stored in the different functions.
functions." printer function are
selected together, and
[Booklet] or [Magazine]
is specified.

"The selected folder is The wrong password Request the file administrator to unlock the
locked. Please contact was entered 10 times folder. The file administrator can unlock
the file administrator." while performing folders.
operation on a See "Managing Folders as a File
password-protected Administrator", User Guide (Full Version).
folder, and the folder is
locked.

245
 10. Troubleshooting

When a Message Appears While Using the

Fax Function

• When confirming or changing the settings in [Settings], press [Home] ( ) after closing [Settings].

Messages that Appear During Operation or When Sending/Receiving a Fax

Cannot Be Performed

Message Condition Solution and reference

"Cannot detect original An original is not placed Place the original correctly. When you place
size." correctly on the an original on the exposure glass, the machine
machine. detects the original size by opening and
closing the exposure glass cover or ADF.
Open the cover or ADF by more than 30
degrees when placing an original.

An original with a Specify [Scan Size] in [Settings].

difficult-to-detect size,
even in the regular size,
such as a transparency
or paper with sticky
notes or a custom size
original, is placed on
the machine.

"Cannot receive emails The machine is receiving Wait a while, and press [Manual Reception:
currently." a On-demand Email Email].
Notification (a query e-
mail from the
administrator), and
manual reception
cannot be performed.

246
 When a Message Appears While Using the Fax Function

Message Condition Solution and reference

"Error occurred, and An original had jammed Press [Confirm], remove the jammed original,
transmission was while sending a fax. and then send the fax again.
cancelled."
An error occurred Press [Confirm] and send the fax again.
temporarily in the
machine, or there was
interference on the line
such as excessive noise
or cross-talk.

"Functional problem The power of the Even if you turn on the power immediately, you
occurred. Stopped machine was lost while may not be able to resume reception until the
processing." receiving an Internet timeout duration has passed depending on the
Fax. settings of the e-mail server. Wait a while. To
receive the fax manually, wait until the
duration has passed and then operate the
machine to perform reception. For the timeout
duration, consult the administrator.

"Memory is full. Cannot The memory is full. Press [Confirm] to return to the stand-by state
scan more. Transmitting and start sending the pages that are already
only scanned pages." scanned and stored. Check the transmission
result report for unsent pages, and send those
pages later.

"Some invalid A folder destination is When sending a fax to a destination other than
destination(s) contained. included in the group. a folder destination, press [Select].
Do you want to select
only valid
destination(s)?"

• If the JPEG/PDF file that is attached to an e-mail sent to the machine cannot be printed, check the
message and resolve the problem accordingly.
• page 260 "When a Message Appears While Using the Printer Function"

Messages that Appear When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Network

For details about your network environment, consult the network administrator.

247
 10. Troubleshooting

Message Condition Solution and reference

"Check whether there are The destination device • Check that the computer specified as the
any network did not respond. destination is operating normally and
problems."[14-01] connected to the network.
• Check that the machine is connected to
the network correctly.

"Check whether there are You do not have Check the access permission settings of the
any network permission to access the shared folder on the destination computer.
problems."[14-03] shared folder specified page 156 "Scanning Documents and Sending
as the destination. the Scanned Data to a Folder"

"Check whether there are The shared folder Creating a shared folder on the destination
any network specified as the transfer computer. To check the folder name, select the
problems."[14-07] destination cannot be destination in the address book, press [Edit],
found in Folder Transfer. and see "Path" in [Destinations] tab [Folder].
See "Transferring a Received Fax Document to
E-mail Address or Folder", User Guide (Full
Version).

The amount of available Check that the computer specified as the

hard disk space on the transfer destination has enough free space.
destination computer is
insufficient to perform
Folder Transfer.

"Check whether there are The password Select the forwarding destination in the
any network registered in the address address book, press [Edit], and specify a
problems."[14-09] book is invalid when password in the [Destinations] tab [Folder]
performing Folder [Folder Authentication Info].
Transfer.

"Check whether there are [Fax Email Account] is Register email address, user name, and
any network not specified. password in [Settings] [Fax Settings]
problems."[14-33] [Detailed Initial Settings] [Fax Email
Account].

"Check whether there are The destination to which Register the destination folder to the address
any network to perform Folder book.
problems."[14-51] Transfer was deleted See "Registering the Destination Folder to Use
from the address book. for Send to Folder", User Guide (Full Version).

248
 When a Message Appears While Using the Fax Function

Message Condition Solution and reference

"Check whether there are The POP3 (IMAP4) Check the settings in [Reception Protocol],
any network server could not be [POP3/IMAP4 Settings] and [Email
problems."[15-11] found. Communication Port] on [Settings] [System
Settings] [Send (Email/Folder)] [Email].

The DNS server could Check the [DNS Configuration] setting on

not be found. [Settings] [System Settings] [Network/
Interface].

The machine is not Check that the machine is connected to the

connected to the network correctly.
network.

"Network communication The SIP server could not Specify the correct "SIP Server IP Address" in
has failed. Cannot be accessed. [Settings] [Fax Settings] [Detailed Initial
access the SIP server. Settings] [IP-Fax Settings] [SIP Settings].
Please check the address See "Sending Documents by IP-Fax", User
setting of the SIP server Guide (Full Version).
or the SIP server
settings."

"Network communication The destination device is Sending a fax using the IP-Fax function is not
has failed. Cannot unable to connect with possible. Send the fax using the G3 line if
connect to the destination the IP-Fax function of possible.
normally because there the machine.
is no IP-FAX function
compatibility between
the destination and this
machine."

"Network communication The SIP server rejected Specify the correct "SIP Server IP Address" and
has failed. Cannot the registration of the "SIP User Name" in [Settings] [Fax Settings]
register this machine to user name. [Detailed Initial Settings] [IP-Fax
SIP server. Please check Settings] [SIP Settings].
the address setting of the See "Sending Documents by IP-Fax", User
SIP server or other Guide (Full Version).
settings of the SIP server."

249
 10. Troubleshooting

Message Condition Solution and reference

"Network communication The POP3 (IMAP4) Check the settings in [Reception Protocol],
has failed. Failed to server could not be [POP3/IMAP4 Settings] and [Email
connect to POP/IMAP found. Communication Port] on [Settings] [System
server. Please check Settings] [Send (Email/Folder)] [Email].
machine settings and the
status of server and The DNS server could Check the [DNS Configuration] setting on
network." not be found. [Settings] [System Settings] [Network/
Interface].

The machine is not Check that the machine is connected to the

connected to the network correctly.
network.

"Network communication The SMTP server could Check [SMTP Server] on [Settings] [System
has failed. Failed to not be found. Settings] [Send (Email/Folder)] [Email].
connect to the
destination. Please check The DNS server could Check [DNS Configuration] on [Settings]
if the destination is not be found. [System Settings] [Network/Interface].
correct and destination The machine is not Check that the machine is connected to the
machine status." connected to the network correctly.
network.

Communication with the • Check that the computer specified as the

destination specified for transfer destination is operating normally
Folder Transfer could and connected to the network.
not be established • Check the transfer settings.
properly.
See "Transferring a Received Fax
Document to E-mail Address or Folder",
User Guide (Full Version).

The destination could Check that the destination is specified correctly.

not be found when the See "Sending Internet Faxes without Using
fax was sent without SMTP Server", User Guide (Full Version).
using the SMTP server.

250
 When a Message Appears While Using the Fax Function

Message Condition Solution and reference

"Network communication The shared folder Specify the destination from the address book,
has failed. Failed to specified as the press [Edit], and check that the setting in the
connect to the destination destination of Folder [Destinations] tab [Folder] matches the
folder. Please check if the Transfer cannot be folder name or path of the shared folder on the
destination is correct and found. destination computer.
destination machine If the shared folder on the destination computer
settings." has been deleted, create the folder.
See "Transferring a Received Fax Document to
E-mail Address or Folder", User Guide (Full
Version).

"Network communication A malfunction is Check that the SMTP server and the computer
has failed. Failed to occurring on the SMTP specified as the transfer destination are
send. Please check a server or the computer functioning normally.
destination machine specified as the
status and both destination when
authentication setting of sending an e-mail
destination machine and without using the SMTP
this machine." server.

"Network communication No free space is Check that free space is available on the SMTP
has failed. Failed to available on an SMTP server and the destination computer.
send. Please check server, the computer
destination machine specified as the
status and remaining destination for Folder
memory." Transfer, or the
computer specified as
the destination when
sending an e-mail
without using the SMTP
server.

"Network communication The specified Check the destination e-mail address, and
has failed. Failed to destination does not specify again if necessary.
send. Please check if the exist.
destination is correct."
The destination could Check that the destination is specified correctly.
not be found when the See "Sending Internet Faxes without Using
fax was sent without SMTP Server", User Guide (Full Version).
using the SMTP server.

251
 10. Troubleshooting

Message Condition Solution and reference

"Network communication A malfunction is Check that the SMTP server and the destination
has failed. Failed to occurring on an SMTP computer are functioning normally.
send. Please check status server, the computer
and settings of the specified as the
destination machine." destination for Folder
Transfer, or the
computer specified as
the destination when
sending an e-mail
without using the SMTP
server.

"Network communication A malfunction is Check that the SMTP server and the destination
has failed. Failed to occurring on an SMTP computers are functioning normally.
send. Please check the server, the computer
access privilege setting specified as the
of the destination." destination for Folder
Transfer, or the
computer specified as
the destination when
sending an e-mail
without using the SMTP
server.

The shared folder Creating a shared folder on the destination

specified as the transfer computer. To check the folder name, select the
destination cannot be destination in the address book, press [Edit],
found in Folder Transfer. and see "Path" in [Destinations] tab [Folder].
See "Transferring a Received Fax Document to
E-mail Address or Folder", User Guide (Full
Version).

The user name and/or Select the forwarding destination in the

password registered in address book, press [Edit], and specify
the address book are [Destinations] tab [Folder] [Folder
invalid when performing Authentication Info] again.
Folder Transfer. See "Registering the Destination Folder to Use
for Send to Folder", User Guide (Full Version).

252
 When a Message Appears While Using the Fax Function

Message Condition Solution and reference

"Network communication The administrator e-mail • Specify [Settings] [System Settings]

has failed. Failed to address is not registered [Send (Email/Folder)] [Email]
send. Please check the when the machine is [Administrator's Email Address].
administrator email configured to send • When configuring the machine to not
address setting." Records by e-mail. send Records by e-mail, change the
current value of bit number [4] under
switch number [21] in [Settings] [Fax
Settings] [Detailed Initial Settings]
[Parameter Setting] [Parameter
Setting].
See "Changing the Parameter Settings",
User Guide (Full Version).

"Network communication The user name and/or Select the forwarding destination in the
has failed. Failed to password registered in address book, press [Edit], and specify
send. Please check user the address book are [Destinations] tab [Folder] [Folder
name and password." invalid when performing Authentication Info] again.
Folder Transfer. See "Registering the Destination Folder to Use
for Send to Folder", User Guide (Full Version).

"Network communication Both the e-mail address Specify [Fax Email Account] on [Settings]
has failed. Failed to to use for sending and [Fax Settings] [Detailed Initial Settings] or
send. The registration of receiving e-mails and [Administrator's Email Address] on [Settings]
fax email address or the administrator e-mail [System Settings] [Send (Email/Folder)]
administrator email address are not [Email].
address is required." registered when sending See "Sending and Receiving Documents by
an e-mail. Internet Fax", User Guide (Full Version).

"Network communication A domain name was not • Specify a host name or IP address as the
has failed. Failed to specified when sending destination, and send the e-mail again.
send. The specified an e-mail without using • When you specified the destination from
address is invalid." the SMTP server. the address book, select the destination in
the address book, press [Edit], and then
check the settings in "Send via SMTP
Server" and "SMTP Authentication Info" in
[Destinations] tab [Email Address].
See "Sending Internet Faxes without Using
SMTP Server", User Guide (Full Version).

253
 10. Troubleshooting

Message Condition Solution and reference

"Network communication [Fax Email Account] is Specify the settings in "User Name" and
has failed. Fax email not specified. "Password" in [Settings] [Fax Settings]
account is not registered. [Detailed Initial Settings] [Fax Email
Please check settings." Account].

"Network communication [Fax Email Account] is Register Email Address in [Settings] [Fax
has failed. Fax email not specified. Settings] [Detailed Initial Settings] [Fax
address is not registered. Email Account].
Please check settings."

"Network communication The destination device • Check that the computer specified as the
has failed. No response did not respond. destination is operating normally and
from the destination. connected to the network.
Please check the cable • Check that the machine is connected to
connection and if the the network correctly.
network equipment is
turned on."

"Network communication A login attempt to the Check the [POP before SMTP] setting on
has failed. POP/IMAP POP3 (IMAP4) server [Settings] [System Settings] [Send
server authentication failed. (Email/Folder)] [Email] and the [Fax Email
error has occurred. Account] setting on [Settings] [Fax Settings]
Please check email [Detailed Initial Settings].
account and password."

"Network communication The POP3 (IMAP4) Specify the setting in [Settings] [System
has failed. POP/IMAP server address is not Settings] [Send (Email/Folder)] [Email]
server is not registered. registered. [POP3/IMAP4 Settings].
Please check settings."

"Network communication A user certificate Install the correct user certificate.

has failed. S/MIME (destination certificate) See "Encrypting Network Communication",
certificate error has is not registered or has User Guide (Full Version).
occurred. Please check expired.
the certificate of both
destination and this A device certificate Install the correct device certificate.
machine." (destination certificate) See "Encrypting Network Communication",
is not registered or has User Guide (Full Version).
expired.

254
 When a Message Appears While Using the Fax Function

Message Condition Solution and reference

"Network communication The authentication Check that the password registered on the SIP
has failed. SIP digest password on the SIP server and "Password" in SIP Digest
authentication failed. server and the Authentication under [Settings] [Fax
Please check the SIP password registered on Settings] [Detailed Initial Settings] [IP-
digest authentication user the machine do not Fax Settings] [SIP Settings] match.
name and password." match. See "Sending Documents by IP-Fax", User
Guide (Full Version).

"Network communication The user certificate Install a new user certificate.

has failed. The certificate (destination certificate) See "Encrypting Network Communication",
of destination is not has expired. User Guide (Full Version).
currently valid. Please re-
issue it."

"Network communication A device certificate Install a new device certificate.

has failed. The certificate (destination certificate) See "Encrypting Network Communication",
of this machine is not is not registered or has User Guide (Full Version).
currently valid. Please re- expired.
issue it."

"Network communication The user certificate Install a new user certificate and device
has failed. The certificate (destination certificate) certificate.
of this machine or and device certificate See "Encrypting Network Communication",
destination machine is have expired. User Guide (Full Version).
not currently valid.
Please re-issue it."

"Network communication An IP-Fax was sent to a Sending a fax using the IP-Fax function is not
has failed. The destination that does not possible. Send the fax using the G3 line if
destination does not support IP-Fax. possible.
support IP-FAX."

"Network communication An invalid IP address is Specify the correct [Effective Protocol] and [IP
has failed. The IP registered. Address (IPv4)], or [IP Address (IPv6)] on
address is invalid. Please [Settings] [System Settings] [Network/
check the network Interface].
settings." See "Connecting to a Wired LAN", User Guide
(Full Version).

255
 10. Troubleshooting

Message Condition Solution and reference

"Network communication The settings in [SIP Check that SIP Server IP Address in [Settings]
has failed. The IP Server IP Address] and [Fax Settings] [Detailed Initial Settings]
address may be invalid. [Effective Protocol] do [IP-Fax Settings] [SIP Settings] and
Please check the network not match. [Effective Protocol] on [Settings] [System
settings." Settings] [Network/Interface] are correct.

An invalid IP address is Specify the correct [Effective Protocol] and [IP

registered. Address (IPv4)], or [IP Address (IPv6)] on
[Settings] [System Settings] [Network/
Interface].
See "Connecting to a Wired LAN", User Guide
(Full Version).

"Network communication The destination • Check that the destination is specified

has failed. The line has terminated the correctly.
been disconnected. communication. • If the destination refuses to receive a fax
Please check the with no sender information, enable
destination and caller ID notifying of the information and send the
notification setting." fax again.

"Network communication When a signature is Check that the authentication e-mail address
has failed. The mail specified, the SMTP matches the address specified in [Settings]
address for authentication e-mail [System Settings] [Send (Email/Folder)]
authentication does not address or POP before [Email] [Administrator's Email Address].
match with SMTP authentication e- See "Send (Email/Folder)", User Guide (Full
administrator's one. mail address does not Version).
Please check the match the administrator
settings." e-mail address.

• Change the current value to [1] under switch number [21] and bit number [6] in [Settings] [Fax
Settings] [Detailed Initial Settings] [Parameter Setting] [Parameter Setting] to disable
displaying the "Network communication has failed." message. Change the setting when you are
not using the IP-Fax or Internet Fax function.
• See "Changing the Parameter Settings", User Guide (Full Version).

Messages that Appear When the Remote Fax Function Is Unavailable

For details about your network environment, consult the network administrator.

256
 When a Message Appears While Using the Fax Function

When a message is displayed on the main-machine

Message Condition Solution and reference

"Check whether there are The machine is not • Check that the machine is
any network problems." connected to the network. connected to the network
[16-00] correctly.
• Press [Confirm] to use the G3
fax.

"Connection with the Another main-machine is Register the sub-machine in

remote machine has failed. registered in remote [Settings] [System Settings]
There is a problem with the machine. [Machine] [Others]
remote machine structure. [Register/Change/Delete Remote
Contact the administrator." Machine].

Another main-machine is Register the machine in [Settings]

registered in remote [System Settings] [Machine]
machine on the sub- [Others] [Register/Change/
machine. Delete Remote Machine] on the
sub-machine.

"Transfer error has A network error occurred • Check that the machine is
occurred. Check the status while transferring the data. connected to the network
of the remote machine." correctly.
• Check that the sub-machine is
connected to the network and
functioning normally.
• Check that the IP address or
host name of the main-machine
is specified correctly in
[Settings] [System Settings]
[Machine] [Others]
[Register/Change/Delete
Remote Machine] on the sub-
machine.

257
 10. Troubleshooting

When a message is displayed on the sub-machine

Message Condition Solution and reference

"Authentication with remote Authentication failed when Specify the same user authentication
machine failed. Check user authentication is setting as the main-machine, and
remote machine's enabled on the main- register a user who has the
authentication settings." machine, or the user does permission to use the fax function.
not have permission to use See "Verifying Users to Operate the
the fax function. Machine (User Authentication)",
User Guide (Full Version).

"Check whether there are The machine is not Check that the machine is
any network problems." connected to the network. connected to the network correctly.
[16-00]

"Connection with the The main-machine is turned Turn on the power of the main-
remote machine has failed. off, or not functioning machine. If the power is turned on,
Check the remote machine normally. check that the device is functioning
status." normally.

A network error occurred. Check that the machine and the

main-machine are connected to the
network correctly.

A timeout error occurred Check that the IP address or host

while connecting to the name of the main-machine is
main-machine. specified correctly in [Settings]
[System Settings] [Machine]
[Others] [Register/Change/
Delete Remote Machine] on the
sub-machine.

"Connection with the Another sub-machine is Register the main-machine in

remote machine has failed. registered in remote [Settings] [System Settings]
There is a problem with the machine. [Machine] [Others]
remote machine structure. [Register/Change/Delete Remote
Contact the administrator." Machine].

The machine is not Register the machine in [Settings]

registered in remote [System Settings] [Machine]
machine on the main- [Others] [Register/Change/
machine. Delete Remote Machine] on the
main-machine.

258
 When a Message Appears While Using the Fax Function

Message Condition Solution and reference

"Remote fax is not User Code authentication is User Code authentication is not
available because [User specified. supported on both the main-
Code Authentication] is machine and sub-machine.
active." Consider another method of user
authentication.

"Remote machine The main-machine could Check that the IP address or host
registration is incorrect. not be found. name of the main-machine is
Contact the administrator." specified correctly in [Settings]
[System Settings] [Machine]
[Others] [Register/Change/
Delete Remote Machine].

"Transfer error has A network error occurred • Check that the machine is
occurred. Check the status while transferring the data. connected to the network
of the remote machine." correctly.
• Check that the main-machine is
connected to the network and
functioning normally.
• Check that the IP address or
host name of the main-machine
is specified correctly in
[Settings] [System Settings]
[Machine] [Others]
[Register/Change/Delete
Remote Machine].

"Transfer error has There is no free space Delete files that are no longer
occurred. Check the status available on the hard disk needed on the main-machine.
of the remote machine." of the main-machine.
"The HDD of the remote
machine is full."

259
 10. Troubleshooting

When a Message Appears While Using the

Printer Function

• When confirming or changing the settings in [Settings], press [Home] ( ) after closing [Settings].

Messages that Appear without Error Codes

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Address Book is The address book is Try again later.

currently in use by in use by another
another function. function, and
Authentication has authentication
failed." query is not
possible.

"A function which A setting that cannot Check the setting, and cancel the function that cannot
cannot be used with be specified with be specified with the fold function.
Fold mode was set. folding was
The job has been specified, and
cancelled." printing was
canceled.

"A job via the When the error job • Check that the machine is connected to the
network that was not storing function is network correctly. For details about your network
printed exists enabled, an error environment, consult the network administrator.
because an error occurred in the print • The stored document can be printed.
occurred. It was job sent via the
page 145 "Printing Documents Stored in the
stored as a job not network and the
Printer from the Control Panel"
printed." canceled job was
stored.

"All the remaining The job was All job slots are occupied by other devices. Check the
print volume has canceled because status of the client machine.
been allocated to the usage count
another central information could
managed client(s). not be obtained
The job has been from the Central
cancelled." Management
machine.

260
 When a Message Appears While Using the Printer Function

Message Cause Solution and reference

"An error occurred A size that is Specify a size smaller than 297.0 mm (11.7 inches)
while printing a job impossible to print wide and 432.0 mm (17.0 inches) long in "Print On:" in
with Background was specified. the printer driver. When [Same as Original Size] is
Numbering. The job specified in "Print On:", reduce the size specified in
has been "Print On:" or adjust the size in the application.
cancelled."

"An error occurred The settings in the Check the following in the printer driver:
while processing an printer driver are • Is a value smaller than 600 dpi specified in
Unauthorized Copy incorrect. [Resolution]?
Prevention job. The
See "Applying Different Print Settings Depending
job was cancelled."
on the Document Type", User Guide (Full Version).
• Is only space(s) entered as the text to use for the
background pattern in the unauthorized copy
prevention function?
• Is Document Server specified as the print method?
See "Storing Documents to Print in the Machine",
User Guide (Full Version).

Unauthorized copy Consult the device administrator for the settings of the
prevention is given machine. The machine administrator can change the
priority in [Settings setting in [Settings] [System Settings] [Settings for
for Administrator]. Administrator] [Security Pattern/Stamp]
[Unauthorized Copy Prevention Printing: Printer].
See "Data Management/Maintenance", User Guide
(Full Version).

"Auto-registration of The maximum Delete a user that is no longer necessary from the
user information has number of items that address book.
failed." can be registered
has been exceeded
and the
authentication
information for
LDAP authentication
or Windows
authentication
cannot be
registered
automatically.

261
 10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Booklet/Half Fold A setting in which Check the setting for the availability of the Booklet or
is not available with Booklet or Half-fold Half-fold function.
the settings. The job cannot be page 304 "List of Specifications"
has been performed was
cancelled." specified, and
printing was
canceled.

"Cannot access the An SD card or USB • Check that the external media is formatted in
Memory Storage flash memory FAT16 or FAT32, and write protection is not
Device." device is enabled on the media.
unavailable for use. • Check that the external media is not corrupted or
damaged.

"Cannot store data The paper size is Reduce the paper size of the document to send. The
of this size." too large. document to send cannot be stored at a custom size.

"Classification Code A classification Consult the machine administrator for the classification
is incorrect. The job code is not code, and enter the code in [Classification Code] in
has been specified. "Detailed Settings" on the [Basic] tab [Modify] under
cancelled." "Job Type" in the printer driver.

The document was Request the machine administrator to change the setting
printed in a printer of the classification code. Machine administrator:
driver that does not Change [Classification Code] to [Optional] in Web
support the Image Monitor if necessary.
classification code. See "Managing the Number of Printed Sheets Using the
Classification Code", User Guide (Full Version).

"Collate has been The sort function Turn off the power of the machine, wait for 10 seconds
cancelled." was canceled. or more after confirming that the main power indicator
is turned off, and then turn on the power.
page 17 "Turning On and Off the Power"

262
 When a Message Appears While Using the Printer Function

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Command Error" A problem occurred Check that the machine can communicate with the
in the data because computer properly.
of the
communication
status or another
reason.

A printer driver that Use the printer driver for the machine. Obtain and
does not support the install the latest version of the driver.
machine was used.

The print command In the printer driver, go to the [Others] tab [Special
did not complete Settings] [Image Quality] and then change [Vector/
correctly. Raster:] to [Raster].

"Communication The job was Check the status of the Central Management machine.
error with central canceled because a
management server Central
has occurred. The Management
job has been communication
cancelled." error occurred.

"Compressed Data Compressed data is • Check that the tool used for creating the
Error." corrupted. compressed data is functioning properly.
• Check that the machine can communicate with the
computer properly.

"Connection with the The machine is • Check whether a message is displayed on the
machine has failed. malfunctioning, and control panel.
Check the machine [Printer] cannot be • Turn off the power of the machine, wait for 10
structure." used. seconds or more after confirming that the main
power indicator is turned off, and then turn on the
power.
page 17 "Turning On and Off the Power"

263
 10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Data storage Printing a document If the message persists even after you have turned the
error." as Test Print, Locked power off and then on, consider repairing the machine.
Print, Hold Print,
Store Print, or
storing the
document in
Document Server
failed. The hard disk
is malfunctioning.

"Document Server is Use of the Consult the user administrator.

not available to use. Document Server
Cannot store." function is restricted.

"Duplex has been The paper source Specify to use the paper tray for duplex printing in
cancelled." tray is not specified [Settings] [Tray/Paper Settings] [Paper Size/
for duplex printing. Paper Type].

"Error has An error such as a Check that the PDF file to print does not have an error.
occurred." syntactic error has
occurred.

"Exceeded max. The hard disk is • Reduce the size of the document to send.
capacity of almost full. • Erase documents that are no longer needed.
Document Server.
See "Deleting Documents Stored in the Machine",
Cannot store."
User Guide (Full Version).
See "Erasing Documents from Document Server",
User Guide (Full Version).

264
 When a Message Appears While Using the Printer Function

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Exceeded max. The maximum Erase a Hold Print (Auto) document that is no longer
number of files. number of Store needed.
(Auto)" Print jobs or the See "Deleting Documents Stored in the Machine", User
maximum number of Guide (Full Version).
jobs that can be
managed for Hold
Print (Auto)
documents has
been exceeded
while storing a
document printed
by Normal Print as
a Hold Print job by
the error job storing
function.

"Exceeded max. The number of Erase documents that are no longer needed.
number of files of documents stored in See "Erasing Documents from Document Server", User
Document Server. the machine Guide (Full Version).
Cannot store." exceeds the
maximum number.

"Exceeded max. An "exceeded max. • Reduce the number of pages to print.

number of pages. number of pages" • Erase documents that are no longer needed.
(Auto)" error occurred
See "Deleting Documents Stored in the Machine",
while storing a
User Guide (Full Version).
document printed
by Normal Print as See "Erasing Documents from Document Server",
a Hold Print job by User Guide (Full Version).
the error job storing
function.

"Exceeded max. The number of • Reduce the number of pages in the document to
number of pages of pages stored in the send.
Document Server. machine exceeds • Erase documents that are no longer needed.
Cannot store." the maximum
See "Erasing Documents from Document Server",
number.
User Guide (Full Version).

265
 10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Exceeded max. The maximum Reduce the number of pages to print.

pages. Collate is number of sheets
incomplete." that can be sorted
has been
exceeded.

"Exceeded the The maximum Up to three sheets can be folded at a time in multi-sheet
maximum number of number of sheets fold. Reduce the number of sheets to copy, and set the
multi-sheet fold. The that can be originals again.
job has been specified for multi-
cancelled." sheet fold has been
exceeded. The
multi-sheet fold job
was canceled.

"Exceeded the When the print For details about the print volume use limitation, consult
maximum unit count volume is limited, the user administrator. The user administrator can clear
for Print Volume Use. printing was the counter or change the limit on the print volume.
The job has been canceled because See "Confirming the Counter for Each User", User
cancelled." the print volume of Guide (Full Version).
a user exceeded the
See "Specifying Maximum Print Volume Use of Each
upper limit allotted
User", User Guide (Full Version).
for the user.

"File system is full." The file system is Erase documents that are no longer needed.
full, and the PDF file See "Deleting Documents Stored in the Machine", User
cannot be printed. Guide (Full Version).
See "Erasing Documents from Document Server", User
Guide (Full Version).

"Hardware Problem: An error is Turn off the power of the machine, wait for 10 seconds
HDD" occurring on the or more after confirming that the main power indicator
hard disk of the is turned off, and then turn on the power.
machine. page 17 "Turning On and Off the Power"
"Hardware Problem: An error has If the message persists even after you have turned the
USB" occurred on the power off and then on, consider repairing the machine.
USB interface.

"Hardware Problem: An error has

Ethernet" occurred in the
Ethernet interface.

266
 When a Message Appears While Using the Printer Function

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Hardware Problem: An error has Turn off the power of the machine, check that the
Wireless Card" occurred in the Wireless LAN board is correctly installed in the
Wireless LAN machine, and then turn on the power.
board. page 17 "Turning On and Off the Power"
If the message persists even after you have turned the
power off and then on, consider repairing the machine.

"HDD is full." The area reserved Delete a registered form or font that is no longer
for forms or fonts in necessary.
PostScript 3 is full.

"HDD is full. (Auto)" An overflow error • Reduce the size of the document to print.
occurred in the hard • Erase documents that are no longer needed.
disk while storing a
See "Deleting Documents Stored in the Machine",
document printed
User Guide (Full Version).
by Normal Print as
a Hold Print job by See "Erasing Documents from Document Server",
the error job storing User Guide (Full Version).
function.

"I/O buffer An overflow has • Reduce the transmission data.

overflow." occurred in the • Increase the value in [I/O Buffer] on [Settings]
receive buffer. [Printer Settings] [Host Interface].

"Information for user In LDAP Consult the user administrator. User administrator:
authentication is authentication, the Delete the corresponding user from the address book,
already registered same name is and register the user again after resolving the duplicate
for another user." registered under names on different servers.
different IDs on
different servers,
and duplicate
names (account
names) occurred
such as when
switching the
domain (server).

"Insufficient The amount of Decrease [Resolution] in the printer driver.

Memory" available memory is See "Applying Different Print Settings Depending on the
insufficient. Document Type", User Guide (Full Version).

267
 10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Load following The paper tray • To proceed with printing after changing the paper
paper in XXX. To specified in the setting, select a tray and press [Print]. However,
force print, select printer driver has no when Staple, Punch, Fold, Cover Sheet, Slip
another tray and paper loaded. Sheet, Chaptering, or Designate is specified, or
press [Continue]." when Duplex printing is specified on a paper tray
(XXX indicates the that does not support the function, printing cannot
tray name) be performed. When Sort is specified, only one
copy of the document is printed.
• To proceed with printing on the specified paper,
load the paper in the tray.
page 185 "Loading Paper into the Paper Tray"

"Memory Overflow" The insufficient In the printer driver, go to the [Others] tab [Special
memory error has Settings] [Image Quality] and then change [Vector/
occurred while Raster:] to [Raster].
printing from the
printer driver (PCL
6).

"Memory Retrieval The data in the Turn off the power of the machine, wait for 10 seconds
Error" memory could not or more after confirming that the main power indicator
be retrieved. is turned off, and then turn on the power.
page 17 "Turning On and Off the Power"

"No response from In LDAP or • Consult the administrator of the authentication

the server. Windows server.
Authentication has authentication, a • When using the Active Directory of the Windows
failed." timeout error server for LDAP Authentication, change [Settings]
occurred while [System Settings] [Settings for Administrator]
submitting an [Authentication/Charge] [Administrator
authentication Authentication/User Authentication/App Auth.]
query to the server. [LDAP Search] "Follow Referrals on LDAP
Server" to [Inactive].

"Output tray has The destination to Specify the correct destination to deliver the output
been changed." deliver the output paper.
paper was changed
because of the
paper size limitation
of the output
destination.

268
 When a Message Appears While Using the Printer Function

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Paper size and/or The paper size or Specify [Driver/Command] in [Settings] [Tray/
type mismatched or paper type Paper Settings] [Printer] [Tray Setting Priority]
no ppr. in Bypass specified in the [Bypass Tray].
Tray." printer driver does
not match the paper
settings, in the
machine, for the
bypass tray.

"Paper size and type The paper tray • To proceed with printing after changing the paper
are mismatched. loaded with paper setting, select a tray and press [Print]. When
Select another tray of the size or type Staple, Punch, Fold, Cover Sheet, Slip Sheet,
from the following specified in the Chaptering, or Designate is specified, or when
and press printer driver is not Duplex printing is specified on a paper tray that
[Continue]. To available. does not support the function, printing cannot be
cancel job, press performed. When Sort is specified, only one copy
[Job Reset]. Paper of the document is printed.
size and type can • To proceed with printing on the specified paper,
also be changed in load the paper and then check that the paper size
User Tools." and type are correctly specified in [Settings]
[Tray/Paper Settings].
page 185 "Loading Paper into the Paper Tray"

"Parallel I/F board An error has Turn off the power of the machine, wait for 10 seconds
has a problem." occurred in the or more after confirming that the main power indicator
parallel interface. is turned off, and then turn on the power.
page 17 "Turning On and Off the Power"
If the message persists even after you have turned the
power off and then on, consider repairing the machine.

"Printer font error." There is a problem Consider repairing the machine.

in the font file of the
machine.

"Print overrun." A page image is Decrease [Resolution] in the printer driver.

discarded while See "Applying Different Print Settings Depending on the
printing the page. Document Type", User Guide (Full Version).

269
 10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Punch has been The Punch function Check the orientation of the paper and print data, and
cancelled." was canceled the specified punch position.
because the staple See "Punching Holes on Printed Pages", User Guide
position is specified (Full Version).
incorrectly.

"Receiving data Transmission of Send the data again.

failed." data was canceled.

"Sending data Transmission of Check that the computer is operating normally.

failed." data from the
printer driver was
canceled.

"Staple error The number of Check the number of sheets that can be stabled on the
occurred. The job sheets that can be finisher in use.
has been stapled was page 304 "List of Specifications"
cancelled." exceeded, and
printing was
canceled.

"Staple has been The staple function Check the specification of the finisher in use, and
cancelled." was canceled specify the setting accordingly.
because the number • Number of sheets that can be stapled together
of sheets exceeds
page 304 "List of Specifications"
the maximum that
can be stapled or • Staple position that can be specified on different
the staple position is paper orientation and print data orientation
specified See "Stapling Printed Pages", User Guide (Full
incorrectly. Version).
Certain settings can produce staple results that might not
be as expected when the paper is delivered to the
output tray.

A malfunction Turn off the power of the machine, wait for 10 seconds
occurred or more after confirming that the main power indicator
temporarily on the is turned off, and then turn on the power.
machine. page 17 "Turning On and Off the Power"

270
 When a Message Appears While Using the Printer Function

Message Cause Solution and reference

"The job was A condition in which Check the binding condition.

cancelled because binding cannot be
the specified settings performed was
are not applicable specified, and
for Booklet." printing was
canceled.

"The print job has The amount of • Reduce the size of the document to send.
been cancelled available space on • Erase documents that are no longer needed.
because capture the hard disk
See "Deleting Documents Stored in the Machine",
file(s) could not be became low while
User Guide (Full Version).
stored: Exceeded saving the capture
max. memory." data. See "Erasing Documents from Document Server",
User Guide (Full Version).

"The print job has The number of Erase documents that are no longer needed.
been cancelled documents stored in See "Erasing Documents from Document Server", User
because capture the machine Guide (Full Version).
file(s) could not be exceeded the
stored: Exceeded maximum number
max. number of while saving the
files." capture data.

"The print job has The number of • Reduce the number of pages in the document to
been cancelled pages stored in the send.
because capture machine exceeded • Erase documents that are no longer needed.
file(s) could not be the maximum
See "Erasing Documents from Document Server",
stored: Exceeded number while
User Guide (Full Version).
max. number of saving the capture
pages per file." data.

"The selected paper A paper size that Print the document on paper of a size that can be fed
size is not cannot be fed on on the machine.
supported. This job the machine was
has been specified and
cancelled." printing was
canceled by the
auto job cancel
function that was
activated.

271
 10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution and reference

"The selected paper A paper type that Print the document on paper of a type that can be fed
type is not cannot be fed on on the machine.
supported. This job the machine was
has been specified and
cancelled." printing was
canceled by the
auto job cancel
function that was
activated.

"You do not have a Authentication Specify the authentication information in the printer
privilege to use this information is not driver. For the authentication information, consult the
function. This job has registered correctly user administrator.
been cancelled." in the printer driver. See "Specifying Login Information in the Printer Driver",
User Guide (Full Version).

The user registered Consult the user administrator. The user administrator
in the printer driver can change the access permissions in the address book.
does not have See "Confirming the Available Functions", User Guide
permission to use (Full Version).
the printer function.

"Z-fold error." A setting in which Z- Check the tray, paper orientation and print data
fold cannot be orientation settings, and the specified position for
performed was postprocessing.
specified, and the
Z-fold function was
canceled.

Messages that Appear with Error Codes

Check the system configuration list or print settings list. The details of the error may also be printed in the
list.
See "List/Test Print", User Guide (Full Version).

Message Cause Solution and reference

"84: Insufficient memory The amount of available Reduce the transmission data.
for image processing." work area is insufficient for
processing images.

272
 When a Message Appears While Using the Printer Function

Message Cause Solution and reference

"86: The parameter for The parameter in the control Specify the correct parameter.
the control code is code is incorrect.
invalid."

"92: The print job was Printing is canceled from the To perform printing, operate the control
cancelled." control panel. panel again.
(displayed in the error
history)

"98: Failed to access the Accessing the hard disk Turn off the power of the machine, wait for
hard disk." failed. 10 seconds or more after confirming that
the main power indicator is turned off, and
then turn on the power.
page 17 "Turning On and Off the Power"

"99: RTIFF Error" When printing a file from an Check the data to print.
SD card or USB flash
memory device, the file to
print is in an unsupported
format or corrupt.

"BAI: Job Cancelled The authentication setting Check the authentication setting.
Because Authentication was changed during
Settings Changed" printing, so printing was
canceled by the auto job
cancel function.

"BAJ: Paper Output A peripheral equipment had Contact your service representative.
Option Malfunction" a problem, so printing was
canceled by the auto job
cancel function.

"CB: Password Error" The entered password was Confirm the correct password for the
incorrect, so printing was document and enter it.
canceled by the auto job
cancel function.

"CC: User ID Error" The user ID was invalid, so Enter the correct login username. Confirm
printing was canceled by the login username with the user
the auto job cancel function. administrator.

273
 10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution and reference

"CD: PS/PDF Error" A postscript language error Check if there is a problem with the printing
occurred in PS3 or PDF data.
printing, so printing was
canceled by the auto job
cancel function.

"CE: PCL5e/XL Error" An error occurred in PCL6 Check that the machine can communicate
printing, so printing was properly with the PC.
canceled by the auto job
cancel function.

"CK: XPS Error" An error occurred in XPS Check that the machine can communicate
printing, so printing was properly with the PC.
canceled by the auto job
cancel function.

"CM: PS3/PDF Error A timeout error occurred in • Check that the machine can
(Time Out)" PostScript 3 or PDF printing, communicate properly with the PC.
so printing was canceled by • PostScript 3
the auto job cancel function.
Check the following setting items.
When [Use Machine Setting(s)] is
selected, set the waiting time longer.
When [Use Driver/Command] is
selected, set the waiting time specified
by the command longer.
Check the setting of [Settings]
[Printer Settings] [PS Menu]
[Job Timeout].

"CN: PS3/PDF Error Some of [Printer Settings] on Check that the printer settings specified in
(Driver/Machine the print data did not match the print data match the settings in
Mismatched Settings)" the machine settings, so [Settings] [Printer Settings] [PS
printing was canceled by Menu].
the auto job cancel function.

"CO: PS3/PDF Error A font error occurred in Register the required fonts.
(Font Error)" PostScript 3 or PDF printing,
so printing was canceled by
the auto job cancel function.

274
 When a Message Appears While Using the Printer Function

Message Cause Solution and reference

"CP: PS3/PDF Error An insufficient memory error Specify [Font Priority] in [Settings]
(Insufficient Processing occurred in PostScript 3 or [Printer Settings] [System] [Memory]
Memory)" PDF printing, so printing was [Memory Usage].
canceled by the auto job
cancel function.

"CQ: Some pages were An error occurred in RPCS Consider repairing the machine.
not printed because they printing, so printing was
were blank." canceled by the auto job
cancel function.

"EB: Job cancelled A printing job has been set Contact your machine administrator.
because it was to be canceled, so printing Machine administrator can change the
prohibited." was canceled by the auto setting in [Settings] [Printer Settings]
job cancel function. [Data Management/Maintenance]
[Print Jobs] [Restrict Direct Print Jobs].

"EC: Failed to store/skip A document has been set to • Fix the error that occurred.
an errored job." be stored or canceled when • You can check the settings of the
an error occurs and it did operation when an error occurs in
not operate, so printing was [Settings] [Printer Settings]
canceled by the auto job [System] [Error Action] [Store
cancel function. and Skip Errored Job].

"ED: Paper Size Error A paper size that cannot be When specifying [Magazine], check and
with Printing Magazine" used for 2 sided print was specify the paper size that corresponds to
specified and [Magazine] 2 sided print.
finishing was not available, page 304 "List of Specifications"
so printing was canceled by
the auto job cancel function.

"EE: Mixed Paper Size Two or more paper sizes When specifying [Magazine], use sheets of
Error with Printing were used and [Magazine] the same size.
Magazine" finishing was not available,
so printing was cancelled
by the auto job cancel
function.

275
 10. Troubleshooting

When a Message Appears While Using the

Scanner Function

• When confirming or changing the settings in [Settings], press [Home] ( ) after closing [Settings].

Messages that Appear on the Control Panel

Message Cause Solution and reference

"All the pages are The original was placed • When scanning on the exposure glass,
detected as blank. No with the wrong side place the original with the side to scan
file was created." facing down when facing down.
[Delete Blank Page] or • When scanning on the ADF, place the
[Delete Blank Page] in original with the side to scan facing up.
OCR is specified.

All pages in the scanned Decrease the value specified in the following
original were setting items.
determined to be blank [Settings] [Scanner Settings] [Scan]
when [Delete Blank [Blank Page Detection] [Blank Page
Page] is specified. Detection Level]

All pages in the scanned Change the following setting items.

original were [Settings] [Scanner Settings] [Scan]
determined to be blank [Blank Page Detection] [Blank Page
when [Delete Blank Detection Level] to [Sensitivity Level 1]
Page] in OCR is
specified.

276
 When a Message Appears While Using the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Authentication with the The user name/ Select the destination in the address book,
destination has failed. password of SMTP press [Edit], and check the setting in
Check settings. To check authentication specified [Destinations] tab [Email Address].
the current status, press when sending the e-mail
[Scan Files Status]." are incorrect.

The user ID/password • Select the forwarding destination in the

specified on the address book, press [Edit], and check the
destination folder in information registered in [Destinations]
Send to Folder are tab [Folder] [Folder Authentication
incorrect. Info].
• Adding "@domain-name" behind the user
name may resolve the problem.
• When a login password is not specified
on your computer, specify a login
password on the computer and register it
to the machine.

"Cannot access the An SD card or USB flash • Check that the external media is
Memory Storage memory device is formatted in FAT16 or FAT32, and write
Device." unavailable for use. encryption or protection is not enabled
on the media.
• Check that the external media is not
corrupted or damaged.

"Cannot detect original An original is not placed Place the original correctly. When you place
size. Select scan size." correctly on the an original on the exposure glass, the machine
machine. detects the original size by opening and
closing the exposure glass cover or ADF.
Open the cover or ADF by more than 30
degrees when placing an original.

An original with a When scanning an original with a difficult-to-

difficult-to-detect size detect size, specify [Send Settings] [Scan
even in the regular size Size].
is placed on the page 217 "Sizes Detectable with Auto Paper
machine. Select"

An original with a When scanning an original with a custom size,

custom size is placed on specify the original size in [Send Settings]
the machine. [Scan Size] [Custom Size].

277
 10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Cannot find the The machine or the Check that the machine or the computer is
specified path. Please computer is not connected to the network correctly. For details
check the settings." connected to the about your network environment, consult the
network correctly. network administrator.

The computer name or Register the computer name and folder name
folder name specified in again.
the path name is
incorrect.

The firewall function is In the firewall function on the computer,

enabled on the register the machine IP address and the port to
computer. use for sending files as exceptions.
You can check the IP address in [Check Status]
"Network". For details about the ports, see
the following:
page 304 "List of Specifications"

"Check original's The original is placed in Depending on the combination of the specified
orientation." the wrong orientation. settings, the orientation to set the original
differs. Be sure to place the original in the
correct orientation.
See "Placing an Original to Scan", User Guide
(Full Version).

278
 When a Message Appears While Using the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Connection with PC has The machine or the Check that the machine or the computer is
failed. Check the computer is not connected to the network correctly. For details
settings." connected to the about your network environment, consult the
network correctly. network administrator.

The computer name or Register the computer name and folder name
folder name specified in again.
the path name is
incorrect.

The firewall function is In the firewall function on the computer,

enabled on the register the machine IP address and the port to
computer. use for sending files as exceptions.
You can check the IP address in [Check Status]
"Network". For details about the ports, see
the following:
page 304 "List of Specifications"

"Connection with the The firewall function is Enable file and printer sharing in the firewall
destination has failed. enabled on the function on your computer.
Check the settings. computer.
Entered path name might
be incorrect, or firewall
and security settings
might be blocking
network connectivity."

"Exceeded max. data The data scanned by • Decrease [Send Settings] [Resolution].
capacity. Check specifying [Scan Ratio] • Specify a smaller paper size in [Send
resolution and ratio then [Specify Size] Settings] [Scan Ratio] [Specify
press [Start] again." exceeds the limit. Size].

"Exceeded max. data A large size original • Decrease [Send Settings] [Resolution].
capacity. Check the was scanned at a high • Specify a smaller size in [Send Settings]
scanning resolution, then resolution, and the [Scan Size].
XXX." resulting data size
(procedure described in exceeds the limit.
place of XXX)

279
 10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Exceeded max. email The file size per page • Specify a lower value in [Send Settings]
size. Sending email has has exceeded the [Resolution], or select a smaller paper
been cancelled. Contact maximum e-mail size size in [Send Settings] [Scan Ratio]
the administrator about specified in [Maximum [Specify Size].
max. email size." Email Size]. • You can change the [Maximum Email
Size] setting on [Settings] [Scanner
Settings] [Sending Settings] [Email
(Size)]. To divide an e-mail that exceeds
the maximum size, specify [Yes (per
Page)] or [Yes (per Max. Size)] in [Divide
& Send Email].

"Exceeded max. number The number of entered Check the maximum number of characters.
of alphanumeric characters has page 365 "The Setting Values of the
characters." exceeded the maximum. Transmission Function"

"Failed to connect to the Email was sent to the Contact your network administrator. Network
destination. Please destination without an administrator should install the root certificate
contact the administrator installed certificate of of the destination server in Web Image
to check the following. the destination server Monitor if required, or set "Root Certificate
*The correct root when "Root Certificate Check" to [Inactive].
certificate is registered to Check" was set to See "Controlling Access to Untrusted Websites
this machine and [Active]. from the Control Panel", User Guide (Full
destination. *The root Version).
certificate check function
is not enabled by
mistake."

"Insufficient memory in There is no free space Change the external media. When scanning
the memory storage available on the SD an original in the divide-document or single-
device." card or USB flash page mode, the saved data may not contain
memory device, or the all pages in the original. Change the external
file could not be saved media and press [Retry] to resume saving the
due to insufficient space remaining data.
on the media.

280
 When a Message Appears While Using the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Not all of the image will The scaling factor Specify a smaller value in [Send Settings]
be scanned. Check the specified in [Scan Ratio] [Scan Ratio].
ratio and then press is too large.
[Start] again."
The paper size specified Specify a paper size for which a reduction
in [Scan Ratio] ratio greater than 25% is specified in [Send
[Specify Size] requires a Settings] [Scan Ratio] [Specify Size].
reduction value smaller
than 25%.

"Programmed. Cannot A folder specified by Register the destination in the address book of
program the Manual Entry is the machine, and then register it to a program.
destination(s) that is not included among the
programmed in the programmed
address book." destinations.

"Programmed. Cannot A destination specified • You cannot program a destination

program the folder with a protection code is specified with a protection code. Specify
destination(s) with included among the this destination individually.
protection code(s)." programmed • To program this destination, cancel the
destinations. protection code and then register the
destination to a program.
See "Using the Protection Function to
Prevent the Misuse of Addresses", User
Guide (Full Version).

"SMTP authentication The SMTP Register the SMTP authentication e-mail

email address and authentication e-mail address in [Settings] [System Settings]
administrator email address is not registered [Send (Email/Folder)] [Email]
address mismatch." in the administrator e- [Administrator's Email Address].
mail address.

"Some invalid The group contains an When sending data to a destination other than
destination(s) contained. e-mail address. an e-mail address, press [Yes].
Do you want to select
only valid
destination(s)?"

281
 10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution and reference

"The program is recalled. A folder destination • You cannot recall a destination specified
Cannot recall the folder specified with a with a protection code in a program.
destination(s) with protection code is Specify this destination individually.
protection code(s)." included among the • To program this destination, cancel the
programmed protection code and then register the
destinations. destination to a program.
See "Using the Protection Function to
Prevent the Misuse of Addresses", User
Guide (Full Version).

"The size of the scanned The data scanned by • Increase [Send Settings] [Resolution].
data is too small. Check specifying [Scan Ratio] • Specify a larger paper size in [Send
the resolution and the [Specify Size] is too Settings] [Scan Ratio] [Specify
ratio and then press small. Size].
[Start] again."

"Transmission has failed. The amount of available Check that the amount of free space is
Insufficient memory in the hard disk space on the sufficient.
destination hard disk. To destination computer,
check the current status, SMTP server, or FTP
press [Scan Files Status]." server is insufficient.

"Transmission has failed. A network error If the same message is displayed after
To check the current occurred while scanning the original again, consult the
status, press [Scan Files transferring the data due administrator.
Status]." to a busy network or
another reason.

The machine or the Check that the machine or the computer is

computer is not connected to the network correctly. For details
connected to the about your network environment, consult the
network correctly. network administrator.

282
 When a Message Appears While Using the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Authentication with the The user name or • Please check the SMTP authentication
destination has failed. password is incorrect. user name and password.
Check settings. To check • Please check the destination folder ID
the current status, press and password.
[Scan Files Status]."
• The maximum number of alphanumeric
characters that can be registered to a
password is 128. Set a different
password that is less than 128
characters.

Messages that Appear on the Computer

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Any of Login User The login user name or Enter the correct login user name and
Name, Login Password password entered in password in [General User Authentication].
or Driver Encryption Key [General User For the login user name and password, consult
is incorrect." Authentication] is the user administrator.
incorrect.

The driver encryption Register the driver encryption key on [Details]

key is not registered [Authenticate] tab in the TWAIN driver. For
correctly in the TWAIN the driver encryption key, consult the network
driver. administrator.

"The authentication The SNMPv3 Consult the network administrator for the
password and/or authentication SNMPv3 authentication information, and
authentication algorithm information registered in change the information registered in Network
may be incorrect, or the Network Connection Connection Tool.
machine does not Tool does not match the See "Installing the TWAIN Driver", User Guide
support the information of the (Full Version).
authentication algorithm. machine.
Please check."

"Authentication The logged-in user does Consult the user administrator. The user
succeeded. However, the not have access administrator can change the access
access privileges for privileges to use the permissions in the address book.
scanner function has scanner function. See "Confirming the Available Functions", User
been denied." Guide (Full Version).

283
 10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Cannot add any more The maximum number of Delete scanning modes that are no longer
scanning mode." scanning modes that necessary.
can be registered
exceeds the maximum
number (100).

"Failed to connect to the The firewall function is Configure the firewall function of the computer
destination. Please enabled on the to allow communication of the application
contact the administrator computer. used, or disable the firewall function.
to check the following.
*The correct root
certificate is registered to
this machine and
destination. *The root
certificate check function
is not enabled by
mistake."

"Cannot detect the paper The original is not When you place an original on the exposure
size of the original. placed correctly on the glass, the machine detects the original size by
Specify the scanning machine. opening and closing the exposure glass cover
size." or ADF. Open the cover or ADF by more than
30 degrees when placing an original.

An original with a When scanning an original with a difficult-to-

difficult-to-detect size detect size, specify [Send Settings] [Scan
even in the regular size Size].
is placed on the page 217 "Sizes Detectable with Auto Paper
machine. Select"

An original with a When scanning an original with a custom size,

custom size is placed on specify the original size in [Send Settings]
the machine. [Scan Size] [Custom Size].

"Cannot specify any The maximum number of Delete scanning areas that are no longer
more scanning area." scanning areas that can necessary.
be registered exceeds
the maximum number
(100).

284
 When a Message Appears While Using the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Communication error A communication error Check that the settings for the communication
has occurred on the has occurred on the protocol (TCP/IP) are configured correctly on
network." network. the computer.

"Entered User Code is The correct user code is Register the User Code on [Details]
not registered or you do not registered in the [Authenticate] tab in the TWAIN driver. For the
not have access TWAIN drive when User Code, consult the user administrator.
privileges to use the User Code
scanner function, please authentication is
contact your specified on the
administrator." machine.

The User Code Consult the user administrator. The user

registered in the TWAIN administrator can change the access
driver is not assigned permissions in the address book.
with the privileges to use See "Confirming the Available Functions", User
the scanner function. Guide (Full Version).

"Error has occurred in the The scan condition Specify the scan condition within the range
scanner." specified in the that can be specified on the machine.
application exceeds the page 304 "List of Specifications"
range that can be
specified on the
machine.

A malfunction is • Restart the application, and perform

occurring in the driver. scanning again.
• Install the TWAIN driver again.

A malfunction is Turn off the power of the machine, wait for 10

temporarily occurring seconds or more after confirming that the main
on the machine. power indicator is turned off, and then turn on
the power.
page 17 "Turning On and Off the Power"

"Error has occurred in the An error is occurring in Restart the computer.

scanner driver." the driver or operating
system.

There is a problem with Check that the computer is connected to the

the network network correctly and in an environment
environment. where the TCP/IP protocol can be used.

285
 10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Fatal error has occurred An unrecoverable error Consider repairing the machine.
in the scanner." is occurring on the
machine.

"Insufficient memory. Other applications are • Close applications on the computer.

Close all other running on the • If the same message is displayed when
applications, then restart computer, and the no other applications are running after
scanning." amount of free memory starting the computer, uninstall the
is insufficient. TWAIN driver, restart the computer, and
then install the TWAIN driver again.

"Insufficient memory. The memory allocated • Reduce the scan size or resolution. You
Reduce the scanning for the scanner function may be able to resolve the error also by
area." is insufficient. reducing the brightness value when
Duotone (black and white) or a high
resolution is specified.
• Specify [No Compression] on [Initial
Settings] [Compression] tab in the
TWAIN driver.

"Invalid Winsock version. Winsock is corrupted. Restore Winsock on the computer.

Please use version 1.1 or
higher."

286
 When a Message Appears While Using the Scanner Function

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Scanner is not available. An access mask is Consult your administrator.

Check the scanner specified.
connection status."
The power of the Check that the machine is turned on, and
machine is not turned connected to the network correctly.
on, or the machine is not
connected to the
network correctly.

The firewall function is Configure the firewall function of the computer

enabled on the to allow communication of the application
computer. used, or disable the firewall function.

The IP address of the Check that the host name of the machine is
machine could not be configured in Network Connection Tool that is
resolved from the host installed with the TWAIN driver.
name. See "Installing the TWAIN Driver", User Guide
(Full Version).

The IPv6 address could Log in to Web Image Monitor in the

not be obtained when administrator mode, and select [Active] in
only IPv6 is enabled on [IPv4] "LLMNR" under [Device
the machine. Management] [Configuration]
"Network".

"Scanner is not available The TWAIN scanner The TWAIN scanner function cannot be used.
on the specified device." function is disabled on
the machine.

"Scanner is not ready. The ADF is open. Close the ADF.

Check the scanner and
the options."

"Scanning has been The amount of available • Clear the [Read-ahead] check box in the
aborted because space on the hard disk TWAIN driver.
memory in Mainframe of the machine is • Erase documents that are no longer
became full." insufficient when needed from the machine.
scanning is performed
with the [Read-ahead]
check box selected in
the TWAIN driver.

287
 10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution and reference

"The device's Authentication cannot • When User Code or Basic authentication

authentication service be performed because is specified, wait a while until processing
cannot be performed." the authentication the machine address is completed.
service is starting up or • When Windows or LDAP authentication is
busy. specified, wait a while until the server
becomes ready for processing. If
authentication is not possible even after
waiting for a while, consult your
administrator.

"There is no response The network is busy. Wait a while.

from the scanner. There
may be a number of The firewall function is Configure the firewall function of the computer
reasons for this, e.g. the enabled on the to allow communication of the application
data between the computer. used, or disable the firewall function.
computer and scanner The machine or the Check that the machine or the computer is
has been lost because of computer is not connected to the network correctly.
an increase in network connected to the
traffic, the firewall in the network correctly.
virus protection software
may be activated, or
there might be problems
with the hardware etc. If
you can not fix this
problem, please call
service."

"User Authentication in The authentication Register the SNMPv3 authentication

SNMPv3 connection has information is registered information in Network Connection Tool that is
failed." incorrectly in Network installed on the computer with the TWAIN
Connection Tool when driver. For the SNMPv3 authentication
SNMPv3 encrypted information, consult your network
communication is administrator.
enabled on the See "Installing the TWAIN Driver", User Guide
machine. (Full Version).

288
 When Other Messages Appear

When Other Messages Appear

• When confirming or changing the settings in [Settings], press [Home] ( ) after closing [Settings].

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Administrator The User When specifying Basic, Windows, or LDAP

Authentication for Management authentication, configure the User Management
User Management privilege is disabled privilege in [Settings] [System Settings]
must be set to on in the administrator [Settings for Administrator] [Authentication/
before this selection authentication Charge] [Administrator Authentication/User
can be made." management. Authentication/App Auth.] [Administrator
Authentication Management].
See "Registering Administrators Before Using the
Machine", User Guide (Full Version).

"Destination list / A destination is being Wait until the message disappears and do not turn
machine settings are registered and off the power of the machine. You may not be able
updated. Selected devices are being to perform operations for a while depending on the
destinations or configured using number of destinations being registered.
function settings have Web Image Monitor.
been cleared. Please
re-select the settings."

"Failed to read the The user attempted to The Web browser of the machine supports the PDF
PDF file." display a PDF file that versions and encryption levels shown below. Other
is not supported by PDF files cannot be displayed.
the Web browser of • PDF version: 1.3-1.7
the machine.
• PDF encryption level: 128-bit AES, 256-bit
AES

"Firmware update will A firmware update is It is recommended to apply the update, but you can
start. Press [OK]. It will available, and the stop the updating process by pressing [Stop] within
start automatically machine is about to 30 seconds after the message is displayed.
after 30 seconds." perform an update. Do not turn off the power of the machine while the
updating process is in progress.

289
 10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Internal cooling fan is The fan installed in You may hear a rotating noise while the fan is
active." the vent for cooling active, but you can continue using the machine as
the interior of the usual.
machine became
active after a large
number of pages has
been printed.

"Output Tray is full. The output tray is full. Remove the paper from the output tray. When the
Remove paper." finisher tray is specified as the output destination,
press [Stop] to pause printing and then remove the
output paper to prevent paper from falling off the
tray.

"Problems with the The Wireless LAN Turn off the power of the machine, check that the
wireless board. Please board can be Wireless LAN board is correctly installed in the
call service." accessed, but an machine, and then turn on the power.
error has been page 17 "Turning On and Off the Power"
detected.
If the message persists even after you have turned
the power off and then on, consider repairing the
machine.

"Updating the A destination is being Wait until the message disappears and do not turn
destination list... registered using Web off the power of the machine. You may not be able
Please wait. Specified Image Monitor. to perform operations for a while depending on the
destination(s) or number of destinations being registered.
sender's name has
been cleared."

"Updating the A network error Check the connection between the machine and the
destination list has occurred. computer.
failed. Try again?"
Anti-virus software or Add the destination list program to the exception list
a firewall function is in the anti-virus software on the computer, or register
running on the the machine IP address to the exception list in the
computer. firewall function. You can check the IP address in
[Check Status] "Network".

290
 When Other Messages Appear

Message Cause Solution and reference

"You do not have the The logged-in user Consult the user administrator. The user
privileges to use this does not have the administrator can change the access permissions in
function." privileges to use the the address book.
specified function. See "Taking Measures to Prevent Information
Leaks", User Guide (Full Version).

Changing the setting Check the administrative privilege required for

is not allowed under changing the specified setting.
the administrative See "Registering Administrators Before Using the
privileges granted to Machine", User Guide (Full Version).
the logged-in user.

Messages that Appear When Machine Login Fails

Check the error code displayed with the "Authentication has failed." message, and taken the necessary
action.

• The letter at the beginning of the error code indicates the type of authentication specified on the
machine.
• B: Basic authentication
• W: Windows authentication
• L: LDAP authentication

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Authentication has An operation in the Check whether another user is logged in to the
failed." TWAIN supporting machine, and then perform the operation.
B/W/L0103-000 application was
performed from the
computer while a user
was logged in to the
machine or performing
the login procedure.

291
 10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Authentication has An incorrect password Enter the correct password.

failed." was entered.
B/W/L0104-000
The Driver Encryption Consult the network administrator whether the
Key is not registered Driver Encryption Key is required, and
correctly in the TWAIN configure the driver accordingly.
driver. See "Specifying Login Information in the Printer
Driver", User Guide (Full Version).
See "Specifying Login Information in the LAN-
Fax Driver", User Guide (Full Version).
The network administrator can check the
setting of "Driver Encryption Key: Encryption
Strength" in [Settings] [System Settings]
[Settings for Administrator] [Security]
[Extended Security Settings].

"Authentication has An incorrect login user Enter the correct login user name and
failed." name or password was password.
B/W/L0206-002 entered.

A user has attempted to The user needs to log in from the application
log in to the functions login screen.
that can be accessed
only by the
administrator such as
[Settings] when
[Application
Authentication
Management] is
specified.

"Authentication has ":" or another character • Enter the correct login user name.
failed." that cannot be used in a • Change the user name if it contains a
B/W/L0206-003 login user name was space, ":" or other unusable characters.
entered.

"Authentication has Web Image Monitor or Wait a while.

failed." another method was
B/W/L0207-001 used to edit or create a
backup of the address
book.

292
 When Other Messages Appear

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Authentication has The account is locked Request the user administrator to unlock the
failed." because the number of account.
B/W/L0208-000 failed login attempts has
exceeded the limit.
B/W/L0208-002

"Authentication has Web Image Monitor or Try again later.

failed." another method was
L0307-001 used to edit or create a
backup of the address
book.

"Authentication has Kerberos authentication Check whether the server is operating

failed." has failed because the normally.
W0400-102 server was not
responsive.

"Authentication has Available resources are Try again later.

failed." insufficient due to too
W0400-200 many authentication
requests.

"Authentication has sAMAccountName was Use UserPrincipalName as the login user

failed." used as the login user name.
W0400-202 name when a user in the
child domain logged in
under a parent-child
domain environment,
and ldap_bind failed.

The SSL settings Check whether the SSL settings specified on

specified on the the authentication server and the device match.
authentication server
and the device do not
match.

"Authentication has The login name attribute Check whether [Login Name Attribute] is
failed." is not specified, or an specified correctly.
L0400-210 attribute on which the See "Verifying Users to Operate the Machine
information cannot be (User Authentication)", User Guide (Full
obtained is specified. Version).

293
 10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Authentication has ":" or other characters • Enter the correct login user name.
failed." that cannot be used in a • Change the user name if it contains a
W/L0406-003 login user name was space, ":" or other unusable characters.
entered.

"Authentication has Too many requests for Try again later. If the problem persists, check
failed." authentication occurred whether the machine is under an authentication
W0406-101 at one time. attack. The attack status can be checked by the
screen message, in the system log, or in the e-
mail notification sent to the administrator.

"Authentication has A user group cannot be Check whether the group name registered on
failed." obtained. the machine is correct and whether the DC
W0406-107 settings are configured correctly.*1

Kerberos Authentication Check whether the realm name registered on

has failed. the clock at the KDC (key distribution center)
and the clock of the device are
synchronized.*3

No connection is Enter the server IP address or host name in

established to the [Settings] [System Settings] [Network/
authentication server. Interface] [Ping Command] to check
whether a connection can be established to
the server.

The domain name is Check whether the domain name registered on

incorrect or cannot be the machine is correct and whether the name
resolved. can be resolved.*2

The login user name or Check the login user name and/or password
password is incorrect. of the user registered on the server.

"Authentication has Too many requests for Try again later. If the problem persists, check
failed." authentication occurred whether the machine is under an authentication
L0406-200 at one time. attack. The attack status can be checked by the
screen message, in the system log, or in the e-
mail notification sent to the administrator.

294
 When Other Messages Appear

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Authentication has [Off] is specified in the Select the server in [Settings] [System
failed." authentication settings of Settings] [Settings for Administrator]
L0406-201 the LDAP server. [Authentication/Charge] [Administrator
Authentication/User Authentication/App
Auth.] [Register/Change/Delete LDAP
Server], and then press [Register/Change]
and set [Authentication] to a setting other than
[Off].

"Authentication has The LDAP authentication Check whether the LDAP authentication
failed." settings or LDAP server settings or LDAP server settings are correctly
L0406-202 settings are incorrect. configured.*4

L0406-203 Check whether the SSL settings are supported

on the LDAP server.

The login user name or Enter the correct login user name and
password is incorrect. password. Change the login user name if it
exceeds 128 bytes in length or contains a
space, ":" or other unusable character.

The simplified Check whether the server name, login user

authentication mode is name, password, and information entered into
incorrectly used. the search filter are correct. Note that
authentication cannot be performed if
obtaining DN of the login user name under the
representative account fails in the simple
authentication mode.

"Authentication has Kerberos Authentication Check whether the realm name registered on
failed." has failed. the clock at the KDC (key distribution center)
L0406-204 and the clock of the device are
synchronized.*3

"Authentication has There was no response Check the status of the network and the server
failed." returned from the to use for authentication.
W/L0409-000 authentication server,
and an authentication
timeout error occurred.

295
 10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Authentication has The user registered on • Delete the older user that is redundant, or
failed." the machine has the change the login name.
W/L0511-000 same name as another • If the message is displayed after switching
user distinguished by the the authentication server, delete the user
W0517-000
unique attribute of the on the old server.
authentication server.

"Authentication has A user name that cannot Do not use "other", "admin", "supervisor", or
failed." be specified in the login "HIDE*" in user account names.
W/L0606-004 user name was
specified.

"Authentication has Web Image Monitor or Wait a while.

failed." another method was
W/L0607-001 used to edit or create a
backup of the address
book.

"Authentication has The number of users Ask the user administrator to delete users that
failed." registered in the address are no longer needed from the address book.
W/L0612-005 book has reached the
upper limit, and auto-
registration failed.

"Authentication has Web Image Monitor or Wait a while.

failed." another method was
W/L0707-001 used to edit or create a
backup of the address
book.

"Authentication has Auto-registration of a • Check the network communication

failed." user on the server between the client and server machines.
B/W/L0913-023 machine has failed • Registration cannot be performed while
when authentication the address book of the server machine is
was performed on the being edited.
client machine using
Central Management.

*1 When obtaining user groups, check the following:

• The user account that can obtain user groups is sAMAccountName (user). Do not use
UserPrincipalName ([email protected]) as the user name.

296
 When Other Messages Appear

• Check whether the name in "Group" is correctly specified including the case-sensitivity in [Settings]
[System Settings] [Settings for Administrator] [Authentication/Charge] [Administrator
Authentication/User Authentication/App Auth.] [User Authentication Management]
[Windows Authentication].
• Select the user in the address book, press [Edit], and then check that [Unavailable] is specified for
each function under the [User Management / Others] tab [User Management] [Available
Functions / Applications].
• Check whether "Global Scope" is specified as the scope of the group in a property for the user
group created in DC, and the group type specified in "Security". Also check whether an account is
registered to the user group that has been created. If more than one DC exists, check whether a
trust relationship between DCs is established.
*2 To resolve the domain name, see the following:
• Check whether [Domain Name Configuration] and [DNS Configuration] or [WINS Configuration]
is specified correctly in [Settings] [System Settings] [Network/Interface].
• Enter the IP address in [Domain Name Configuration] to check the connection. If authentication can
be performed using the IP address, check [DNS Configuration] or [WINS Configuration] again.
• If authentication by IP address is not possible, check whether LM/NTLM is set to be denied in the
domain controller security policy or domain security policy. Also check that the port is not closed in
the firewall between the device and the domain controller or in the firewall settings of the domain
controller. When the Windows firewall is enabled, create a new rule that allows communication on
port 137 and port 139 in "Advanced" of the Windows firewall. Open the TCP/IP properties from
the network connection properties, select the "Enable NetBIOS Over TCP/IP" check box on
[Advanced] [WINS] tab, and open port 137.
*3 For Kerberos authentication, check the following:
• Check that "Realm Name", "KDC Server Name", "Domain Name" are specified correctly in
[Settings] [System Settings] [Settings for Administrator] [Authentication/Charge]
[Administrator Authentication/User Authentication/App Auth.] [Register/Change/Delete
Realm]. Enter "Realm Name" in upper case.
• Configure the setting so that the difference in time between the clocks on KDC and device is less
than five minutes. The clock on the machine can be adjusted in [Settings] [System Settings]
[Date/Time/Timer] [Date/Time] [Set Time].
• Kerberos authentication fails if auto-obtaining of KDC in Windows authentication fails. When auto-
obtaining cannot be activated, switch to manual.
*4 For LDAP settings, check the following:
• Check whether the LDAP server is correctly specified in [Settings] [System Settings] [Settings
for Administrator] [Authentication/Charge] [Administrator Authentication/User
Authentication/App Auth.] [User Authentication Management] [LDAP Authentication] or
[Custom Authentication].

297
 10. Troubleshooting

• Check that the representative account is registered in the following setting items, and then execute
[Connection Test]. Select the server in [Settings] [System Settings] [Settings for Administrator]
[Authentication/Charge] [Administrator Authentication/User Authentication/App Auth.]
[Register/Change/Delete LDAP Server], press [Register/Change] and set [Authentication] to
[Kerberos Authentication]
See "Registering the LDAP Server", User Guide (Full Version).
• If the connection test fails, check whether [Domain Name Configuration] and [DNS Configuration]
or [WINS Configuration] is specified correctly on [Settings] [System Settings] [Network/
Interface].

Messages that Appear When Logging in to the Machine Using an IC Card Fails

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Authentication has The card is locked Unlock the card.

failed." because the number of
*0150-401 times an incorrect PIN
code was entered
exceeds the limit.

"Authentication has An incorrect PIN code Enter the correct PIN.

failed." was entered.
*0151-401

"Authentication has The card authentication Connect the card authentication device again.
failed." device has been Connect the card authentication device to the
*0153-402 removed or is not USB2.0 Interface Type A on the back left side
connected properly. of the machine.

"Authentication has Reading of an IC card Set the IC card on the authentication device
failed." has failed. correctly and for a longer duration.
*0154-402

"Authentication has An incorrect user name Enter the correct user name and password.
failed." or password was
*0156-401 entered.

298
 When Other Messages Appear

Message Cause Solution and reference

"The card authentication The card authentication Connect the card authentication device again.
device is not connected." device has been Connect the card authentication device to the
removed or is not USB2.0 Interface Type A on the back left side
connected properly. of the machine.

A malfunction is Turn off the power of the machine, wait for 10

temporarily occurring seconds or more after confirming that the main
on the machine. power indicator is turned off, and then turn on
the power.
page 17 "Turning On and Off the Power"

Messages that Appear When the LDAP Server Is Unavailable

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Connection with LDAP The network is busy. Try again.

server has failed. Check
the server status." The setting information is Check the setting information of [Settings]
incorrect. [System Settings] [Settings for
Administrator] [Authentication/Charge]
[Administrator Authentication/User
Authentication/App Auth.] [Register/
Change/Delete LDAP Server].
See "Registering the LDAP Server", User Guide
(Full Version).

"Exceeded time limit for The network is busy. Try again.

LDAP server search.
Check the server status." The setting information is Check the setting information of [Settings]
incorrect. [System Settings] [Settings for
Administrator] [Authentication/Charge]
[Administrator Authentication/User
Authentication/App Auth.] [Register/
Change/Delete LDAP Server].
See "Registering the LDAP Server", User Guide
(Full Version).

299
 10. Troubleshooting

Message Cause Solution and reference

"LDAP server The user name or Select the user in the address book, press
authentication has failed. password is incorrect. [Edit], and specify the correct user name and
Check the settings." password in [User Management / Others] tab
[User Management] [LDAP
Authentication Info].
See "Registering a User in the Address Book
and Specifying the Login Information", User
Guide (Full Version).

Messages that Appear When There Is a Problem with the Certificate

Message Cause Solution and reference

"The destination cannot The device certificate Install a new device certificate used for the S/
be selected because the used for the S/MIME MIME signature.
device certificate used signature is not currently See "Encrypting Network Communication",
for the S/MIME valid. User Guide (Full Version).
signature is not currently
valid. Please check the
certificate."

"Signature cannot be set

because there is a
problem with the device
certificate used for the S/
MIME signature. Check
the device certificate."

300
 When Other Messages Appear

Message Cause Solution and reference

"Signature cannot be set The device certificate Use a valid device certificate for the digital
because the Digital used for the digital signature in PDF or PDF/A.
Signature's device signature in PDF or See "Scanning an Original as a PDF with
certificate is not currently PDF/A is not currently Security Setting Specified", User Guide (Full
valid. Please check the valid. Version).
certificate."

"The destination cannot The device certificate

be selected because used for the digital
there is a problem with signature in PDF or
the device certificate PDF/A is missing or
used for the S/MIME invalid.
signature. Please check
the certificate."

"The destination cannot The user certificate Install a new user certificate.
be selected because its (destination certificate) See "Encrypting Network Communication",
encryption certificate is has expired. User Guide (Full Version).
not currently valid. Please
check the certificate."

"The group destination

cannot be selected
because it contains a
destination with an
encryption certificate that
is not currently valid.
Please check the
certificate."

"Transmission cannot be
performed because the
encryption certificate is
not currently valid. Please
check the certificate."

301
 10. Troubleshooting

Messages that Appear When an Application Site Cannot Be Used

Message Cause Solution and reference

"A server error has An unexpected error • See the server maintenance information in
occurred." has occurred on the [Information].
server. • Check whether the Network/Interface
([DNS Configuration], [Control Panel:
"Cannot connect to Cannot connect to the
Proxy Settings]) are correctly configured.
server which installs installation server.
applications. Check See "Installing an Application from
maintenance information Application Site", User Guide (Full
on Information screen or Version).
network settings."

"Could not update the

firmware."

"Failed to download the

application"

"Failed to install the

application because an
error has occurred."

"Could not restore the The firmware from The firmware cannot be recovered.
firmware because the Application Site has not
required data does not been updated.
exist."

"The specified page An error has occurred in See the server maintenance information in
cannot be found." Application Site. [Information].

"There is insufficient The remaining free Delete applications that are not necessary.
space to store internally, space on the hard disk
delete any unnecessary is insufficient.
applications."

302
11. Specifications for The Machine

Model-Specific Information
This section explains how you can identify the region your machine belongs to.
There is a label on the rear of the machine, located in the position shown below. The label contains
details that identify the region your machine belongs to. Read the label.

D0CHIA3101

The following information is region-specific. Read the information under the symbol that corresponds to
the region of your machine.
(mainly Europe and Asia)
If the label contains the following, your machine is a region A model:
• CODE XXXX -27, -65, -29
• 220–240 V
(mainly North America)
If the label contains the following, your machine is a region B model:
• CODE XXXX -17, -58
• 120–127 V

• Dimensions in this manual are given in two units of measure: metric and inch. If your machine is a
Region A model, refer to the metric units. If your machine is a Region B model, refer to the inch
units.
• If your machine is a region A model and "CODE XXXX -27, -65" is printed on the label, see
" (mainly Europe)" also.
• If your machine is a region A model and "CODE XXXX -29" is printed on the label, see
" (mainly Asia)" also.

303
 11. Specifications for The Machine

List of Specifications
Specifications for the Main Unit

Item Specifications

Configuration Desktop

Memory 2 GB

Hard disk size 320 GB

Photosensitivity type OPC drum

Copy process Laser beam scanning and electro-photographic printing

Exposure glass Stationary original exposure type

Scan method Flatbed scanning

Warm-up time • Normal mode:

(23°C (73.4°F), rated 52 seconds
voltage) • Quick mode:
20 seconds

First copy time • IM 2500/2500A/3000/3000A

(mainly Europe) 4.6 seconds
• IM 3500/3500A
4.3 seconds
• IM 4000A
4.0 seconds
• IM 5000A/6000
2.9 seconds

304
 List of Specifications

Item Specifications

First copy time • IM 2500/3000

(mainly Asia) 4.6 seconds
• IM 3500
4.3 seconds
• IM 4000
4.0 seconds
• IM 5000/6000
2.9 seconds

First copy time • IM 2500/2500A/3000/3000A

(mainly North America) 4.6 seconds
• IM 3500/3500A
4.3 seconds
• IM 4000
4.0 seconds
• IM 5000/6000
2.9 seconds

Copy/print speed (per • IM 2500 series: 25 sheets/minute

minute) • IM 3000 series: 30 sheets/minute
• IM 3500 series: 35 sheets/minute
• IM 4000 series: 40 sheets/minute
• IM 5000 series: 50 sheets/minute
• IM 6000 series: 60 sheets/minute
(A4 , 81/2 × 11 )

Maximum original size (mainly Europe and Asia)

A3
(mainly North America)
11×17

305
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Item Specifications

Original scanning area • Exposure Glass

22
11

DZW788

1. Vertical: Up to 297 mm (11.7 inches)

2. Horizontal: Up to 432 mm (17. 1 inches)
• ADF

22
11

DZW789

1. Vertical: 128 to 297 mm (5.1 to 11.7 inches)

2. Horizontal
• Copy function: 128 to 1,260 mm (5.1 to 49.6 inches)
• Scanner function: 128 to 432 mm (5.1 to 17. 1 inches)
• Facsimile function: 128 to 1,200 mm (5.1 to 47.2
inches)

Originals Sheet, book, three-dimensional object

Copy size • Trays 1–2 and the bypass tray:

page 200 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types"
• Duplex:
A3 , A4, A5, A6 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS, B6 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2
× 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 ×
13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K, 12 ×
18 , 11 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 132/5
• Duplex (Custom Size):
Vertical: 90–297 mm (3.55–11.69 inches)
Horizontal: 148–431.8 mm (5.83–17.0 inches)

306
 List of Specifications

Item Specifications

Paper weight • Trays 1–2 and the bypass tray:

page 200 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types"
• Duplex:
52.0–256.0 g/m2 (14.0 lb. Bond–140.0 lb. Index)
For details about and recommendations concerning thick paper,
see page 208 "Thick Paper Orientation and Recommended
Status".

Missing image area

(Copy)
1

Print area

4 3 DZX710

1. Leading edge: 4.2 ±1.5 mm (0.17 ±0.06 inches)

2. Trailing edge: 0.5–6.0 mm (0.02–0.24 inches)
3. Right edge: 0.5–4.0 mm (0.02–0.16 inches)
4. Left edge: 0.5–4.0 mm (0.02–0.16 inches)

Paper output capacity of A4 or smaller: 500 sheets (80 g/m2)

the internal tray B4 or smaller: 250 sheets (80 g/m2)

307
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Item Specifications

Preset reproduction ratio (mainly Europe and Asia)

Preset reproduction ratios (%):
• Enlargement: 400, 200, 141, 122, 115
• Full size: 100
• Reduction: 93, 82, 75, 71, 65, 50, 25
(mainly North America)
Preset reproduction ratios (%):
• Enlargement: 400, 200, 155, 129, 121
• Full size: 100
• Reduction: 93, 85, 78, 73, 65, 50, 25

Reproduction ratio (zoom) From 25–400% in increments of 1%

Resolution (scanning 600 × 600dpi

originals)

Resolution (copying) 600 × 600dpi

Tone 256 tones

Paper capacity (80 g/m2, page 200 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types"
20 lb. Bond)

Continuous copy run 1–999 sheets

Duplex Standard

Power requirements (mainly Europe and Asia)

220-240 V, 8 A, 50/60 Hz
(mainly North America)
120–127 V, 12 A, 60 Hz

308
 List of Specifications

Item Specifications

Power consumption (Main • IM 2500/2500A/3000/3000A/3500/3500A

unit only) Ready: 56.4 W
(mainly Europe)
During printing: 446 W (IM 2500/2500A)
During printing: 475 W (IM 3000/3000A)
During printing: 553 W (IM 3500/3500A)
Maximum: 1600 W or less
• IM 4000A/5000A/6000
Ready: 64.7 W
During printing: 568 W (IM 4000A)
During printing: 767 W (IM 5000A)
During printing: 821 W (IM 6000)
Maximum: 1780 W or less
The power level when the main switch is turned off and the power cord
is plugged into an outlet: 1 W or less

Power consumption • IM 2500/2500A/3000/3000A/3500/3500A

(Complete system) Maximum: 1600 W or less
(mainly
• IM 4000A/5000A/6000
Europe)
Maximum: 1780 W or less
• The complete system of the IM 2500/2500A/3000/3000A/
3500/3500A consists of the main unit, one-pass duplex scanning
ADF, lower paper trays, large capacity tray (LCT), Internal Multi-
Folding unit, Booklet Finisher SR3270, and device server option.
• The complete system of the IM 4000A/5000A/6000 consists of
the main unit, one-pass duplex scanning ADF, lower paper trays,
large capacity tray (LCT), Internal Multi-Folding unit, Booklet
Finisher SR3290, and device server option.

309
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Item Specifications

Power consumption (Main • IM 2500/3000/3500

unit only) Ready: 56.4 W
(mainly Asia)
During printing: 446 W (IM 2500)
During printing: 475 W (IM 3000)
During printing: 553 W (IM 3500)
Maximum: 1600 W or less
• IM 4000/5000/6000
Ready: 64.7 W
During printing: 568 W (IM 4000)
During printing: 767 W (IM 5000)
During printing: 821 W (IM 6000)
Maximum: 1780 W or less
The power level when the main switch is turned off and the power cord
is plugged into an outlet: 1 W or less

Power consumption • IM 2500/3000/3500

(Complete system) Maximum: 1600 W or less
(mainly Asia)
• IM 4000/5000/6000
Maximum: 1780 W or less
• The complete system of the IM 2500/3000/3500 consists of the
main unit, one-pass duplex scanning ADF, lower paper trays, large
capacity tray (LCT), Internal Multi-Folding unit, Booklet Finisher
SR3270, and device server option.
• The complete system of the IM 4000/5000/6000 consists of the
main unit, one-pass duplex scanning ADF, lower paper trays, large
capacity tray (LCT), Internal Multi-Folding unit, Booklet Finisher
SR3290, and device server option.

310
 List of Specifications

Item Specifications

Power consumption (Main • IM 2500/2500A/3000/3000A/3500/3500A

unit only) Ready: 57.0 W
(mainly North America)
During printing: 437 W (IM 2500/2500A)
During printing: 470 W (IM 3000/3000A)
During printing: 536 W (IM 3500/3500A)
Maximum: 1600 W or less
• IM 4000/5000/6000
Ready: 62.2 W
During printing: 584 W (IM 4000)
During printing: 755 W (IM 5000)
During printing: 811 W (IM 6000)
Maximum: 1600 W or less
The power level when the main switch is turned off and the power cord
is plugged into an outlet: 1 W or less

Power consumption Maximum: 1600 W or less

(Complete system) • The complete system of the IM 2500/2500A/3000/3000A/
(mainly North 3500/3500A consists of the main unit, one-pass duplex scanning
America) ADF, lower paper trays, large capacity tray (LCT), Internal Multi-
Folding unit, Booklet Finisher SR3270, and device server option.
• The complete system of the IM 4000/5000/6000 consists of the
main unit, one-pass duplex scanning ADF, lower paper trays, large
capacity tray (LCT), Internal Multi-Folding unit, Booklet Finisher
SR3290, and device server option.

311
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Item Specifications

Dimensions (When the (mainly Europe)

angle of the control panel • IM 2500/3000/3500 (W × D × H up to ADF):
is 10° to the floor)
587 × 673 × 913 mm (23.2 × 26.5 × 36.0 inches)
• IM 2500A/3000A/3500A/4000A/5000A/6000 (W × D × H
up to ADF):
587 × 673 × 963 mm (23.2 × 26.5 × 38.0 inches)
(mainly Asia)
• IM 2500/3000/3500/4000/5000 (W × D × H up to exposure
glass):
587 × 673 × 788 mm (23.2 × 26.5 × 31.1 inches)
• IM 6000 (W × D × H up to ADF):
587 × 673 × 963 mm (23.2 × 26.5 × 38.0 inches)
(mainly North America)
• IM 2500/3000/3500 (W × D × H up to ADF):
587 × 673 × 913 mm (23.2 × 26.5 × 36.0 inches)
• IM 2500A/3000A/3500A/4000/5000/6000 (W × D × H up
to ADF):
587 × 673 × 963 mm (23.2 × 26.5 × 38.0 inches)

Space for main unit 1,919 × 1,208 mm (75.6 × 47.6 inches) or less (When the trays
(W × D) (handles not included), one-pass duplex scanning ADF, large capacity
tray, or Booklet Finisher SR3290 are open.)

312
 List of Specifications

Item Specifications

Noise emission (Sound • IM 2500/2500A

power level: Main unit Stand-by: 40.0 dB
only) (mainly
Copying: 60.0 dB
Europe)
• IM 3000/3000A
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 60.0 dB
• IM 3500/3500A
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 61.3 dB
• IM 4000A
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 62.6 dB
• IM 5000A
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 64.8 dB
• IM 6000
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 65.0 dB

313
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Item Specifications

Noise emission (Sound • IM 2500/2500A

power level: Complete Stand-by: 40.0 dB
system)
Copying: 68.8 dB
(mainly Europe)
• IM 3000/3000A
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 69.5 dB
• IM 3500/3500A
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 70.8 dB
• IM 4000A
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 72.0 dB
• IM 5000A
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 72.9 dB
• IM 6000
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 72.9 dB

314
 List of Specifications

Item Specifications

Noise emission (Sound • IM 2500/2500A

pressure level: Main unit Stand-by: 34.0 dB
only) (mainly
Copying: 54.0 dB
Europe)
• IM 3000/3000A
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 54.0 dB
• IM 3500/3500A
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 55.3 dB
• IM 4000A
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 56.6 dB
• IM 5000A
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 58.8 dB
• IM 6000
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 59.0 dB

315
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Item Specifications

Noise emission (Sound • IM 2500/2500A

pressure level: Complete Stand-by: 34.0 dB
system)
Copying: 62.8 dB
(mainly Europe)
• IM 3000/3000A
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 63.5 dB
• IM 3500/3500A
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 64.8 dB
• IM 4000A
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 66.0 dB
• IM 5000A
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 66.9 dB
• IM 6000
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 66.9 dB

Noise emission
(mainly
• Sound power levels and sound pressure levels are actual values
Europe)
measured in accordance with ISO 7779.
• Sound pressure levels are measured from the position of the
bystander.
• The complete system of the IM 2500/2500A/3000/3000A/
3500/3500A consists of the main unit, ADF, internal tray 2, lower
paper trays, bridge unit, and Booklet Finisher SR3270.
• The complete system of the IM 4000A/5000A/6000 consists of
the main unit, ADF, internal tray 2, lower paper trays, bridge unit,
and Booklet Finisher SR3290.

316
 List of Specifications

Item Specifications

Noise emission (Sound • IM 2500

power level: Main unit Stand-by: 40.0 dB
only) (mainly
Copying: 60.0 dB
Asia)
• IM 3000
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 60.0 dB
• IM 3500
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 61.3 dB
• IM 4000
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 62.6 dB
• IM 5000
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 64.8 dB
• IM 6000
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 65.0 dB

317
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Item Specifications

Noise emission (Sound • IM 2500

power level: Complete Stand-by: 40.0 dB
system)
Copying: 68.8 dB
(mainly Asia)
• IM 3000
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 69.5 dB
• IM 3500
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 70.8 dB
• IM 4000
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 72.0 dB
• IM 5000
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 72.9 dB
• IM 6000
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 72.9 dB

318
 List of Specifications

Item Specifications

Noise emission (Sound • IM 2500

pressure level: Main unit Stand-by: 34.0 dB
only) (mainly
Copying: 54.0 dB
Asia)
• IM 3000
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 54.0 dB
• IM 3500
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 55.3 dB
• IM 4000
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 56.6 dB
• IM 5000
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 58.8 dB
• IM 6000
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 59.0 dB

319
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Item Specifications

Noise emission (Sound • IM 2500

pressure level: Complete Stand-by: 34.0 dB
system)
Copying: 62.8 dB
(mainly Asia)
• IM 3000
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 63.5 dB
• IM 3500
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 64.8 dB
• IM 4000
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 66.0 dB
• IM 5000
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 66.9 dB
• IM 6000
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 66.9 dB

Noise emission
(mainly Asia)
• Sound power levels and sound pressure levels are actual values
measured in accordance with ISO 7779.
• Sound pressure levels are measured from the position of the
bystander.
• The complete system of the IM 2500/3000/3500 consists of the
main unit, ADF, internal tray 2, lower paper trays, bridge unit, and
Booklet Finisher SR3270.
• The complete system of the IM 4000/5000/6000 consists of the
main unit, ADF, internal tray 2, lower paper trays, bridge unit, and
Booklet Finisher SR3290.

320
 List of Specifications

Item Specifications

Noise emission (Sound • IM 2500/2500A

power level: Main unit Stand-by: 40.0 dB
only) (mainly
Copying: 60.0 dB
North America)
• IM 3000/3000A
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 60.0 dB
• IM 3500/3500A
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 61.3 dB
• IM 4000
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 62.6 dB
• IM 5000
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 64.8 dB
• IM 6000
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 65.0 dB

321
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Item Specifications

Noise emission (Sound • IM 2500/2500A

power level: Complete Stand-by: 40.0 dB
system) (mainly
Copying: 68.8 dB
North America)
• IM 3000/3000A
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 69.5 dB
• IM 3500/3500A
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 70.8 dB
• IM 4000
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 72.0 dB
• IM 5000
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 72.9 dB
• IM 6000
Stand-by: 40.0 dB
Copying: 72.9 dB

322
 List of Specifications

Item Specifications

Noise emission (Sound • IM 2500/2500A

pressure level: Main unit Stand-by: 34.0 dB
only) (mainly
Copying: 54.0 dB
North America)
• IM 3000/3000A
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 54.0 dB
• IM 3500/3500A
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 55.3 dB
• IM 4000
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 56.6 dB
• IM 5000
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 58.8 dB
• IM 6000
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 59.0 dB

323
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Item Specifications

Noise emission (Sound • IM 2500/2500A

pressure level: Complete Stand-by: 34.0 dB
system) (mainly
Copying: 62.8 dB
North America)
• IM 3000/3000A
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 63.5 dB
• IM 3500/3500A
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 64.8 dB
• IM 4000
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 66.0 dB
• IM 5000
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 66.9 dB
• IM 6000
Stand-by: 34.0 dB
Copying: 66.9 dB

Noise emission
(mainly North
• Sound power levels and sound pressure levels are actual values
America)
measured in accordance with ISO 7779.
• Sound pressure levels are measured from the position of the
bystander.
• The complete system of the IM 2500/2500A/3000/3000A/
3500/3500A consists of the main unit, ADF, internal tray 2, lower
paper trays, bridge unit, and Booklet Finisher SR3270.
• The complete system of the IM 4000/5000/6000 consists of the
main unit, ADF, internal tray 2, lower paper trays, bridge unit, and
Booklet Finisher SR3290.

324
 List of Specifications

Item Specifications

Weight (mainly Europe)

• IM 2500/3000/3500
Approx. 71 kg (156.5 lb.)
• IM 2500A/3000A/3500A/4000A/5000A/6000
Approx. 77 kg (169.8 lb.)
(mainly Asia)
• IM 2500/3000/3500/4000/5000
Approx. 63 kg (138.9 lb.)
• IM 6000
Approx. 77 kg (169.8 lb.)
(mainly North America)
• IM 2500/3000/3500
Approx. 71 kg (156.5 lb.)
• IM 2500A/3000A/3500A/4000/5000/6000
Approx. 77 kg (169.8 lb.)

Specifications for the Document Server

Item Specifications

HDD (Document Server) Approx. 73 GB

Maximum: 9,000 pages (Total number of pages that can be stored
with all functions combined.)
Copy/A4 original: Approx. 9,000 pages
Printer/A4/600 dpi, 2 bits: Approx. 9,000 pages
Scanner/A4/200 dpi, 8 bits/JPEG: Approx. 9,000 pages
(Under the printer and scanner modes, the number of the pages that
can be stored depends on the print image and original.)

Maximum number of stored 3,000 documents

documents

325
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Item Specifications

Number of pages supported Maximum: 2,000 pages

by memory sorting Copy/A4 original: Approx. 2,000 pages
Printer/A4/600 dpi, 4 bits: Approx. 2,000 pages
(Under the printer mode, the number of pages that can be sorted
depends on the print image.)

• After the documents have been stored up to the maximum, no more document can be stored.
Delete unneeded documents.

Specifications for Facsimile

This function may not be used depending on the telephone line or area status.

• To connect the machine to the network, use a LAN cable supporting 1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX,
and 10BASE-T. The length of the usable cable is up to 100 m.

Fax Transmissions and Reception

Item Specifications

Standard G3

Resolution • Standard: 8 × 3.85 lines/mm, 200 × 100 dpi (Standard

character), 8 × 7.7 lines/mm, 200 × 200 dpi (Detail character)
• Optional: 8 × 15.4 lines/mm, 16 × 15.4 lines/mm, 400 × 400
dpi (Super Fine character)*1

Transmission time 3 seconds at 28,800 bps, Standard resolution (JBIG transmission: 2

seconds)

Data compression method MH, MR, MMR, JBIG*2

Maximum original size Standard: A3 or 11 × 17

Custom (w × h): 297 × 1,200 mm (11.7 × 47.3 inches)

Maximum scanning size 297 × 1,200 mm (11.7 × 47.3 inches)

Print process Laser beam scanning and electro-photographic printing

326
 List of Specifications

Item Specifications

Transmission speed 33,600 / 31,200 / 28,800 / 26,400 / 24,000 / 21,600 /

19,200 / 16,800 / 14,400 / 12,000 / 9,600 / 7,200 / 4,800 /
2,400 bps (auto shift down system)

*1 For Super Fine transmission, an expansion memory (optional) is required.

*2 JBIG transmission cannot be performed if the JBIG reception and ECM functions are not available on the
destination fax. The ECM function is valid for communication over the G3 line.

Internet Fax Transmissions and Reception

Item Specifications

Network • Standard:
Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T)
• Option:
IEEE802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN interface

Transmit function E-mail

Scan line density • Standard: 200 × 100 dpi (Standard character), 200 × 200 dpi
(Detail character)
• Optional: 200 × 400 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi (Super Fine
character)*1*2

Original size: Scanning 297 mm (A3 )*1, 257 mm (B4 JIS )*1, 210 mm (A4 )
width

Communication Protocols • Transmission:

SMTP, TCP/IP
• Reception:
POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP

E-mail format Single/Multi-part, MIME Conversion

Attached file forms: TIFF-F (MH, MR*1, MMR*1 compression)

Internet communication Send and receive e-mail with a computer that has an e-mail address

Encryption method (for S/MIME

forwarding)

Internet Fax send functions: Automatic conversion of sent documents to e-mail format and e-mail
transmission. Memory transmission only.

327
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Item Specifications

Internet Fax receive Automatic detection and printing of appended TIFF-F (MH) files and
functions ASCII text.
Memory reception only.

*1 Full mode
*2 For superfine-character transmission, an expansion memory (optional) is required.

IP-Fax Transmissions and Reception

Item Specifications

Network • Standard:
Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T)
• Option:
IEEE802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN interface

Scan line density • Standard: 8 × 3.85 lines/mm, 200 × 100 dpi (Standard
character), 8 × 7.7 lines/mm, 200 × 200 dpi (Detail character)
• Optional: 8 × 15.4 lines/mm, 16 × 15.4 lines/mm, 400 × 400
dpi (Super Fine character)*1

Maximum original size Standard: A3 or 11 × 17

Custom (w × h): 297 × 1,200 mm (11.7 × 47.3 inches)

Maximum scanning size 297 × 1,200 mm (11.7 × 47.3 inches)

Transmission protocol Recommendation: T.38, TCP, UDP/IP communication, SIP (RFC 3261
compliant), H.323 v2

Compatible machines IP-Fax compatible machines

IP-Fax transmission function Specify an IP address and send faxes to an IP-Fax compatible fax
through a network.
Also capable of sending faxes to a G3 fax connected to a telephone
line via a VoIP gateway.

IP-Fax reception function Receive faxes sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax through a network.
Also capable of receiving faxes from a G3 fax connected to a
telephone line via a VoIP gateway.

*1 For detail-character and superfine-character transmission, an expansion memory (optional) is required.

328
 List of Specifications

Validated Peripherals
Item Specifications

Gateway (T.38 compliant) • InnovaPhone VoIP-Gateway IP305

Software version: v7 hotfix (09-70300.17)
• Cisco VoIP-Gateway (Operation confirmed with H.323)
Software version: IOS12.3 (5)
Platform: Cisco2600XM, 3725, 847-4V, 26xx, 36xx, 37xx,
7200, AS5300, ICS 7750
• Siemens VoIP-Gateway RG8300 (Operation confirmed with SIP)
Software version: Version 5

Gatekeeper • InnovaPhone VoIP-Gateway IP305

Software version: v7 hotfix (09-70300.17)
• Cisco Gatekeeper
Software version: IOS12.1 (2) T
Platform: Cisco2600XM, 3620, 3640, 3660, 3725, 3745,
7200, 7400

SIP server • Cisco SIP proxy server

Software version: Version 2.0
• Cisco VoIP-Gateway
Software version: IOS12.3 (17) a
Platform: Cisco3725 (256Mbyte RAM), Cisco2621XM
(128Mbyte RAM)
• Cisco unified CallManager
Software version: Ver6.2
• InnovaPhone VoIP-Gateway IP305
Software version: v7 hotfix (09-70300.17)
• Siemens HiPath8000 (Operation confirmed with SIP)
Software version: Voice redundant v4

• You can assign multiple addresses of the machine in the IPv6 environment, but only one address
can receive IP-fax.
• The SIP connection is specified to connect to either IPv4 or IPv6 depending on the environment of
the machine. To change the setting, contact your local dealer.

329
 11. Specifications for The Machine

E-mail Transmission and Folder Transmission (Fax (Classic) only)

Item Specifications

Network • Standard:
Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T)
• Option:
IEEE802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN interface

Scan line density • Standard: 200 × 100 dpi (Standard character)*1, 200 × 200
dpi (Detail character)
• Optional: 400 × 400 dpi (Super Fine character)*2

Maximum original size Standard: A3 or 11 × 17

Custom (w × h): 297 × 1,200 mm (11.7 × 47.3 inches)

Maximum scanning size (w 297 × 1,200 mm (11.7 × 47.3 inches)

× h)

E-mail transmission SMTP, TCP/IP

protocols

Protocols for sending files to SMB, FTP, TCP/IP

folders

E-mail format Single/Multi-part, MIME Conversion

File formats TIFF (MH, MR, MMR compression), PDF, PDF/A

When you select PDF or PDF/A for the file format, you can attach a
digital signature.

Authentication methods SMTP-AUTH, POP before SMTP, A-POP

Encryption method S/MIME

E-mail sending functions Automatically converts documents to e-mail format and sends them as
e-mail.

Sending to folder functions Sends scanned files over the network to shared folders or FTP server
folders.

*1 When you send documents in TIFF format.

*2 For detail-character and superfine-character transmission, an expansion memory (optional) is required.

330
 List of Specifications

E-mail Reception
Item Specifications

Network • Standard:
Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T)
• Option:
IEEE802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN interface

E-mail reception protocols POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP

(Mail to Print)

E-mail format Single/Multi-part, MIME Conversion

File formats (Mail to Print) JPEG (JFIF), PDF

Authentication methods SMTP-AUTH, POP before SMTP, A-POP

Encryption method S/MIME

E-mail receiving functions Automatically detects and outputs JPEG and PDF documents attached
to received e-mail.

Specifications for Printer

• To connect the machine to the network, use a LAN cable supporting 1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX,
and 10BASE-T. The length of the usable cable is up to 100 m.

Item Specifications

Printing speed • IM 2500 series: 25 sheets/minute

• IM 3000 series: 30 sheets/minute
• IM 3500 series: 35 sheets/minute
• IM 4000 series: 40 sheets/minute
• IM 5000 series: 50 sheets/minute
• IM 6000 series: 60 sheets/minute
(A4 , 81/2 × 11 , plain paper, one-side printing)

Resolution 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi, 1,200 dpi

331
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Item Specifications

Printer language • Standard:

PCL 5e/6(XL), PostScript 3 Emulation, PDF Emulation, MediaPrint
(JPEG, TIFF)
• Option:
Genuine Adobe PostScript 3, PDF Direct from Adobe, IPDS, XPS

Interface • Standard:
Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T)
USB2.0 (Type B) port
USB2.0 (Type A) port (on the control panel)
SD card slot (on the control panel)
• Option:
IEEE 1284 parallel interface
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN interface
File format converter
Device Server option

Network protocol TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6)

USB interface • Transmission spec:

USB 2.0 Standard
• Connectable device:
Devices corresponding to USB 2.0 Standard

Operating system • Windows 8.1/10

• Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2/2016/2019
• macOS 10.12 or later

Fonts • PCL 5e/6(XL): 80 fonts, 13 International fonts

• PostScript 3 Emulation: 80 fonts, 13 International fonts
• PDF Emulation: 80 fonts, 13 International fonts
• Genuine Adobe PDF: 136 fonts
• Genuine Adobe PostScript 3: 136 fonts
• IPDS: 108 fonts

332
 List of Specifications

Item Specifications

Store function Total number of documents that can be stored: Up to 100 documents
Number of pages for each document that can be stored: Up to 2,000
pages
Total number of pages of all documents that can be stored: Up to
9,000 pages

Sort function Number of pages that can be sorted: Up to 2,000 pages

Number of copies that can be sorted: Up to 999 copies

• The maximum length for the cable connecting the machine to an Ethernet network is 100 meters.

Specifications for Scanner

• To connect the machine to the network, use a LAN cable supporting 1000BASE-T, 100BASE-TX,
and 10BASE-T. The length of the usable cable is up to 100 m.

Scanning
Item Specifications

Type Full-color scanner

Scan method Flatbed scanning

Image sensor type CMOS Image Sensor

Scan type Sheet, book, three-dimensional object

Original sizes that can be • Length: 10–297 mm (0.4–11 inches)

scanned • Width: 10–432 mm (0.4–17 inches)

Scan sizes automatically (mainly Europe and Asia)

detectable from the A3 , A4, A5 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS
exposure glass
(mainly North America)
11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 132/5 , 81/2 × 11, 51/2 × 81/2

333
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Item Specifications

Scan sizes automatically (mainly Europe and Asia)

detectable from the ADF A3 , A4, A5, B4 JIS , B5 JIS, B6 JIS, 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11
(mainly North America)
A3 , A4, 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 132/5 , 81/2 × 11,
71/4 × 101/2 , 51/2 × 81/2, 10 × 14

Scan speed (the machine • When scanning A4 (black and white, full color)
equipped with the ARDF) 80 pages/minute
• When scanning 81/2 × 11 (black and white, full color)
79 pages/minute
When using the E-mail, Scan to Folder, WSD (Push Type), or Scan to
Removable device (Original size: A4 /81/2 × 11, Resolution: 200
dpi/300 dpi)
• Black and white
Original Type: B & W two-value, Compression (MMR):
Compressed, ITU-T No1 Chart
• Full color
Original type: Text / Photo, Compression (Gray Scale / Full
Color): Default, Original Chart
Scanning speed differs depending on the operating environment of the
machine and computer, scan settings, and the content of originals.

334
 List of Specifications

Item Specifications

Scan speed (the machine • When scanning one-sided originals (black and white, full color)
equipped with the one-pass 120 pages/minute
duplex scanning ADF):
• When scanning two-sided originals (black and white, full color)
240 pages/minute
When using the E-mail, Scan to Folder, WSD (Push Type), or Scan to
Removable device (Original size: A4 /81/2 × 11, Resolution: 200
dpi/300 dpi)
• Black and white
Original Type: B & W two-value, Compression (MMR):
Compressed, ITU-T No1 Chart
• Full Color
Original type: Text/Photo, Compression (Gray Scale/Full Color):
Default, Original Chart
Scanning speed differs depending on the operating environment of the
machine and computer, scan settings, and the content of originals.

Tone • Black & White: 2 tones

• Full Color/Gray Scale: 256 tones

Basic scanning resolution: 200 dpi

Image compression type for TIFF (MH, MR, MMR, JBIG2)

black and white (two-value)

Image compression type for JPEG

gray scale/full color

Interface • Standard:
Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T)
USB 2.0 (Type A) port (on the control panel)
SD card slot (on the control panel)
• Option:
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN interface

Network protocol TCP/IP

WSD Supported

DSM Supported*1

335
 11. Specifications for The Machine

*1 The function can be used only in Scanner (Classic).

E-mail transmission
Item Specifications

Scanning resolution 100 dpi, 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi

Protocol*1 POP, SMTP*2, IMAP4

Output format TIFF, JPEG, PDF, High Compression PDF, PDF/A, Searchable PDF*3*4

*1 Supporting Web mail transmission

*2 Supporting SMTP over SSL
*3 To perform OCR, the optional OCR unit is required.
*4 The number of characters that can be scanned optically is about 40,000 characters per page.

• When you select [PDF], [High Comp. PDF], or [PDF/A] for the file format, you can attach a digital
signature. You can also specify the security settings for [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF].
• See "Scanning an Original as a PDF with Security Setting Specified", User Guide (Full Version).
• To specify High Compression PDF for the PDF type, the following settings are required:
• Selecting Gray Scale or Full Color for [Original Type] under [Send Settings]
• Selecting [100%] for [Scan Ratio] under [Send Settings]
• Selecting [200 dpi], [300 dpi], [400 dpi], or [600 dpi] for [Resolution] under [Send Settings]
• Selecting other than [Preview]
• Specifying [PDF File Type: PDF/A Fixed] under [Settings] [System Settings] [Settings for
Administrator] [File Management] to [Off]

Scan to Folder
Item Specifications

Scanning resolution 100 dpi, 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi

Protocol SMB, FTP

Output format TIFF, JPEG, PDF, High Compression PDF, PDF/A, Searchable PDF*1*2

Operating system • Windows 8.1/10

• Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2/2016/2019
• macOS 10.12 or later

*1 To perform OCR, the optional OCR unit is required.

336
 List of Specifications

*2 The number of characters that can be scanned optically is about 40,000 characters per page.

• When you select [PDF], [High Comp. PDF], or [PDF/A] for the file format, you can attach a digital
signature. You can also specify the security settings for [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF].
• See "Scanning an Original as a PDF with Security Setting Specified", User Guide (Full Version).
• To specify High Compression PDF for the PDF type, the following settings are required:
• Selecting Gray Scale or Full Color for [Original Type] under [Send Settings]
• Selecting [100%] for [Scan Ratio] under [Send Settings]
• Selecting [200 dpi], [300 dpi], [400 dpi], or [600 dpi] for [Resolution] under [Send Settings]
• Selecting other than [Preview]
• Specifying [PDF File Type: PDF/A Fixed] under [Settings] [System Settings] [Settings for
Administrator] [File Management] to [Off]

Network TWAIN Scanner

Item Specifications

Scanning resolution 100–1,200 dpi*1

Protocol TCP/IP

Operating system • Windows 8.1/10

• Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2/2016/2019
(TWAIN scanner runs in 32-bit compatible mode on a 64-bit
operating system, so TWAIN scanner is not compatible with 64-bit
applications. Use 32-bit applications. IC card Authentication System is
not compatible with 64-bit operating system.)

*1 The maximum resolution depends on the scan size.

WIA scanner
Item Specifications

Scanning resolution 100–1,200 dpi*1

(Main scanning × Sub-
scanning)

Protocol TCP/IP

337
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Item Specifications

Operating system • Windows 8.1/10

• Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012 R2/2016/2019
(WIA scanner can function under both 32- and 64-bit operating
systems.)

*1 The maximum resolution depends on the scan size.

Specifications for One-pass Duplex Scanning ADF

Item Specifications

Mode Batch mode, SADF mode, Mixed Sizes mode, Custom Size
originals mode, Original Orientation mode

Original size (mainly Europe and Asia)

A3 –A5, A6 *1, B4 JIS –B6 JIS, 11 × 17 –81/2 × 11
• You cannot scan two sides of B6 JIS originals.
(mainly North America)
11 × 17 –51/2 × 81/2, A3 –A4, A6 *1

Original weight One-sided: 40-128 g/m2 (11-34 lb. Bond)

Two-sided: 52-128 g/m2 (14-34 lb. Bond)
• Small size paper unit:
One-sided/Two-sided: 64-128 g/m2 (17-34 lb.
Bond)

Number of originals to be set 220 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

• Small size paper unit: 44 sheets (81.4g/m2)

Power requirements Power is supplied from the main unit.

Maximum power consumption 55 W or less

(mainly Asia)

Dimensions 587 × 520 × 175 mm (23.2 × 20.5 × 6.9 inches)

(W × D × H) (mainly Asia)

Weight (mainly Asia) Approx. 15 kg (33.1 lb.)

338
 List of Specifications

*1 Small size paper unit is used. (Readable original size: Vertical 76–105 mm (3–4.2 inches), Horizontal 148–
218 mm (5.9–8.6 inches))

Specifications for Auto Reverse Document Feeder (ARDF)

Item Specifications

Mode Batch mode, SADF mode, Mixed Sizes mode, Custom Size originals
mode, Original Orientation mode

Original Size (mainly Europe and Asia)

A3 –A5, B4 JIS –B6 JIS, 11 × 17 –81/2 × 11
• You cannot scan two sides of B6 JIS originals.
(mainly North America)
11 × 17 –51/2 × 81/2, A3 –B6 JIS
• You cannot scan two sides of B6 JIS originals.

Original weight 1 Sided: 40-128 g/m2 (11-34 lb. Bond)

Two Sided: 52-128 g/m2 (14-34 lb. Bond)

Number of originals to be 100 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

set

Power requirements Power is supplied from the main unit.

Maximum power 42 W or less

consumption
(mainly Asia)

Dimensions 565 × 500 × 125 mm (22.3 × 19.7 × 5.0 inches)

(W × D × H)
(mainly Asia)

Weight (mainly Approx. 9 kg (19.9 lb.)

Asia)

339
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Specifications for Internal Finisher SR3250

Item Specifications

Paper size A3 , A4, A5, A6 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS, B6 JIS ,

11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 ,
71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2 , 41/8 × 91/2, 37/8 × 71/2, C5 Env,
C6 Env, DL Env,
8K , 16K, 12 × 18 , 11 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 132/5 ,
custom size

Paper weight 52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)

Paper sizes that can be A3 , A4, A5, B4 JIS , B5 JIS, 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13
shifted , 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 ,
71/4 × 101/2, 8K , 16K, 11 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 132/5 ,
custom size

Paper weight that can be 64-105 g/m2 (17-28 lb. Bond)

shifted

Stack capacity (80 g/m2, • 500 sheets: A4, 81/2 × 11 or smaller

20 lb. Bond) • 250 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 × 14 or larger

Staple paper size A3 , A4, B4 JIS , B5 JIS, 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 ,

81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 71/4 × 101/2, 8K , 16K,
81/2 × 132/5

Staple paper weight 64-105 g/m2 (16-28 lb. Bond)

Staple capacity (80 g/m2, Without Mixed Size:

20 lb. Bond) • 30 sheets: A3 , B4 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13
, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8K , 81/2 × 132/5
• 50 sheets: A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2, 16K
With Mixed Size:
• 30 sheets: A3 /A4 , B4 JIS /B5 , 11 × 17 /81/2 × 11

340
 List of Specifications

Item Specifications

Stack capacity after stapling • A4 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 11

(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond) • 2–9 sheets: 55-46 sets
• 10-50 sheets: 45-10 sets
• A4 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 11 :
• 2-9 sheets: 55-27 sets
• 10-50 sheets: 25-8 sets
• A3 , B4 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 :
• 2-9 sheets: 55-27 sets
• 10-30 sheets: 25-8 sets

Staple position Top 1, Bottom 1, Left 2, Top 2

Power requirements Power is supplied from the main unit.

Maximum power • 47 W or less (without punch unit)

consumption • 60 W or less (with punch unit)

Dimensions 546 × 523 × 170 mm (21.5 × 20.6 × 6.7 inches)

(W × D × H)

Weight • Approx. 13 kg (28.7 lb.) (without punch unit)

• Approx. 18 kg (39.7 lb.) (with punch unit)

Specifications for Finisher SR3260

Item Specifications

Paper size for the finisher A3 , B4 JIS , A4, B5 JIS, A5, B6 JIS , A6 ,
upper tray 12 × 18 *1, 11 × 17 , 11 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2
× 13 , 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 ,
71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K, 81/2 × 132/5 , custom
size

Paper weight for the finisher 52-169 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond-90 lb. Index)
upper tray

341
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Item Specifications

Stack capacity for the • 250 sheets : A4, 81/2 × 11 or smaller

finisher upper tray (80 • 50 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 × 14 or larger
g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

Paper size for the finisher A3 , B4 JIS , A4, B5 JIS, A5, B6 JIS , A6 ,
shift tray 12 × 18 *1, 11 × 17 , 11 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2
× 13 , 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 ,
71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K, 81/2 × 132/5 , custom
size

Paper weight for the finisher 52-300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond-110 lb. Cover)
shift tray (without staple)

Paper sizes that can be A3 , B4 JIS , A4, B5 JIS, A5, A6 , B6 JIS ,

shifted when delivered to 12 × 18 *1, 11 × 17 , 11 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2
the finisher shift tray × 13 , 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 ,
71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K, 81/2 × 132/5 , custom
size

Paper weight that can be 52-300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond-110 lb. Cover)
shifted when delivered to
the finisher shift tray

Stack capacity for the • 1,000 sheets: A4, 81/2 × 11 or smaller:

finisher shift tray (80 g/m2, • 500 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 × 14 or larger:
20 lb. Bond)

Staple paper size A3 , B4 JIS , A4, B5 JIS,

11 × 17 , 11 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2
× 11, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 ×
101/2, 8K , 16K, 81/2 × 132/5 , custom size

Staple paper weight • Staple: 52-220 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond-80 lb. Cover) *2
• Staple-free staple: 64-80 g/m2 (17-20 lb. Bond)

342
 List of Specifications

Item Specifications

Staple capacity (80 g/m2, Without Mixed Size:

20 lb. Bond) • 30 sheets: A3 , B4 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 8 × 13 ,
81/2 × 13 , 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 11 × 15 , 10 × 14
, 8K , 81/2 × 132/5
• 50 sheets: A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11, 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2, 16K
With Mixed Size:
• 22 sheets: A3 /A4 , B4 JIS /B5 JIS , 11 × 17 /81/2 ×
11
Staple-free staple:
• 5 sheets: A3 , A4, B4 JIS , B5 JIS, 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 ,
81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 71/4 ×
101/2, 8K , 16K, 81/2 × 132/5

Stack capacity after stapling Staple:

(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond) • 2–9 sheets: 100 sets (A4 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 11 )
• 10–50 sheets: 100–20 sets (A4 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 11 )
• 10–50 sheets: 50–10 sets (A4 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 11 )
• 2–9 sheets: 50 sets (A3 , A4 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS , 11 × 17 ,
81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11 )
• 10–30 sheets: 50–10 sets (A3 , B4 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 ×
14 )
Staple-free staple:
• 2–5 sheets: 100 sets (A4 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 11 )
• 2–5 sheets: 50 sets (A3 , A4 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS , 11 × 17 ,
81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11 )

Staple position 3 positions (Top, Bottom, 2 Staples)

Power requirements Power is supplied from the main unit.

Maximum power 36 W or less

consumption

Dimensions • 575 × 665 × 960 mm (22.6 × 26.2 × 37.8 inches) (Tray is

(W × D × H) folded.)
• 658 × 665 × 960 mm (25.9 × 26.2 × 37.8 inches) (Tray is
extended.)
(the height to reach the top board)

343
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Item Specifications

Weight Approx. 34 kg (75.0 lb.)

*1 You can load this paper if you are using the IM 4000/5000/6000 series.
*2 You can use two sheets of paper weighing up to 216 g/m2 (80 lb. Cover) per set as cover sheets.

Specifications for Booklet Finisher SR3270

Item Specifications

Paper size for the finisher A3 , B4 JIS , A4, B5 JIS, A5, B6 JIS , A6 ,
upper tray 12 × 18 *1, 11 × 17 , 11 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2
× 13 , 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 ,
71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K, 81/2 × 132/5 , custom
size

Paper weight for the finisher 52-169 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond-90 lb. Index)
upper tray

Stack capacity for the • 250 sheets : A4, 81/2 × 11 or smaller

finisher upper tray (80 • 50 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 × 14 or larger
g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

Paper size for the finisher A3 , B4 JIS , A4, B5 JIS, A5, B6 JIS , 12 × 18 *1, 11 × 17 ,
shift tray 11 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11, 81/4
× 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 ×
81/2 , 8K , 16K, 81/2 × 132/5 , custom size

Paper weight for the finisher 52-300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond-110 lb. Cover)
shift tray

Paper sizes that can be A3 , B4 JIS , A4, B5 JIS, A5, B6 JIS , 12 × 18 *1, 11 × 17 ,
shifted when delivered to 11 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11, 81/4
the finisher shift tray × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 ×
81/2 , 8K , 16K, 81/2 × 132/5 , custom size

Paper weight that can be 52-300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond-110 lb. Cover)
shifted when delivered to
the finisher shift tray

344
 List of Specifications

Item Specifications

Stack capacity for the • 1,000 sheets: A4, 81/2 × 11 or smaller:

finisher shift tray (80 g/m2, • 500 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 × 14 or larger:
20 lb. Bond)

Staple paper size A3 , B4 JIS , A4, B5 JIS,

11 × 17 , 11 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2
× 11, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 ×
101/2, 8K , 16K, 81/2 × 132/5 , custom size

Staple paper weight 52-220 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond-80 lb. Cover)
You can use two sheets of paper weighing up to 216 g/m2 (80 lb.
Cover) per set as cover sheets.

Staple capacity (80 g/m2, Without Mixed Size:

20 lb. Bond) • 30 sheets: A3 , B4 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 8 × 13 ,
81/2 × 13 , 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 11 × 15 , 10 × 14
, 8K , 81/2 × 132/5
• 50 sheets: A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11, 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2, 16K
With Mixed Size:
• 22 sheets: A3 /A4 , B4 JIS /B5 JIS , 11 × 17 /81/2 ×
11

Stack capacity after stapling Without Mixed Size:

(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond) • 2–9 sheets: 100 sets (A4 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 11 )
• 10–50 sheets: 100–20 sets (A4 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 11 )
• 10–50 sheets: 50–10 sets (A4 , B5 JIS , 81/2 × 11 )
• 2–9 sheets: 50 sets (A3 , A4 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS , 11 × 17 ,
81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11 )
• 10–30 sheets: 50–10 sets (A3 , B4 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 ×
14 )
With Mixed Size:
• 2–22 sheets: 22 sets (A3 /A4 , B4 JIS /B5 JIS , 11 × 17
/81/2 × 11 )

Staple position 3 positions (Top, Bottom, 2 Staples)

Saddle stitch paper size A3 , A4 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11

, 81/2 × 132/5

345
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Item Specifications

Saddle stitch paper weight 52-105 g/m2 (14-28 lb. Bond)

Saddle stitch capacity (80 1 set (15 sheets)

g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

Stack capacity after saddle • 2-5 sheets: approx. 20 sets

stitching (80 g/m2, 20 lb. • 6-10 sheets: approx. 10 sets
Bond)
• 11-15 sheets: approx. 7 sets
(Stack capacity depends on the paper type and use conditions.)

Saddle stitch position Center 2 positions

Types of folds Half Fold

Half fold paper size A3 , A4 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11

, 81/2 × 132/5

Half fold paper weight 52-105 g/m2 (14-28 lb. Bond)

Half fold paper type Plain 1, Plain 2, Recycled Paper, Middle Thick, Thin Paper, Color
Paper

Power requirements Power is supplied from the main unit.

Maximum power 36 W or less

consumption

Dimensions • 575 × 620 × 960 mm (22.6 × 24.5 × 37.8 inches) (Tray is

(W × D × H) folded.)
• 658 × 620 × 960 mm (25.9 × 24.5 × 37.8 inches) (Tray is
extended.)
(the height to reach the top board)

Weight Approx. 44 kg (97.1 lb.)

*1 You can load this paper if you are using the IM 4000/5000/6000 series.

• The Half Fold function can fold one sheet at a time.

346
 List of Specifications

Specifications for Finisher SR3280

Item Specifications

Paper size for the finisher A3 , B4 JIS , A4, B5 JIS, A5, B6 JIS , A6 ,
upper tray 12 × 18 , 11 × 17 , 11 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 ×
13 , 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 ,
71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K, 81/2 × 132/5 , custom
size

Paper weight for the finisher 52-220 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond-80 lb. Cover)
upper tray

Stack capacity for the • 250 sheets : A4, 81/2 × 11 or smaller

finisher upper tray (80 • 50 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 × 14 or larger
g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

Paper size for the finisher A3 , B4 JIS , A4, B5 JIS, A5, B6 JIS , A6 ,
shift tray: 12 × 18 , 11 × 17 , 11 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 ×
13 , 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 ,
71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K, 81/2 × 132/5 , custom
size

Paper weight for the finisher 52-300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond-110 lb. Cover)
shift tray (without staple)

Paper sizes that can be A3 , B4 JIS , A4, B5 JIS, A5, 12 × 18 , 11 × 17 , 11 × 15 ,

shifted when delivered to 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14 ,
the finisher shift tray 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2 ,
8K , 16K, 81/2 × 132/5 , custom size

Paper weight that can be 52-300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond-110 lb. Cover)
shifted when delivered to
the finisher shift tray

Stack capacity for the • 3,000 sheets: A4 , 81/2 × 11

finisher shift tray (80 g/m2, • 1,500 sheets: A3 , B4 JIS , A4 , B5 JIS, 12 × 18 , 11 × 17
20 lb. Bond) , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11
• 500 sheets: A5
• 100 sheets: A5 , A6 , B6 JIS , 51/2 × 81/2

347
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Item Specifications

Staple paper size A3 , B4 JIS , A4, B5 JIS,

11 × 17 , 11 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2
× 11, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 ×
101/2, 8K , 16K, 81/2 × 132/5 , custom size

Staple paper weight 52-105 g/m2 (14-28 lb. Bond)

You can use two sheets of paper weighing up to 256 g/m2 (80 lb.
Cover) per set as cover sheets.

Staple capacity (80 g/m2, Without Mixed Size:

20 lb. Bond) • 50 sheets: A3 , B4 JIS , A4, B5 JIS, 11 × 17 , 11 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14
, 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2, 8K ,
16K, 81/2 × 132/5
With Mixed Size:
• 50 sheets: A3 /A4 , B4 JIS /B5 JIS , 11 × 17 /81/2 ×
11

Stack capacity after stapling Without Mixed Size:

(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond) • 2–19 sheets: 150 sets (A4 , 81/2 × 11 )
• 20–50 sheets: 150–46 sets (A4 , 81/2 × 11 )
• 2–14 sheets: 100 sets (A4 , B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11 )
• 15–50 sheets: 100–23 sets (A4 , B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11 )
• 2–14 sheets: 100 sets (other size paper)
• 15–50 sheets: 100–23 sets (other size paper)
With Mixed Size:
• 2–50 sheets: 23 sets (A3 /A4 , B4 JIS /B5 JIS , 11 × 17
/81/2 × 11 )

Staple position 5 positions (Top, Top Slant, Slant, Bottom, 2 Staples)

Power requirements Power is supplied from the main unit.

Maximum power 64 W or less

consumption

348
 List of Specifications

Item Specifications

Dimensions • 657 × 613 × 960 mm (25.9 × 24.2 × 37.8 inches) (Tray is

(W × D × H) folded.)
• 757 × 613 × 960 mm (29.9 × 24.2 × 37.8 inches) (Tray is
extended.)
(the height to reach the top board)

Weight • Approx. 36 kg (79.4 lb.) (without punch unit)

• Approx. 39 kg (86.0 lb.) (with punch unit)

Specifications for Booklet Finisher SR3290

Item Specifications

Paper size for the finisher A3 , B4 JIS , A4, B5 JIS, A5, B6 JIS , A6 ,
upper tray 12 × 18 , 11 × 17 , 11 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 ×
13 , 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 ,
71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K, 81/2 × 132/5 , custom
size

Paper weight for the finisher 52-220 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond-80 lb. Cover)
upper tray

Stack capacity for the • 250 sheets : A4, 81/2 × 11 or smaller

finisher upper tray (80 • 50 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 × 14 or larger
g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

Paper size for the finisher A3 , B4 JIS , A4, B5 JIS, A5, B6 JIS , A6 ,
shift tray 12 × 18 , 11 × 17 , 11 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 ×
13 , 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 ,
71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K, 81/2 × 132/5 , custom
size

Paper weight for the finisher 52-300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond-110 lb. Cover)
shift tray

Paper sizes that can be A3 , B4 JIS , A4, B5 JIS, A5, 12 × 18 , 11 × 17 , 11 × 15 ,

shifted when delivered to 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14 ,
the finisher shift tray 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2 ,
8K , 16K, 81/2 × 132/5 , custom size

349
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Item Specifications

Paper weight that can be 52-300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond-110 lb. Cover)
shifted when delivered to
the finisher shift tray

Stack capacity for the • 2,000 sheets: A4 , 81/2 × 11

finisher shift tray (80 g/m2, • 1,000 sheets: A3 , B4 JIS , A4 , B5 JIS, 12 × 18 , 11 × 17
20 lb. Bond) , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11
• 500 sheets: A5
• 100 sheets: A5 , A6 , B6 JIS , 51/2 × 81/2

Staple paper size A3 , B4 JIS , A4, B5 JIS,

11 × 17 , 11 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2
× 11, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 ×
101/2, 8K , 16K, 81/2 × 132/5 , custom size

Staple paper weight 52-256 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond-140 lb. Index)
You can use two sheets of paper weighing up to 256 g/m2 (80 lb.
Cover) per set as cover sheets.

Staple capacity (80 g/m2, Without Mixed Size:

20 lb. Bond) • 50 sheets: A3 , B4 JIS , A4, B5 JIS, 11 × 17 , 11 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14
, 81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 , 71/4 × 101/2, 8K ,
16K, 81/2 × 132/5
With Mixed Size:
• 50 sheets: A3 /A4 , B4 JIS /B5 JIS , 11 × 17 /81/2 ×
11

Stack capacity after stapling Without Mixed Size:

(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond) • 2–12 sheets: 150 sets (A4 , 81/2 × 11 )
• 13–50 sheets: 150–30 sets (A4 , 81/2 × 11 )
• 2–9 sheets: 100 sets (A4 , B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11 )
• 10–50 sheets: 100–15 sets (A4 , B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11 )
• 2–9 sheets: 100 sets (other size paper)
• 10–50 sheets: 100–23 sets (other size paper)
With Mixed Size:
• 2–50 sheets: 23 sets (A3 /A4 , B4 JIS /B5 JIS , 11 × 17
/81/2 × 11 )

350
 List of Specifications

Item Specifications

Staple position 5 positions (Top, Top Slant, Slant, Bottom, 2 Staples)

Saddle stitch paper size A3 , A4 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11

, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 11 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 ×
132/5 , custom size

Saddle stitch paper weight 64-105 g/m2 (17-28 lb. Bond)

You can use two sheets of paper weighing up to 216 g/ m2 (80 lb.
Cover) per set as cover sheets.

Saddle stitch capacity (80 1 set (20 sheets)

g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)

Stack capacity after saddle • 2-5 sheets: approx. 30 sets

stitching (80 g/m2, 20 lb. • 6-10 sheets: approx. 15 sets
Bond)
• 11-15 sheets: approx. 10 sets
• 16-20 sheets: approx. 5 sets
(Stack capacity depends on the paper type and use conditions.)

Saddle stitch position Center 2 positions

Types of folds Half Fold

Half fold paper size A3 , A4 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11

, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 11 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 ×
132/5

Half fold paper weight: • 1 sheet: 64-216 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond-80 lb. Cover)
• 2-5 sheets: 64-90 g/m2 (17-24 lb. Bond)

Half fold paper type Plain 1, Plain 2, Recycled Paper, Middle Thick, Thick Paper 1, Thick
Paper 2, Color Paper

Power requirements Power is supplied from the main unit.

Maximum power 64 W or less

consumption

351
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Item Specifications

Dimensions • 657 × 613 × 960 mm (25.9 × 24.2 × 37.8 inches) (Tray is

(W × D × H) folded.)
• 757 × 613 × 960 mm (29.9 × 24.2 × 37.8 inches) (Tray is
extended.)
(the height to reach the top board)

Weight • Approx. 56 kg (123.5 lb.) (without punch unit)

• Approx. 59 kg (130.1 lb.) (with punch unit)

• The Multi-sheet Fold function can fold a maximum of five sheets at a time.

Specifications for Internal Finisher SR3300

Item Specifications

Paper size A3 , A4, B4 JIS , B5 JIS, 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 ,

81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 71/4 × 101/2, 8K , 16K,
81/2 × 132/5 , Custom Size

Paper weight 52-300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond-110 lb. Cover)

Paper sizes that can be A3 , A4, B4 JIS , B5 JIS, 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 ,

shifted 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 71/4 × 101/2, 8K , 16K,
81/2 × 132/5 , Custom Size

Paper weight that can be 64-80 g/m2 (17-20 lb. Bond)

shifted

Stack capacity (80 g/m2, • 250 sheets or more: A4 , B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11

20 lb. Bond) • 125 sheets: A3 -A4 , B4 JIS , 81/2 × 14 , 11 × 17

Staple paper size A3 , A4, B4 JIS , B5 JIS, 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 ,

81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14 , 81/4 × 13 , 71/4 × 101/2, 8K , 16K,
81/2 × 132/5

Staple paper weight 64-80 g/m2 (17-20 lb. Bond)

Staple capacity (80 g/m2, 5 sheets

20 lb. Bond)

352
 List of Specifications

Item Specifications

Stack capacity after stapling • 30 sets or more: A4 , 81/2 × 11

• 20 sets or more: B5 JIS
• 15 sets or more: A3 -A4 , B4 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 11

Staple position Slant

Power requirements Power is supplied from the main unit.

Maximum power 30 W or less

consumption

Dimensions 435 × 515 × 150 mm (17.2 × 20.3 × 6.0 inches)

(W × D × H)

Weight Approx. 10 kg (22.1 lb.)

Specifications for Internal Multi-Folding Unit

Item Specifications

Types of folds Half Fold, Letter Fold-out, Letter Fold-in, Z-fold

Half fold paper size • Z-fold

A3 , A4 , B4 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11 ,
8K , 81/2 × 132/5
• Half Fold
A3 , A4 , B4 JIS , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11 ,
8K , 12 × 18 , 81/2 × 132/5
When only the Internal Multi-Folding unit is mounted, you cannot
use the paper whose size is 12 × 18 .
• Letter Fold-out, Letter Fold-in
A3 , A4 , 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 11 , 81/2 ×
132/5

Half fold paper weight: 64-105 g/m2 (17-28 lb. Bond)

353
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Item Specifications

Paper weight that can be When only the Internal Multi-Folding unit is attached
output • 52–220 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–80 lb. Cover)
When the Finisher is attached
• 52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)

Folded paper output tray*1 Finisher SR3280, Booklet Finisher SR3290

• Z-fold, half fold: Finisher shift tray, finisher upper tray, fold tray
• Letter fold-out, letter fold-in: Fold tray
Finisher SR3260, Booklet Finisher SR3270
• Z-fold, half fold: Finisher upper tray, fold tray
• Letter fold-out, letter fold-in: Fold tray

Power requirements Power is supplied from the main unit.

Maximum power 40 W or less

consumption

Dimensions • 612 × 555 × 184 mm (24.1 × 21.9 × 7.3 inches): when the tray
(W × D × H) is pulled out
• 714 × 555 × 242 mm (28.2 × 21.9 × 9.6 inches): when the tray
is folded
• 420 × 555 × 152 mm (16.6 × 21.9 × 6.0 inches): when the
finisher is mounted

Weight Approx. 15 kg (33.1 lb.) or less

*1 Specify the output tray using the Machine Features Settings.

See "Output Tray", User Guide (Full Version).

• The sheets are output to the folding tray of the attached finisher only in the following cases:
• When Z-fold sheets (A3, 11 × 17) and non-fold sheets (A4 , 81/2 × 11 ) are output at
once
• When envelopes are output
• When banner paper is output
• When only the Internal Multi-Folding unit is mounted, you cannot use the paper whose width is
wider than 297 mm.

354
 List of Specifications

• When you output envelopes or banner paper to the fold tray with the Finisher SR3280 or Booklet
Finisher SR3290 attached, an exclusive tray must be attached.

Specifications for External Tray

Item Specifications

Paper size A3 , A4, A5, A6 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS, B6 JIS ,

11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 ,
71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2 , 41/8×91/2, 37/8×71/2, C5 Env, C6
Env, DL Env
8K , 16K, 12 × 18 , 11 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 132/5 ,
custom size

Paper weight 52–300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond–110 lb. Cover)

Paper capacity (80 g/m2, Internal tray 1:

20 lb. Bond) • 250 sheets: A4, 81/2 × 11 or smaller
• 125 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 × 14 or larger
External tray: 125 sheets

Power requirements Power is supplied from the main unit.

Maximum power 12 W or less

consumption

Dimensions 800 × 549 × 156 mm (31.5 × 21.7 × 6.2 inches)

(W × D × H)

Weight Approx. 4 kg (8.9 lb.)

355
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Specifications for Internal Shift Tray

Item Specifications

Paper size A3 , A4, A5, A6 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS, B6 JIS ,

11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 ,
71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2 , 41/8 × 91/2, 37/8 × 71/2, C5 Env,
C6 Env, DL Env,
8K , 16K, 12 × 18 , 11 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 132/5 ,
custom size

Paper weight 52-300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond-110 lb. Cover)

Paper sizes that can be A3 , A4, A5, A6 , B4 JIS , B5 JIS, B6 JIS ,

shifted 11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 ,
71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2 ,
8K , 16K, 11 × 15 , 10 × 14 , 81/2 × 132/5 , custom size

Paper weight that can be 52-300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond-110 lb. Cover)
shifted

Stack capacity (80 g/m2, • 250 sheets: A4, 81/2 × 11 or smaller

20 lb. Bond) • 125 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 × 14 or larger

Power requirements Power is supplied from the main unit.

Maximum power 5 W or less

consumption

Dimensions 420 × 489 × 107 mm (16.6 × 19.3 × 4.3 inches)

(W × D × H)

Weight Approx. 2 kg (4.5 lb.)

Specifications for Internal Tray 2

Item Specifications

Number of bins: 1

356
 List of Specifications

Item Specifications

Paper size A3 , A4, A5, B4 JIS , B5 JIS,

11 × 17 , 81/2 × 14 , 81/2 × 13 , 81/2 × 11, 81/4 × 14 ,
81/4 × 13 , 8 × 13 , 8 × 10 ,
71/4 × 101/2, 51/2 × 81/2 , 8K , 16K, 12 × 18 , 11 × 15 ,
10 × 14 , 81/2 × 132/5 , custom size

Paper weight 52-300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond-110 lb. Cover)

Stack capacity (80 g/m2, 125 sheets

20 lb. Bond)

Power requirements Power is supplied from the main unit.

Maximum power 1 W or less

consumption

Dimensions 444 × 450 × 150 mm (17.5 × 17.8 × 6.0 inches)

(W × D × H)

Weight Approx. 2 kg (4.5 lb.)

Specifications for Bridge Unit

Item Specifications

Stack capacity • 250 sheets: A4, 81/2 × 11 or smaller

• 125 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 × 14 or larger

Power requirements Power is supplied from the main unit.

Maximum power 1.2 W or less

consumption

Dimensions 412 × 466 × 143 mm (16.3 × 18.4 × 5.7 inches)

(W × D × H)

Weight Approx. 4 kg (8.9 lb.)

357
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Specifications for Punch Unit (Internal Finisher SR3250)

Punch unit type Paper size Paper weight

: A3, A4, B4 JIS, B5 JIS, 11 × 17, 81/2 ×

2 & 4 holes type: 2 holes 14, 81/2 × 13, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2,
8K, 16K, 81/2 × 132/5

2 & 4 holes type: 2 holes : A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11, 16K

2 & 4 holes type: 4 holes : A3, 11 × 17

2 & 4 holes type: 4 holes : A4, 81/2 × 11

: A3, A4, B4 JIS, B5 JIS, 11 × 17, 81/2 × 60–169 g/m2 (16

4 holes type: 4 holes 14, 81/2 × 13, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2, lb. Bond –90 lb.
81/2 × 132/5 Index)
4 holes type: 4 holes : A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11

: A3, 11 × 17, 81/2 × 14, 81/2 × 13, 81/2

2 & 3 holes type: 2 holes
× 11, 71/4 × 101/2, 81/2 × 132/5

2 & 3 holes type: 2 holes : A4, 81/2 × 11

2 & 3 holes type: 3 holes : A3, 11 × 17

2 & 3 holes type: 3 holes : A4, 81/2 × 11

358
 List of Specifications

Specifications for Punch Unit (Finisher SR3260 ,Booklet Finisher SR3270)

Punch unit type Paper size Paper weight

: A3, B4 JIS, A4, B5 JIS, A5, 11 × 17, 81/2

× 14, 81/2 × 11, 51/2 × 81/2, 71/4 ×
2 & 4 holes type: 2 holes 101/2, 8 × 13, 81/2 × 13, 81/4 × 13, 8K,
16K, 81/4 × 14, 8 × 10, 11 × 15, 10 × 14,
81/2 × 132/5

: A4, B5 JIS, A5, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2,

2 & 4 holes type: 2 holes
16K

2 & 4 holes type: 4 holes : A3, B4 JIS, 11 × 17, 11 × 15, 8K

2 & 4 holes type: 4 holes : A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2, 16K

: A3, B4 JIS, A4, B5 JIS, A5, 11 × 17, 81/2

× 14, 81/2 × 11, 51/2 × 81/2, 71/4 ×
4 holes type: 4 holes 101/2, 8 × 13, 81/2 × 13, 81/4 × 13, 8K, 52–256 g/m2 (14
16K, 81/4 × 14, 8 × 10, 11 × 15, 10 × 14, lb. Bond–140 lb.
81/2 × 132/5 Index)

: A4, B5 JIS, A5, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2,

4 holes type: 4 holes
16K

: A3, B4 JIS, B5 JIS, A5, 11 × 17, 81/2 ×

14, 81/2 × 11, 51/2 × 81/2, 71/4 × 101/2,
2 & 3 holes type: 2 holes 8 × 13, 81/2 × 13, 81/4 × 13, 8K, 16K,
81/4 × 14, 8 × 10, 11 × 15, 10 × 14, 81/2 ×
132/5

2 & 3 holes type: 2 holes : A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2, 16K

2 & 3 holes type: 3 holes : A3, B4 JIS, 11 × 17, 11 × 15, 10 × 14, 8K

2 & 3 holes type: 3 holes : A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2, 16K

359
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Specifications for Punch Unit (Finisher SR3280 ,Booklet Finisher SR3290)

Punch unit type Paper size Paper weight

: A3, B4 JIS, A4, B5 JIS, A5, 11 × 17, 81/2

× 14, 81/2 × 11, 51/2 × 81/2, 71/4 ×
2 & 4 holes type: 2 holes 101/2, 8 × 13, 81/2 × 13, 81/4 × 13, 8K,
16K, 81/4 × 14, 8 × 10, 11 × 15, 10 × 14,
81/2 × 132/5, custom size

: A4, B5 JIS, A5, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2,

2 & 4 holes type: 2 holes
16K, custom size

: A3, B4 JIS, 11 × 17, 11 × 15, 8K, custom

2 & 4 holes type: 4 holes
size

: A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2,

2 & 4 holes type: 4 holes
16K, custom size

: A3, B4 JIS, A4, B5 JIS, A5, 11 × 17, 81/2

× 14, 81/2 × 11, 51/2 × 81/2, 71/4 ×
4 holes type: 4 holes 101/2, 8 × 13, 81/2 × 13, 81/4 × 13, 8K, 52–256 g/m2 (14
16K, 81/4 × 14, 8 × 10, 11 × 15, 10 × 14, lb. Bond–140 lb.
81/2 × 132/5, custom size Index)
: A4, B5 JIS, A5, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2,
4 holes type: 4 holes
16K, custom size

: A3, B4 JIS, B5 JIS, A5, 11 × 17, 81/2 ×

14, 81/2 × 11, 51/2 × 81/2, 71/4 × 101/2,
2 & 3 holes type: 2 holes 8 × 13, 81/2 × 13, 81/4 × 13, 8K, 16K,
81/4 × 14, 8 × 10, 11 × 15, 10 × 14, 81/2 ×
132/5, custom size

: A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2,

2 & 3 holes type: 2 holes
16K, custom size

: A3, B4 JIS, 11 × 17, 11 × 15, 10 × 14,

2 & 3 holes type: 3 holes
8K, custom size

: A4, B5 JIS, 81/2 × 11, 71/4 × 101/2,

2 & 3 holes type: 3 holes
16K, custom size

360
 List of Specifications

Specifications for Lower Paper Tray

Item Specifications

Page size page 200 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types"

Paper capacity page 200 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types"

Paper weight page 200 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types"

Power requirements Power is supplied from the main unit.

Maximum power 19 W or less

consumption

Dimensions 587 × 685 × 120 mm (23.2 × 27.0 × 4.8 inches) (except protruding
(W × D × H) parts)

Weight Approx. 12 kg (26.5 lb.)

Specifications for Lower Paper Trays

Item Specifications

Page size page 200 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types"

Paper capacity (80 g/m2, page 200 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types"
20 lb. Bond)

Paper weight page 200 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types"

Power requirements Power is supplied from the main unit.

Maximum power 21 W or less

consumption

Dimensions 587 × 685 × 247 mm (23.2 × 27.0 × 9.8 inches) (except protruding
(W × D × H) parts and stabilizers)

Weight Approx. 23 kg (50.8 lb.)

361
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Specifications for Tray 3 (LCT)

Item Specifications

Page size page 200 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types"

Paper capacity (80 g/m2, page 200 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types"
20 lb. Bond)

Paper weight page 200 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types"

Power requirements Power is supplied from the main unit.

Maximum power 15 W or less

consumption

Dimensions • Except stabilizers

(W × D × H) 587 × 685 × 247 mm (23.2 × 27.0 × 9.8 inches)
• With stabilizers
670 × 755 × 247 mm (26.4 × 29.8 × 9.8 inches)

Weight Approx. 22 kg (48.5 lb.)

Specifications for Large Capacity Tray (LCT)

Item Specifications

Page size page 200 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types"

Paper capacity (80 g/m2, page 200 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types"
20 lb. Bond)

Paper weight page 200 "Recommended Paper Sizes and Types"

Power requirements Power is supplied from the main unit.

Maximum power 13 W or less

consumption

Dimensions 340 × 544.5 × 290 mm (13.4 × 21.4 × 11.5 inches) (except

(W × D × H) protruding parts)

Weight Approx. 11 kg (24.3 lb.)

362
 List of Specifications

Specifications for IEEE 1284 Interface Board

Item Specifications

Transmission spec IEEE 1284

Required cable Standard IEEE 1284 compliant Micro Centronics 36 pin cable

Specifications for Wireless LAN Board

• Note that the available channels (frequency ranges) and locations to use the wireless LAN are
subject to the regulations of the country or region where the printer is used. Be sure to use the
wireless LAN according to the applicable regulations.

Item Specifications

Transmission spec Based on IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n (wireless LAN)

Transmission rate • 2.4 GHz band: 130 Mbps (maximum)

• 5 GHz band: 300 Mbps (maximum)

Frequency range (Center • 2412–2472 MHz (1–13 channels)

Frequency) • 5180–5240 MHz (36, 40, 44, and 48 channels)
• 5260–5320 MHz (52, 56, 60, and 64 channels)
• 5500–5700 MHz (100, 104, 108, 112, 116, 120, 124, 128,
132, 136, and 140 channels)

Transmission mode • Infrastructure mode

• Direct Connection Mode
• Direct Connection: Group Owner Mode

• Web Image Monitor is supported.

• The transmission rates of 300 Mbps in the 5 GHz band and 130 Mbps in the 2.4 GHz band are
the theoretical values of the wireless LAN specification. The actual transmission rate may be lower,
depending on the operating environment.
• The connecting channel is determined by the channel that is used as the access point.

363
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Specifications for Device Server Option

Item Specifications

Interface • Gigabit Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T)

Operating systems • Windows 8.1/10, Windows Server 2008 R2/2012/2012

R2/2016/2019
• macOS 10.12 or later

Protocol • Port 9100, IPP, LPR

IPP does not support SPL.
• The device server option allows simultaneous connection of up to
eight sessions of printing protocols.

364
 The Setting Values of the Transmission Function

The Setting Values of the Transmission Function

• Depending on the type or settings of a document or original, you may not be able to specify or
enter the maximum number of destinations or characters.

Send Email

Item Value Remarks

Maximum number of characters 128 alphanumeric characters -

entered in a subject

Maximum number of characters • When selecting an item You cannot select an item from
entered in the an e-mail from the standard the standard message and enter
message message: 396 the value manually at the same
alphanumeric characters time.
(79 alphanumeric
characters × 5 lines)
• When entering manually:
80 alphanumeric
characters

Maximum number of characters 128 alphanumeric characters An e-mail; address that has
entered in an e-mail address been searched from the LDAP
server and exceeds 128
alphanumeric characters cannot
be specified correctly as the
destination.

Number of destinations that can 500 Up to 100 items can be

be specified at one time specified when entering an item
manually (including the items
specified by LDAP search) For
the rest, select up to 400 items
from the registered destinations.

Size of a document that can be Up to 725.3 MB per document -

sent

Number of pages that can be Up to 2,000 pages per -

sent document

365
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Send to Folder

Item Value Remarks

Maximum number of characters 256 characters -

in a path name specified for the
SMB protocol

Maximum number of characters 64 characters -

in a user name specified for the
SMB protocol

Maximum number of characters 64 characters -

in a password specified for the
SMB protocol

Maximum number of characters 64 characters -

in a server name specified for
the FTP protocol

Maximum number of characters 256 characters -

in a path name specified for the
FTP protocol

Maximum number of characters 64 alphanumeric characters -

in a user name specified for the
FTP protocol

Maximum number of characters 64 alphanumeric characters -

in a password specified for the
FTP protocol

Number of destinations that can 50 Up to 50 items can be entered

be specified at one time also when entering the items
manually.

Size of a document that can be 2,000 MB per document -

sent

366
 The Setting Values of the Transmission Function

Broadcast Transmission

Item Value Remarks

Total number of destinations that 550 -

can be specified for Send Email
and Send to Folder

Number of destinations that can 500 Up to 100 items can be

be specified when sending a specified when entering an item
document by Send Email manually (including the items
specified by LDAP search)

Number of destinations that can 50 -

be specified when sending a
document by Send to Folder

367
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Printable Area and Margin

Print area

4 3 DZX710

1. Leading edge: 4.2 ±1.5 mm (0.17 ±0.06 inches)

2. Trailing edge: 0.5–6.0 mm (0.02–0.24 inches)
3. Right edge: 0.5–4.0 mm (0.02–0.16 inches)
4. Left edge: 0.5–4.0 mm (0.02–0.16 inches)

• The machine does not support edge-to-edge printing. To minimize the margins, specify the
maximum printable area with the settings on the printer driver.
• See "Maximizing the Printable Area When Printing", User Guide (Full Version).
• The printable area may vary due to the paper size or settings of the printer driver.
• The outside of the printable area can be printed due to the settings of the printer driver or printing
condition; however, the print result may be different from the intended one or the paper may not be
fed correctly.

368
 Machine Options

Machine Options
Guide to Functions of the Machine’s External Options

(1)

(2)
(3)

(5)

(4)

D0CHIA8401

(1) Options Mounted to the Scanner Unit

(mainly Europe) (mainly North America)
When a one-pass duplex scanning ADF is attached as standard.

1 2

DZC771

No. Option Description

ADF double-feed Detects a double feeding of the original when it is placed in the
1
detection kit ADF.

Used to scan an original smaller than B6 JIS size with the

2 Small size paper unit
one- pass duplex scanning ADF.

(mainly Asia)

369
 11. Specifications for The Machine

1 2 3 4 5

DZC772

No. Option Description

One- pass duplex

1 Feeds the loaded originals to the exposure glass one by one.
scanning ADF *1

ADF double-feed Detects a double feeding of the original when it is placed in the
2
detection kit ADF.

Used to scan an original smaller than B6 JIS size with the

3 Small size paper unit
one- pass duplex scanning ADF.

4 ARDF*2 Feeds the loaded originals to the exposure glass one by one.

Exposure Glass
5 Lowers the cover over originals placed on the exposure glass.
Cover*2

*1 IM 6000 is attached as standard.

*2 This cannot be mounted to IM 6000.
(2) Options Mounted to the Machine’s Paper Output Section

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

DZB772

370
 Machine Options

No. Option Description

Specify the output tray for the function, such as Copy or Fax,
added to the Internal Tray 1. When you use this tray together
1 Internal Tray 2 with the optional external tray, you can specify up to three
output trays. Copied/printed paper or fax messages are
delivered here face down.

2 Bridge Unit Relays the main unit and finisher.

Sorts and stacks multiple sheets of paper for each set or each
job.
3 Internal Shift Tray page 92 "Copying in Page Order or for Each Page Number"
See "Sorting Printed Sheets by Individual Copies", User Guide
(Full Version).

Specify the output tray for the function, such as Copy or Fax,
added to the Internal Tray 1. When you use this tray together
4 External Tray with the optional Internal Tray 2, you can specify up to three
output trays. Copied/printed paper or fax messages are
delivered here face down.

Internal Finisher Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Copies can
5
SR3250*1 be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.

Internal Finisher Shifts, sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper with a
6
SR3300*2 stapleless stapler.

Folds the printed paper in half fold, letter fold-in, letter fold-out,
Internal Multi-Folding or Z-fold.
7
unit
See "Folding Printed Sheets", User Guide (Full Version).

*1 This cannot be mounted to IM 6000 series.

*2 This cannot be mounted to IM 4000/5000/6000 series.
(3) Options Mounted on the Machine’s Side Panel
(mainly Europe and Asia)
1

D0CHIA3102

371
 11. Specifications for The Machine

No. Option Description

Pass an IC card over the card reader to log in to the machine.

1 Card reader
page 57 "Logging In from the Control Panel"

(mainly North America)

1 2

D0CHIA3106

No. Option Description

Used as a receiver when a fax unit is installed and enables you

to use the machine as a telephone. Allows you to use the On
Hook Dial and Manual Dial functions.
1 Handset
See "Confirming a Dial Tone or Voice of a Person at the
Destination Before Sending or Receiving a Fax", User Guide
(Full Version).

Pass an IC card over the card reader to log in to the machine.

2 Card reader
page 57 "Logging In from the Control Panel"

(4) Options Mounted on the Machine’s Bottom

1 2 3 4

5
DZC774

No. Option Description

1 Lower Paper Tray Paper is loaded here. You can load up to 550 sheets of paper.

372
 Machine Options

No. Option Description

You can attach it to the main unit or the lower paper tray.
2 Caster Table
Allows you to move the machine easily.

Consists of two paper trays, right and left, for A4 size paper.
3 Tray 3 (LCT)
You can load up to 2,000 sheets of paper.

Consists of two paper trays. You can load up to 1,100 sheets of

4 Lower Paper Trays
paper.

Large Capacity Tray Paper tray for A4 size paper. You can load up to 1,500
5
(LCT) sheets of paper.

(5) Finisher

1 2 3 4

DZB775

No. Option Description

Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper.

Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on
the finisher.
1 Finisher SR3260
Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher Upper Tray
• Finisher Shift Tray

373
 11. Specifications for The Machine

No. Option Description

Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. The saddle

stitch function can staple multiple sheets of paper in the center
and fold them into booklets.
See "Folding Printed Sheets", User Guide (Full Version).

Booklet Finisher Consists of the following paper trays:

2
SR3270 • Finisher Upper Tray
• Finisher Shift Tray
• Finisher Booklet Tray
Copies can be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on
the finisher.

Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. Copies can

be punched if the optional punch unit is installed on the finisher.
3 Finisher SR3280*1 Consists of the following paper trays:
• Finisher Upper Tray
• Finisher Shift Tray

Sorts, stacks, and staples multiple sheets of paper. The saddle

stitch function can staple multiple sheets of paper in the center
and fold them into booklets, and copies can be punched
See "Folding Printed Sheets", User Guide (Full Version).
Booklet Finisher
4 Consists of the following paper trays:
SR3290*1
• Finisher Upper Tray
• Finisher Shift Tray
• Finisher Booklet Tray

*1 The Finisher SR3280 and Booklet Finisher SR3290 cannot be mounted to IM 2500/3000/3500
series.

• You cannot install multiple finishers simultaneously.

• To mount the Finisher SR3260, Booklet Finisher SR3270, Finisher SR3280, or Booklet Finisher
SR3290, one of the lower paper trays, or tray 3 (LCT) and the bridge unit or Internal Multi-Folding
unit must be mounted.

374
 Machine Options

Guide to Functions of the Machine’s Internal Options

• Fax unit
Allows you to use the facsimile function.
• Extra G3 interface unit
This lets you add a G3 fax line. A maximum of two G3 interface units can be installed.
• Expansion Memory
Provides 60 MB of additional memory for the facsimile function. (Standard 4 MB)
This allows you to send and receive fax documents at high resolution (Super Fine), and also to
receive fax documents at high resolution (Fine). This enables you to increase the number of sheets
of originals that can be stored in memory.
• PostScript 3 unit
Allows you to output using Genuine Adobe PostScript 3.
• OCR unit
Recognizes the scanned originals optically, and creates a PDF with the text data embedded.
• IPDS unit
Allows you to print using Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS).
• XPS card( (mainly Asia)/ (mainly North America))
Allows you to directly output XPS files.
• Device server option
Allows you to add an Ethernet port to the printer. Allows you to print using the printer function via a
network other than that connected to the machine.
• IEEE 1284 interface board
Allows you to connect to an IEEE 1284 cable.
• Wireless LAN board
Allows you to communicate over wireless LAN.
• File format converter
Allows you to download documents that are stored in the Document Server to the computer.
• Enhanced Security HDD ( (mainly Europe)/ (mainly North America))
Allows you to enhance the security of the hard disk by using an encryption function that is
compliant with FIPS 140-2.
• Fax connection unit( (mainly Asia)/ (mainly North America))
Allows you to send and receive faxes via a different machine that has the fax unit installed.

375
 11. Specifications for The Machine

• Only one of the following can be installed: IEEE 1284 interface board, wireless LAN board, or file
format converter.
• Only one of the following options can be installed on the machine at any one time: HDD and
Enhanced Security HDD.
• The Ethernet interface and wireless LAN board cannot be used simultaneously.

376
 Functions Requiring Optional Configurations

Functions Requiring Optional Configurations

When options are installed, the functions and interface of this machine can be expanded.
• The options that can be installed differ depending on the models.
See "Machine Options", User Guide (Full Version).

Copy Function

Function/Reference Option

Batch ADF
See "Copying a Separately Scanned Original as
a Single Document", User Guide (Full Version).

SADF
See "Copying a Separately Scanned Original as
a Single Document", User Guide (Full Version).

Mixed Sizes mode

See "Copying Mixed-size Originals", User Guide
(Full Version).

Shift Collate One of the following options is required:

page 92 "Copying in Page Order or for Each • Internal shift tray
Page Number" • Finisher SR3260
Stack • Booklet Finisher SR3270
page 92 "Copying in Page Order or for Each • Finisher SR3280
Page Number" • Booklet Finisher SR3290
• Internal Finisher SR3250
• Internal Finisher SR3300

377
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Function/Reference Option

Staple One of the following options is required:

See "Stapling Copied Pages", User Guide (Full • Finisher SR3260
Version). • Booklet Finisher SR3270
• Finisher SR3280
• Booklet Finisher SR3290
• Internal Finisher SR3250
• Internal Finisher SR3300

Staple (Center) One of the following options is required:

See "Stapling Copied Pages", User Guide (Full • Booklet Finisher SR3270
Version). • Booklet Finisher SR3290
Half Fold
See "Folding Copied Sheets", User Guide (Full
Version).

Punch One of the following combinations of options is

See "Punching Holes on the Copied Pages", User required:
Guide (Full Version). • Finisher SR3260 and punch unit
• Booklet Finisher SR3270 and punch unit
• Finisher SR3280 and punch unit
• Booklet Finisher SR3290 and punch unit
• Internal Finisher SR3250 and punch unit

378
 Functions Requiring Optional Configurations

Function/Reference Option

Z-fold Internal Multi-Folding unit

See "Folding Copied Sheets", User Guide (Full
Version).

Half Fold
See "Folding Copied Sheets", User Guide (Full
Version).

Letter Fold-out
See "Folding Copied Sheets", User Guide (Full
Version).

Letter Fold-in
See "Folding Copied Sheets", User Guide (Full
Version).

Facsimile Functions

Fax functions require the optional fax unit.

Functions Option

Manual Dial Handset

See "Confirming a Dial Tone or Voice of a Person
at the Destination Before Sending or Receiving a
Fax", User Guide (Full Version).

Manual Reception
See "Answering a Phone Call on the Machine",
User Guide (Full Version).

379
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Functions Option

Two-sided Original ADF

See "Setting an Original to Send by Fax on the
Scanner", User Guide (Full Version).

Stamp*2
See "Pressing an OK Stamp on Pages Scanned
for Fax", User Guide (Full Version).

Blank Page Detection

See "Setting an Original to Send by Fax on the
Scanner", User Guide (Full Version).

Mixed Sizes mode

See "Setting an Original to Send by Fax on the
Scanner", User Guide (Full Version).

Transmission of Super Fine resolution Expansion Memory

See "Sending a Fax at the Image Quality Suitable
for the Original", User Guide (Full Version).

Reception of Fine or Super Fine resolution

Transmission using the extra G3 line Extra G3 interface unit

Routing received documents utilizing extra G3

lines
See "Transferring Received Fax Documents to
Another Fax Destination", User Guide (Full
Version).

380
 Functions Requiring Optional Configurations

Functions Option

Specify Tray for Lines One of the following options is required:

See "Specifying the Output Tray to Deliver the • Internal tray 2
Received Page", User Guide (Full Version). • Internal shift tray
• External tray
• Finisher SR3260
• Booklet Finisher SR3270
• Finisher SR3280
• Booklet Finisher SR3290
• Internal Finisher SR3250
• Internal Finisher SR3300

Tray Shift One of the following options is required:

See "Specifying the Output Tray to Deliver the • Internal shift tray
Received Page", User Guide (Full Version). • Finisher SR3260
• Booklet Finisher SR3270
• Finisher SR3280
• Booklet Finisher SR3290
• Internal Finisher SR3250
• Internal Finisher SR3300

Remote Fax*1 Fax connection unit

See "Overview of the Remote Fax Function", User
Guide (Full Version).

*1 A sub-machine on which fax function is not included can send and receive faxes using the fax function of the
main-machine connected via network. This function is available when fax connection units are installed in the
main- and sub-machines.
(mainly Asia)
*2 The stamp function can be used by the ARDF.

381
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Printer Function

Functions Option

Shift Collate One of the following options is required:

See "Sorting Printed Sheets by Individual • Internal shift tray
Copies", User Guide (Full Version). • Finisher SR3260
• Booklet Finisher SR3270
• Finisher SR3280
• Booklet Finisher SR3290
• Internal Finisher SR3250
• Internal Finisher SR3300

Punch One of the following combinations of options is

See "Punching Holes on Printed Pages", User required:
Guide (Full Version). • Finisher SR3260 and punch unit
• Booklet Finisher SR3270 and punch unit
• Finisher SR3280
• Booklet Finisher SR3290
• Internal Finisher SR3250 and punch unit

Staple One of the following options is required:

See "Stapling Printed Pages", User Guide (Full • Finisher SR3260
Version). • Booklet Finisher SR3270
• Finisher SR3280
• Booklet Finisher SR3290
• Internal Finisher SR3250
• Internal Finisher SR3300

Staple (Center) One of the following options is required:

See "Stapling Printed Pages", User Guide (Full • Booklet Finisher SR3270
Version). • Booklet Finisher SR3290
Half Fold
See "Folding Printed Sheets", User Guide (Full
Version).

382
 Functions Requiring Optional Configurations

Functions Option

Half Fold Internal Multi-Folding unit

Letter Fold-out
Letter Fold-in
See "Folding Printed Sheets", User Guide (Full
Version).

Genuine Adobe PostScript 3*1 PostScript 3 unit

XPS XPS card

*1 If an optional Genuine Adobe PostScript 3 is installed, the built-in standard PostScript 3 cannot be used.

383
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Scanner Function

Functions Option

Documents scanned automatically ADF

See "Placing an Original to Scan", User Guide
(Full Version).

SADF
See "Combining the Data of Multiple Scans into a
Single File", User Guide (Full Version).

Mixed Sizes mode*1

See "Placing an Original to Scan", User Guide
(Full Version).

Stamp*2
See "Pressing an OK Stamp on Pages of the
Scanned Original", User Guide (Full Version).

Blank Page Detection

See "Scan (Scanner Settings)", User Guide (Full
Version).

Creating PDF files with OCR text information OCR unit

See "Scanning an Original as a PDF File with
Embedded Text Data", User Guide (Full Version).

(mainly Asia)
*1 The mixed sizes function can be used in the One-pass duplex scanning ADF.
*2 The stamp function can be used by the ARDF.

384
 Functions Requiring Optional Configurations

Interface

Functions Option

Wireless LAN communication Wireless LAN board

See "Connecting to a Wireless LAN", User Guide
(Full Version).

Parallel Interface Connection IEEE 1284 interface board

See "Connecting an IEEE 1284 cable", User
Guide (Full Version).

Extra Ethernet Interface (for Printer) Device server option

See "Connecting a LAN Cable", User Guide (Full
Version).

Others

Functions Option

Quick Card Authentication NFC card reader

See "Logging in to the Machine Using an IC Card
or a Smart Device", User Guide (Full Version).

(mainly Asia)/ (mainly (mainly Asia)/ (mainly

North America) North America)
Specifying the HDD authentication code Enhanced Security HDD

385
 11. Specifications for The Machine

Function Compatibility
Function Compatibility
The chart shows Function Compatibility when [Interleave Print Priority] is set to [Switch Every Specified No.].
: Simultaneous operations are possible.
: Operation is enabled when the relevant function key is pressed and remote switching (of the scanner/external extension) is done.
: Operation is enabled when the [Interrupt] key is pressed to interrupt the preceding operation.
: Operation is performed automatically once the preceding operation ends.
: The operation must be started once the preceding operation ends. (Simultaneous operations are not possible.)

Mode after you select Copy Interrupt Copying Fax Printer Scanner TWAIN Document Server DeskTop Binder Web Document Server

Transmission Reception Print

Transmission Operation/ Manual Reception Operation

Scanning a Document to Store in Document Server

Scanning an Original for Memory Transmission

Sending a Fax from Document Server

Operations for Document Server

Printing from Document Server

Printing from Document Server

Printing Received Data *9
Immediate Transmission

Operations for Scanning

Operations for Copying

Operations for Copying

Memory Transmission

Memory Reception

Data Reception

Scanning

Scanning
Copying
Stapling

Stapling
Printing

Printing
Sort

Mode before you select

Operations for Copying
Copy Stapling *1 *1 *1 *5 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *4 *4
Sort *1 *1 *1 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2
Operations for Copying
Interrupt Copying
Copying
Transmission Operation/Manual Reception Operation
Transmission

Scanning an Original for Memory Transmission

Memory Transmission *3 *3 *3

Fax Immediate Transmission *3 *3

Reception

Memory Reception *3 *3 *3

Printing Received Data *7 *7 *8

Data Reception
Printing *10
Print

Printer
Stapling *5 *10 *4 *4 *4
Operations for Scanning
Scanner
Scanning *2 *2 *2 *2 *2 *2
TWAIN Scanning
Operations for Document Server
Document Server Scanning a Document to Store in Document Server
Printing from Document Server *10 *6 *6 *6
Printing from Document Server *4 *10
DeskTop Binder
Sending a Fax from Document Server
Web Document Server Printing *4 *10

*1 Simultaneous operations are only possible after the preceding job documents are all scanned and [Reserve] appears.
*2 You can scan a document after the preceding job documents are all scanned.
*3 Simultaneous operations can be performed when a different line is used.
*4 During stapling, printing automatically starts after the current job.
*5 Stapling is not available.
*6 Simultaneous operation becomes possible after you press [New Job].
*7 During parallel reception, any subsequent job is suspended until the reception is completed.
*8 If an attempt is made to manually print a received document while automatically printing a different received document, the document printed manually will be printed first.
*9 This includes the printing of data sent via LAN-Fax driver.
*10 If the previous print job does not finish within the time specified in "the reprinting time of stored documents in memory that could not be printed using LAN-Fax Driver" when printing from the LAN-Fax Driver, printing will stop.

D0CHIA3104

• The scanning speed may become slower when scanning an original with another function while
executing printing.

386
 Function Compatibility

Copy Function Compatibility

Blank: These modes can be used together.
Ɣ : These modes cannot be used together. The second mode selected will be the mode you are working in.
× : These modes cannot be used together. The first mode selected will be the mode you are working in.

Function selected second

Unauthorized Copy Prevention

Image Density (Manual)

Background Numbering
Auto Reduce / Enlarge
Regular Size Originals
Custom Size Originals

Erase Center/ Border

Designate / Chapter
Auto Image Density
Original Orientation

Book Type Original

Margin Adjustment
Positive / Negative
Auto Paper Select

Reduce / Enlarge

1 Sided Original
2 Sided Original

Double Copies
Create Margin

Image Repeat
ID Card Copy
Paper Select
Bypass Tray

Cover Sheet
Mixed Sizes

Rotate Sort
Slip Sheet
Magazine

Centering

Multi Fold
Combine

Half Fold
Stamp*1
1 Sided
2 Sided

Booklet

Storing
Poster

Staple
Punch
Z-fold
Stack
Sort
Mixed Sizes × ×
Regular Size Originals × Ɣ
Custom Size Originals × Ɣ × ×
*2 *3 *3 *3
Original Orientation
Auto Image Density Ɣ
Image Density (Manual)
Auto Paper Select Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ
Paper Select Ɣ Ɣ
Bypass Tray Ɣ Ɣ × × × × × × × × × × × ×
Auto Reduce / Enlarge Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ
Reduce / Enlarge Ɣ Ɣ
Create Margin × × ×
1 Sided Original Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ
2 Sided Original Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ × ×*7 ×*7
Book Type Original *2
Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ × × ×
Poster × × × × × Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
1 Sided Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ
2 Sided Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ × ×
Combine Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ × × × ×
Function selected ¿rst

Booklet × Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ × × × × × × × × × ×
Magazine × Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ × × × × × ×*4 × ×
ID Card Copy × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × × ×
Double Copies × × × × × Ɣ × × × ×
Image Repeat × × × × × × × Ɣ × × × ×
Margin Adjustment ×
Positive / Negative
Centering × × ×
Erase Center/ Border × ×
Background Numbering × ×
Stamp*1 × ×
Unauthorized Copy Prevention
Cover Sheet × × ×*7 × × × × × × Ɣ × ×
Designate / Chapter × × ×*7 × × × × × × × Ɣ × ×
Slip Sheet × × × × × × × × × × Ɣ Ɣ × × × × ×
Sort × Ɣ Ɣ
Rotate Sort × × × × Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ × × × ×
Stack Ɣ Ɣ Ɣ × ×
Staple *3
× × × ×*4 × Ɣ Ɣ ×*5 ×*6 × ×
*3 *5 *8
Punch × × × × × × × × ×
Z-fold *3
× × × × × × *6
× *8
Ɣ Ɣ
Multi-fold × × × × × × × Ɣ Ɣ
Half Fold × × × × × × × × × Ɣ Ɣ
Storing × × × ×

*1 Stamps include Preset Stamp, User Stamp, Date Stamp, Page Numbering, and Stamp Text.
*2 [90 Degrees Counterclockwise] or [90 Degrees Clockwise], and [Open Book 2 Sided] cannot be selected simultaneously. The function selected first has priority.
*3 The following combinations of functions cannot be selected unless [Auto Paper Select] or [Fit to Paper Size] is selected.
• [Readable Direction] cannot be selected with [Top 2] under [Staple], or [Two Holes Top], [Three Holes Top], or [Four Holes Top] under [Punch], or [Z-fold (Bottom Fold)].
• [180 Degrees] cannot be selected with [Top 2] under [Staple], or [Two Holes Top], [Three Holes Top], or [Four Holes Top] under [Punch], or [Z-fold (Bottom Fold)].
• [90 Degrees Counterclockwise] cannot be selected with [Slant], [Left 2], [Center], under [Staple], or stapleless stapler, or [Two Holes Left], [Three Holes Left], or [Four Holes Left] under [Punch], or [Z-fold (Right Fold)].
• [90 Degrees Clockwise] cannot be selected with [Slant], [Left 2], [Center], under [Staple], or stapleless stapler, or [Two Holes Left], [Three Holes Left], or [Four Holes Left] under [Punch], or [Z-fold (Right Fold)].
*4 [Magazine] and [Staple: Center] can be selected simultaneously.
*5 The following combinations of functions can be selected at the same time.
• [Top 1] under [Staple] and [Two Holes Left], [Three Holes Left], [Four Holes Left], [Two Holes Top], [Three Holes Top], or [Four Holes Top] under [Punch]
• [Bottom 1] under [Staple] and [Two Holes Left], [Three Holes Left], or [Four Holes Left] under [Punch]
• [Slant] under [Staple] and [Two Holes Left], [Three Holes Left], or [Four Holes Left] under [Punch]
• [Left 2] under [Staple] and [Two Holes Left], [Three Holes Left], or [Four Holes Left] under [Punch]
• [Top 2] under [Staple] and [Two Holes Top], [Three Holes Top], or [Four Holes Top] under [Punch]
• Stapleless stapler, and [Two Holes Left], [Three Holes Left], or [Four Holes Left] under [Punch]
*6 The following combinations of functions can be selected, unless you are using the Internal Multi-Folding Unit together with the Finisher SR3260 or Booklet Finisher SR3270.
• [Top 1] under [Staple] and [Z-fold (Right Fold)] or [Z-fold (Bottom Fold)]
• [Bottom 1], [Slant], [Left 2], under [Staple], or stapleless stapler, and [Z-fold (Right Fold)]
• [Top 2] under [Staple] and [Z-fold (Bottom Fold)]
*7 [2 Sidedĺ1 Sided] and [Cover Sheet] or [Designate / Chapter] cannot be selected simultaneously.
*8 [Z-fold (Right Fold)] can be selected at the same time as [Two Holes Left], [Three Holes Left], or [Four Holes Left] under [Punch]. And, [Z-fold (Bottom Fold)] can be selected at the same time as [Two Holes Top], [Three
Holes Top], or [Four Holes Top] under [Punch].

D0CHIA3105

387
 11. Specifications for The Machine

388
12. Legal and Contact Information

Environmental Regulations
ENERGY STAR Program (mainly North America)

ENERGY STAR® Program Requirements for Imaging Equipment

This company is a participant in the ENERGY STAR® Program.
This machine is compliant with the regulations specified by the
ENERGY STAR® Program.

The ENERGY STAR® Program Requirements for Imaging Equipment encourage energy conservation
by promoting energy efficient computers and other office equipment.
The program backs the development and dissemination of products that feature energy saving
functions.
It is an open program in which manufacturers participate voluntarily.
Energy Star standards and logos are internationally uniform.

Energy Saving Functions

If this machine remains idle for a specified period of time or when [Energy Save] ( ) is pressed, it
enters Sleep mode to further reduce its electrical consumption. This is called "Sleep Mode".
• The default delay time the machine waits before entering Sleep mode is one minute.
• The machine can print jobs from computers and receive faxes while in Sleep mode.
• The time it takes to recover from the energy saving functions and low power consumption in Sleep
Mode may differ depending on the machine.
(mainly Europe)

389
 12. Legal and Contact Information

Time to Duplex
Model Name Power Consumption Recover from Function*1
Sleep Mode

IM 2500 0.57 W 7.9 seconds Standard

IM 2500A 0.57 W 7.9 seconds Standard

IM 3000 0.57 W 7.9 seconds Standard

IM 3000A 0.57 W 7.9 seconds Standard

IM 3500 0.57 W 7.9 seconds Standard

IM 3500A 0.57 W 7.9 seconds Standard

IM 4000A 0.57 W 8.0 seconds Standard

IM 5000A 0.57 W 8.4 seconds Standard

IM 6000 0.57 W 8.8 seconds Standard

(mainly Asia)

Time to Duplex
Model Name Power Consumption Recover from Function*1
Sleep Mode

IM 2500 0.57 W 7.9 seconds Standard

IM 3000 0.57 W 7.9 seconds Standard

IM 3500 0.57 W 7.9 seconds Standard

IM 4000 0.57 W 8.0 seconds Standard

IM 5000 0.57 W 8.4 seconds Standard

IM 6000 0.57 W 8.8 seconds Standard

(mainly North America)

Time to Duplex
Model Name Power Consumption Recover from Function*1
Sleep Mode

IM 2500 0.54 W 7.9 seconds Standard

390
 Environmental Regulations

Time to Duplex
Model Name Power Consumption Recover from Function*1
Sleep Mode

IM 2500A 0.54 W 7.9 seconds Standard

IM 3000 0.53 W 7.9 seconds Standard

IM 3000A 0.53 W 7.9 seconds Standard

IM 3500 0.53 W 7.9 seconds Standard

IM 3500A 0.53 W 7.9 seconds Standard

IM 4000 0.54 W 7.9 seconds Standard

IM 5000 0.54 W 8.2 seconds Standard

IM 6000 0.54 W 8.7 seconds Standard

*1 Achieves ENERGY STAR energy savings; product fully qualifies when packaged with (or used with) a
duplex tray and the duplex function is enabled as an option.

• You can change the amount of time that the machine waits before entering Sleep mode under
[Sleep Mode Timer].
• See "Date/Time/Timer", User Guide (Full Version).
• It may take longer than the specified time to enter Sleep mode according to the type of Embedded
Software Architecture application installed in the machine.

User Information on Electrical and Electronic Equipment (mainly

Europe)

Users in the countries where this symbol shown in this section has been specified in
national law on collection and treatment of E-waste

Our Products contain high quality components and are designed to facilitate recycling.
Our products or product packaging are marked with the symbol below.

391
 12. Legal and Contact Information

The symbol indicates that the product must not be treated as municipal waste. It must be disposed of
separately via the appropriate return and collection systems available. By following these instructions
you ensure that this product is treated correctly and help to reduce potential impacts on the environment
and human health, which could otherwise result from inappropriate handling. Recycling of products
helps to conserve natural resources and protect the environment.
For more detailed information on collection and recycling systems for this product, please contact the
shop where you purchased it, your local dealer or sales/service representatives.

All Other Users

If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local authorities, the shop where you bought this
product, your local dealer or sales/service representatives.

For Turkey only

Note for the Battery and/or Accumulator Symbol (For EU countries only)
(mainly Europe)

In accordance with the Battery Directive 2006/66/EC Article 20 Information for end-users Annex II,
the above symbol is printed on batteries and accumulators.

392
 Environmental Regulations

This symbol means that in the European Union, used batteries and accumulators should be disposed of
separately from your household waste.
In the EU, there are separate collection systems for not only used electrical and electronic products but
also batteries and accumulators.
Please dispose of them correctly at your local community waste collection/recycling centre.

Environmental Advice for Users (mainly Europe)

Users in the EU, Switzerland and Norway

Consumables yield
Please refer to either the User's Manual for this information or the packaging of the consumable.
Recycled paper
The machine can use recycled paper which is produced in accordance with European standard
EN 12281:2002 or DIN 19309. For products using EP printing technology, the machine can print
on 64 g/m2 paper, which contains less raw materials and represents a significant resource
reduction.
Duplex printing (if applicable)
Duplex printing enables both sides of a sheet of paper to be used. This saves paper and reduces
the size of printed documents so that fewer sheets are used. We recommend that this feature is
enabled whenever you print.
Toner and ink cartridge return program
Toner and ink cartridge for recycling will be accepted free of charge from users in accordance with
local regulations.
For details about the return program, please refer to the Web page below or consult your service
person.

https://www.ricoh-return.com/

Energy efficiency
The amount of electricity a machine consumes depends as much on its specifications as it does on
the way you use it. The machine is designed to allow you to reduce electricity costs by switching to
Ready mode after it prints the last page. If required, it can immediately print again from this mode.
If no additional prints are required and a specified period of time passes, the device switches to an
energy saving mode.
In these modes, the machine consumes less power (watts). If the machine is to print again, it needs
a little longer to return from an energy saving mode than from Ready mode.
For maximum energy savings, we recommend that the default setting for power management is
used.

393
 12. Legal and Contact Information

Notes to users in the state of California (Notes to Users in USA)

(mainly North America)

Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate

394
 Copyright Information about Installed Software

Copyright Information about Installed

Software
Open source software is used in the machine and applications that can be downloaded from the
Application Site. You can check their copyright information in the following settings or applications.
• Some information about software used in the control panel
[Settings] [System Settings] [Machine/Control Panel Information] [About Control Panel]
[Legal information]
• Some information about software used in the control panel and information about software used in
the machine
[Status/Information] [Device Info] in Web Image Monitor

• You may be able to check some software information on the screens of each application, rather
than on the control panel or Web Image Monitor.

395
 12. Legal and Contact Information

Trademarks (User Guide)

Adobe, Acrobat, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
Firefox is registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
Dropbox is a registered trademark or trademark of Dropbox, Inc.
Google, Android, Google Drive, and Chrome are trademarks of Google Inc.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
JAWS® is a registered trademark of Freedom Scientific, Inc., St. Petersburg, Florida and/or other
countries.
Kerberos is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT).
Bonjour, macOS, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Edge, and Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corp. in the United States and/or other countries.
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and in other countries.
The SD and SD logo are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.

This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software of EMC Corporation. RSA and BSAFE are
registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and other countries.
The proper name of Edge is Microsoft® EdgeTM.
The proper names of Internet Explorer 11 is Internet Explorer® 11.
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 10 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Home

396
 Trademarks (User Guide)

Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro

Microsoft® Windows® 10 Pro for Workstations
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Education
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2012 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Standard
• The product names of Windows Server 2012 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Standard
• The product names of Windows Server 2016 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016 Datacenter
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2016 MultiPoint Premium Server
• The product names of Windows Server 2019 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2019 Datacenter
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2019 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2019 Essentials
Wi-Fi® and Wi-Fi Direct® are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

397
 MEMO

398
MEMO

399
 MEMO

400 EN GB EN US EN AU D0CH-7421
© 2021
EN GB EN US EN AU D0CH-7421
Operating Instructions

AirPrint Guide

For safe and correct use, be sure to read Safety Information before using
the machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
How to Read the Manuals................................................................................................................................. 2
Symbols Used in Manuals............................................................................................................................. 2
Disclaimer........................................................................................................................................................2
1. How to Use AirPrint
Before Using AirPrint...........................................................................................................................................5
About AirPrint..................................................................................................................................................5
Requirements for using AirPrint......................................................................................................................5
Confirming Settings........................................................................................................................................ 6
Notes and Limitations.....................................................................................................................................7
Using AirPrint From OS X or macOS.............................................................................................................. 10
Connecting the Machine to OS X or macOS............................................................................................ 10
Printing Documents Using OS X or macOS............................................................................................... 11
Scanning Documents Using OS X or macOS............................................................................................15
Sending Faxes Using OS X or macOS...................................................................................................... 17
Using AirPrint From iOS or iPadOS................................................................................................................ 21
Printing Documents Using iOS or iPadOS................................................................................................. 21
2. Trademarks
Trademarks....................................................................................................................................................... 23

1
 How to Read the Manuals
Symbols Used in Manuals

This manual uses the following symbols:

Indicates supplementary explanations of the product's functions and instructions on resolving user errors.

[]
Indicates the names of keys or buttons on the product or display.

Disclaimer

To the maximum extent permitted by applicable laws, in no event will the manufacturer be liable for any
damages whatsoever arising out of failures of this machine, losses of the registered data, or the use or
non-use of this product and operation manuals provided with it.
Make sure that you always copy or have backups of the data registered in this machine. Documents or
data might be erased due to your operational errors or malfunctions of the machine.
In no event will the manufacturer be responsible for any documents created by you using this machine or
any results from the data executed by you.
The screen displayed after you press the [Settings] key on the Home screen varies depending on the
machine.
The screen type is written as follows in this manual.
• The machine for which the following screen is displayed after you press the [Settings] key: Standard

• The machine for which the following screen is displayed after you press the [Settings] key: Classic

2
3
4
1. How to Use AirPrint
This section describes how to use devices from OS X, macOS or iOS using AirPrint.

Before Using AirPrint

About AirPrint

AirPrint is a function that allows you to use AirPrint-compatible printers or multi-function printers that are
on the same network to print, scan, and fax from iOS, OS X, or macOS. You can use the print function
on iOS, and you can use the print, scan, and fax functions on OS X, or macOS. You can use the print,
scan, and fax functions via wired LAN, wireless LAN, or a USB connection on the same network, without
installing any printer drivers or software.

• Available functions may differ depending on connected device or connection method.

• For details about available functions, see our web site.

Requirements for using AirPrint

OS X and macOS requirements

The following conditions are necessary to print with OS X or macOS:
• OS X 10.7 (Lion) or later
• AirPrint compatible printer or multi-function printer
The following conditions are necessary to scan with OS X or macOS:
• OS X 10.10.3 (Yosemite) or later
• AirPrint compatible multi-function printer
The following conditions are necessary to send fax with OS X or macOS:
• OS X 10.10.3 (Yosemite) or later
• AirPrint compatible multi-function printer
iOS and iPadOS requirements
The latest version of iOS must be installed to print with iOS.
• iPad (All models)
• iPhone (3GS or later)
• iPod touch (3rd generation or later)

5
 1. How to Use AirPrint

Output device requirements

To use AirPrint, select [Active] for the following settings. These settings are set to [Active] by default.
• AirPrint
• Bonjour
• IPP
A device certificate must be installed because AirPrint uses SSL encrypted communications. A
device certificate is already installed by default.
To confirm the AirPrint settings and device certificate, see page 6 "Confirming Settings".

Confirming Settings

Confirm the settings required for AirPrint by using a web browser on a computer on the network.
We use Web Image Monitor installed on the printer or multi-function printer. To log in Web Image
Monitor, see the web manual for your machine.
Confirming AirPrint settings

1. Log in to Web Image Monitor as a network administrator.

2. Click [Configuration] in "Device Management".
3. Click [AirPrint] in "Network".
4. Confirm that "AirPrint" is set to [Active].
If [Active] is not set, set to [Active].
5. Click [OK].
6. Click [IPv4] in "Network".
7. Confirm that "IPP" is set to [Active].
If [Active] is not set, set to [Active].
8. Click [OK].
9. Click [Bonjour] in "Network".
10. Confirm that "IPv4" or "IPv6" in "Bonjour" is set to [Active].
If [Active] is not set, set to [Active].
11. Click [OK].
Confirming IPP-SSL environment settings

1. Log in to Web Image Monitor as a network administrator.

2. Click [Configuration] in "Device Management".
3. Click [Device Certificate] in "Security".
Confirm the following conditions for "Certificate1":

6
 Before Using AirPrint

• "Certificate Status" must be [Installed].

• The certificate must have a valid expiration date in "Validity Period".
If an error message appears, see the web manual for your machine.
4. Click [OK].
5. Click [SSL/TLS] in "Security".
6. Configure the following settings:
• Set [Active] for the version of the internet protocol you are using for "SSL/TLS".
• Set [Active] for "TLS1.2" in "SSL/TLS Version".
7. Click [OK].

Notes and Limitations

About basic function

• You need to set the security settings for TLS1.2 to use AirPrint.
• A device certificate (self-signed certificate) is installed automatically when AirPrint is set to
[Active] but a device certificate for SSL/TLS is not installed.
• Your machine may be unable to communicate with the following utilities after the device
certificate for SSL/TLS is installed:
• Ridoc GlobalScan
• Third-party products
If this happens, you can recover communications by using one of the three ways described
below.
• Install the certificate issued by the certificate authority to both the machine and the utility.
• If a certificate (self-signed certificate) is already installed on the device, install it to the
utility as a reliable certificate.
• After setting AirPrint to [Inactive], delete the device certificate for SSL/TLS (You cannot
use AirPrint when AirPrint is set to [Inactive]).
• The default for "Permit SSL/TLS Communication" is [Ciphertext/Cleartext]. You need to
specify HTTPS to use encrypted communications because access using HTTP is not redirected
to HTTPS when [Ciphertext/Cleartext] is set. For instance, you must enter a URL starting with
https to access Web Image Monitor.
• When [Ciphertext/Cleartext] is set in "Permit SSL/TLS Communication", your machine may
communicate in clear-text with device management software even if a certificate for SSL/TLS
is installed. If you want to use encrypted communications, return the setting to [Ciphertext
Priority] or [Ciphertext Only].
• If you cannot use AirPrint, contact your service representative.

7
 1. How to Use AirPrint

About the print function

• Do one of the following settings to print with AirPrint.
• Set printer job authentication to [Simple (All)].
• Disable the user authentication function.
• Enable the user authentication function, and then in the IPP authentication settings, set the
[User Authentication Function of Main Unit] to [On].
• When printing with AirPrint, your machine cannot accept multiple jobs simultaneously. Wait
for the preceding job to finish before printing the next one.
• If you cancel a job while it is printing, the main text may continue printing if that job has a
cover sheet.
• You may not be able to use the printing functions depending on the application.
• When printing odd pages, the last page may be counted as black and white depending on
the application and the operation system.
About the scanner function
• Even if [Not Available] is selected in [Use a Destination List that is not DSM], you can scan
documents with AirPrint.
The [Use a Destination List that is not DSM] settings appear in a different menu according to
the screen type.
Standard: [Scanner Settings], [Others], [WSD/DSM Settings]
Classic: [General Settings] under [Scanner Features]
• When scanning is performed with AirPrint, the following settings are enabled. The settings
name varies according to the screen type.
Standard:
• Compression (Black & White): On
• Compression Method (Black & White): MMR
• Compression (Gray Scale/Full Color): On
Settings in [Sending Settings] under [Scanner Settings] on the machine are not applied.
Classic:
• Compression (Black & White): On
• Compression Method (Black & White): MMR
• Compression (Gray Scale / Full Color): On
Settings in [Send Settings] under [Scanner Features] on the machine are not applied.
• You cannot use the scanner function if the user authentication management function is used to
restrict the use of functions.

8
 Before Using AirPrint

About the fax function

• The name of the sender is the one used for [First Name] specified for [Register Fax
Information] (screen type: Standard) or [Program Fax Information] (screen type: Classic). For
details about the settings, see the web manual for your machine. If you want to use a name
other than that set in [First Name], contact your service representative.
The [Register Fax Information] settings (screen type: Standard) or the [Program Fax
Information] settings (screen type: Classic) appear in a different menu according to the screen
type.
Standard: [Detailed Initial Settings] in [Fax Settings]
Classic: [Initial Settings] in [Fax Settings]
• If unavailable letters are used in the address, the letters are ignored when sending a fax.
• The line type for fax transmission is set to external line (default). If you want to use an
extension line for fax transmissions, contact your service representative.
• You can check transmission results in the Record.
• You cannot check the contents of documents sent with the fax function of AirPrint from the
machine.
• If you are using OS X 10.8, a cover sheet will not be sent even if it is configured.
• You cannot use the fax function in the following conditions:
• When the use of functions is restricted by the user authentication management function
• When the fax function is restricted by an external charge unit
• When "Restrict Adding of User Destinations (Fax)" in [Extended Security] in "Security" is
set to [On] on Web Image Monitor
• When the optional fax unit is not installed
• If the country code is set to Korea and a sender's name is not registered on the machine
• When the fax is being used on the machine
• When the hard disk on the machine has insufficient storage

9
 1. How to Use AirPrint

Using AirPrint From OS X or macOS

This section describes how to use the print, fax, and scan functions of printers and multi-function printers
from OS X and macOS. OS X 10.14 is used for example in this manual.

Connecting the Machine to OS X or macOS

Use the following procedure to connect the machine to OS X or macOS using AirPrint.

1. Click [System Preferences...] under the Apple menu.

2. Click [Printers & Scanners].

3. Click [+].
4. Select the machine you are using from the list in "Name".
5. Select [Secure AirPrint] or [AirPrint] from [Use].
Devices that are not compatible with AirPrint are also displayed because devices are discovered
by using the Bonjour protocol.
6. Click [Add].
When the selected machine is displayed on the screen in Step 3, the connection is complete.

10
 Using AirPrint From OS X or macOS

Printing Documents Using OS X or macOS

1. Click [Print...] in the [File] menu of the application.

2. Select the machine to use for printing from "Printer".

3. Change the print settings as necessary, and then click [Print].
You can change the print settings by clicking [Show Details]. For details, see page 11 "Changing
print settings when using OS X or macOS".

Changing print settings when using OS X or macOS

You can change the print settings from OS X and macOS. Setting items may differ depending on the
application you are using, the specifications of the connected machine, and the configuration of options.

1
2
9
3
4 10

5
6 11

7 8 DVL901

1. Printer
Select the machine to use for printing.

11
 1. How to Use AirPrint

2. Presets
You can save the displayed settings or recall stored settings.
3. Copies
Specify the quantity to print.
4. Pages
Specify the range of pages to print.
5. Paper Size
Specify the size of the paper. You can also specify custom sizes here.
6. Orientation
Select the orientation of the paper.
7. PDF
Displays the workflow menu for PDF.
8. Hide Details
Hides the print settings.
9. Black & White
Select this item to print in black and white.
10. Two-Sided
You can print on both sides of the paper when this item is checked.
11. Print option menu
Displays the menu according to the specifications of the connected machine and the configuration of options.
For details, see page 12 "Print option menu".

Print option menu

Setting items may differ depending on specifications of the connected device or optional configurations.
[Media & Quality]
Select the paper tray and the paper type you want to use.

1
2
DVL902

1. Feed from
Select the paper tray.
2. Media Type
Select the type of paper.

12
 Using AirPrint From OS X or macOS

[Layout]
Configure settings for two-sided printing or to combine multiple pages on one sheet.

2
3
4
5
6
DVL903

1. Pages per Sheet

Specify the number of pages to combine on one side of the paper.
2. Layout Direction
Specify how to arrange the pages.
3. Border
Specify the width and number of the borders between combined pages.
4. Two-Sided
Specify the print format for two sided printing.
5. Reverse page orientation
Reverse the orientation of the output paper.
6. Flip horizontally
Print by flipping the entire image on the page left to right.
[Paper Handling]
Specify the order of the pages to be printed, or print only the odd or even pages.

1
2
3
4

DVL904

1. Collate pages
When printing two or more sets, print them by sorting them in sets. (Sort printing)
2. Pages to Print
Specify to print all pages or only the odd or even pages.
3. Page Order
Specify the order of the pages to print.

13
 1. How to Use AirPrint

4. Scale to fit paper size

Select this item to reduce or enlarge printouts to fit the paper. If you select this item, you can select the
paper size in "Destination Paper Size".
Reduce or enlarge printouts to fit the selected paper size.
When printing on paper larger than the print data without enlarging it, check [Scale down only].
[Cover Page]
Configure settings for inserting a cover page (banner page).

2
DVL905

1. Print Cover Page

Specify whether or not to insert a cover page and where to insert it.
2. Cover Page Type
Select the type of cover page to insert.
[Finishing Options]
Configure settings for stapling, the output tray, and folding.

1
2
3
DVL906

1. Staple
Specify the position of stapling.
2. Output Bin
Select the output tray.
3. Fold
Specify how to fold.
[Supply Levels]
You can check the remaining amount of consumables, such as toner and paper.
When you click [More Info…], Web Image Monitor starts and you can check more detailed
information.

14
 Using AirPrint From OS X or macOS

Scanning Documents Using OS X or macOS

1. Place originals in the Auto Document Feeder (ADF) or on the exposure glass.
For details about placing originals, see the web manual for your machine.
2. Click [System Preferences...] under the Apple menu.

3. Click [Printers & Scanners].

4. Select the device to use for scanning from the list of "Printers".
5. Click [Scan].
6. Click [Open Scanner...]
7. Change the scan settings as necessary and click [Scan].
Check [Use Document Feeder] when using the ADF.
You can change the scan settings by clicking [Show Details]. For Details, see page 16
"Changing scan settings".
When the scanned original is displayed on the [Scan] screen, scanning is complete.

15
 1. How to Use AirPrint

Changing scan settings

You can change the scan settings from OS X and macOS. Setting items may differ depending on the
application you are using, the specifications of the connected machine, and the configuration of options.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

12

14 13 DVL908

1. Scan Mode
Select whether to scan from the ADF or the exposure glass.
2. Kind
Select the type of original.
3. Resolution
Specify the resolution for scanning the original.
4. Use Custom Size
You can specify the scanning range as a value when this item is selected.
5. Size
Select the size of the original to scan.
6. Orientation
Select the orientation of scanned data.
7. Scan To
Specify the place to save scanned data.
8. Name
Specify the name for scanned data.
9. Format
Specify the file format for scanned data.
10. Image Correction
Specify the correction method for scanned data.
11. Enable edge detection
Use the function of the operating system to detect the outline of images and to specify the trimming range.

16
 Using AirPrint From OS X or macOS

12. Scan
Execute scanning.
13. Overview
Display the scanned image of the original.
14. Hide Details
Hides the scan settings.

Sending Faxes Using OS X or macOS

1. Click [Print...] under the [File] menu of the application.

2. Select the device to use for sending fax from "Printer".

The machines that can be used to send faxes have "- Fax" at the end of their names.
3. Enter a fax number in "To".
4. Change the fax transmission settings as necessary and click [Fax].
For details about fax transmission settings, see page 17 "Changing fax transmission settings".

Changing fax transmission settings

You can change the fax transmission settings from OS X and macOS. Setting items may differ depending
on the application you are using, the specifications of the connected machine, and the configuration of
options.

17
 1. How to Use AirPrint

1
2
3
4

5
6
7

8 9 DVL909

1. Printer
Select the machine to use for sending fax.
2. Presets
You can save the displayed settings or recall stored settings.
3. Copies
Specify the quantity to send fax.
4. Pages
Specify the range of pages of faxes to send.
5. Paper Size
Specify the size of the paper.
6. Orientation
Select the orientation of the fax.
7. Fax transmission option menu
Displays the menus according to the specifications of the connected machine and the configuration of options.
For details, see page 18 "Fax transmission option menu".
8. PDF
Displays the workflow menu for PDF.
9. Hide Details
Hides the fax transmission settings.

Fax transmission option menu

Setting items may differ depending on specifications of the connected device or optional configurations.

18
 Using AirPrint From OS X or macOS

[Fax Information]
Enter information necessary for sending faxes.

1
2

DVL910

1. To
Enter the fax number of the destination.
2. Dialing Prefix
Enter the phone number necessary to call an external line from the phone being used.
3. Use cover page
Select this item when sending a cover page as the first page of the fax. Enter the contents of the cover
page in [Subject] and [Message].
[Preview]
This setting is not active even if it is configured.
[Layout]
Configure settings to combine multiple pages on one sheet.

4
5
DVL911

1. Pages per Sheet

Specify the number of pages to combine in one side of the paper.
2. Layout Direction
Specify how to arrange the pages.
3. Border
Specify the width and number of the borders between combined pages.

19
 1. How to Use AirPrint

4. Reverse page orientation

Reverse the orientation of the fax to be sent.
5. Flip horizontally
Print by flipping the entire image on the page left to right.
[Paper Handling]
Specify the order of the pages to be sent, or send only the odd or even pages.

1
2
3

DVL912

1. Pages to Print
Specify to send all pages or only the odd or even pages.
2. Page Order
Specify the order of the pages to be sent.
3. Scale to fit paper size
Select this item to reduce or enlarge the size of faxes. If you select this item, you can select the paper size
in "Destination Paper Size".
Reduce or enlarge the size of faxes when sending to fit the selected paper size.
When sending on paper larger than the fax data without enlarging, check [Scale down only].
[Scheduler]
Configure a schedule for sending faxes.

2
DVL913

1. Print Document
Select [Now] to send the fax immediately.
Select [At] and specify the time to send the fax.
Select [On hold] to store the fax job in the print queue. You can send the fax later.
2. Priority
Select the priority level for sending the fax.

20
 Using AirPrint From iOS or iPadOS

Using AirPrint From iOS or iPadOS

This section describes how to use the print function of printers and multi-function printers from iOS and
iPadOS.

Printing Documents Using iOS or iPadOS

1. Tap the share icon ( ) on the application displaying data to print.

2. Tap [Print].

If [Print] is not displayed, flick the bottom area to the left.

3. Tap [Select Printer].
4. Tap the name of the device to use.
5. Tap [Options].
6. Change the print settings as necessary and tap [Print].
You can change the print settings by tapping [Options]. For details, see page 21 "Changing print
settings when using iOS or iPadOS" or iPadOS.

Changing print settings when using iOS or iPadOS

You can change print settings from iOS and iPadOS. Setting items may differ depending on
specifications of the connected device or optional configurations.

21
 1. How to Use AirPrint

DVL907

1. Printer
Select the device to use for printing.
2. Quantity
Specify the quantity to print.
3. Options
Show or hide the print settings.
4. Range
Specify the pages to print.
5. Double-sided
Configure setting for duplex printing.
6. Black & White
Select whether to print in black and white or color.
7. Staple
Configure setting for stapling.
8. Punch
Configure setting for punching.
9. Paper
Select the size of the paper.

22
2. Trademarks
This section describes about trademarks.

Trademarks
Apple, Bonjour, Macintosh, OS X, macOS and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.

Use of the Works with Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to work specifically
with the technology identified in the badge and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards.
To control this AirPrint-enabled product,the latest iOS and macOS versions are recommended.
AirPrint and AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.

23
 MEMO

24 EN GB EN US EN AU D0CM-7071B
EN GB EN US EN AU D0CM-7071B © 2019, 2020, 2021
Operating Instructions

Mopria Guide

For safe and correct use, be sure to read Safety Information before using
the machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction......................................................................................................................................................... 2
Meanings of Symbols.................................................................................................................................... 2
Disclaimer........................................................................................................................................................2
Preparations........................................................................................................................................................ 4
Connecting the Machine and an Android Device on the Same Network.................................................4
Confirming the Settings on the Machine.......................................................................................................4
1. Using Mopria Print
About Mopria Print Service................................................................................................................................7
Setting Up an Android Device...........................................................................................................................8
Printing................................................................................................................................................................. 9
2. Using Mopria Scan
About Mopria Scan......................................................................................................................................... 11
Setting Up an Android Device........................................................................................................................ 12
Using the Scanner Function............................................................................................................................. 14
Confirming/Changing Settings.......................................................................................................................16
3. Supplement
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................................19

1
 Introduction
Meanings of Symbols

This manual uses the following symbols:

Indicates points to pay attention to when using functions. This symbol indicates points that may result in
the product or service becoming unusable or result in the loss of data if the instructions are not obeyed.
Be sure to read these explanations.

Indicates supplementary explanations of the product's functions and instructions on resolving user errors.

[]
Indicates the names of keys or buttons on the product or display.

Disclaimer

To the maximum extent permitted by applicable laws, in no event will the manufacturer be liable for any
damages whatsoever arising out of failures of this product, losses of documents or data, or the use or
non-use of this product and operation manuals provided with it.
Make sure that you always copy or have backups of important documents or data. Documents or data
might be erased due to your operational errors or malfunctions of the machine. Also, you are
responsible for taking protective measures against computer viruses, worms, and other harmful software.
In no event will the manufacturer be responsible for any documents created by you using this product or
any results from the data executed by you.
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
The versions of Mopria applications used in this manual's description are as follows.
The actual screen may vary depending on the version of the application you are using.
• Mopria Print Service: 2.8.5
• Mopria Scan: 1.1.3
The screen displayed after you press the [Settings] key on the Home screen varies depending on the
machine.
The screen type is written as follows in this manual.
• The machine for which the following screen is displayed after you press the [Settings] key: Standard

2
• The machine for which the following screen is displayed after you press the [Settings] key: Classic

3
 Preparations
To use Mopria Print Service and Mopria Scan, you need to configure the settings on both the machine
and the Android device.

Connecting the Machine and an Android Device on the Same Network

Connect the machine and your Android device with one of the following methods. For details about the
connection procedure, see the instruction manuals provided with the machine or your Android device.
• Connecting directly on a wireless LAN network (Wi-Fi)
• Connecting over an access point (You can connect the machine and the access point on a wireless
LAN network or a wired LAN network.)

Confirming the Settings on the Machine

To use Mopria Print Service and Mopria Scan, the machine's settings need to be as shown below.
Confirm these settings.

Setting values
Setting item for using How to confirm using your web browser (Web Image Monitor)*1
Mopria

User Disabled 1. Log in to Web Image Monitor as a device administrator.

Authentication (Factory-set 2. Click "Device Management" [Configuration], in this order.
Management value: Disabled) 3. Click [User Authentication Management] in "Device
Settings", and confirm that "User Authentication
Management" is disabled. If it is enabled, switch it to
disabled. If it is enabled, set the [User Authentication
Function of Main Unit] in the IPP authentication settings to
[On].

IPP Enabled 1. Log in to Web Image Monitor as a network administrator.

(Factory-set 2. Click "Device Management" [Configuration], in this order.
value: Enabled) 3. Click [IPv4] in "Network", and confirm that "IPP" is enabled.
If it is disabled, switch it to enabled.

4
 Setting values
Setting item for using How to confirm using your web browser (Web Image Monitor)*1
Mopria

Bonjour Enabled 1. Log in to Web Image Monitor as a network administrator.

(Factory-set 2. Click "Device Management" [Configuration], in this order.
value: Enabled) 3. Click [Bonjour] in "Network", and confirm that "IPv4" or
"IPv6" for "Bonjour" is enabled. If it is disabled, switch it to
enabled.

*1 The procedures in this manual may be different for some versions of Web Image Monitor. If the procedures
are different, see the instruction manual provided with the machine or the Web Image Monitor Help.

5
6
1. Using Mopria Print
This section explains how to use the Mopria Print Service to print on the machine from an Android
device.

About Mopria Print Service

The machine supports the Mopria Print Service.
You can easily print on the machine by using the Mopria Print Service over a wireless network from an
Android device. You do not need to install a printer driver specifically for the machine on your Android
device.

DTN753

For details about the Mopria Print Service, see the following URL.
https://mopria.org/print-from-android

• If the operating system in your Android device is Android 8, 9 or 10, you can use the "Default Print
Service", which is pre-installed on the operating system. For the differences between the Default
Print Service and Mopria Print Service, see https://mopria.org/android-8-9-10faq.

7
 1. Using Mopria Print

Setting Up an Android Device

You can set up an Android device to use the Mopria Print Service.

1. If the Mopria Print Service is not installed on your Android device, install it.
Search for Mopria Print Service at the Google Play store, and install it.
2. Open the Android settings screen and tap [Device connection], [Printing].
3. Tap [Mopria Print Service].
4. Turn the service on.
If a message appears, confirm the information and tap [OK].
Mopria authorized devices on the same network are automatically discovered, and then shown in
a list.
When the name of the machine appears, the setup is complete.

D0C9OA8402

8
 Printing

Printing
You can use the Mopria Print Service to print from an Android device.

• The Mopria Print Service cannot accept multiple jobs at the same time. When the first job is
finished, print the next job.

1. Open the page you want to print on your Android device.

2. Select [Print], [Share], or another menu to open the Mopria Print Service screen (the
screen in step 3).
The names of menus and operational procedures vary depending on the type of application.
After you tap [Print], [Share], or another menu, if a [Mopria Print] icon ( ) or [Print] icon ( )
appears, tap that icon.
3. Perform the next operation in the Mopria Print Service screen.
1. Select an output printer. To change the output location, tap , and then select a location
from the list.
2. To change the printing conditions, such as the number of copies, paper size, one-sided/two-
sided printing, etc., tap , and then change the settings.
3. Tap the [Print] icon ( ).

1
2

D0C9OA8400

Printing starts.

9
 1. Using Mopria Print

10
2. Using Mopria Scan
This section explains how to use Mopria Scan to use the machine's scanner function from an Android
device.

About Mopria Scan

The machine supports Mopria Scan.
You can easily use the machine's scanner function over a wireless network from an Android device. You
do not need to install a scanner driver specifically for the machine on your Android device.

DTN753

For details about Mopria Scan, see the following URL.

https://mopria.org/scan-to-android#What-is-Mopria

11
 2. Using Mopria Scan

Setting Up an Android Device

You can set up an Android device to use Mopria Scan.

1. If Mopria Scan is not installed on your Android device, install it.

Search for Mopria Scan at the Google Play store, and install it.
2. Start Mopria Scan.

D0C9OA9903

Mopria authorized devices on the same network are automatically discovered, and then shown in
a list.
When the name of the machine appears, the setup is complete.

12
 Setting Up an Android Device

3. If you cannot find the machine, tap [ADD SCANNER MANUALLY].

D0C9OA8401

The information input screen appears.

4. Input the information for the machine, and then tap the confirmation icon ( ), in the
upper right.
The machine's information is registered.

13
 2. Using Mopria Scan

Using the Scanner Function

You can use Mopria Scan to scan from an Android device.

• You cannot use Mopria Scan's scanner function when personal authentication or user code
authentication is set on the machine and users are restricted.

1. Place the original on the machine.

2. Start Mopria Scan from an Android device, and then select the machine.

D0C9OA8403

3. If necessary, set the scanning conditions, and then tap [SCAN].

D0C9OA8404

The scanned image is saved to the Android device.

14
 Using the Scanner Function

• You can use Mopria Scan's scanner function even if [Use a Destination List that is not DSM] is set to
[Not Available].
The [Use a Destination List that is not DSM] settings appear in a different menu according to the
screen type.
Standard: [Scanner Settings], [Others], [WSD/DSM Settings]
Classic: [General Settings] under [Scanner Features]
• The following settings are applied when an original is scanned using Mopria Scan. The setting
name varies according to the screen type.
• Standard:
• [Compression (Black & White)]: On
• [Compression Method (Black & White)]: MMR
• [Compression (Gray Scale/Full Color)]: On ([Off] is applied when "Color mode" is set to
[Color (24b)] and "File format" is set to [TIFF] in Mopria Scan.)
(Settings in [Sending Settings] under [Scanner Settings] on the machine are not applied.)
• Classic:
• [Compression (Black & White)]: On
• [Compression Method (Black & White)]: MMR
• [Compression (Gray Scale / Full Color)]: On ([Off] is applied when "Color mode" is set
to [Color (24b)] and "File format" is set to [TIFF] in Mopria Scan.)
(Settings in [Send Settings] under [Scanner Features] on the machine are not applied.)
• If the application you are using in the Android device is not compatible with the file format of the
image scanned with Mopria Scan, you may not be able to open the image properly. Use an
application that is compatible with the file format of the scanned image.

15
 2. Using Mopria Scan

Confirming/Changing Settings
Confirm Mopria Scan's settings, and then if necessary, you can change them.

1. Start Mopria Scan.

D0C9OA9903

2. Tap the menu icon ( ) in the upper right.

3. Tap [Settings].

D0C9OA8405

The settings screen appears.

16
 Confirming/Changing Settings

4. Confirm the settings, and change them as needed.

17
 2. Using Mopria Scan

18
3. Supplement

Troubleshooting
This section explains what to do if you have trouble with your Android device's setup, printing, or
scanning.

Condition Cause Solution

The name of the The following causes are Use the following solution that
machine does not possible. corresponds to the cause.
appear (the machine • The machine's power is not • Turn on the power to the machine.
is not discovered turned on. • Confirm that the machine and
automatically) when
• The machine and the Android device can connect to the
doing setup, printing,
Android device cannot same network. For details, see
or scanning on your
connect to the same page 4 "Connecting the Machine
Android device.
network. and an Android Device on the Same
• The Mopria Print Service is Network".
disabled on the Android • Enable the Mopria Print Service on
device. the Android device. For the setting
procedure, see Steps 2 to 4 in
page 8 "Setting Up an Android
Device".
If you still cannot print or scan, even after
applying the solutions, redo the setup.

There is also an FAQ in the Mopria Print Service Help. Display the Mopria Print Service Help by tapping
[Mopria Print] on the list of applications screen on your Android device.

Mopria and the Mopria logo are trademarks of Mopria Alliance Inc.
Android and Google Play are registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance®.
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.

19
 MEMO

20 EN GB EN US EN AU D0CM-7072A
EN GB EN US EN AU D0CM-7072A © 2019, 2020
Safety Information Safety Information English

Read This First Información de seguridad Español

Leer antes de empezar

Leia isto primeiro Informações de segurança Português (Brasil)

À lire avant de commencer

Consignes de sécurité Français
 English

Safety Information 1. Manuals Provided with This Machine

2. Safety Information for This Machine

3. Other Information for This Machine

For information not found in this manual,

see the online manuals available on our
web site (https://www.ricoh.com/) or via the
control panel.

Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep
it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to
read the Safety Information in this manual before using the
machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
How to Read the Manuals......................................................................................................... 3

1. Manuals Provided with This Machine

Manuals for This Machine......................................................................................................... 4

2. Safety Information for This Machine

The Meanings of the Safety Symbols Used with This Machine............................................... 5
The Meanings of Safety Labels................................................................................................ 5
Safety Precautions to Be Followed........................................................................................... 6
Safety Labels of This Machine................................................................................................. 9

3. Other Information for This Machine

Laws and Regulations............................................................................................................. 13
Legal Requirements................................................................................................................ 13
Trademarks............................................................................................................................. 16

2
How to Read the Manuals Disclaimer
To the maximum extent permitted by applicable laws, in no event will the manufacturer
Symbols Used in the Manuals be liable for any damages whatsoever arising out of failures of this machine, losses of the
registered data, or the use or non-use of this product and operation manuals provided with
This manual uses the following symbols:
it.
Make sure that you always copy or have backups of the data registered in this machine.
Documents or data might be erased due to your operational errors or malfunctions of the

English
Indicates points to pay attention to when using functions. This symbol indicates points that machine.
may result in the product or service becoming unusable or result in the loss of data if the In no event will the manufacturer be responsible for any documents created by you using this
instructions are not obeyed. Be sure to read these explanations. machine or any results from the data executed by you.

Indicates supplementary explanations of the product's functions and instructions on resolving Notes
user errors.
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from
[]
the use of parts other than genuine parts from the manufacturer with your office products.
Indicates the names of keys or buttons on the product or display.
For good output quality, the manufacturer recommends that you use genuine toner from the
manufacturer.
(mainly Europe and Asia), (mainly Europe), or (mainly Asia)
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
(mainly North America)
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your
Differences in the functions of Region A and Region B models are indicated by two symbols.
local dealer.
Read the information indicated by the symbol that corresponds to the region of the model
Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please
you are using. For details about which symbol corresponds to the model you are using, see
contact your local dealer.
"Model-Specific Information", Specifications.

3
 • You can download information about the machine's certification, which is based on an
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine IT security certification system (hereafter CC Certification), from the following URL:
U.S. Government Protection Profile for Hardcopy Devices Version 1.0 (IEEE Std
2600.2™-2009)
Manuals for This Machine For Administrator: https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/
IM_2500_3500_4000_5000_6000/en/download_admin.html
The operating instructions of this machine are provided in the following formats: For User: https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/
Format Manuals
IM_2500_3500_4000_5000_6000/en/download_user.html
Protection Profile for Hardcopy Devices 1.0 dated September 10, 2015
Printed manual • Safety Information For Administrator: https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/
CD-ROM • Driver Installation Guide (HTML) im_2500_3500_4000_5000_6000/en/download_admin.html
Manuals displayed on the control panel • User Guide (Full Version) (HTML) This information is about how to set up the machine. If you have purchased a CC
Certified machine, be sure to read it before operating the machine so you can make the
Web pages • Safety Information correct settings before using it.
• User Guide (Selected Version) (PDF)
• User Guide (Full Version) (HTML)
• Driver Installation Guide (HTML)

Safety Information
Before using the machine, be sure to read the section of this manual entitled Safety
Information. It also describes each regulation and environmental conformance.
User Guide (Selected Version)
Regarding the basic usage of this machine, frequently used functions, troubleshooting
when an error message appears, etc., summaries are provided for each user manual.
User Guide (Full Version)
Describes the setup for using the machine, how to use functions to copy, fax, print, scan
or for maintenance and specifications, troubleshooting, system settings, and security
functions.
Manuals are available in English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, and Russian.
The User Guide for languages other than shown above contains the information in User
Guide (Selected Version) and Security.
Driver Installation Guide
Describes how to install and configure each driver. This manual is included in the drivers
CD.

• Before you configure the extended security and authentication settings, refer to "Regis-
tering Administrators Before Using the Machine" in the Security.
• Using the machine’s security function prevents unauthorized use of the machine, data
tampering, or information leakage. For enhanced security, we recommend that you first
make the following settings:
• Install the Device Certificate.
• Enable SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) Encryption.
• Change the user name and password of the administrator.
4
2. Safety Information for This Machine The Meanings of Safety Labels

The Meanings of the Safety Symbols Used with

WARNING
This Machine
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could result
in death or serious injury.

English
Prohibition
CAUTION
Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result
in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.

Keep out of reach of children

Do not touch

Do not throw into the fire

Do not use the cleaner

Caution, risk of having hands or arms caught

Caution, hot surface

5
Safety Precautions to Be Followed Requirements for Using Power Plugs and Cords

Requirements for Unpacking Products

WARNING

WARNING
• Avoid taking the following actions because doing so can result in fire or
electric shock:
• Using any power supply voltage or frequencies other than those that
• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this match the specifications shown
product's packaging: • Using multi-socket adaptors
• Do not leave the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this • Using extension cords
machine close to babies and small children. Suffocation can result if • Touching the prongs of the power cable's plug with anything metallic
polythene materials are brought into contact with the mouth or nose.
• Avoid applying the following actions to power cords because doing so can
result in fire or electric shock:
• Damaging them
Requirements for Locating and Installing Machines • Bundling them
• Modifying them
• Putting heavy objects on them
• Pulling them forcibly
WARNING • Bending them forcibly

• Do not handle the power cord plug with wet hands. Doing so can result in
• Avoid taking the following actions close to or inside this machine because
electric shock.
doing so can result in fire or electric shock:
• Using flammable sprays, solvents, and so on • The supplied power cord or cords are for use with this machine only. They
• Placing flammable sprays, solvents, and so on cannot be used for appliances other than this machine. Also, do not use
• Placing containers holding liquids or small metal objects power cords other than the power cord or cords supplied with this machine.
Doing so can result in fire or electric shock.

• To prevent fire or electric shock, disconnect the plug and the power cord from
CAUTION the wall outlet at least once a year and check them. If any of the following
conditions exist, do not use the plug and the power cord continuously, and
• Do not place the machine in a humid or dusty environment. Doing so can consult your dealer or service representative.
result in fire or electric shock. • There are burn marks on the plug
• The prongs on the plug are deformed
• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. Doing so can • The power cord's inner wires are exposed or broken
cause the machine to fall or topple over, possibly resulting in injury. • The power cord's coating is cracked, dented, or damaged
• When the power cord is bent, the power turns off and on
• Do not obstruct the machine's vents. Doing so can result in fire as the internal
• Part of the power cord becomes hot
components are overheated.

• Do not place heavy objects on the machine. Doing so can cause the machine
to fall or topple over, possibly resulting in injury.
CAUTION
• When using this machine in a poorly ventilated or narrow room continuously
for a long period of time or printing a high volume of materials, make sure to • When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, make sure to pull the
ventilate the room sufficiently. plug, not the cord. Do not pull the power cord forcibly. Doing so can damage
the power cord, possibly resulting in fire or electric shock.

6
 Requirements for Relocating Machines
CAUTION
• Be sure to push the power cord plug fully into the wall outlet. Also, do not
push it into loose and unstable wall outlets likely to cause a contact failure.
Doing so can result in heat generation. CAUTION
• Be sure to disconnect the plug from the wall outlet and clean the prongs and • When moving the machine, do not hold the control panel. Doing so may
the area around the prongs at least once a year. Allowing dust to build up on damage the control panel and can result in injury or malfunction.
the plug constitutes a fire hazard.

English
• When moving the machine with the optional paper tray unit attached, do not
• If you do not use the machine for a long period of time such as consecutive push the upper part of the main unit forcibly. Doing so can cause the main
holidays, be sure to disconnect the power cord plug from the wall outlet for unit to detach from the optional paper tray unit, possibly resulting in injury.
reasons of safety.
• When carrying or moving the machine by lifting it for relocation to another
• When performing maintenance on the machine, disconnect the power cord floor, contact your service representative. Dropping or toppling the machine
from the wall outlet for safety. can result in injury or malfunction.

• Power Source • After moving the machine, use the caster fixture to fix it in place. Otherwise,
the machine might move or topple over to cause injury.
120–127 V, 12 A or more, 60 Hz
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. • When moving the machine, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall
outlet and confirm that line cords and other connecting cables have been
removed. Otherwise, the power cord is damaged, possibly resulting in fire
Requirements during Emergencies or electric shock.

WARNING
• Do not touch this machine if a lightning strike occurs in the immediate vicinity.
Doing so could result in electric shock.

• Be sure to install the machine as close as possible to a wall outlet so that you
can disconnect the power cord plug easily in an emergency.

• If the machine behaves unusually as follows, turn off the power immediately.
After turning off the power, make sure to disconnect the power cord plug
from the wall outlet, and then contact your service representative and report
the problem. Continuously using the power cord can result in fire or electric
shock.
• The machine is emitting smoke
• The machine is emitting odors
• Metal objects or other foreign objects have fallen inside the machine
• Water or other fluids have fallen inside the machine

• If the machine topples or a cover or other part is damaged, turn off the power
immediately. After disconnecting the power cord plug from the wall outlet,
contact your service representative. Using the machine continuously can
result in fire or electric shock.

7
Requirements for Using the Machine CAUTION
• There are highly-heated parts inside the machine. When removing misfed
paper, do not touch areas other than those specified in this manual. Touching
CAUTION those areas can result in burns.

• Do not look into the light source. Doing so may damage your eyes. • There are parts inside the machine that may break when touched. When
removing misfed paper, do not touch connectors, sensors, and LED specified
• Do not use stapled sheets of paper, aluminum foil, carbon paper, or any kind in "Troubleshooting". Touching them can result in malfunction.
of conductive paper. Doing so can result in fire.
• Although the machine is designed so that a safety device protects users from
• Keep SD cards and USB flash memory devices out of reach of children. If a injury, take care not to touch the rollers during operation. The rollers may
child accidentally swallows an SD card or USB flash memory device, consult pinch before stopping completely.
a doctor immediately.
• Contact your sales or service representative for cleaning the machine's interior.
• When lowering the ADF, do not place your hands on the hinges and exposure If the machine's interior is not regularly cleaned while dust accumulates, fire
glass. Your hands or fingers are caught, which can result in injury. and malfunction can result.

• If the lower paper tray is installed, do not pull out more than one tray at a time. • When replacing paper or removing jammed paper, make sure not to trap or
Pressing down forcefully on the machine's upper surface might cause the injure your fingers.
machine topple over, possibly resulting in injury.
• Keep your hands clear of the paper output slot of the finisher booklet tray
when pulling it out or pushing it in the finisher's staple unit. You may trap your
fingers in the machine's gap and injury can result.
Requirements for Handling the Machine's Interior

Requirements for Handling Supplies

WARNING

WARNING
• Do not remove any covers or screws other than those explicitly mentioned in
this manual. There are high voltage components inside the machine that can
cause electric shock. Also there are laser components inside the machine
that can cause blindness. Contact your sales or service representative if any • Do not store toner (new or used) or toner containers while toner is inside in a
of the machine's internal components require maintenance, adjustment, or place with an open flame. The toner can ignite and result in burns or fire.
repair.
• Do not dispose of the following items into a fire. Toner will ignite on contact
• Do not disassemble or modify this machine. Doing so can result in fire and with naked flame and burns can result.
electric shock. Also, exposure to the laser components inside this machine • Toner (new or used)
risks blindness. • Toner containers while toner is inside
• Toner-attached parts

• Do not absorb spilled toner (including used toner) using a vacuum cleaner.
Absorbed toner may cause ignition or explosion due to electric contact
sparks inside the vacuum cleaner. However, you can use a toner-compatible
industrial vacuum cleaner. When toner is spilled, remove the spilled toner
using a wet cloth so that the toner is not scattered.

8
 Safety Labels of This Machine
CAUTION
• Do not open toner containers forcibly while toner is inside, crush or squeeze Positions of WARNING and CAUTION labels
them. Toner spillage can cause accidental ingestion or dirtying of clothes,
hands, or floor. This machine has labels for WARNING and CAUTION at the positions shown below.
For safety, please follow the instructions and handle the machine as indicated.
• Do not leave the following items in a place where children can reach them:
• Toner (new or used)
• Toner containers while toner is inside

English
• Toner-attached parts

• When removing jammed paper, replenishing or replacing toner (new or used),

make sure not to inhale toner.

• When the following occurs while toner is handled, receive emergency

measures first, and then consult a doctor if necessary.
• When inhaling toner, gargle with a large amount of water and move into
a fresh air environment.
• When swallowing toner, dilute gastric contents with a large amount of
water.
• When getting toner into your eyes, flush them with a large amount of
water.

• When removing jammed paper, replenishing or replacing toner (new or used),

be careful not to have toner dirt your skin or clothes.

• If toner (new or used) comes into contact with your skin or clothes and smears
them, take the following actions:
• If toner comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected area
Do not touch the parts a label
thoroughly with soap and water. Lower Paper Trays/Tray 3 (LCT) indicates. The inside of the machine
• If toner comes into contact with your clothes, wash the stained area with
could be very hot. Caution should be
cold water. Heating the stained area by applying hot water will set the
taken when removing misfed paper.
toner into the fabric and removing the stain may become impossible.

• When replacing a container with toner (including used toner) or consumables

with toner, be careful that the toner does not splatter. After removing used
consumables and shutting the lid of the container if the lid is available, put
them in a bag.

Lower Paper Tray

9
The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts which a label is put on. Finisher SR3260 or Booklet Finisher SR3270
Otherwise, an injury might occur. The inside of the
machine could be very
hot. Do not touch the
parts indicated with the
( ) label. Otherwise,
an injury might occur.

Finisher SR3260 Booklet Finisher SR3270

During operation,
rollers for
transporting the
paper revolve.
Take care not
to touch rollers
during operation.
Otherwise, an
injury might
occur.

The inside of the

machine could be very
hot. Do not touch the
parts indicated with the
( ) label. Otherwise,
an injury might occur.

Keep your hands clear of the booklet

finisher tray when pulling out or pushing
in the finisher's staple unit, or removing
paper jam. You might trap your fingers if
you do not.

10
Finisher SR3280 or Booklet Finisher SR3290 Internal Finisher SR3300

During operation, rollers

for transporting the paper

English
revolve. Take care not
to touch rollers during
operation. Otherwise, an
injury might occur. The inside of the machine could
be very hot. Do not touch the
The inside of the parts indicated with the ( )
machine could be very label. Otherwise, an injury might
hot. Do not touch the occur.
parts indicated with the
( ) label. Otherwise,
an injury might occur.

Keep your hands clear of the booklet finisher tray

Be careful of the protruding parts
when pulling out or pushing in the finisher's staple
of the front cover when replacing
unit, or removing paper jam. You might trap your
the cartridge in the saddle stitch
fingers if you do not.
unit or clearing a paper jam from
the saddle stitch unit.

11
ARDF Large capacity tray (LCT)

Do not place your hand under the bottom

plate. Doing so may result in your fingers
becoming trapped in the gap and injured.

Symbols for the Power Switch

The meanings of the symbols for the switches on this machine are as follows:
The cartridge may become hot during use. Do not touch : POWER ON
the cartridge immediately; turn off the main power of the : STANDBY
machine and wait 20 minutes or more before replacing it.

12
3. Other Information for This Machine Legal Requirements

Laws and Regulations Laser Safety

Duplication and Printing Prohibited For IM 2500/2500A/3000/3000A/3500/3500A

CDRH Regulations
Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law.

English
This machine complies with requirements of 21 CFR Subchapter J for class I laser product.
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law:
This machine contains one AlGaInP laser diode, 660 nanometer wavelength. The beam
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports,
divergence angle is 21 degrees (minimum) and 29 degrees (maximum) in the vertical
driver's licenses.
direction, and 7 degrees (minimum) and 11 degrees (maximum) in the horizontal direction,
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no responsibility
and laser beams are generated in Continuous Wave (CW) mode. The maximum output power
for its completeness or accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying
of the light source is 10 milliwatt.
or printing certain items, consult with your legal advisor.
Caution
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in
this manual might result in hazardous radiation exposure.

For IM 4000/5000/6000
CDRH Regulations
This machine complies with requirements of 21 CFR Subchapter J for class I laser product.
This machine contains two AlGaInP laser diodes, 660 nanometer wavelength for each
emitter. The beam divergence angle is 15 degrees (minimum) and 25 degrees (maximum) in
the vertical direction, and 7 degrees (minimum) and 13 degrees (maximum) in the horizontal
direction, and laser beams are generated in Continuous Wave (CW) mode. The maximum
output power of the light source is 15 milliwatt.
Caution
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in
this manual might result in hazardous radiation exposure.

13
 • IM 4000
Notes to USA Users of FCC Requirements • IM 5000
• IM 6000
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
Installing the Ferrite Core
Note: Attach a ferrite core to the following cables to prevent RF interference:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital • An Ethernet interface cable connecting to the Device Server Option port
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, Part 68 of the FCC Rules regarding Optional Facsimile Unit
uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with
the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there 1. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the cover of this equipment
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the FCC registration number and ringer
does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by equivalence number (REN) for this equipment. If requested, this information must be provided
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by to the telephone company.
one or more of the following measures: 2. This equipment uses the RJ11C USOC jack.
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 3. A plug and jack used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone
network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements adopted by
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
the ACTA. A compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this product. It is
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver
designed to be connected to a compatible modular jack that is also compliant. See installation
is connected.
instructions for detail.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio /TV technician for help. 4. The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone
line. Excessive RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response
Caution:
to an incoming call. In most but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0).
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to a line, as determined by the
could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. total RENs, contact the local telephone company.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or 5. If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify
transmitter. you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you
environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines. This equipment will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more away from 6. The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or
person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles). procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone
company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary modifications to
Supplier's Declaration of Conformity
maintain uninterrupted service.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
7. If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
contact Ricoh USA, Inc. Customer Support Department at 1-888-456-6457. If this device is
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
causing problems with your telephone network, the telephone company may request that you
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved.
undesired operation.
8. In the event of operation problems (document jam, copy jam, communication error indication),
Responsible party: Ricoh USA, Inc.
see the manual provided with this machine for instruction on resolving the problem.
Address: 300 Eagleview Boulevard, Suite 200 Exton, PA 19341, U.S.A.
9. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility
Telephone number: 610-296-8000
commission, public service commission or corporation commission for information.
Product Name: Multi Function Peripheral
10. If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line,
Model Number:
ensure the installation of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have
• IM 2500, IM 2500A
questions about what will disable alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a
• IM 3000, IM 3000A
qualified installer.
• IM 3500, IM 3500A
14
WHEN PROGRAMMING EMERGENCY NUMBERS AND/OR MAKING TEST CALLS TO
EMERGENCY NUMBERS: Notes to Canadian Users of Wireless Devices
1. Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before
hanging up. This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs.
2. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning hours or late Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
evenings. (1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a operation of the device.
computer or other electronic device, including FAX machines, to send any message unless

English
such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
on the first page of the transmission, the date and time it is sent and an identification of the environment and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This
business or other entity, or other individual sending the message and the telephone number equipment should be installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20 cm or more away
of the sending machine or such business, other entity, or individual. (The telephone number from person's body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
provided may not be a 900 number or any other number for which charges exceed local or
long-distance transmission charges.)
In order to program this information into your FAX machine, you should complete the following Remarques à l'attention des utilisateurs canadiens d'appareils sans fil
steps: Follow the FAX HEADER programming procedure in the Programming chapter of the
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
operating instructions to enter the business identification and telephone number of the terminal
radio exempts de licence.
or business. This information is transmitted with your document by the FAX HEADER feature.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes :
In addition to the information, be sure to program the date and time into your machine.
(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
Important Safety Instructions for Optional Facsimile Unit brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.

When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements énoncées
to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following: pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles d'exposition aux fréquences
• Do not use this product near water, for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l'IC. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant
or laundry tub, in a wet basement or near a swimming pool. une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l'exception des
extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
• Avoid using a telephone during an electrical storm. There may be a remote risk of electric
shock from lightning.
• Do not use a telephone in the vicinity of a gas leak to report the leak.
Save these instructions.

IMPORTANTES MESURES DE SÉCURITÉ de l'unité Fax en option

Certaines mesures de sécurité doivent être prises pendant l'utilisation de material
téléphonique afin de réduire les risques d'incendie, de choc électrique et de blessures. En
voici quelques-unes:
• Ne pas utiliser l'appareil près de l'eau, p.ex., près d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un évier
de cuisine, d'un bac à laver, dans un sous-sol humide ou près d'une piscine.
• Éviter d'utiliser le téléphone (sauf s'il s'agit d'un appareil sans fil) pendant un orage
électrique. Ceci peut présenter un risque de choc électrique causé par la foudre.
• Ne pas utiliser l'appareil téléphonique pour signaler une fuite de gaz s'il est situé près de
la fuite.
Conserver ces instructions.
15
 Notes to Canadian Users of Optional Facsimile Unit Trademarks
The SD is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
This product meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
technical specifications. Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) indicates the maximum number of devices allowed of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
to be connected to a telephone interface. The termination of an interface may consist of any
combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the
devices not exceed five.

Remarques à l'attention des utilisateurs canadiens de l'unité Fax en option

Le présent produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques applicables d 'Innovation,
Sciences et Développement économique Canada.
L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de dispositifs
qui peuvent être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut
consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme
des IES de tous les dispositifs n'excède pas cinq.

16
 Español

Información de 1. Manuales suministrados con esta máquina

seguridad
2. Información de seguridad de esta máquina

3. Más información sobre esta máquina

Para información no incluida en este

manual, consulte los manuales online
disponibles en nuestra página web
(https://www.ricoh.com/) o a través del
panel de mandos.

Lea atentamente este manual antes de utilizar la máquina y

guárdelo a mano para consultarlo en el futuro. Para un uso
seguro y correcto, lea Información de seguridad antes de
utilizar la máquina.
CONTENIDO
Cómo leer los manuales........................................................................................................... 3

1. Manuales suministrados con esta máquina

Manuales para esta máquina................................................................................................... 4

2. Información de seguridad de esta máquina

Los significados de los símbolos de seguridad utilizados con esta máquina......................... 5
Los significados de las etiquetas de seguridad....................................................................... 5
Precauciones de seguridad...................................................................................................... 6
Etiquetas de seguridad de esta máquina................................................................................. 9

3. Más información sobre esta máquina

Leyes y normativas................................................................................................................. 13
Requisitos legales................................................................................................................... 13
Marcas comerciales................................................................................................................ 16

2
Cómo leer los manuales Exención de responsabilidades
En la medida en que lo permita la legislación aplicable, el fabricante no será responsable de
Símbolos utilizados en los manuales ningún daño causado por fallos de esta máquina, pérdida de documentos o datos, o el uso
o no uso de este producto y los manuales de producto que se proporcionan con el mismo.
En este manual se utilizan los siguientes símbolos:
Asegúrese siempre de realizar copias o tener copias de seguridad de los datos registrados
en esta máquina. Es posible que se borren documentos y datos por un error operativo o
alguna avería de la máquina.
Indica aquellos puntos a los que debe prestar atención cuando se utilicen las funciones. En ningún caso el fabricante será responsable de documentos creados por usted mediante
Este símbolo indica los puntos que pueden dañar el producto o servicio de forma que no esta máquina, ni cualquier resultado de los datos ejecutados por usted.
pueda utilizarse o que pueden resultar en la pérdida de información si no se siguen las
instrucciones. Asegúrese de leer estas explicaciones.

Español
Notas
El contenido de este manual está sujeto a cambios sin previo aviso.
Indica explicaciones adicionales sobre las funciones del producto e instrucciones sobre
El fabricante no se hace responsable de los daños o gastos derivados del uso de piezas que
cómo resolver errores de usuario.
no sean las originales del fabricante en sus productos de oficina.
Para una buena calidad de impresión, el fabricante recomienda el uso de tóner original del
[]
fabricante.
Indica los nombres de las teclas y los botones del producto o de la pantalla.
Algunas de las ilustraciones de este manual pueden presentar ligeras diferencias respecto
a la máquina.
(principalmente, Europa y Asia), (principalmente, Europa), o (principalmente,
Algunas opciones pueden no estar disponibles en algunos países. Si desea información más
Asia)
detallada, póngase en contacto con su distribuidor local.
(principalmente Norteamérica)
En función del país en que se encuentre, determinadas unidades pueden ser opcionales. Si
Las diferencias entre las funciones de los modelos de la región A y la región B se indican
desea información más detallada, póngase en contacto con su distribuidor local.
mediante estos dos símbolos. Lea la información indicada por el símbolo correspondiente a
la región del modelo que está utilizando. Para obtener más información sobre qué símbolo
corresponde al modelo que está utilizando, consulte Especificaciones.

3
 • En la siguiente URL encontrará información sobre el certificado de la máquina, que se basa
1. Manuales suministrados con esta máquina en un sistema de certificación de seguridad IT (de aquí en adelante, Certificación CC).
Perfil de Protección del Gobierno de los EE. UU. para Dispositivos de Copia en
Papel, Versión 1.0 (Norma IEEE 2600.2™-2009)
Manuales para esta máquina Para el administrador: https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/
IM_2500_3500_4000_5000_6000/en/download_admin.html
Las instrucciones de uso de esta máquina se proporcionan en los siguientes formatos: Para el usuario: https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/
Formato Manuales
IM_2500_3500_4000_5000_6000/en/download_user.html
Perfil de Protección de Dispositivos de Copia en Papel 1.0 del 10 de septiembre
Manual impreso • Información de seguridad de 2015
CD-ROM • Guía de instalación del driver (HTML) Para el administrador: https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/
im_2500_3500_4000_5000_6000/en/download_admin.html
Manuales mostrados en el panel de • Guía del usuario (versión completa) (HTML)
mandos Esta información es sobre la configuración de la máquina. Si ha adquirido una máquina
con Certificado CC, asegúrese de leerlo antes de utilizarla para realizar los ajustes
Páginas web • Información de seguridad
• Guía del usuario (versión seleccionada) (PDF)
necesarios.
• Guía del usuario (versión completa) (HTML)
• Guía de instalación del driver (HTML)

Información de seguridad
Antes de utilizar la máquina, asegúrese de leer la sección de este manual llamada
Información de seguridad. También contiene información sobre la conformidad
medioambiental y normativas.
Guía del usuario (versión seleccionada)
En relación al uso básico de esta máquina, se proporcionan para cada manual de
usuario resúmenes sobre las funciones utilizadas con más frecuencia, detección de
errores al aparecer un mensaje de error, etc.
Guía del usuario (versión completa)
Describe la configuración para usar la máquina, cómo usar las funciones para copiar,
comunicarse por fax, imprimir, escanear o para llevar a cabo el mantenimiento y
especificaciones, detección de errores, ajustes del sistema y funciones de seguridad.
Los manuales están disponibles en inglés, alemán, francés, italiano, español,
neerlandés y ruso.
La Guía del usuario para otros idiomas aparte de los indicados anteriormente contiene
la información de la Guía del usuario (versión seleccionada) y la Guía de seguridad.
Guía de instalación del driver
Describe cómo instalar y configurar cada driver. Este manual está incluido en el CD de
drivers.

• Antes de configurar los ajustes de seguridad y autenticación ampliados, consulte la

Guía de seguridad.
• Utilizar la función de seguridad de la máquina evita usos no autorizados de la máquina,
alteración de datos o fuga de información. Le recomendamos que realice los siguientes
ajustes para aumentar la seguridad:
• Instale el Certificado del Dispositivo.
• Active el cifrado SSL (Secure Sockets Layer).
• Cambie el nombre de usuario y la contraseña del administrador.
4
2. Información de seguridad de esta máquina Los significados de las etiquetas de seguridad

Los significados de los símbolos de seguridad

ADVERTENCIA
utilizados con esta máquina
Indica una situación de peligro potencial que podría causar la muerte o lesiones graves si no
se siguen las instrucciones.
Prohibición

PRECAUCIÓN
Precaución Indica una situación de peligro potencial que podría causar lesiones leves o moderadas o

Español
daños a la propiedad si no se siguen las instrucciones.

Mantener fuera del alcance de los niños

No tocar

No tirar al fuego

No usar un aspirador

Precaución, corre el riesgo de pillarse las

manos o los brazos

Precaución, superficie caliente

5
Precauciones de seguridad
Requisitos para el uso de enchufes y cables de alimentación
Requisitos para desempacar productos
ADVERTENCIA
ADVERTENCIA • Evite llevar a cabo las siguientes acciones, ya que, de lo contrario, podría provocar
un incendio o una descarga eléctrica:
• A continuación, se explican los mensajes de advertencia que se indican en la • Usar una tensión de alimentación o frecuencias que no sean las indicadas en
bolsa de plástico utilizada para el embalaje de este producto: las especificaciones
• No deje los materiales de polietileno (bolsas, etc.) suministrados con esta • Usar adaptadores con varias tomas
máquina al alcance de bebés y niños pequeños. El contacto con materiales • Usar cables prolongadores
de polietileno a través de la boca o la nariz puede producir asfixia. • Tocar las clavijas del enchufe del cable eléctrico con cualquier objeto metálico

• Evite cualquiera de las siguientes acciones en los cables eléctricos, ya que,

de lo contrario, podría provocar un incendio o descarga eléctrica:
• Dañarlos
Requisitos para la ubicación e instalación de las máquinas • Agruparlos
• Modificarlos
• Colocar objetos pesados sobre ellos
• Tirar de ellos con fuerza
ADVERTENCIA • Doblarlos a la fuerza

• No toque el enchufe del cable con las manos húmedas. Hacerlo puede
• Evite llevar a cabo las siguientes acciones cerca o en el interior de esta provocar una descarga eléctrica.
máquina, ya que, de lo contrario, se podría producir un incendio o una
descarga eléctrica: • Los cables de alimentación suministrados solo pueden utilizarse con esta
• Usar pulverizadores inflamables, disolventes, etc. máquina. No pueden utilizarse con otros dispositivos. Tampoco utilice cables
• Colocar pulverizadores inflamables, disolventes, etc. no suministrados con esta máquina. De lo contrario, puede producirse un
• Colocar contenedores con líquidos o pequeños objetos metálicos incendio o una descarga eléctrica.

• Para evitar un incendio o una descarga eléctrica, desconecte el enchufe

y el cable de la toma de pared al menos una vez al año para comprobar

PRECAUCIÓN su estado. Si se produce alguna de las siguientes condiciones, no siga

utilizando ni el enchufe ni el cable de alimentación y consulte a su distribuidor
o representante de servicio.
• No coloque la máquina en un entorno húmedo o con polvo. De lo contrario,
• Hay marcas de quemaduras en el enchufe
puede producirse un incendio o una descarga eléctrica. • Las clavijas del enchufe están deformadas
• Los cables del interior del cable de alimentación están expuestos o rotos
• No coloque la máquina en una superficie inestable o inclinada. De lo
• El revestimiento del cable de alimentación está agrietado, fisurado o
contrario, la máquina podría caer o volcar, y provocar lesiones. dañado
• Al doblar el cable de alimentación, la máquina se apaga y se enciende
• No obstruya las rejillas de ventilación de la máquina. De lo contrario, podría
• Parte del cable de alimentación se calienta
provocar un incendio al sobrecalentar los componentes internos.

• No coloque objetos de peso sobre la máquina. De lo contrario, la máquina

PRECAUCIÓN
podría caer o volcar, y provocar lesiones.

• Si se utiliza esta máquina en una habitación mal ventilada o estrecha de

forma continua durante un periodo de tiempo prolongado, o si se imprime • Al desconectar el cable de alimentación de la toma de pared, asegúrese de
un gran volumen de materiales, asegúrese de ventilar suficientemente la tirar del enchufe y no del cable. No tire del cable de alimentación con fuerza.
habitación. Hacer esto podría dañar el cable de alimentación, pudiendo llegar a producir
un incendio o descarga eléctrica.
6
 PRECAUCIÓN Requisitos para cambiar la ubicación de las máquinas
• Asegúrese de insertar completamente el enchufe del cable de alimentación en la
toma de la pared. Además, no lo inserte en tomas de pared flojas e inestables, ya
que es probable que se produzca un fallo de contacto. Hacerlo podría generar calor. PRECAUCIÓN
• Asegúrese de desconectar el enchufe de la toma de la pared y de limpiar las • Cuando traslade la máquina, no la sujete por el panel de mandos. De
clavijas, así como la zona de alrededor al menos una vez al año. Si deja que lo contrario, podría dañarse el panel de mandos, causar una avería o
se acumule el polvo en el enchufe, podría producirse un incendio.
provocar alguna lesión.
• Si no utiliza la máquina durante un periodo de tiempo prolongado, como por
• A la hora de trasladar la máquina con la bandeja de papel opcional
ejemplo, en vacaciones, asegúrese de desconectar el enchufe del cable de
acoplada, no presione con fuerza la parte superior de la unidad principal.
alimentación de la toma de pared por motivos de seguridad.
Si lo hace, la bandeja de papel opcional podría separarse de la unidad
• Si realiza operaciones de mantenimiento en la máquina, desconecte el cable principal y provocar lesiones.

Español
de alimentación de la red por seguridad.
• A la hora de trasladar la máquina elevándola para su reubicación en otra
• Alimentación eléctrica planta, póngase en contacto con su representante de servicio. Una caída o
120–127 V, 12 A o más, 60 Hz vuelco de la máquina puede producir una lesión o averías.
Asegúrese de conectar el cable de alimentación a una fuente de
alimentación del tipo arriba indicado. • Después de mover la máquina, utilice el dispositivo de fijación para fijar la
máquina. De lo contrario, la máquina se podría mover o volcar, causando
lesiones.
Requisitos durante emergencias • A la hora de trasladar la máquina, asegúrese de desenchufar el cable de
alimentación de la toma de pared y confirme que se han retirado los cables
de línea y el resto de cables de conexión. De lo contrario, el cable de
alimentación podría sufrir daños, lo que podría provocar un incendio o una
ADVERTENCIA descarga eléctrica.

• No toque la máquina si ha caído un rayo en una zona próxima. Hacerlo

podría provocar una descarga eléctrica.

• Asegúrese de instalar la máquina lo más cerca posible de una toma de

pared para poder desconectar el enchufe del cable de alimentación de forma
sencilla en caso de emergencia.

• Si la máquina se comporta de forma extraña, corte la alimentación eléctrica

de inmediato. Tras desactivar la alimentación eléctrica, desconecte
el enchufe del cable de alimentación de la toma de pared y póngase en
contacto con su representante de servicio para comunicarle el problema. El
uso cotinuado del cable de alimentación puede provocar un incendio o una
descarga eléctrica.
• La máquina desprende humo
• La máquina desprende olores
• Han caído objetos metálicos u otros objetos extraños en el interior de
la máquina
• Ha entrado agua u otros líquidos en el interior de la máquina

• Si la máquina vuelca o una cubierta u otra pieza está dañada, apague la

máquina inmediatamente. Después de desconectar el enchufe del cable de
alimentación de la toma de pared, póngase en contacto con su representante
del servicio técnico. Un uso continuo de la máquina puede provocar un
incendio o una descarga eléctrica.
7
Requisitos para el uso de la máquina PRECAUCIÓN
• Hay componentes a temperaturas muy altas en el interior de la máquina. A la
hora de retirar el papel mal colocado, no toque las áreas no especificadas en
PRECAUCIÓN este manual. Si toca las áreas no especificadas, puede sufrir quemaduras.

• No mire directamente hacia la fuente de luz. De lo contrario, podría sufrir • Estos son componentes del interior de la máquina que se pueden romper si
daños en los ojos. se tocan. A la hora de retirar el papel mal colocado, no toque los conectores,
sensores y LED especificados en "Resolución de problemas". Tocarlos
• No utilice hojas de papel con grapas, láminas de aluminio, papel de carbón puede provocar una avería.
ni ningún otro tipo de papel conductivo. Hacerlo podría provocar un incendio.
• Aunque la máquina está diseñada para que un dispositivo de seguridad
• Guarde las tarjetas SD o los dispositivos de memoria flash USB fuera del proteja a los usuarios de cualquier lesión, procure no tocar los rodillos durante
alcance de los niños. Si algún niño ingiere por accidente una tarjeta SD o el funcionamiento de la máquina. Los dedos podrían quedar atrapados entre
dispositivo de memoria flash USB, consulte inmediatamente con un médico. los rodillos antes de que estos se detengan por completo.

• Al bajar el ADF, no coloque las manos en las bisagras ni en el cristal de • Póngase en contacto con su representante de ventas o de servicio para limpiar
exposición. Las manos o los dedos quedarían atrapados, lo que podría el interior de la máquina. Si el interior de la máquina no se limpia periódicamente
provocar una lesión. y el polvo se acumula, se puede producir un incendio y averías.
• Si la bandeja inferior de papel está instalada, no tire de más de una bandeja • Al sustituir el papel o retirar el papel atascado, tenga cuidado de no hacerse
al mismo tiempo. Ejercer una presión o fuerza sobre la superficie superior daño ni pillarse los dedos.
de la máquina, puede provocar que la máquina vuelque, y resultar en daños
personales. • Mantenga las manos fuera del alcance de la ranura de salida de papel de
la bandeja de folletos del finisher al sacarla o empujarla en la unidad de
grapado del finisher. Los dedos pueden quedar atrapados en el hueco de la
máquina, provocando lesiones.
Requisitos para la manipulación del interior de la máquina
Requisitos para la manipulación de consumibles
ADVERTENCIA
• No retire tapas ni tornillos si no se indica explícitamente en el presente ADVERTENCIA
manual. Hay componentes de alto voltaje en el interior de la máquina que
pueden provocar descargas eléctricas. También hay componentes láser en • No almacene tóner (nuevo o usado) ni contenedores con tóner en su interior
el interior de la máquina que pueden provocar ceguera. En caso de que en un lugar con una llama abierta. El tóner podría entrar en combustión y
los componentes internos de la máquina necesiten mantenimiento, ajuste provocar quemaduras o un incendio.
o reparación, póngase en contacto con su representante de ventas o de
• No arroje al fuego los siguientes elementos. El tóner entrará en combustión
servicio técnico.
en contacto con una llama abierta, provocando quemaduras.
• No desmonte ni modifique esta máquina. Hacerlo podría producir una
• Tóner (nuevo o usado)
descarga eléctrica o un incendio. Además, la exposición a los componentes
• Contenedores de tóner con tóner en su interior
láser del interior de la máquina puede provocar ceguera.
• Componentes en contacto con tóner

• No aspire el tóner vertido (incluido tóner usado) con una aspiradora. El tóner
absorbido puede entrar en combustión o causar una explosión por contacto
eléctrico en el interior del aspirador. No obstante, puede utilizar un aspirador
industrial específico para tóner. Si se vierte tóner, limpie el tóner vertido
utilizando un paño seco, para que el tóner no se disperse.

8
 Etiquetas de seguridad de esta máquina
PRECAUCIÓN
• No abra a la fuerza los contenedores de tóner cuando haya tóner en su
interior. No los apriete ni aplaste. Un vertido de tóner puede provocar una Posiciones de las etiquetas de ADVERTENCIA y PRECAUCIÓN
ingestión accidental o ensuciar la ropa, las manos o el suelo.

• No deje los siguientes elementos en un lugar al que puedan acceder los

Esta máquina dispone de etiquetas de ADVERTENCIA y PRECAUCIÓN en los
niños:
• Tóner (nuevo o usado)
siguientes lugares. Por su seguridad, siga las instrucciones y manipule la máquina tal como
• Contenedores de tóner con tóner en su interior se indica.
• Componentes en contacto con tóner

• Al retirar el papel atascado, rellenar o sustituir el tóner (nuevo o usado),

asegúrese de no inhalar el tóner.

Español
• Si se da cualquiera de las siguientes situaciones al manejar el tóner, reciba
primero los primeros auxilios y, a continuación, acuda a un médico si fuera
necesario.
• Si inhala el tóner, realice gárgaras con una cantidad abundante de agua
y diríjase a un lugar donde pueda respirar aire fresco.
• Si ingiere el tóner, diluya el contenido gástrico con una gran cantidad
de agua.
• Si el tóner entra en contacto con los ojos, lávelos con abundante agua.

• Al retirar el papel atascado, rellenar o sustituir el tóner (nuevo o usado),

tenga cuidado de no mancharse la piel o la ropa.

• Si se mancha de tóner (nuevo o usado) la piel o la ropa, lleve a cabo las

siguientes acciones:
• Si el tóner entra en contacto con la piel, lave la zona afectada con agua
abundante y jabón.
• Si el tóner entra en contacto con la ropa, lave la zona manchada con Bandejas de papel inferiores/ No toque las piezas indicadas con
bandeja 3 (LCT)
agua fría. Calentar el área manchada con agua caliente fijará el tóner al una etiqueta. El interior de la máquina
tejido y puede hacer imposible la eliminación de la mancha. podría alcanzar temperaturas muy
elevadas. Se debe tener precaución a
• Al sustituir un contenedor con tóner (incluido tóner usado) o consumibles la hora de extraer un papel atascado.
con tóner, evite que se produzcan salpicaduras. Después de retirar los
consumibles usados y cerrar la tapa del contenedor (si hay una tapa
disponible), colóquelos en una bolsa.

Bandejas de papel inferior

9
El interior de la máquina podría alcanzar temperaturas muy elevadas. No toque las piezas con una Finisher SR3260 o Plegador de folletos SR3270
etiqueta sobre las mismas. De lo contrario pueden producirse lesiones. El interior de la máquina
podría alcanzar
temperaturas muy
elevadas. No toque
las piezas indicadas
con la etiqueta ( ).
De lo contrario pueden
producirse lesiones.

Finisher SR3260 Finisher de folletos SR3270

Durante el
funcionamiento
de la impresora,
los rodillos que
transportan el
papel giran.
Tenga cuidado
de no tocar los
rodillos durante
la acción. De lo
contrario pueden
producirse El interior de la máquina
lesiones. podría alcanzar
temperaturas muy elevadas.
No toque las piezas
indicadas con la etiqueta
( ). De lo contrario
pueden producirse lesiones.

No toque la bandeja del plegador de

folletos mientras extrae o introduce la
unidad de grapado del plegador o retira
papel atascado. De lo contrario, los
dedos podrían quedar atrapados.

10
Finisher SR3280 o Plegador de folletos SR3290 Finisher interno SR3300

Durante el funcionamiento
de la impresora, los rodillos
que transportan el papel
giran. Tenga cuidado de no
tocar los rodillos durante
la acción. De lo contrario El interior de la máquina podría
pueden producirse El interior de la máquina alcanzar temperaturas muy

Español
lesiones. podría alcanzar elevadas. No toque las piezas
temperaturas muy indicadas con la etiqueta
elevadas. No toque ( ). De lo contrario pueden
las piezas indicadas producirse lesiones.
con la etiqueta ( ).
De lo contrario pueden
producirse lesiones.

No toque la bandeja del plegador de folletos

Tenga cuidado con las piezas
mientras extrae o introduce la unidad de grapado
que sobresalen de la tapa frontal
del plegador o retira papel atascado. De lo
al reemplazar el cartucho en la
contrario, los dedos podrían quedar atrapados.
unidad de cosido en caballete o
al retirar un papel atascado de la
unidad de cosido en caballete.

11
ARDF Bandeja de gran capacidad (LCT)

No coloque la mano debajo de la placa

inferior. Si lo hace, puede que los dedos
queden atrapados en el hueco o resulten
dañados.

Símbolos del interruptor de alimentación

El cartucho puede calentarse durante su uso. No toque
el cartucho usado de forma inmediata; apague la Los símbolos de los interruptores de esta máquina significan lo siguiente:
alimentación principal de la máquina y espere 20 minutos : ENCENDIDA
o más antes de sustituirlo. : EN ESPERA.

12
3. Más información sobre esta máquina Requisitos legales

Leyes y normativas Seguridad para láser

Duplicación e impresión prohibidas Para IM 2500/2500A/3000/3000A/3500/3500A

Normas CDRH
No realice copias ni imprima ningún artículo cuya reproducción esté prohibida por la ley.
La máquina cumple con los requisitos del 21 CFR Subchapter J para productos láser de
La copia o la impresión de los siguientes artículos, normalmente está prohibida por la ley:
clase I. Esta máquina contiene un diodo láser AlGaInP, con una longitud de onda de 660
billetes bancarios, timbres fiscales, bonos, certificados de acciones, efectos bancarios,
nanómetros. El ángulo de divergencia del haz luminoso es de 21 grados (mínimo) y 29
cheques, pasaportes y permisos de conducir.
grados (máximo) en la dirección vertical, y 7 grados (mínimo) y 11 grados (máximo) en la
La lista anterior es tan solo una guía orientativa y no contiene todas las prohibiciones. No

Español
dirección horizontal, y los rayos láser se generan en modo Onda continua (Continuous Wave
asumimos responsabilidad alguna relacionada con su precisión e integridad. Si tiene alguna
o CW). La potencia de salida máxima de la fuente lumínica es de 10 milivatios.
pregunta relacionada con la legalidad de copiar o imprimir ciertos artículos, póngase en
contacto con su asesor legal. Precaución
El uso de los controles o ajustes o la práctica de procedimientos que no se ajusten a lo
especificado en este manual, pueden causar exposición peligrosa a radiaciones.

Para IM 4000/5000/6000
Normas CDRH
La máquina cumple con los requisitos del 21 CFR Subchapter J para productos láser de
clase I. Esta máquina contiene dos diodos láser AlGaInP, y una longitud de onda de 660
nanómetros para cada emisor. El ángulo de divergencia del haz luminoso es de 15 grados
(mínimo) y 25 grados (máximo) en la dirección vertical, y 7 grados (mínimo) y 13 grados
(máximo) en la dirección horizontal; y los rayos láser se generan en modo Onda continua
(Continuous Wave o CW). La potencia de salida máxima de la fuente lumínica es 15 milivatios.
Precaución
El uso de los controles o ajustes o la práctica de procedimientos que no se ajusten a lo
especificado en este manual, pueden causar exposición peligrosa a radiaciones.

13
 • IM 4000
• IM 5000
Notas para los usuarios de EE. UU. sobre requisitos de • IM 6000
la FCC
Instalación del núcleo de ferrita
Acople un núcleo de ferrita a los siguientes cables para evitar interferencias de RF:
Apartado 15 de la Reglamentación de FCC
• Un cable de interfaz Ethernet que se conecta al puerto del servidor de dispositivos opcional
Nota:
Este equipo se ha sometido a pruebas que acreditan su conformidad con los límites Apartado 68 de la Reglamentación FCC acerca de la Unidad de fax opcional
establecidos para los dispositivos digitales de clase B, según el apartado 15 de las normas
de la FCC. Estos límites están pensados para ofrecer una protección suficiente contra las 1. Este equipo cumple con el Apartado 68 de la Reglamentación FCC. En la tapa de este
interferencias perjudiciales en instalaciones residenciales. Este aparato genera, utiliza equipo se encuentra un adhesivo que contiene, entre otros, el número de registro FCC y
y puede emitir energía de radiofrecuencia y, si no se instala y se utiliza de conformidad número REN para este equipo. En caso de solicitarse, deberá proporcionar esta información
con las instrucciones, podría provocar interferencias perjudiciales para las comunicaciones a la compañía telefónica.
por radio. Sin embargo, no se garantiza la ausencia de interferencias en una instalación 2. Este equipo utiliza un conector RJ11C USOC.
concreta. Si el equipo provoca interferencias en la recepción de radio o televisión (que 3. La clavija y el enchufe utilizados para conectar este equipo al cableado y a la red telefónica
podrá determinar encendiendo y apagando el equipo), el usuario puede tratar de corregirlas deben cumplir con las reglas aplicables del Apartado 68 de la FCC y los requisitos adoptados
adoptando alguna de las siguientes medidas: por la ACTA. Con este producto se suministra un cable telefónico y un conector modular en
• Cambie la orientación o la posición de la antena de recepción. conformidad. Se ha diseñado para conectar un enchufe hembra modular compatible también
en conformidad. Consulte las instrucciones de instalación para más detalles.
• Aumente la distancia que separa el equipo y el receptor.
4. El REN se utiliza para determinar el número de dispositivos que pueden conectarse a la
• Conecte el equipo a una toma de un circuito diferente del circuito al que se conecta el línea telefónica. Un número excesivo de REN en una línea telefónica puede provocar que los
receptor. dispositivos no suenen ante una llamada entrante. En la mayoría de áreas, pero no en todas,
• Consulte con el distribuidor o con un técnico de radio o televisión experimentado. la suma de REN no debería superar cinco (5,0). Para asegurarse del número de dispositivos
que pueden conectarse a una línea, según lo determinado por los REN totales, contacte con
Precaución: la compañía de teléfonos local.
Los cambios o modificaciones que no sean aprobados expresamente por el responsable de 5. Si este equipo causara alguna anomalía en la línea de teléfono, la compañía telefónica le
conformidades pueden anular la autoridad del usuario para utilizar el equipo. notificaría previamente de un posible corte temporal del servicio. Si el aviso previo no pudiera
Este transmisor no debe colocarse ni utilizarse junto con otra antena o transmisor. realizarse, la compañía telefónica avisará al cliente lo antes posible. Asimismo, se le informará
Este equipo cumple con los límites de exposición a radiación FCC establecidos para controlar de su derecho a presentar una reclamación a la FCC si así lo cree necesario.
los entornos y cumple con las directrices sobre exposición a radiofrecuencia (RF) FCC. 6. La compañía telefónica puede realizar cambios en sus instalaciones, equipo, operaciones
Este equipo debe instalarse y utilizarse con el radiador a un mínimo de 20 cm de cualquier o procedimientos que podrían afectar al funcionamiento del equipo. Si esto ocurriera, la
persona (excluidas las extremidades: manos, muñecas, pies y tobillos). compañía telefónica le notificará de antemano para que pueda realizar las modificaciones
necesarias sin interrumpir el servicio.
Declaración de conformidad del proveedor 7. Si surge algún problema con el equipo, para información sobre la garantía o reparaciones,
Este dispositivo cumple con el apartado 15 de la Reglamentación FCC. contacte con el departamento de atención al cliente: Ricoh USA, Inc. Customer Support
El funcionamiento está sujeto a las dos condiciones siguientes: Department, 1-888-456-6457. Si este dispositivo causa problemas en su red telefónica, la
(1) Este dispositivo no puede provocar interferencias perjudiciales; y compañía telefónica podría solicitarle que desconectara el equipo hasta que se solucione
(2) Este dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia recibida, incluidas las interferencias el problema.
que afecten al funcionamiento del dispositivo. 8. En el caso de problemas de funcionamiento (atasco de documentos, atasco de copias,
indicadores de error de comunicación), consulte el manual proporcionado con la máquina
Responsable: Ricoh USA, Inc. para ver las instrucciones sobre cómo resolver el problema.
Dirección: 300 Eagleview Boulevard, Suite 200 Exton, PA 19341, EE. UU. 9. La conexión con el servicio de multillamadas está sujeta a las tarifas estatales. Contacte
Teléfono: 610-296-8000 con la comisión pública estatal, la comisión de servicio público o la comisión corporativa
Nombre de producto: Multi Function Peripheral (periférico multifuncional) para más información.
10. Si tiene un equipo de alarma cableado conectado a la línea telefónica en casa, asegúrese
Número de modelo:
de que la instalación de este equipo no desactiva su equipo de alarma. Si tiene alguna
• IM 2500, IM 2500A pregunta acerca de qué podría desactivar su equipo de alarma, consulte a la compañía
• IM 3000, IM 3000A telefónica o a un técnico de instalación cualificado.
• IM 3500, IM 3500A
14
AL PROGRAMAR NÚMEROS DE EMERGENCIA Y/O REALIZAR LLAMADAS DE • Éviter d'utiliser le téléphone (sauf s'il s'agit d'un appareil sans fil) pendant un orage
PRUEBA A NÚMEROS DE EMERGENCIA: électrique. Ceci peut présenter un risque de choc électrique causé par la foudre.
1. Permanezca en línea y explique brevemente al receptor el motivo de su llamada antes de • Ne pas utiliser l'appareil téléphonique pour signaler une fuite de gaz s'il est situé près de
colgar. la fuite.
2. Realice este tipo de actividades en horas de tarifa reducida, como a primera hora de la Conserver ces instructions.
mañana o al final de la tarde.

El acta de protección al consumidor (Telephone Consumer Protection Act) de 1991 declara Notas para los usuarios canadienses de dispositivos
ilegal el uso por parte de cualquier persona de un ordenador o cualquier otro dispositivo inalámbricos
electrónico, incluidas máquinas de fax, para enviar cualquier mensaje, a menos que dicho
mensaje contenga claramente en el margen superior o inferior de cada página transmitida o Este dispositivo cumple los estándares RSS exentos de licencia de la Industry Canada.
en la primera página de transmisión, la fecha y hora en la que se envió y una identificación El funcionamiento está sujeto a las dos condiciones siguientes:
de la empresa u otra entidad, u otro individuo que enviara el mensaje y el número de teléfono (1) Este dispositivo no causa interferencias y

Español
de la máquina emisora o la empresa, otra entidad o individuo. (El número de teléfono (2) este dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluidas aquellas que afecten al
proporcionado no puede ser un 900 ni ningún otro número para el que los cargos superen funcionamiento del dispositivo.
las cuotas de transmisión local o de larga distancia).
Para programar esta información en su máquina de FAX, debería completar los pasos Este equipo cumple con los límites de exposición a radiación IC establecidos para controlar
siguientes: Siga el procedimiento de programación de encabezado de fax en el capítulo entornos y cumple con RSS-102 de las normas de exposición a radiofrecuencia (FC) IC.
de programación de las instrucciones de uso para introducir el identificador de empresa y Este equipo debe instalarse y utilizarse con el radiador a un mínimo de 20 cm de cualquier
número telefónico del terminal o empresa. Esta información se transmitirá con su documento persona (excluidas las extremidades: manos, muñecas, pies y tobillos).
mediante la función de encabezado de fax. Además de dicha información, asegúrese de
programar la fecha y hora de la máquina.
Remarques à l'attention des utilisateurs canadiens d'appareils sans fil
Instrucciones de seguridad importantes para la Unidad Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
de fax opcional radio exempts de licence.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes :
Al utilizar su dispositivo telefónico, debe seguir siempre una serie de precauciones de (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
seguridad básicas para reducir el riesgo de incendio, descarga eléctrica y lesiones, entre las (2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
que se incluyen las siguientes: brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
• No utilice el producto cerca del agua, como por ejemplo, cerca de una bañera,
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements énoncées
lavamanos, fregadero o lavadero, ni en un sótano húmedo o cerca de una piscina.
pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles d'exposition aux fréquences
• Evite el uso del teléfono durante tormentas eléctricas. Corre riesgo de descarga eléctrica
radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l'IC. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant
causada por un rayo.
une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des
• No utilice el teléfono cerca de un escape de gas para informar del mismo. extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
Guarde estas instrucciones.

IMPORTANTES MESURES DE SÉCURITÉ de l'unité Fax

Certaines mesures de sécurité doivent être prises pendant l'utilisation de material
téléphonique afin de réduire les risques d'incendie, de choc électrique et de blessures. En
voici quelques-unes:
• Ne pas utiliser l'appareil près de l'eau, p.ex., près d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un évier
de cuisine, d'un bac à laver, dans un sous-sol humide ou près d'une piscine.

15
 Marcas comerciales
Notas para usuarios de la Unidad de fax opcional en Canadá SD es una marca comercial de SD-3C, LLC.

Este producto cumple las especificaciones técnicas aplicables del organismo de Innovación,
Otros nombres de productos mencionados en el presente documento lo son únicamente
Ciencias y Desarrollo económico de Canadá.
para su identificación y pueden ser marcas comerciales de sus respectivas empresas.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) indicates the maximum number of devices allowed to
Renunciamos a cualquier derecho sobre dichas marcas.
be connected to a telephone interface . La terminación de una interfaz puede contar de una
combinación de dispositivos sujetos únicamente al requisito de que la suma de los REN de
todos los dispositivos no supere cinco.

Remarques à l'attention des utilisateurs canadiens de l'unité Fax en option

Le présent produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques applicables d 'Innovation,
Sciences et Développement économique Canada.
L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de dispositifs
qui peuvent être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut
consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme
des IES de tous les dispositifs n'excède pas cinq.

16
 Português (Brasil)

Informações de 1. Manuais fornecidos com este equipamento

segurança
2. Informações de segurança relativas a este
equipamento

3. Outras informações relativas a este

equipamento

Para informações não encontradas

neste manual, consulte os manuais
on-line disponíveis em nosso site
(https://www.ricoh.com/) ou pelo
painel de controle.

Antes de usar o equipamento, leia atentamente este manual e

mantenha-o ao alcance para consultas futuras. Para um uso
seguro e correto, certifique-se de ler as Informações de
segurança neste manual antes de usar o equipamento.
ÍNDICE
Como ler os manuais................................................................................................................ 3

1. Manuais fornecidos com este equipamento

Manuais deste equipamento..................................................................................................... 4

2. Informações de segurança relativas a este equipamento

Significados dos símbolos de segurança usados neste equipamento.................................... 5
Significados das etiquetas de segurança................................................................................. 5
Precauções de segurança a serem seguidas.......................................................................... 6
Etiquetas de segurança neste equipamento............................................................................ 9

3. Outras informações relativas a este equipamento

Leis e regulamentações.......................................................................................................... 13
Requisitos legais..................................................................................................................... 13
Marcas comerciais.................................................................................................................. 16

2
Como ler os manuais Isenção de responsabilidade
Até a extensão máxima permitida pelas leis aplicáveis, o fabricante, sob nenhuma
Símbolos usados nos manuais circunstância, será responsável por danos de qualquer natureza decorrentes de falhas
neste equipamento, perdas de dados registrados ou do uso ou não uso deste produto e dos
Este manual usa os seguintes símbolos:
manuais de operação fornecidos com ele.
Certifique-se de sempre copiar ou fazer backups dos dados registrados neste equipamento.
Documentos ou dados podem ser apagados devido a erros operacionais ou falhas de
Indica pontos que necessitam de atenção ao utilizar as funções. Este símbolo indica pontos funcionamento do equipamento.
que podem resultar em incapacidade de uso do produto ou serviço ou resultar na perda de Sob nenhuma circunstância, o fabricante será responsável por documentos criados por você
dados caso as instruções não sejam cumpridas. Certifique-se de ler essas explicações. por meio deste equipamento ou por quaisquer resultados decorrentes dos dados executados
por você.

Indica explicações complementares sobre as funções do produto e instruções sobre como

solucionar erros. Notas

Português (Brasil)
O conteúdo deste manual está sujeito a alterações sem notificação prévia.
[]
O fabricante não será responsável por nenhum dano ou despesa resultante do uso de peças
Indica os nomes de teclas ou botões no produto ou visor.
não genuínas em seus produtos de escritório.
Para uma boa qualidade dos documentos, o fabricante recomenda a utilização de toner
(essencialmente Europa e Ásia), (essencialmente Europa) ou (essencialmente Ásia)
genuíno do fabricante.
(essencialmente América do Norte)
Algumas ilustrações neste manual podem ser um pouco diferentes no equipamento.
As diferenças nas funções dos modelos da região A e região B são indicadas por dois
Algumas opções podem não estar disponíveis em determinados países. Para obter mais
símbolos. Leia as informações indicadas pelo símbolo que corresponde à região do modelo
informações, entre em contato com o seu revendedor.
que você está usando. Para obter mais informações sobre que símbolo corresponde ao seu
Dependendo do país em que você estiver, algumas unidades podem ser opcionais. Para
modelo, consulte Specifications (Especificações).
obter mais informações, entre em contato com o seu revendedor.

3
 • Você pode baixar informações sobre a certificação do equipamento, que se baseia em
1. Manuais fornecidos com este equipamento um sistema de certificação de segurança de TI (deste ponto em diante, Certificação
CC), na URL a seguir.
U.S. Government Protection Profile for Hardcopy Devices Version 1.0 (IEEE Std
Manuais deste equipamento 2600.2™-2009)
Para administrador: https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/
As instruções de operação deste equipamento são fornecidas nos seguintes formatos: IM_2500_3500_4000_5000_6000/en/download_admin.html
Formato Manuais
Para usuário: https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/
IM_2500_3500_4000_5000_6000/en/download_user.html
Manual impresso • Informações de segurança Protection Profile for Hardcopy Devices 1.0 , 10 de setembro de 2015
CD-ROM • Guia de instalação do driver (HTML) Para administrador: https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/
im_2500_3500_4000_5000_6000/en/download_admin.html
Manuais exibidos no painel de controle • Guia do usuário (versão completa) (HTML)
Estas informações referem-se a como configurar o equipamento. Se você adquiriu um
Páginas da Web • Informações de segurança
equipamento com certificado CC, leia as informações do certificado antes de operar o
• Guia do usuário (versão selecionada) (PDF)
equipamento para fazer as definições corretas.
• Guia do usuário (versão completa) (HTML)
• Guia de instalação do driver (HTML)

Informações de segurança
Antes de usar este equipamento, certifique-se de ler a seção Informações de segurança
neste manual. Ela também descreve cada regulamentação e conformidade ambiental.
Guia do usuário (versão selecionada)
Em relação à utilização básica deste equipamento, às funções usadas com frequência,
à solução de problemas quando uma mensagem de erro é exibida, etc., são fornecidos
resumos de cada manual do usuário.
Guia do usuário (versão completa)
Descreve as configurações para utilização do equipamento, como usar as funções de cópia,
fax, impressão, digitalização ou para procedimentos de manutenção, especificações, soluções
de problemas, definições do sistema e funções de segurança.
Os manuais estão disponíveis em inglês, alemão, francês, italiano, espanhol, holandês e russo.
O Guia do usuário para outros idiomas além daqueles mostrados acima contém as informações
no Guia do usuário (versão selecionada) e Segurança.
Guia de instalação do driver
Descreve como instalar e configurar cada driver. Este manual está incluído no CD de
drivers.

• Antes de configurar as definições de segurança estendida e autenticação, consulte

Segurança.
• Usar a função de segurança do equipamento evita o uso não autorizado do equipamen-
to, adulteração de dados ou vazamento de informações. Para uma segurança aprimo-
rada, recomendamos primeiro realizar as seguintes definições:
• Instale o certificado de dispositivo.
• Habilitar a criptografia SSL (Secure Sockets Layer).
• Alterar o nome do usuário e a senha do administrador.
4
2. Informações de segurança relativas a este Significados das etiquetas de segurança
equipamento
AVISO
Significados dos símbolos de segurança
Indica situação potencialmente perigosa que poderá resultar em morte ou ferimentos graves
usados neste equipamento se as instruções não forem seguidas.

Proibição CUIDADO
Indica uma situação potencialmente perigosa que poderá resultar em ferimentos menores
ou moderados ou danos materiais se as instruções não forem seguidas.
Cuidado

Mantenha longe do alcance de crianças

Português (Brasil)
Não toque

Não jogue no fogo

Não use aspirador de pó

Cuidado, risco de prender as mãos ou os

braços

Cuidado, superfície quente

5
Precauções de segurança a serem seguidas Requisitos para usar cabos de alimentação e tomadas

Requisitos para desembalar produtos

AVISO
• Evite as seguintes ações para que não ocorra incêndio ou choque elétrico:
AVISO • Usar uma tensão ou frequência diferente daquela indicada nas
especificações
• As seguintes explicações se referem às mensagens de aviso na • Usar adaptadores para várias tomadas
embalagem plástica deste produto: • Usar extensões elétricas
• Não deixe materiais feitos de polietileno (bolsas, etc.) fornecidos com • Tocar os pinos do conector do cabo de alimentação com um objeto
este equipamento próximos de bebês e crianças pequenas. Poderá metálico
ocorrer sufocamento se materiais de polietileno entrarem em contato
• Evite as seguintes ações nos cabos de alimentação para que não ocorra
com a boca ou nariz.
incêndio ou choque elétrico:
• Danificá-los
• Enrolá-los
Requisitos para alocar e instalar equipamentos • Modificá-los
• Colocar objetos pesados sobre eles
• Puxá-los com força
• Dobrá-los com força
AVISO • Não manuseie o conector do cabo de alimentação com as mãos molhadas.
Isso pode causar choque elétrico.
• Evite as ações a seguir nas proximidades ou dentro deste equipamento
para evitar incêndio ou choque elétrico: • O(s) cabo(s) de alimentação fornecido(s) destina(m)-se exclusivamente ao
• Usar sprays inflamáveis, solventes e/ou produtos semelhantes uso com este equipamento. Não é possível usá-lo(s) em outros aparelhos
• Colocar sobre o equipamento sprays inflamáveis, solventes e/ou além deste equipamento. Além disso, não use cabos de alimentação
produtos semelhantes diferentes daqueles fornecidos com este equipamento. Caso contrário,
• Colocar sobre o equipamento pequenos objetos metálicos ou poderá ocorrer incêndio ou choque eléctrico.
recipientes contendo líquidos
• Para evitar incêndio ou choque elétrico, retire o conector e o cabo
de alimentação da tomada na parede pelo menos uma vez por ano e
inspecione-os. Se alguma das condições abaixo estiver ocorrendo, não

CUIDADO
use o conector e o cabo de alimentação continuamente e consulte seu
revendedor ou representante de serviços técnicos.
• A tomada apresenta sinais de que está queimada
• Não deixe o equipamento em um ambiente úmido ou empoeirado. Caso • Os pinos da tomada estão deformados
contrário, poderá ocorrer incêndio ou choque eléctrico. • Os fios internos do cabo de alimentação estão expostos ou partidos
• O revestimento do cabo de alimentação está rachado, amassado ou
• Não coloque o equipamento em uma superfície instável ou inclinada. Caso danificado
contrário, o equipamento poderá cair e causar lesões. • Quando o cabo de alimentação é dobrado, o equipamento desliga e liga
• Parte do cabo de alimentação esquenta
• Não obstrua as aberturas do equipamento. Caso contrário, poderá ocorrer
incêndio, uma vez que os componentes internos superaquecem.

CUIDADO
• Não coloque objetos pesados em cima do equipamento. Caso contrário, o
equipamento poderá cair e causar lesões.

• Se você usar este equipamento de modo contínuo em um ambiente estreito • Ao desconectar o cabo de alimentação da tomada na parede, puxe sempre
ou com pouca ventilação por períodos prolongados ou imprimir grandes pela tomada, e não pelo cabo. Não aplique força ao puxar o cabo de
alimentação. Caso contrário, o cabo de alimentação poderá ser danificado,
volumes de materiais, certifique-se de ventilar o ambiente adequadamente.
resultando, possivelmente, em fogo ou choque elétrico.
6
 CUIDADO AVISO
• Certifique-se de inserir totalmente a tomada do cabo de alimentação na tomada • Se o equipamento cair ou uma tampa ou outra parte estiver danificada,
da parede. Além disso, não force o conector para inseri-lo em uma tomada desligue a energia imediatamente. Depois de desconectar o conector do
de parede solta e instável; isso poderá causar mau contato. Isso resulta em cabo de alimentação da tomada na parede, entre em contato com o seu
aquecimento. representante de serviços técnicos. Usar o equipamento continuamente
pode resultar em fogo ou choque elétrico.
• Não se esqueça de desconectar a tomada do cabo retirando-a da tomada
na parede e de limpar os pinos e a área ao redor dos pinos pelo menos
uma vez por ano. O acúmulo de sujeira na tomada constitui risco de
incêndio. Requisitos para mudar equipamentos de lugar
• Se for necessário deixar o equipamento ocioso por um longo período, por
exemplo, durante férias, desconecte a tomada do cabo de força da tomada
na parede para fins de segurança. CUIDADO
• Ao fazer manutenção no equipamento, desconecte o cabo de alimentação
• Ao mover o equipamento, não segure-o pelo painel de controle. Isso pode
da tomada na parede para fins de segurança.
danificar o painel de controle e resultar em mau funcionamento ou causar
ferimentos.
• Fonte de alimentação

Português (Brasil)
120-127 V, 12 A ou mais, 60 Hz • Ao mover o equipamento com a unidade de bandeja de papel opcional
Certifique-se de conectar o cabo de alimentação a uma fonte de ainda conectada, não force a parte superior da unidade principal. Caso
alimentação, conforme indicado acima. contrário, a unidade principal pode desencaixar da bandeja de papel
opcional, podendo causar ferimentos.

Requisitos durante emergências • Se o equipamento precisar ser carregado ou movido para outro andar,
entre em contato com seu representante de serviços técnicos. A queda do
equipamento pode resultar em ferimentos ou mau funcionamento.

• Depois de deslocar o equipamento, use a trava dos rodízios para fixá-lo.

AVISO Caso contrário, o equipamento poderá se mover ou tombar, causando
ferimentos.
• Não toque neste equipamento se estiverem ocorrendo relâmpagos nas
proximidades. Caso contrário, pode ocorrer choque elétrico. • Ao mover o equipamento, certifique-se de desconectar o cabo de
alimentação da tomada na parede e certifique-se de que outros frio e
• Certifique-se de instalar o equipamento o mais próximo possível de uma cabos de conexão tenham sido removidos. Caso contrário, o cabo de
tomada na parede para facilitar a desconexão do cabo de alimentação em alimentação ficará danificado, resultando possivelmente em fogo ou
caso de emergência. choque elétrico.

• Se o equipamento apresentar comportamento anormal, conforme descrito

a seguir, desligue a alimentação imediatamente. Depois de desligar a
alimentação, desconecte o conector do cabo de alimentação da tomada na
parede e entre em contato com seu representante de serviços técnicos e
relate o problema. O uso contínuo do cabo de alimentação pode resultar em
fogo ou choque elétrico.
• O equipamento está emitindo fumaça
• O equipamento está emitindo odores
• Objetos de metal ou outros objetos estranhos caíram dentro do
equipamento
• Água ou outros líquidos caíram dentro do equipamento

7
Requisitos para usar o equipamento CUIDADO
• Existem partes com temperaturas muito altas dentro do equipamento. Ao
remover papel atolado, não toque em áreas diferentes daquelas especificadas
CUIDADO neste manual. Tocar nessas áreas pode causar queimaduras.

• Não olhe diretamente para a fonte de luz. Isso poderá causar ferimentos • Existem partes no interior do equipamento que podem quebrar ao serem
aos seus olhos. tocadas. Ao remover papel atolado, não toque nos conectores, sensores e
LEDs especificados na seção "Solução de problemas". Tocar nessas partes
• Não use folhas de papel grampeadas, folha de alumínio, papel carbono ou poderá resultar em mau funcionamento.
outro tipo de papel condutor. Caso contrário, há risco de incêndio.
• Embora o equipamento seja projetado de modo que um dispositivo de
• Mantenha cartões SD e dispositivos USB de memória flash fora do alcance segurança proteja os usuários contra ferimentos, tome cuidado para não tocar
de crianças. Se uma criança engolir acidentalmente um cartão SD ou um nos rolos durante o funcionamento. Os rolos podem ser pressionados uns
dispositivo USB de memória flash, procure um médico imediatamente. contra os outros antes de pararem completamente.

• Ao abaixar o ADF, não coloque as mãos nas dobradiças nem no vidro • Entre em contato com seu representante de serviços técnicos para fazer
de exposição. Suas mãos ou dedos poderão ficar presos, resultando em a limpeza do interior do equipamento. Se o pó acumulado no interior do
ferimentos. equipamento não for limpo regularmente, há risco de incêndio e mau
funcionamento.
• Se a bandejas de papel inferior estiver instalada, não remova mais de uma
bandeja de cada vez. Pressionar a superfície superior do equipamento com • Ao substituir papel ou remover papel atolado, tenha cuidado para não prender
força excessiva poderá resultar em seu tombamento e causar lesões. os dedos nem feri-los.

• Mantenha suas mãos afastadas da abertura de saída de papel da bandeja

de folhetos do finalizador quando retirá-lo ou coloca-lo na unidade de
Requisitos para manusear a parte interna do equipamento grampeamento do finalizador. Seus dedos poderão ficar presos no vão do
equipamento, resultando em ferimentos.

AVISO Requisitos para manusear suprimentos

• Não retire tampas ou parafusos diferentes daqueles explicitamente
especificados neste manual. Existem componentes de alta tensão no

AVISO
interior do equipamento que podem causar choque elétrico. Além disso, há
componentes a laser dentro do equipamento que podem causar cegueira.
Entre em contato com seu representante comercial ou técnico se algum
• Não armazene toner (novo ou usado) ou recipientes contendo toner
dos componentes internos do equipamento precisar de manutenção, ajuste em locais com chama aberta. O toner poderá inflamar e resultar em
ou reparo. queimaduras ou incêndio.
• Não desmonte nem modifique este equipamento. Caso contrário,
poderá ocorrer incêndio e choque eléctrico. Além disso, a exposição aos • Não descarte os itens abaixo em fogo. O toner inflamará em contato com
componentes do laser no interior deste equipamento pode causar cegueira. chama aberta, causando risco de queimaduras.
• Toner (novo ou usado)
• Recipientes de toner ainda contendo toner
• Partes em contato com toner

• Não use aspirador de pó em toner derramado (incluindo toner usado). O

toner aspirado pode inflamar ou causar explosão devido às faíscas que
podem ocorrer dentro do aspirador de pó. No entanto, você pode usar
um aspirador de pó industrial específico para toner. Quando houver toner
derramado, remova-o usando um pano úmido, para não espalhá-lo.

8
 Etiquetas de segurança neste equipamento
CUIDADO
• Ao abrir recipientes de toner contendo toner, não force, amasse ou aperte
o recipiente. Derramamentos de toner podem causar ingestão acidental ou
Posições das etiquetas de AVISO e CUIDADO
sujar roupas, mãos e o piso.
Este equipamento tem etiquetas de AVISO e CUIDADO nas posições indicadas abaixo.
• Não deixe os itens a seguir em um local onde crianças possam alcançá- Por questões de segurança, siga as instruções e manuseie o equipamento conforme indicado.
los:
• Toner (novo ou usado)
• Recipientes de toner ainda contendo toner
• Partes em contato com toner

• Ao remover papel atolado, reabastecer ou trocar o toner (novo ou usado),

não inale toner.

• Se ocorrerem as seguintes situações ao manipular toner, primeiro

receba as medidas de emergência e, em seguida, procure um médico, se
necessário.
• Se você inalar toner, faça gargarejo com uma grande quantidade de

Português (Brasil)
água e dirija-se a um local com ar fresco.
• Se você ingerir toner, dilua os conteúdo gástrico com uma grande
quantidade de água.
• Em caso de contato de toner com os olhos, lave-os com uma grande
quantidade de água.

• Ao remover papel atolado, reabastecer ou trocar toner (novo ou usado),

evite o contato do pó de toner com a pele ou roupas.

• Se o toner (novo ou usado) entrar em contato com a pele ou roupas e

manchá-las, sigas estas instruções:
Bandejas de papel inferiores/ Não toque nas partes indicadas pelas
• Se o toner entrar em contato com sua pele, lave a área afetada com Bandeja 3 (LCT) etiquetas. O interior do equipamento
muita água e sabão.
pode ficar muito quente. Tenha
• Se o toner entrar em contato com suas roupas, lave a área manchada
cuidado ao remover papel atolado.
com água fria. Aquecer a área manchada com água quente fará com
que o toner penetre no tecido, tornando impossível a remoção da
mancha.

• Ao trocar um recipiente contendo toner (mesmo toner usado) ou itens

de consumo com toner, tenha cuidado para que o toner não esparrame.
Depois de remover itens de consumo usados e fechar a tampa do
recipiente (se aplicável), coloque-os em uma sacola.
Bandeja de papel inferior

9
O interior do equipamento pode ficar muito quente. Não toque nas peças com etiqueta. Caso Finalizador SR260 ou Finalizador de folhetos SR270
contrário, você pode sofrer lesões. O interior do equipamento
pode ficar muito quente. Não
toque nas peças indicadas
pela etiqueta ( ). Caso
contrário, você pode sofrer
lesões.

Finalizador Finalizador de
SR3260 folhetos SR3270

Durante o
funcionamento,
os rolos de
transporte do
papel giram.
Tenha cuidado
para não tocar
nos rolos durante
a operação.
Caso contrário,
você pode sofrer
lesões. O interior do equipamento
pode ficar muito quente.
Não toque nas peças
indicadas pela etiqueta
( ). Caso contrário, você
pode sofrer lesões.

Mantenha as mãos afastadas da bandeja

do finalizador de folhetos ao empurrar ou
puxar a unidade de grampeamento do
finalizador ou retirar papel atolado. Caso
contrário, você poderá prender os dedos.

10
Finalizador SR3280 ou Finalizador de folhetos SR3290 Finalizador interno SR3300

Durante o funcionamento,
os rolos de transporte do
papel giram. Tenha cuidado
para não tocar nos rolos
durante a operação. Caso
contrário, você pode sofrer O interior do equipamento pode
lesões. O interior do ficar muito quente. Não toque
equipamento pode nas peças indicadas pela
ficar muito quente. etiqueta ( ). Caso contrário,
Não toque nas peças você pode sofrer lesões.
indicadas pela etiqueta
( ). Caso contrário,

Português (Brasil)
você pode sofrer
lesões.

Mantenha as mãos afastadas da bandeja do

Tome cuidado com as partes
finalizador de folhetos ao empurrar ou puxar
protuberantes na tampa frontal ao
a unidade de grampeamento do finalizador ou
substituir o cartucho na unidade
retirar papel atolado. Caso contrário, você poderá
de grampeamento na lombada ou
prender os dedos.
ao limpar uma obstrução de papel
na unidade de grampeamento na
lombada.

11
ARDF Bandeja de alta capacidade (LCT)

Não coloque a mão sob a placa inferior.

Caso contrário, você poderá prender os
dedos no vão e machucá-los.

Símbolos do botão liga/desliga

Os significados dos símbolos dos botões deste equipamento são os seguintes:
O cartucho pode aquecer durante o uso. Não toque no
: LIGADO
cartucho imediatamente; ligue o equipamento principal e
aguarde 20 minutos ou mais antes de substituí-lo. : EM ESPERA

12
3. Outras informações relativas a este equipamento Requisitos legais

Leis e regulamentações Segurança relacionada a laser

Cópia e impressão proibidas Para IM 2500/2500A/3000/3000A/3500/3500A

Regulamentações do CDRH (Center for Devices and Radiological Health, Centro
Não copie nem imprima nenhum item para o qual a reprodução seja proibida por lei.
para Dispositivos e Saúde Radiológica)
A cópia ou impressão dos seguintes itens é geralmente proibida pelas leis locais:
Este equipamento atende aos requisitos do CFR 21, Subcapítulo J, para produto a laser
cédulas bancárias, selos fiscais, títulos, ações, cheques bancários, passaportes e carteiras
da classe I. Este equipamento contém um diodo laser AlGaInP e comprimento de onda de
de motorista.
660 nanômetros. O ângulo de divergência do feixe é de 21 graus (no mínimo) e 29 graus
A lista acima serve apenas como orientação, pois não é completa. Não assumimos
(no máximo) no sentido vertical e 7 graus (no mínimo) e 11 graus (no máximo) no sentido
responsabilidade por sua totalidade e precisão de informações. Se você tiver dúvidas sobre
horizontal, e os feixes de laser são gerados em onda contínua (Continuous Wave ou CW). A
a legalidade de cópias ou impressões de determinados itens, consulte seu advogado.
potência máxima de saída da fonte de luz é de 10 miliwatts.
Cuidado

Português (Brasil)
O uso de controles, ajustes ou procedimentos diferentes daqueles especificados neste
manual pode resultar em exposição perigosa à radiação.

Para IM 4000/5000/6000
Regulamentações do CDRH (Center for Devices and Radiological Health, Centro
para Dispositivos e Saúde Radiológica)
Este equipamento atende aos requisitos do CFR 21, Subcapítulo J, para produto a laser da
classe I. Este equipamento contém dois diodos laser AlGaInP e comprimento de onda de 660
nanômetros para cada emissor. O ângulo de divergência do feixe é de 15 graus (no mínimo)
e 25 graus (no máximo) no sentido vertical e 7 graus (no mínimo) e 13 graus (no máximo) no
sentido horizontal, e os feixes de laser são gerados em onda contínua (Continuous Wave ou
CW). A potência máxima de saída da fonte de luz é de 15 miliwatts.
Cuidado
O uso de controles, ajustes ou procedimentos diferentes daqueles especificados neste
manual pode resultar em exposição perigosa à radiação.

13
 • IM 4000
Notas aos usuários nos EUA sobre os requisitos da FCC • IM 5000
• IM 6000

Parte 15 das normas FCC Instalar o núcleo de ferrite

Nota: Coloque um núcleo de ferrite nos seguintes cabos para evitar interferência de RF:
Este equipamento foi testado e considerado em conformidade com os limites para um • Um cabo de interface de Ethernet conectado à porta Device Server Option
dispositivo digital Classe B, nos termos da Parte 15 das normas da FCC. Esses limites
são formulados para fornecer proteção razoável contra interferência em uma instalação Parte 68 das Regras da FCC para unidade de fax opcional
residencial. Este equipamento gera, usa e pode irradiar energia de radiofrequência e, se não
for instalado e usado de acordo com as instruções, poderá causar interferência prejudicial 1. Este equipamento está em conformidade com a Parte 68 das Regras da FCC. Há uma etiqueta na
a comunicações de rádio. No entanto, não há garantia de que tal interferência não ocorrerá tampa deste equipamento que contém, entre outras informações, o número de registro da FCC e o
em uma instalação em particular. Se este equipamento provocar interferência prejudicial à número de equivalência de toque (REN, ringer equivalence number) deste equipamento. Caso sejam
recepção de rádio ou televisão, o que pode ser determinado desligando o equipamento e solicitadas, estas informações devem ser fornecidas à empresa de telefonia.
religando-o, recomendamos que o usuário tente corrigir a interferência através de uma ou 2. Este equipamento usa uma entrada RJ11C USOC.
mais das seguintes medidas: 3. A tomada e o conector usados para ligar este equipamento aos cabos e à rede telefônica das
• Reoriente ou reposicione a antena receptora. instalações devem estar em conformidade com as normas aplicáveis da Parte 68 da FCC e com
• Aumente a distância entre o equipamento e o receptor. os requisitos adotados pelo ACTA. Um cabo telefônico e uma tomada modular compatíveis são
• Conecte o equipamento a uma tomada em um circuito diferente daquele ao qual o fornecidos com este produto. Ambos foram projetados para serem ligados a um conector modular
receptor está conectado. também compatível. Consulte as instruções de instalação para obter informações.
• Consulte seu representante ou um técnico especializado em rádio/TV para obter ajuda. 4. O REN é utilizado para determinar o número de equipamentos que podem ser conectados a uma
linha telefônica. RENs excessivos em uma linha telefônica podem fazer com que os equipamentos não
Cuidado:
toquem ao receberem uma chamada. Na maior parte das áreas, a soma dos RENs não deve exceder
Alterações ou modificações não aprovadas expressamente pela parte responsável pela cinco (5,0). Para ter a certeza do número de equipamentos que podem ser conectados a uma linha,
conformidade podem anular a autoridade do usuário em operar o equipamento. conforme determinado pelo total de RENs, entre em contato com a empresa telefônica local.
Esse transmissor não deve ser colocado nem operado junto de outra antena ou transmissor. 5. Se este equipamento provocar danos à rede telefônica, a empresa de telefonia irá notificá-lo
Este equipamento está em conformidade com os limites de exposição à radiação previamente de que talvez seja necessário interromper temporariamente o serviço. No entanto, se a
estabelecidos pela FCC para um ambiente não controlado e atende às Diretrizes de notificação prévia não for viável, a empresa de telefonia notificará o cliente assim que possível Além
exposição à radiofrequência. Este equipamento deve ser instalado e operado mantendo o disso, você será informado do seu direito de apresentar queixa à FCC caso considere necessário.
irradiador a pelo menos 20 cm ou mais do corpo da pessoa (exceto extremidades: mãos, 6. A empresa telefônica pode fazer alterações em suas instalações, equipamentos, operações ou
punhos, pés e tornozelos). procedimentos, que poderão afetar o funcionamento do equipamento. Se isso acontecer, a empresa
de telefonia fornecerá uma notificação prévia para que você faça as modificações necessárias e o
Declaração de Conformidade do Fornecedor
serviço não seja interrompido.
Este equipamento cumpre a Parte 15 dos Regulamentos da FCC.
7. Se este equipamento apresentar problemas, entre em contato com o Departamento de Suporte ao
A operação está sujeita às duas condições a seguir:
(1) Este equipamento não pode provocar interferência prejudicial e Cliente da Ricoh USA, Inc. em 1-888-456-6457 para obter informações sobre reparo ou garantia. Se
(2) Este equipamento deve aceitar qualquer interferência recebida, incluindo interferência este equipamento provocar problemas na sua linha telefônica, a empresa telefônica poderá solicitar
que possa provocar funcionamento não desejado. que você o desligue até o problema ser resolvido.
Parte responsável: Ricoh USA, Inc. 8. Na eventualidade de ocorrerem problemas operacionais (atolamento de documentos, atolamento de
Endereço: 300 Eagleview Boulevard, Suite 200 Exton, PA 19341, U.S.A. cópias, indicação de erro de comunicação), consulte o manual fornecido com este equipamento para
Telefone: 610-296-8000 obter instruções sobre como solucionar o problema.
Nome do produto: Periférico multifuncional 9. A conexão com o serviço telefônico de terceiros está sujeita a tarifas. Para obter mais informações,
Número do modelo: entre em contato com as entidades competentes.
• IM 2500, IM 2500A 10. Se houver em sua casa dispositivos de alarme conectados à linha telefônica, certifique-se de que a
• IM 3000, IM 3000A instalação deste equipamento não desativa o dispositivo de alarme. Se você tiver dúvidas sobre o que
• IM 3500, IM 3500A pode desativar dispositivos de alarme, consulte a sua empresa de telefonia ou um técnico qualificado.
14
AO PROGRAMAR NÚMEROS DE EMERGÊNCIA E/OU FAZER CHAMADAS DE TESTE
PARA NÚMEROS DE EMERGÊNCIA: Observações para usuários canadenses de dispositivos
1. Permaneça na linha e explique resumidamente ao operador a razão da chamada antes
de desligar. sem fio
2. Siga esses procedimentos fora do horário de pico, como no início da manhã ou no fim da
noite. Este equipamento está em conformidade com os padrões RSS isentos de licença da
indústria do Canadá.
A lei de proteção ao consumidor de telefonia de 1991 torna ilegal para qualquer pessoa A operação está sujeita às duas condições a seguir:
utilizar um computador ou outro dispositivo eletrônico, incluindo aparelhos de fax, para (1) Este equipamento não pode causar interferência e
enviar qualquer mensagem, a menos que claramente contenha em uma margem na parte (2) Este dispositivo deve aceitar qualquer interferência, incluindo interferência que possa
superior ou inferior de cada página transmitida ou na primeira página da transmissão a data
causar operação não desejada do dispositivo.
e hora do envio e uma identificação da empresa ou da outra entidade ou do outro indivíduo
que está fazendo o envio e o número de telefone do equipamento ou da empresa ou da outra
entidade ou do indivíduo que está fazendo o envio. (O número de telefone fornecido não Este equipamento está em conformidade com os limites de exposição à radiação
pode ser um número de emergência ou um número para o qual as tarifas excedam ao valor estabelecidos pela IC para um ambiente não controlado e atende ao RSS-102 das normas
das tarifas de transmissão local ou de longa distância.) de exposição à radiofrequência (RF)estabelecidas pela IC. Este equipamento deve ser
Para programar essas informações em seu aparelho de fax, você deverá realizar as seguintes instalado e operado mantendo o irradiador a pelo menos 20 cm ou mais do corpo da pessoa
etapas: siga o procedimento de programação de CABEÇALHO DE FAX no capítulo sobre (exceto extremidades: mãos, punhos, pés e tornozelos).
programação nas instruções operacionais para inserir a identificação da empresa e o

Português (Brasil)
número de telefone do terminal ou da empresa. Essas informações são transmitidas com
o documento pelo recurso CABEÇALHO DE FAX. Além das informações, certifique-se de Remarques à l'attention des utilisateurs canadiens d'appareils sans fil
programar a data e hora no equipamento.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
radio exempts de licence.
Informações de segurança importantes relativas à unidade L’exploitation est autorisee aux deux conditions suivantes :
de fax opcional (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
Ao usar seu equipamento telefônico, precauções básicas de segurança devem ser sempre brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
seguidas para reduzir o risco de incêndio, choque elétrico e ferimentos pessoais, incluindo:
• Não use este produto perto de água, por exemplo, banheira, pia, bancada de cozinha,
tanque de roupa, porão úmido ou piscina. Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements énoncées
pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles d'exposition aux fréquences
• Evite usar o telefone durante chuvas com relâmpagos. Há um risco remoto de choque
elétrico causado pelos raios. radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l'IC. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant
• Não utilize o telefone perto de um local onde haja vazamento de gás para relatar esse une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l'exception des
vazamento. extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
Guarde essas instruções.

IMPORTANTES MESURES DE SÉCURITÉ de l'unité Fax

Certaines mesures de sécurité doivent être prises pendant l'utilisation de material
téléphonique afin de réduire les risques d'incendie, de choc électrique et de blessures. En
voici quelques-unes:
• Ne pas utiliser l'appareil près de l'eau, p.ex., près d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un évier
de cuisine, d'un bac à laver, dans un sous-sol humide ou près d'une piscine.
• Éviter d'utiliser le téléphone (sauf s'il s'agit d'un appareil sans fil) pendant un orage
électrique. Ceci peut présenter un risque de choc électrique causé par la foudre.
• Ne pas utiliser l'appareil téléphonique pour signaler une fuite de gaz s'il est situé près de la fuite.
Conserver ces instructions.
15
 Marcas comerciais
Notas para usuários canadenses da unidade de fax opcional
SD é marca comercial da SD-3C, LLC.

Este produto atende às especificações técnicas aplicáveis de inovação, ciência e

Os outros nomes de produtos aqui mencionados têm exclusivamente fins de identificação e
desenvolvimento econômico do Canadá.
podem ser marcas comerciais de suas respectivas empresas. Isentamo-nos de quaisquer
O número de equivalência de toque (REN) indica o número máximo de equipamentos que
direitos sobre essas marcas.
podem ser conectados a uma interface telefônica. A terminação de uma interface pode
consistir em qualquer combinação de dispositivos, sujeita apenas ao requisito de que a
soma dos RENs de todos os equipamentos não exceda a cinco.

Remarques à l’attention des utilisateurs canadiens de l’unité Fax

Le présent produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques applicables d'Innovation,
Sciences et Développement économique Canada.
L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de dispositifs
qui peuvent être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut
consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme
des IES de tous les dispositifs n'excède pas cinq.

Para consultas, visite: www.anatel.gov.br

Este equipamento não tem direito à proteção contra interferência prejudicial e não pode
causar interferência
em sistemas devidamente autorizados.

16
 Français

Consignes de 1. Manuels fournis avec cet appareil

sécurité
2. Informations de sécurité de cet appareil

3. Autres informations sur cet appareil

Pour les informations qui ne figurent pas

dans ce manuel, veuillez consulter les
manuels disponibles en ligne sur notre
site Internet (https://www.ricoh.com/) ou
sur le panneau de commande.

Veuillez lire attentivement ce manuel avant d'utiliser l'appareil

et conservez-le à portée de main pour référence ultérieure.
Pour une utilisation correcte et en toute sécurité, veillez à bien
lire les Consignes de sécurité avant d'utiliser l'appareil.
SOMMAIRE
Comment lire les manuels........................................................................................................ 3

1. Manuels fournis avec cet appareil

Manuels pour cet appareil........................................................................................................ 4

2. Informations de sécurité de cet appareil

Les définitions des symboles de sécurité utilisés avec cet appareil........................................ 5
Les définitions des étiquettes de sécurité................................................................................ 5
Consignes de sécurité à observer............................................................................................ 6
Étiquettes de sécurité de cet appareil...................................................................................... 9

3. Autres informations sur cet appareil

Lois et réglementations........................................................................................................... 13
Obligations légales................................................................................................................. 13
Marques commerciales.......................................................................................................... 16

2
Comment lire les manuels Avis de non-responsabilité
Dans le cadre prévu par la loi, en aucun cas le fabricant ne peut être tenu responsable de tout
Symboles utilisés dans les manuels dommage pouvant découler de pannes de cet appareil, de pertes de données enregistrées,
ou de l'utilisation ou de la non utilisation de ce produit et des manuels utilisateurs fournis
Le présent manuel utilise les symboles suivants :
avec celui-ci.
Assurez-vous d'avoir une copie ou une sauvegarde des données enregistrées sur l'appareil.
Il est possible que des documents ou des données soient effacés en raison d'erreurs
Indique les points à observer lors de l'utilisation des fonctions. Ce symbole indique les points d'utilisation ou de dysfonctionnements de l'appareil.
qui pourraient rendre le produit ou le service inutilisable ou entraîner une perte de données En aucun cas le fabricant ne pourrait être tenu responsable des documents que vous aurez
si les instructions ne sont pas suivies. Veillez à lire attentivement ces explications. créés à l'aide de cet appareil ou des résultats des données exécutées par vos soins.

Fournit des explications supplémentaires sur les fonctions de l'appareil et les instructions Remarques
pour éliminer les erreurs commises par l'utilisateur.
Le contenu de ce manuel peut faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis.
Le fabricant ne peut être tenu pour responsable des dommages ou frais résultant de
[]
l'utilisation de pièces autres que les pièces du fabricant pour vos appareils bureautiques.
Indique les noms des touches ou des boutons sur l'appareil ou l'écran.
Pour des documents de bonne qualité, le fournisseur recommande l'utilisation de son toner.
Certaines illustrations de ce manuel peuvent présenter de légères différences avec votre
(Principalement l'Europe et l'Asie), (Principalement l'Europe), ou (Principalement l'Asie)

Français
appareil.
(principalement l'Amérique du Nord)
Certaines options peuvent ne pas être disponibles dans certains pays. Pour plus de détails,
Les fonctions qui diffèrent entre les modèles de la région A et de la région B sont indiquées
veuillez contacter votre distributeur local.
par deux symboles. Lisez les informations indiquées par le symbole correspondant à la
En fonction de votre pays, certaines unités peuvent être en option. Pour plus de détails,
région du modèle utilisé. Pour plus d'informations sur la correspondance des symboles avec
veuillez contacter votre distributeur local.
le modèle que vous utilisez, reportez-vous à Caractéristiques.

3
 • Vous pouvez télécharger des informations relatives à la certification de l'appareil,
1. Manuels fournis avec cet appareil évaluée dans le cadre d'un système de certification de sécurité informatique (la
certification Critères Communs) à partir des URL ci-dessous.
Profil de protection du gouvernement des États-Unis pour les appareils de copie
Manuels pour cet appareil papier Version 1.0 (norme IEEE 2600.2™-2009)
Pour administrateur : https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/
Les manuels utilisateur de cet appareil se déclinent selon les formats ci-après : IM_2500_3500_4000_5000_6000/en/download_admin.html
Format Manuels
Pour utilisateur : https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/
IM_2500_3500_4000_5000_6000/en/download_user.html
Manuel papier • Consignes de sécurité Profil de protection pour les appareils de copie papier 1.0 datant du 10
CD-ROM • Manuel d'installation du pilote (HTML) septembre 2015
Pour administrateur : https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/
Manuels affichés sur le panneau de • Guide utilisateur (version intégrale) (HTML)
im_2500_3500_4000_5000_6000/en/download_admin.html
commande
Pages Web • Consignes de sécurité Ces informations expliquent comment installer l'appareil. Si vous avez fait l'acquisition
• Guide utilisateur (version condensée) (PDF) d'un appareil certifié Critères Communs, assurez-vous de consulter ces informations
• Guide utilisateur (version intégrale) (HTML) avant d'utiliser l'appareil de manière à définir les paramètres adaptés au préalable.
• Manuel d'installation du pilote (HTML)

Consignes de sécurité
Avant d'utiliser cet appareil, veillez à lire la section de ce manuel intitulée Consignes
de sécurité. Elle décrit également chaque réglementation et conformité liée à
l'environnement.
Guide utilisateur (version condensée)
Pour chaque guide utilisateur, des résumés concernant le fonctionnement de base
de l'appareil, la foire aux questions, la procédure de dépannage à effectuer lorsqu'un
message d'erreur apparaît, etc., sont fournis.
Guide utilisateur (version intégrale)
Décrit la configuration nécessaire pour utiliser l'appareil, explique comment utiliser
les fonctions de copie, de télécopie, d'impression, de numérisation, ainsi que la
maintenance, les spécifications, le dépannage, les paramètres système et les fonctions
de sécurité.
Les manuels sont disponibles en anglais, allemand, français, italien, espagnol,
néerlandais et russe.
Pour les autres langues que celles mentionnées ci-dessus, les informations se trouvent
dans les manuels Guide utilisateur (version condensée) et Sécurité.
Manuel d'installation du pilote
Explique comment installer et configurer chaque pilote. Ce manuel est inclus sur le CD des pilotes.

• Avant de configurer les paramètres d'authentification et de sécurité avancés, reportez-

vous à Sécurité.
• La fonction de sécurité de l'appareil empêche les utilisations non autorisées de la
machine, la falsification de données ou la fuite d'informations. Pour une sécurité
optimale, nous vous recommandons de définir tout d'abord les paramètres suivants :
• Installez le certificat de périphérique.
• Activez le cryptage SSL (Secure Sockets Layer).
• Modifiez le nom utilisateur et le mot de passe de l'administrateur.
4
2. Informations de sécurité de cet appareil Les définitions des étiquettes de sécurité

Les définitions des symboles de sécurité

AVERTISSEMENT
utilisés avec cet appareil
Indique une situation qui peut s’avérer dangereuse et causer des blessures graves, voire
mortelles, si les instructions ne sont pas respectées.
Interdiction

ATTENTION
Attention Indique une situation qui peut s’avérer dangereuse et causer des blessures superficielles ou
des dégâts matériels si les instructions ne sont pas respectées.

À conserver hors de portée des enfants.

Ne pas toucher

Français
Ne pas jeter au feu

Ne pas utiliser d'aspirateur

Attention, risque de se coincer les mains ou

les bras

Attention, surface chaude

5
Consignes de sécurité à observer Exigences pour utiliser les fiches et cordons d'alimentation

Exigences de déballage des produits

AVERTISSEMENT
AVERTISSEMENT • Évitez de prendre les mesures suivantes car elles pourraient entraîner un
incendie ou une électrocution :
• Utiliser une tension d'alimentation ou des fréquences autres que celles
• La section suivante explique les messages d'avertissement du sac
des spécifications indiquées
plastique utilisé pour l'emballage du produit :
• Utiliser des adaptateurs multiprise
• Ne laissez pas les éléments en polythène (sacs, etc.) fournis avec • Utiliser des rallonges électriques
l'appareil à la portée de bébés ou de jeunes enfants. Porter ces • Toucher les broches de la fiche du cordon d'alimentation avec un objet
matériaux en polyéthylène à la bouche ou au nez peut causer un métallique
étouffement.
• Évitez d'appliquer les mesures suivantes sur le cordon d'alimentation car
cela pourrait entraîner un incendie ou une électrocution :
• Les endommager
Exigences pour localiser et installer les appareils • Les emballer ensemble
• Les modifier
• Placer des objets lourds dessus
• Les tirer en forçant
AVERTISSEMENT • Les plier de force

• Évitez de prendre les mesures suivantes près de ou à l'intérieur de • Ne manipulez pas la fiche du cordon d'alimentation avec les mains
l'appareil, car cela pourrait causer un incendie ou une électrocution : mouillées. Cela risque de provoquer une électrocution.
• Utiliser des pulvérisateurs, des solvants ou autres produits
• Le ou les cordons d'alimentations fournis sont destinés uniquement à cet
inflammables appareil. Ils ne peuvent pas être utilisés pour d'autres appareils que celui-ci.
• Placer des pulvérisateurs, des solvants et autres produits inflammables N'utilisez pas non plus d'autres cordons d'alimentation que celui ou ceux fournis
• Placer des conteneurs contenant des liquides ou de petits objets avec cet appareil. Cela risquerait de provoquer un incendie ou une électrocution.
métalliques
• Pour éviter les incendies et les électrocutions, débranchez la fiche et le
cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale au moins une fois par an pour les
inspecter. Si l'un des cas suivants se produit, n'utilisez pas la fiche et le
ATTENTION cordon d'alimentation en continu, et consultez votre revendeur ou le SAV.
• Il y a des marques de brûlures sur la prise
• Ne placez pas l'appareil dans un environnement humide et poussiéreux. • Les broches de la prise sont déformées
Cela risquerait de provoquer un incendie ou une électrocution. • Les fils internes du cordon d'alimentation sont à nu ou cassés
• Le revêtement du cordon d'alimentation est fissuré, entaillé ou
• Ne placez pas l’appareil sur une surface instable ou inclinée. L'appareil endommagé
pourrait tomber ou basculer et vous risqueriez de vous blesser. • Lorsque le cordon d'alimentation est courbé, l'alimentation se coupe
• Une partie du cordon d'alimentation devient chaude
• N'obstruez pas les orifices de ventilation de l'appareil. Cela pourrait
entraîner un incendie suite à la surchauffe des composants internes.

• Ne placez aucun objet lourd sur l'appareil. L'appareil pourrait tomber ou

basculer et vous risqueriez de vous blesser.
ATTENTION
• Lorsque vous débranchez le cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale,
• Lors de l'utilisation continue de cet appareil dans une pièce étroite ou mal
tirez toujours sur la fiche et non sur le câble. Ne forcez pas sur le cordon
ventilée pendant une longue période ou lors de l'impression d'un volume
d'alimentation en tirant. Cela pourrait endommager le cordon, entraînant
élevé de documents, veillez à suffisamment aérer la pièce.
potentiellement un incendie ou une électrocution.

6
 ATTENTION Exigences pour déplacer les appareils
• Vérifiez que la fiche du câble d'alimentation est entièrement enfoncée dans la prise
murale Ne l'insérez pas non plus dans des prises murales lâches ou instables, ce
qui pourrait causer un faux contact. Cela pourrait générer de la chaleur. ATTENTION
• Au moins une fois par an, débranchez la prise de la prise murale et nettoyez • Lorsque vous déplacez l'appareil, ne le tenez pas par le panneau de
les broches ainsi que la zone qui les entoure. L’accumulation de poussière commande. Vous pourriez endommager le panneau de commande et
sur la prise constitue un risque d’incendie.
provoquer un dysfonctionnement ou vous blesser.
• Si vous n'utilisez pas l'appareil pendant une longue période comme des
• Lorsque vous déplacez l'appareil avec le magasin papier en option attaché,
vacances, assurez-vous de débrancher le cordon d'alimentation de la prise
ne forcez pas sur la partie supérieure de l'unité principale en la poussant.
murale pour des raisons de sécurité.
Cela pourrait détacher l'unité principale de l'unité de magasin papier en
• Lors de toute opération de maintenance sur l'appareil, débranchez le option et vous risqueriez de vous blesser.
cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale pour des raisons de sécurité.
• Lorsque vous transportez ou déplacez l'appareil en le soulevant pour le
• Source d'alimentation placer à un autre étage, contactez votre SAV. Faire tomber ou basculer
120–127 V, 12 A ou plus, 60 Hz l'appareil risque de causer des blessures ou un dysfonctionnement.
Veillez à raccorder le câble d’alimentation à une source d’alimentation du • Une fois que vous avez déplacé l'appareil, utilisez le système de blocage
type décrit ci-dessus. des roulettes pour le maintenir en place. Dans le cas contraire, l'appareil est
susceptible de se déplacer ou de basculer et d'entraîner une blessure.

Exigences en cas d'urgence • Lorsque vous déplacez l'appareil, veillez à débrancher le cordon

Français
d'alimentation de la prise murale et vérifiez que les cordons de ligne
téléphonique et autres câbles de connexion ont été retirés. Dans le cas
contraire, le cordon d'alimentation sera endommagé, ce qui peut entraîner
un incendie ou une électrocution.
AVERTISSEMENT
• Ne touchez pas cet appareil en cas de foudroiement à proximité. Cela
risque de provoquer une électrocution.

• Assurez-vous d'installer l'appareil le plus près possible d'une prise murale pour
pouvoir débrancher le cordon d'alimentation facilement en cas d'urgence.

• Si l'appareil agit de façon inhabituelle, mettez-le immédiatement hors

tension. Après avoir mis l'alimentation hors tension, veillez à débrancher
la fiche du cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale, puis contactez votre
SAV pour expliquer le problème. Une utilisation continue du cordon
d'alimentation risque de provoquer un incendie ou une électrocution.
• L'appareil émet de la fumée
• L'appareil émet des odeurs
• Des objets métalliques ou d'autres corps étrangers sont tombés dans
l'appareil
• De l'eau ou d'autres liquides ont coulé dans l'appareil

• Si l'appareil bascule ou un capot ou une autre pièce est endommagé,

coupez immédiatement l'alimentation. Après avoir débranché la fiche du
cordon d'alimentation de la prise murale, contactez votre SAV. Utiliser
l'appareil en continu risque de causer un incendie ou une électrocution.

7
Exigences pour utiliser l'appareil ATTENTION
• Il y a des pièces très chaudes à l'intérieur de l'appareil. Lorsque vous
retirez le papier mal alimenté, ne touchez pas à d'autres zones que celles
ATTENTION spécifiées dans ce manuel. Si vous les touchez, vous pourriez vous brûler.

• Ne regardez pas directement dans la source lumineuse. Cela pourrait • Des pièces de l'appareil peuvent se casser si vous y touchez. Lorsque vous
endommager vos yeux. retirez le papier mal alimenté, ne touchez pas aux connecteurs, capteurs et
LED. Les toucher peut entraîner un dysfonctionnement.
• N'utilisez pas de feuilles agrafées, d'aluminium, de papier carbone ou tout
autre type de papier conducteur. Cela pourrait entraîner un incendie. • Bien que l'appareil soit conçu pour qu'un dispositif de sécurité protège les
utilisateurs des blessures, faites attention à ne pas toucher les rouleaux
• Conservez les cartes SD et clés USB hors de portée des enfants. En cas pendant l'opération. Les rouleaux peuvent pincer avant de s'arrêter
d'ingestion accidentelle d'une carte SD ou d'une clé USB par un enfant, complètement.
consultez immédiatement un médecin.
• Contactez votre SAV ou revendeur pour nettoyer l'intérieur de l'appareil.
• Lorsque vous abaissez l'ADF, ne placez pas vos mains sur les charnières et Si l'intérieur de l'appareil n'est pas nettoyé régulièrement alors que la
la vitre d'exposition. Vos mains ou vos doigts pourraient se coincer, ce qui poussière s'accumule, il y a un risque d'incendie et de dysfonctionnement.
entraînerait des blessures.
• Lors du remplacement du papier ou du retrait du papier coincé, assurez-
• Si le magasin papier inférieur est installé, ne tirez pas plus d'un magasin à vous de ne pas vous coincer les doigts et de ne pas vous blesser.
la fois. Une pression excessive sur les surfaces supérieures de l’appareil
peut faire basculer l'appareil et entraîner des blessures. • N'approchez pas vos mains du logement de sortie du papier du réceptacle
livret fournisseur lorsque vous le sortez ou l'insérez dans l'unité d'agrafage
du finisseur. Vous pourriez coincer vos doigts dans l'espacement de
Exigences pour manipuler l'intérieur de l'appareil l'appareil et vous blesser.

Exigences pour manipuler les fournitures

AVERTISSEMENT
• Enlevez uniquement les capots ou vis explicitement indiqués dans ce
manuel. Il y a des composants haute tension dans l'appareil susceptibles AVERTISSEMENT
de provoquer une électrocution. Il y a également des composants laser à
l'intérieur de l'appareil qui peuvent entraîner une cécité. Contactez votre • Ne stockez pas de toner (neuf ou usagé) ou de conteneurs de toner avec
revendeur ou le SAV si l'un des composants internes de l'appareil doit faire du toner à l'intérieur dans un endroit avec une flamme nue. Le toner peut
l'objet d'une maintenance, un réglage ou une réparation. s'enflammer et entraîner un incendie ou des brûlures.
• Ne démontez pas et ne modifiez pas cet appareil. Cela risque de provoquer
• Ne vous débarrassez pas des éléments suivants en les brûlant. Le toner
un incendie et une électrocution. Une exposition aux composants laser
s'enflammera au contact d'une flamme nue.
internes de l'appareil peut également entraîner la cécité.
• Toner (neuf ou usagé)
• Conteneurs de toner avec du toner à l'intérieur
• Pièces fixées au toner

• N'aspirez pas du toner renversé (même usagé) avec un aspirateur. Le

toner aspiré peut provoquer un incendie ou une explosion en raison des
étincelles du contact électrique à l'intérieur de l'aspirateur. Cependant, vous
pouvez utiliser un aspirateur industriel compatible avec le toner. Lorsque le
toner est renversé, nettoyez soigneusement le toner déversé à l'aide d'un
chiffon humide afin de ne pas l'éparpiller.

8
 Étiquettes de sécurité de cet appareil
ATTENTION
• Ne forcez pas pour ouvrir les conteneurs de toner pendant que du toner est
à l'intérieur, ne les écrasez pas et ne les pressez pas. Le déversement de Emplacements des étiquettes AVERTISSEMENT et
toner peut entraîner une ingestion accidentelle ou des vêtements, mains,
planchers sales.
ATTENTION
• Ne laissez pas les éléments suivants dans un endroit où des enfants y ont Cet appareil présente des étiquettes AVERTISSEMENT et PRÉCAUTION dans
accès : les emplacements indiqués ci-dessous. Pour une sécurité maximale, veuillez suivre les
• Toner (neuf ou usagé)
instructions et manipuler l'appareil comme indiqué.
• Conteneurs de toner avec du toner à l'intérieur
• Pièces fixées au toner

• Lorsque vous retirez une feuille de papier coincée, que vous

réapprovisionnez en toner ou que vous remplacez le toner (neuf ou usagé),
veillez à ne pas l'inhaler.

• Lorsque ce qui suit se produit pendant la manipulation du toner, prenez

d'abord des mesures d'urgence puis consultez un médecin si nécessaire.
• Lorsque vous inhalez du toner, gargarisez-vous avec beaucoup d'eau
et allez respirer de l'air frais.
• Lorsque vous avalez du toner, diluez le contenu gastrique avec
beaucoup d'eau.
• Lorsque vous avez du toner dans les yeux, rincez-les à grandes eaux.

Français
• Lorsque vous retirez du papier coincé, que vous remplissez ou que vous
remplacez du toner (neuf ou usagé), veillez à ne pas répandre de poussière
de toner sur votre peau ou vos vêtements.

• Si du toner (neuf ou usagé) entre en contact avec votre peau ou vos

vêtements et que vous l'étalez, prenez les mesures suivantes :
• En cas de contact du toner avec la peau, lavez abondamment la zone
affectée avec de l'eau et du savon.
• Si du toner entre en contact avec vos vêtements, lavez la zone tâchée Magasins papier inférieurs/ Ne touchez pas les parties indiquées
à l'eau froide. Chauffer la zone tachée en appliquant de l'eau chaude magasin 3 (LCT) par cette étiquette. L’intérieur de
fixera le toner dans le tissu et retirer la tache deviendrait impossible. l’appareil peut être très chaud. Il faut
être prudent lors du retrait du papier
• Lorsque vous remplacez un conteneur avec du toner (y compris du toner mal alimenté.
usagé) ou des consommables avec du toner, veillez à ce que le toner
n'éclabousse pas. Après avoir retiré les consommables usagés et avoir
fermé le couvercle du conteneur si le couvercle est disponible, placez-les
dans un sac.

Magasin papier inférieur

9
L’intérieur de l’appareil peut être très chaud. Ne touchez pas les parties comportant cette étiquette. Finisseur SR3260 ou Finisseur livret SR3270
Dans le cas contraire, vous risquez de vous blesser. L’intérieur de l’appareil
peut être très chaud. Ne
touchez pas les parties
signalées par l'étiquette
( ). Dans le cas
contraire, vous risquez de
vous blesser.

Finisseur SR3260 Finisseur livret SR3270

Pendant
l'utilisation, les
rouleaux de
transport du
papier tournent.
Veillez à ne
pas toucher
les rouleaux
pendant le
fonctionnement.
Dans le cas
contraire, vous L’intérieur de l’appareil
risquez de vous peut être très chaud. Ne
blesser. touchez pas les parties
signalées par l'étiquette
( ). Dans le cas
contraire, vous risquez
de vous blesser.

Tenez vos mains à l'écart du magasin

du finisseur livret lorsque vous retirez ou
enfoncez l'unité d'agrafage du finisseur
ou que vous résolvez un incident papier.
Dans le cas contraire, vous risquez de
vous coincer les doigts.

10
Finisseur SR3280 ou Finisseur livret SR3290 Finisseur interne SR3300

Pendant l'utilisation, les

rouleaux de transport du
papier tournent. Veillez à
ne pas toucher les rouleaux
pendant le fonctionnement.
Dans le cas contraire, vous L’intérieur de l’appareil peut
risquez de vous blesser. L’intérieur de l’appareil être très chaud. Ne touchez
peut être très chaud. pas les parties signalées par
Ne touchez pas les l'étiquette ( ). Dans le cas
parties signalées contraire, vous risquez de vous
par l'étiquette ( ). blesser.
Dans le cas contraire,
vous risquez de vous
blesser.

Français
Tenez vos mains à l'écart du magasin du finisseur
Veuillez faire attention aux parties
livret lorsque vous retirez ou enfoncez l'unité
saillantes du capot avant lorsque
d'agrafage du finisseur ou que vous résolvez
vous remplacez la cartouche
un incident papier. Dans le cas contraire, vous
dans l'unité de piqûre à cheval
risquez de vous coincer les doigts.
ou lorsque vous retirez du papier
coincé dans l'unité de piqûre à
cheval.

11
ARDF Magasin grande capacité (LCT)

Ne mettez pas votre main sous la plaque de

fond. Vous risqueriez de vous coincer les
doigts dans l'interstice et de vous blesser.

Symbole pour la mise sous tension

Les significations des symboles pour les interrupteurs de cet appareil sont les suivantes :
Il se peut que la cartouche chauffe durant l'utilisation.
: SOUS TENSION
Ne touchez pas la cartouche immédiatement, mettez
l'appareil hors tension et attendez au moins 20 minutes : VEILLE
avant de la remplacer.

12
3. Autres informations sur cet appareil Obligations légales

Lois et réglementations Sécurité laser

Duplications et impressions interdites Pour IM 2500/2500A/3000/3000A/3500/3500A

Réglementations CDRH
Ne copiez ou n'imprimez pas des documents dont la reproduction est interdite par la loi.
Cet appareil est conforme aux exigences du CFR, Titre 21, Sous-chapitre J relatif aux
Copier ou imprimer les éléments suivants est en règle générale interdit par les autorités
produits laser de classe I. Cet appareil comprend une diode laser AlGaInP, d'une longueur
locales :
d'onde de 660 nanomètres. L'angle de divergence du faisceau est de 21 degrés (minimum)
billets de banques, timbres fiscaux, obligations, certificats d'actions, traites bancaires,
et 29 degrés (maximum) dans la direction verticale, et de 7 degrés (minimum) et 11 degrés
chèques, passeports et permis de conduire.
(maximum) dans la direction horizontale. Les faisceaux laser sont générés en mode Onde
La liste précédente est donnée à titre d'exemple et n'est en aucun cas exhaustive. Nous
continue (CW). La puissance maximale de sortie de la source lumineuse est de 10 milliwatts.
déclinons toute responsabilité en cas de liste incomplète ou inexacte. Si vous avez des
questions concernant le droit de copier ou d'imprimer certains éléments, consultez un Attention
conseiller juridique. Recourir à toute autre procédure en termes de commandes, réglages ou performances que
celles décrites dans ce manuel peut vous exposer dangereusement à des radiations.

Pour IM 4000/5000/6000

Français
Réglementations CDRH
Cet appareil est conforme aux exigences du CFR, Titre 21, Sous-chapitre J relatif aux
produits laser de classe I. Cet appareil contient deux diodes laser AlGaInP, d'une longueur
d'onde de 660 nanomètres pour chaque émetteur. L'angle de divergence du faisceau est
de 15 degrés (minimum) et 25 degrés (maximum) dans la direction verticale, et de 7 degrés
(minimum) et 13 degrés (maximum) dans la direction horizontale. Les faisceaux laser sont
générés en mode Onde continue (CW). La puissance maximale de la source lumineuse est
de 15 milliwatts.
Attention
Recourir à toute autre procédure en termes de commandes, réglages ou performances que
celles décrites dans ce manuel peut vous exposer dangereusement à des radiations.

13
 • IM 3500, IM 3500A
Remarques à l'attention des utilisateurs aux États-Unis • IM 4000
concernant les exigences de la FFC • IM 5000
• IM 6000

Partie 15 des règles FCC Installation du câble à noyau de ferrite

Remarque : Fixez un noyau de ferrite sur les câbles suivants pour éviter les interférences de radio-fréquence :
Cet équipement a été testé et déclaré conforme aux limites pour un appareil numérique de • Un câble d'interface Ethernet connecté au port de l'option Serveur de périphériques
classe B, conformément aux Règles FCC, partie 15. Ces limites sont conçues pour permettre
une protection raisonnable contre les interférences nuisibles dans le cadre d'une installation Section 68 de la réglementation FCC concernant l'unité de télécopie en option
résidentielle. Cet équipement génère, utilise et peut rayonner de l'énergie radiofréquence
1. Cet appareil est conforme à la section 68 de la réglementation FCC. Le capot de cet équipement
et peut engendrer des interférences nuisibles aux communications radio s'il n'est pas
est doté d'une étiquette qui comprend, entre autres informations, son numéro d'enregistrement
installé et utilisé conformément aux instructions. Cependant, il n'existe aucune garantie FCC et son REN (numéro d'équivalence de sonnerie). Si elles sont demandées, vous devez
d'absence totale d'interférences pour une installation en particulier. Si cet équipement cause donner ces informations à votre opérateur téléphonique.
effectivement des interférences nuisibles à la réception radio ou télévision, chose qui peut 2. Cet appareil utilise la prise jack RJ11C USOC.
être déterminée en éteignant puis allumant l'équipement, il est conseillé à l'utilisateur de 3. La fiche et le connecteur jack utilisés pour connecter l'appareil au réseau de câbles et au réseau
supprimer l'interférence en prenant l'une ou plusieurs des mesures suivantes : téléphonique des locaux doivent être conformes à la réglementation de la section 68 applicable de la
• Réorienter ou déplacer l'antenne réceptrice. FCC et aux exigences adoptées par l'ACTA. Un câble téléphonique et une prise modulaire conformes
sont fournis avec ce produit. Ils sont conçus pour être connectés à un connecteur modulaire
• Accroître la distance entre l'équipement et le récepteur.
compatible, lui-même conforme. Reportez-vous aux instructions d'installation pour plus de détails.
• Raccorder l'équipement à une prise d'un circuit différent de celui du récepteur. 4. Le REN détermine le nombre d'appareils pouvant être connectés à une ligne téléphonique. S'il
• Contacter le vendeur ou un technicien radio/TV confirmé. y a trop de REN sur une ligne téléphonique, il est possible que les appareils ne sonnent pas pour
un appel entrant. Dans la plupart des zones (mais pas dans toutes les zones), la somme des REN
Attention : ne doit pas être supérieure à cinq (5,0). Pour vous assurer du nombre de périphériques pouvant
Toute modification non autorisée par les autorités responsables de la conformité peut entraîner la être connectés à une ligne (déterminé par le nombre total de REN), veuillez contacter l'opérateur
révocation du droit d’utilisation de ce produit. téléphonique local.
Cet émetteur ne doit pas être placé près de ou être utilisé avec une autre antenne ou un autre émetteur. 5. Si l'équipement cause des dommages au réseau téléphonique, l'opérateur téléphonique vous
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux radiofréquences de la FCC établies pour un prévient qu'une interruption temporaire du service est requise. Mais si la notification préalable n'est pas
réalisable, l'opérateur préviendra le client dès que possible. De la même manière, vous serez informé
environnement non contrôlé et se conforme aux exigences de conformité pour l'exposition aux RF de
de votre droit de déposer une plainte auprès de la FCC si vous pensez que cela est nécessaire.
la FCC. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en mettant le radiateur à une distance d'au moins
6. Il est possible que l'opérateur téléphonique modifie ses installations, son équipement, ses
20 cm du corps d'une personne (sauf les extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles). opérations ou ses procédures, ce qui pourrait affecter le fonctionnement de l’appareil. Le cas
échéant, l'opérateur vous préviendra à l'avance afin de vous permettre de réaliser les modifications
Déclaration de conformité du fournisseur
nécessaires à la continuité du service.
Ce périphérique est conforme à la partie 15 des règles de la FCC. 7. Si vous rencontrez des problèmes avec cet appareil, veuillez contacter Ricoh USA, Inc. Customer
L'utilisation est soumise aux deux conditions suivantes : Support Department au 1-888-456-6457 pour obtenir des informations sur la réparation et la
(1) Cet appareil ne doit pas causer d'interférences nuisibles. garantie. Si cet appareil est la source de problèmes sur votre réseau téléphonique, il est possible
(2) Cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interférences reçues, y compris celles susceptibles que votre opérateur vous demande de le débrancher jusqu'à ce que le problème soit résolu.
de provoquer un fonctionnement indésirable. 8. Dans le cas de problèmes de fonctionnement (bourrage de document, bourrage de copie,
Partie responsable : Ricoh USA, Inc. indication d'erreur de communication), reportez-vous au manuel fourni avec l'appareil pour
connaître les instructions de résolution des problèmes.
Adresse : 300 Eagleview Boulevard, Suite 200 Exton, PA 19341, U.S.A.
9. La connexion à un service de ligne partagée est sujette à des tarifs d'état. Veuillez contacter
Numéro de téléphone : 610-296-8000
la commission du service public de l'état ou la commission de la société pour plus d'information.
Nom de produit : Périphérique multifonction
10. Si votre domicile comporte un dispositif d'alarme connecté à la ligne téléphonique,
Numéro de modèle :
• IM 2500, IM 2500A assurez-vous que l'installation de cet appareil ne désactive pas cette alarme. Si vous avez
• IM 3000, IM 3000A des questions sur ce qui est susceptible de désactiver votre dispositif d'alarme, veuillez
consulter votre opérateur téléphonique ou un installateur qualifié.
14
LORS DE LA PROGRAMMATION DE NUMÉROS D'URGENCE ET/OU LORS DES
APPELS TESTS AUX NUMÉROS D'URGENCE : Remarques à l'attention des utilisateurs canadiens d'appareils
1. Restez en ligne et expliquez brièvement au répartiteur la raison de votre appel avant de raccrocher. sans fil
2. Procédez à ces opérations pendant les heures creuses, par exemple, très tôt le matin ou tard
le soir. Le présent appareil est conforme aux normes CNR d'Industry Canada applicables aux
appareils radio exempts de licence.
Le Telephone Consumer Protection Act de 1991 définit comme illégal le fait qu'une personne utilise
L'utilisation est soumise aux deux conditions suivantes :
un ordinateur ou tout autre appareil électronique, y compris les fax, pour envoyer un message à
(1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage ; et
moins que ce message contienne dans une marge en haut ou en bas de chaque page transmise
ou sur la première page de la transmission la date et l'heure à laquelle il a été envoyé, l'identité de (2) Cet appareil doit accepter toutes les interférences, y compris celles susceptibles de
l'entreprise, organisme ou personne envoyant ce message, ainsi que le numéro de téléphone de provoquer un fonctionnement indésirable de l'appareil.
l'appareil émetteur, de l'entreprise, de l'organisme ou de la personne. (Le numéro de téléphone
fourni ne peut pas être un numéro 900 ou tout autre numéro pouvant entraîner une tarification Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux radiofréquences de l'IC
supérieure à la tarification locale ou des frais de transmission longue distance). établies pour un environnement non contrôlé et se conforme aux règles d'exposition aux
Pour programmer ces informations dans votre fax, vous devez exécuter les étapes suivantes radiofréquences (RF) RSS-102 de l'IC. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en mettant
: Suivez la procédure de programmation de l'en-tête de fax dans le chapitre Programmation du le radiateur à une distance d'au moins 20 cm du corps d'une personne (sauf les extrémités :
manuel utilisateur afin de saisir l'identifiant de l'entreprise et le numéro de fax du terminal ou de mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
l'entreprise. Ces informations sont transmises avec votre document par la fonction En-tête de fax.
En plus de ces informations, assurez-vous de bien programmer la date et l'heure sur votre appareil.
Remarques à l’attention des utilisateurs canadiens d'appareils sans fil
Instructions de sécurité importantes pour l'unité de télécopie
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils
en option radio exempts de licence.

Français
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes :
Lorsque vous utilisez votre équipement téléphonique, vous devez toujours respecter les
règles de sécurité élémentaires afin de réduire les risques d’incendie, d'électrocution et de (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
blessure, notamment : 2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
• N'utilisez pas ce produit à proximité de l'eau, par exemple, près d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo,
d'un évier ou d'une cuve de lessivage, dans un sous-sol humide ou près d'une piscine.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d'exposition aux rayonnements énoncées
• Évitez d'utiliser un téléphone pendant un orage. Il peut exister un risque d'électrocution à pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles d'exposition aux fréquences
distance dû à la foudre. radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l'IC. Cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant
• N'utilisez pas un téléphone pour signaler une fuite de gaz lorsque vous vous trouvez à une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à l’exception des
proximité de cette dernière. extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
Veuillez conserver ces instructions.

IMPORTANTES MESURES DE SÉCURITÉ de l'unité de télécopie en option

Certaines mesures de sécurité doivent être prises pendant l'utilisation de material
téléphonique afin de réduire les risques d'incendie, de choc électrique et de blessures. En
voici quelques-unes :
• Ne pas utiliser l'appareil près de l'eau, p.ex., près d'une baignoire, d'un lavabo, d'un évier
de cuisine, d'un bac à laver, dans un sous-sol humide ou près d'une piscine.
• Évitez d'utiliser le téléphone (sauf s'il s'agit d'un appareil sans fil) pendant un orage
électrique. Cela peut présenter un risque de choc électrique causé par la foudre.
• Ne pas utiliser l'appareil téléphonique pour signaler une fuite de gaz s'il est situé près de la fuite.
Conserver ces instructions.
15
Remarques à l'attention des utilisateurs canadiens de Marques commerciales
SD est une marque commerciale de SD-3C, LLC.
l'unité de télécopie
D'autres désignations de produit sont utilisées ci-après uniquement à des fins d'identification
Ce produit correspond aux caractéristiques techniques de « Innovation, Sciences et
et peuvent être des marques de leur société respective. Nous renonçons à tout droit relatif
Développement économique Canada ».
à ces marques.
Le numéro d'équivalence de sonnerie (REN) indique le nombre maximum d'appareils
pouvant être connectés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut
être constituée de n'importe quelle combinaison d'appareils, à la seule condition que la
somme des REN de tous ces appareils ne dépasse pas cinq.

Remarques à l’attention des utilisateurs canadiens de l’unité de télécopie

Le présent produit est conforme aux spécifications techniques applicables d'Innovation,
Sciences et Développement économique Canada.
L'indice d'équivalence de la sonnerie (IES) sert à indiquer le nombre maximal de dispositifs
qui peuvent être raccordés à une interface téléphonique. La terminaison d'une interface peut
consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs, à la seule condition que la somme
des IES de tous les dispositifs n'excède pas cinq.

D0CH-7507
16
©2020
 EN US ES ES PT BR FR FR

D0CH-7507
Safety Information 1. Manuals Provided with This Machine

2. Safety Information for This Machine

3. Other Information for This Machine

For information not found in this manual,

see the online manuals available on our
web site (https://www.ricoh.com/) or via the
control panel.

Read this manual carefully before you use this machine and keep
it handy for future reference. For safe and correct use, be sure to
read the Safety Information in this manual before using the
machine.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
How to Read the Manuals......................................................................................................... 3

1. Manuals Provided with This Machine

Manuals for This Machine......................................................................................................... 4

2. Safety Information for This Machine

The Meanings of the Safety Symbols Used with This Machine............................................... 5
The Meanings of Safety Labels................................................................................................ 5
Safety Precautions to Be Followed........................................................................................... 6
Safety Labels of This Machine................................................................................................. 9

3. Other Information for This Machine

Laws and Regulations............................................................................................................. 13
Legal Requirements................................................................................................................ 13
Trademarks............................................................................................................................. 14

2
How to Read the Manuals Disclaimer
To the maximum extent permitted by applicable laws, in no event will the manufacturer
Symbols Used in the Manuals be liable for any damages whatsoever arising out of failures of this machine, losses of the
registered data, or the use or non-use of this product and operation manuals provided with
This manual uses the following symbols:
it.
Make sure that you always copy or have backups of the data registered in this machine.
Documents or data might be erased due to your operational errors or malfunctions of the
Indicates points to pay attention to when using functions. This symbol indicates points that machine.
may result in the product or service becoming unusable or result in the loss of data if the In no event will the manufacturer be responsible for any documents created by you using this
instructions are not obeyed. Be sure to read these explanations. machine or any results from the data executed by you.

Indicates supplementary explanations of the product's functions and instructions on resolving Notes
user errors.
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
The manufacturer shall not be responsible for any damage or expense that might result from
[]
the use of parts other than genuine parts from the manufacturer with your office products.
Indicates the names of keys or buttons on the product or display.
For good output quality, the manufacturer recommends that you use genuine toner from the
manufacturer.
(mainly Europe and Asia), (mainly Europe), or (mainly Asia)
Some illustrations in this manual might be slightly different from the machine.
(mainly North America)
Certain options might not be available in some countries. For details, please contact your
Differences in the functions of Region A and Region B models are indicated by two symbols.
local dealer.
Read the information indicated by the symbol that corresponds to the region of the model
Depending on which country you are in, certain units may be optional. For details, please
you are using. For details about which symbol corresponds to the model you are using, see
contact your local dealer.
"Model-Specific Information", Specifications.

3
 • You can download information about the machine's certification, which is based on an
1. Manuals Provided with This Machine IT security certification system (hereafter CC Certification), from the following URL:
U.S. Government Protection Profile for Hardcopy Devices Version 1.0 (IEEE Std
2600.2™-2009)
Manuals for This Machine For Administrator: https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/
IM_2500_3500_4000_5000_6000/en/download_admin.html
The operating instructions of this machine are provided in the following formats: For User: https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/
Format Manuals
IM_2500_3500_4000_5000_6000/en/download_user.html
Protection Profile for Hardcopy Devices 1.0 dated September 10, 2015
Printed manual • Safety Information
For Administrator: https://support.ricoh.com/services/device/ccmanual/
CD-ROM • Driver Installation Guide (HTML) im_2500_3500_4000_5000_6000/en/download_admin.html
Manuals displayed on the control panel • User Guide (Full Version) (HTML)
This information is about how to set up the machine. If you have purchased a CC Certified
Web pages • Safety Information machine, be sure to read it before operating the machine so you can make the correct
• User Guide (Selected Version) (PDF) settings before using it.
• User Guide (Full Version) (HTML)
• Driver Installation Guide (HTML)

Safety Information
Before using the machine, be sure to read the section of this manual entitled Safety
Information. It also describes each regulation and environmental conformance.
User Guide (Selected Version)
Regarding the basic usage of this machine, frequently used functions, troubleshooting
when an error message appears, etc., summaries are provided for each user manual.
User Guide (Full Version)
Describes the setup for using the machine, how to use functions to copy, fax, print, scan
or for maintenance and specifications, troubleshooting, system settings, and security
functions.
Manuals are available in English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, and Russian.
The User Guide for languages other than shown above contains the information in User
Guide (Selected Version) and Security.
Driver Installation Guide
Describes how to install and configure each driver. This manual is included in the drivers
CD.

• Before you configure the extended security and authentication settings, refer to "Regis-
tering Administrators Before Using the Machine" in the Security.
• Using the machine’s security function prevents unauthorized use of the machine, data
tampering, or information leakage. For enhanced security, we recommend that you first
make the following settings:
• Install the Device Certificate.
• Enable SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) Encryption.
• Change the user name and password of the administrator.
4
2. Safety Information for This Machine The Meanings of Safety Labels

The Meanings of the Safety Symbols Used with

WARNING
This Machine
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, could result
in death or serious injury.
Prohibition
CAUTION
Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not followed, may result
in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.

Keep out of reach of children

Do not touch

Do not throw into the fire

Do not use the cleaner

Caution, risk of having hands or arms caught

Caution, hot surface

5
Safety Precautions to Be Followed Requirements for Using Power Plugs and Cords

Requirements for Unpacking Products

WARNING
• Avoid taking the following actions because doing so can result in fire or
WARNING electric shock:
• Using any power supply voltage or frequencies other than those that
• The following explains the warning messages on the plastic bag used in this match the specifications shown
product's packaging: • Using multi-socket adaptors
• Do not leave the polythene materials (bags, etc.) supplied with this • Using extension cords
machine close to babies and small children. Suffocation can result if • Touching the prongs of the power cable's plug with anything metallic
polythene materials are brought into contact with the mouth or nose.
• Avoid applying the following actions to power cords because doing so can
result in fire or electric shock:
• Damaging them
Requirements for Locating and Installing Machines • Bundling them
• Modifying them
• Putting heavy objects on them
• Pulling them forcibly
WARNING • Bending them forcibly

• Do not handle the power cord plug with wet hands. Doing so can result in
• Avoid taking the following actions close to or inside this machine because
electric shock.
doing so can result in fire or electric shock:
• Using flammable sprays, solvents, and so on • The supplied power cord or cords are for use with this machine only. They
• Placing flammable sprays, solvents, and so on cannot be used for appliances other than this machine. Also, do not use
• Placing containers holding liquids or small metal objects power cords other than the power cord or cords supplied with this machine.
Doing so can result in fire or electric shock.

• To prevent fire or electric shock, disconnect the plug and the power cord from
CAUTION the wall outlet at least once a year and check them. If any of the following
conditions exist, do not use the plug and the power cord continuously, and
• Do not place the machine in a humid or dusty environment. Doing so can consult your dealer or service representative.
result in fire or electric shock. • There are burn marks on the plug
• The prongs on the plug are deformed
• Do not place the machine on an unstable or tilted surface. Doing so can • The power cord's inner wires are exposed or broken
cause the machine to fall or topple over, possibly resulting in injury. • The power cord's coating is cracked, dented, or damaged
• When the power cord is bent, the power turns off and on
• Do not obstruct the machine's vents. Doing so can result in fire as the internal
• Part of the power cord becomes hot
components are overheated.

• Do not place heavy objects on the machine. Doing so can cause the machine
to fall or topple over, possibly resulting in injury.
CAUTION
• When using this machine in a poorly ventilated or narrow room continuously
for a long period of time or printing a high volume of materials, make sure to • When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, make sure to pull the
ventilate the room sufficiently. plug, not the cord. Do not pull the power cord forcibly. Doing so can damage
the power cord, possibly resulting in fire or electric shock.

6
 Requirements for Relocating Machines
CAUTION
• Be sure to push the power cord plug fully into the wall outlet. Also, do not
push it into loose and unstable wall outlets likely to cause a contact failure.
Doing so can result in heat generation. CAUTION
• Be sure to disconnect the plug from the wall outlet and clean the prongs and • When moving the machine, do not hold the control panel. Doing so may
the area around the prongs at least once a year. Allowing dust to build up on damage the control panel and can result in injury or malfunction.
the plug constitutes a fire hazard.
• When moving the machine with the optional paper tray unit attached, do not
• If you do not use the machine for a long period of time such as consecutive push the upper part of the main unit forcibly. Doing so can cause the main
holidays, be sure to disconnect the power cord plug from the wall outlet for unit to detach from the optional paper tray unit, possibly resulting in injury.
reasons of safety.
• When carrying or moving the machine by lifting it for relocation to another
• When performing maintenance on the machine, disconnect the power cord floor, contact your service representative. Dropping or toppling the machine
from the wall outlet for safety. can result in injury or malfunction.

• After moving the machine, use the caster fixture to fix it in place. Otherwise,
• Power Source the machine might move or topple over to cause injury.
220–240 V, 8 A or more, 50/60 Hz
Please be sure to connect the power cord to a power source as above. • When moving the machine, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall
outlet and confirm that line cords and other connecting cables have been
removed. Otherwise, the power cord is damaged, possibly resulting in fire
Requirements during Emergencies or electric shock.

Requirements for Using the Machine

WARNING
• Do not touch this machine if a lightning strike occurs in the immediate vicinity.
Doing so could result in electric shock.
CAUTION
• Be sure to install the machine as close as possible to a wall outlet so that you
can disconnect the power cord plug easily in an emergency. • Do not look into the light source. Doing so may damage your eyes.

• If the machine behaves unusually as follows, turn off the power immediately. • Do not use stapled sheets of paper, aluminum foil, carbon paper, or any kind
After turning off the power, make sure to disconnect the power cord plug of conductive paper. Doing so can result in fire.
from the wall outlet, and then contact your service representative and report
the problem. Continuously using the power cord can result in fire or electric • Keep SD cards and USB flash memory devices out of reach of children. If a
shock. child accidentally swallows an SD card or USB flash memory device, consult
• The machine is emitting smoke a doctor immediately.
• The machine is emitting odors
• When lowering the ADF, do not place your hands on the hinges and exposure
• Metal objects or other foreign objects have fallen inside the machine
glass. Your hands or fingers are caught, which can result in injury.
• Water or other fluids have fallen inside the machine
• If the lower paper tray is installed, do not pull out more than one tray at a time.
• If the machine topples or a cover or other part is damaged, turn off the power
Pressing down forcefully on the machine's upper surface might cause the
immediately. After disconnecting the power cord plug from the wall outlet,
machine topple over, possibly resulting in injury.
contact your service representative. Using the machine continuously can
result in fire or electric shock.

7
Requirements for Handling the Machine's Interior Requirements for Handling Supplies

WARNING WARNING
• Do not remove any covers or screws other than those explicitly mentioned in • Do not store toner (new or used) or toner containers while toner is inside in a
this manual. There are high voltage components inside the machine that can place with an open flame. The toner can ignite and result in burns or fire.
cause electric shock. Also there are laser components inside the machine
that can cause blindness. Contact your sales or service representative if any • Do not dispose of the following items into a fire. Toner will ignite on contact
of the machine's internal components require maintenance, adjustment, or with naked flame and burns can result.
repair. • Toner (new or used)
• Do not disassemble or modify this machine. Doing so can result in fire and • Toner containers while toner is inside
electric shock. Also, exposure to the laser components inside this machine • Toner-attached parts
risks blindness.
• Do not absorb spilled toner (including used toner) using a vacuum cleaner.
Absorbed toner may cause ignition or explosion due to electric contact
sparks inside the vacuum cleaner. However, you can use a toner-compatible
industrial vacuum cleaner. When toner is spilled, remove the spilled toner
CAUTION using a wet cloth so that the toner is not scattered.

• There are highly-heated parts inside the machine. When removing misfed
paper, do not touch areas other than those specified in this manual. Touching
those areas can result in burns.
CAUTION
• There are parts inside the machine that may break when touched. When
removing misfed paper, do not touch connectors, sensors, and LED specified • Do not open toner containers forcibly while toner is inside, crush or squeeze
in "Troubleshooting". Touching them can result in malfunction. them. Toner spillage can cause accidental ingestion or dirtying of clothes,
hands, or floor.
• Although the machine is designed so that a safety device protects users from
injury, take care not to touch the rollers during operation. The rollers may • Do not leave the following items in a place where children can reach them:
pinch before stopping completely. • Toner (new or used)
• Toner containers while toner is inside
• Contact your sales or service representative for cleaning the machine's interior. • Toner-attached parts
If the machine's interior is not regularly cleaned while dust accumulates, fire
and malfunction can result. • When removing jammed paper, replenishing or replacing toner (new or used),
make sure not to inhale toner.
• When replacing paper or removing jammed paper, make sure not to trap or
injure your fingers. • When the following occurs while toner is handled, receive emergency
measures first, and then consult a doctor if necessary.
• Keep your hands clear of the paper output slot of the finisher booklet tray • When inhaling toner, gargle with a large amount of water and move into
when pulling it out or pushing it in the finisher's staple unit. You may trap your a fresh air environment.
fingers in the machine's gap and injury can result. • When swallowing toner, dilute gastric contents with a large amount of
water.
• When getting toner into your eyes, flush them with a large amount of
water.

• When removing jammed paper, replenishing or replacing toner (new or used),

be careful not to have toner dirt your skin or clothes.

8
 Safety Labels of This Machine
CAUTION
• If toner (new or used) comes into contact with your skin or clothes and smears Positions of WARNING and CAUTION labels
them, take the following actions:
• If toner comes into contact with your skin, wash the affected area This machine has labels for WARNING and CAUTION at the positions shown below.
thoroughly with soap and water. For safety, please follow the instructions and handle the machine as indicated.
• If toner comes into contact with your clothes, wash the stained area with
cold water. Heating the stained area by applying hot water will set the
toner into the fabric and removing the stain may become impossible.

• When replacing a container with toner (including used toner) or consumables

with toner, be careful that the toner does not splatter. After removing used
consumables and shutting the lid of the container if the lid is available, put
them in a bag.

Do not touch the parts a label indicates.

Lower Paper Trays/Tray 3 (LCT) The inside of the machine could be
very hot. Caution should be taken
when removing misfed paper.

Lower Paper Tray

9
The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts which a label is put on. Finisher SR3260 or Booklet Finisher SR3270
Otherwise, an injury might occur. The inside of the
machine could be very
hot. Do not touch the
parts indicated with the
( ) label. Otherwise,
an injury might occur.

Finisher SR3260 Booklet Finisher SR3270

During operation,
rollers for
transporting the
paper revolve.
Take care not
to touch rollers
during operation.
Otherwise, an
injury might
occur.

The inside of the

machine could be very
hot. Do not touch the
parts indicated with the
( ) label. Otherwise,
an injury might occur.

Keep your hands clear of the booklet

finisher tray when pulling out or pushing
in the finisher's staple unit, or removing
paper jam. You might trap your fingers if
you do not.

10
Finisher SR3280 or Booklet Finisher SR3290 Internal Finisher SR3300

During operation, rollers

for transporting the paper
revolve. Take care not
to touch rollers during
operation. Otherwise, an
injury might occur. The inside of the machine could
be very hot. Do not touch the parts
The inside of the indicated with the ( ) label.
machine could be very Otherwise, an injury might occur.
hot. Do not touch the
parts indicated with the
( ) label. Otherwise,
an injury might occur.

Keep your hands clear of the booklet finisher tray

Be careful of the protruding parts
when pulling out or pushing in the finisher's staple
of the front cover when replacing
unit, or removing paper jam. You might trap your
the cartridge in the saddle stitch
fingers if you do not.
unit or clearing a paper jam from
the saddle stitch unit.

11
ARDF Large capacity tray (LCT)

Do not place your hand under the bottom

plate. Doing so may result in your fingers
becoming trapped in the gap and injured.

Symbols for the Power Switch

The meanings of the symbols for the switches on this machine are as follows:
The cartridge may become hot during use. Do not touch : POWER ON
the cartridge immediately; turn off the main power of the : STANDBY
machine and wait 20 minutes or more before replacing it.

12
3. Other Information for This Machine Legal Requirements

Laws and Regulations Laser Safety

For IM 2500/3000/3500
Duplication and Printing Prohibited This machine complies with the requirements of IEC60825-1:2014 for class 1 laser product.
Do not copy or print any item for which reproduction is prohibited by law. This machine contains one AlGaInP laser diode, 660 nanometer wavelength. The beam
Copying or printing the following items is generally prohibited by local law: divergence angle is 21 degrees (minimum) and 29 degrees (maximum) in the vertical
bank notes, revenue stamps, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, passports, direction, and 7 degrees (minimum) and 11 degrees (maximum) in the horizontal direction,
driver's licenses. and laser beams are generated in Continuous Wave (CW) mode. The maximum output power
The preceding list is meant as a guide only and is not inclusive. We assume no responsibility of the light source is 10 milliwatt.
for its completeness or accuracy. If you have any questions concerning the legality of copying The following label is attached on the rear side of the machine:
or printing certain items, consult with your legal advisor.

Caution
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in
this manual might result in hazardous radiation exposure.

For IM 4000/5000/6000
This machine complies with the requirements of IEC60825-1:2014 for class 1 laser product.
This machine contains two AlGaInP laser diodes, 660 nanometer wavelength for each
emitter. The beam divergence angle is 15 degrees (minimum) and 25 degrees (maximum) in
the vertical direction, and 7 degrees (minimum) and 13 degrees (maximum) in the horizontal
direction, and laser beams are generated in Continuous Wave (CW) mode. The maximum
output power of the light source is 15 milliwatt.
The following label is attached on the rear side of the machine:

Caution
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in
this manual might result in hazardous radiation exposure.

13
 EMC Directive Trademarks
The SD is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
Installing the Ferrite Core
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks
Attach a ferrite core to the following cables to prevent RF interference: of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
• An Ethernet interface cable connecting to the Device Server Option port
• A telephone line cable connecting to the G3 interface connector
• A telephone line cable connecting to the Extra G3 interface unit connector

User Information on Electrical and Electronic Equipment (For Users in India)

This product including components, consumables, parts and spares complies with the "India
E-waste Rule" and prohibits use of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, polybrominated
biphenyls or polybrominated diphenyl ethers in concentrations exceeding 0.1 weight % and
0.01 weight % for cadmium, except for the exemptions set in the Rule.

NOTICE TO USERS (NEW ZEALAND)

• The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom
has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its
network. It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom, nor does it provide any
sort of warranty. Above all, it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all
respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model, nor
does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom's network services.
• This equipment is not capable, under all operating conditions, of correct operation at
the higher speeds for which it is designed. Telecom will accept no responsibility should
difficulties arise in such circumstances.
• Devices connected to the telephone port may lose their memory if this fax machine is on
line for extended periods. To prevent this, such devices should have the facility for battery
or similar backup of memory.
• This device may be subject to ringing or bell tinkle when certain other devices are
connected to the same line. If this occurs, the problem should not be referred to the
Telecom Faults Service.
• This equipment should not be used under any circumstances that may constitute a
nuisance to other Telecom customers.
• Telepermitted equipment only may be connected to the auxiliary telephone port. The
auxiliary telephone port is not specifically designed for 3-wire connected equipment that
may not respond to incoming ringing when attached to this port.

14 D0CH-7420
© 2020
EN AU D0CH-7420